diff options
| author | Timothy Pearson <kb9vqf@pearsoncomputing.net> | 2011-08-10 12:13:27 -0500 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Timothy Pearson <kb9vqf@pearsoncomputing.net> | 2011-08-10 12:13:27 -0500 |
| commit | d296f1d337dabfeae5191955fdadb874965dbbe9 (patch) | |
| tree | 1a4b3b4cca01f2ea77eee2497297219d60e9bbd4 /tqtinterface/qt4/src | |
| parent | eaa7ee2e0bbca40ba3173c4304f81957e8964291 (diff) | |
| download | experimental-d296f1d337dabfeae5191955fdadb874965dbbe9.tar.gz experimental-d296f1d337dabfeae5191955fdadb874965dbbe9.zip | |
rename the following methods:
tqparent parent
tqmask mask
Diffstat (limited to 'tqtinterface/qt4/src')
336 files changed, 3387 insertions, 3387 deletions
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jchuff.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jchuff.c index aec9cf8..f235250 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jchuff.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jchuff.c @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ emit_bits (working_state * state, unsigned int code, int size) if (size == 0) ERREXIT(state->cinfo, JERR_HUFF_MISSING_CODE); - put_buffer &= (((INT32) 1)<<size) - 1; /* tqmask off any extra bits in code */ + put_buffer &= (((INT32) 1)<<size) - 1; /* mask off any extra bits in code */ put_bits += size; /* new number of bits in buffer */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jcphuff.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jcphuff.c index 5567f88..07f9178 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jcphuff.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jcphuff.c @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ emit_bits (phuff_entropy_ptr entropy, unsigned int code, int size) if (entropy->gather_statistics) return; /* do nothing if we're only getting stats */ - put_buffer &= (((INT32) 1)<<size) - 1; /* tqmask off any extra bits in code */ + put_buffer &= (((INT32) 1)<<size) - 1; /* mask off any extra bits in code */ put_bits += size; /* new number of bits in buffer */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdct.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdct.h index 24e4c5c..e11fafa 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdct.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdct.h @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ typedef FAST_FLOAT FLOAT_MULT_TYPE; /* preferred floating type */ * Each IDCT routine is responsible for range-limiting its results and * converting them to unsigned form (0..MAXJSAMPLE). The raw outputs could * be quite far out of range if the input data is corrupt, so a bulletproof - * range-limiting step is required. We use a tqmask-and-table-lookup method + * range-limiting step is required. We use a mask-and-table-lookup method * to do the combined operations quickly. See the comments with * prepare_range_limit_table (in jdmaster.c) for more info. */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdmaster.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdmaster.c index 9219b1c..9c4901a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdmaster.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jdmaster.c @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ jpeg_calc_output_dimensions (j_decompress_ptr cinfo) * x = range_limit[x & MASK]; * where MASK is 2 bits wider than legal sample data, ie 10 bits for 8-bit * samples. Under normal circumstances this is more than enough range and - * a correct output will be generated; with bogus input data the tqmask will + * a correct output will be generated; with bogus input data the mask will * cause wraparound, and we will safely generate a bogus-but-in-range output. * For the post-IDCT step, we want to convert the data from signed to unsigned * representation by adding CENTERJSAMPLE at the same time that we limit it. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jmorecfg.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jmorecfg.h index c2b38a7..a2cae21 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jmorecfg.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jmorecfg.h @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ * Maximum number of components (color channels) allowed in JPEG image. * To meet the letter of the JPEG spec, set this to 255. However, darn * few applications need more than 4 channels (maybe 5 for CMYK + alpha - * tqmask). We recommend 10 as a reasonable compromise; use 4 if you are + * mask). We recommend 10 as a reasonable compromise; use 4 if you are * really short on memory. (Each allowed component costs a hundred or so * bytes of storage, whether actually used in an image or not.) */ @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ #if BITS_IN_JSAMPLE == 8 /* JSAMPLE should be the smallest type that will hold the values 0..255. - * You can use a signed char by having GETJSAMPLE tqmask it with 0xFF. + * You can use a signed char by having GETJSAMPLE mask it with 0xFF. */ #ifdef HAVE_UNSIGNED_CHAR diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jquant1.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jquant1.c index fd173cf..0befadf 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jquant1.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/jquant1.c @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ #define ODITHER_SIZE 16 /* dimension of dither matrix */ /* NB: if ODITHER_SIZE is not a power of 2, ODITHER_MASK uses will break */ #define ODITHER_CELLS (ODITHER_SIZE*ODITHER_SIZE) /* # cells in matrix */ -#define ODITHER_MASK (ODITHER_SIZE-1) /* tqmask for wrapping around counters */ +#define ODITHER_MASK (ODITHER_SIZE-1) /* mask for wrapping around counters */ typedef int ODITHER_MATRIX[ODITHER_SIZE][ODITHER_SIZE]; typedef int (*ODITHER_MATRIX_PTR)[ODITHER_SIZE]; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/libjpeg.doc b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/libjpeg.doc index bcd97d1..b50e716 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/libjpeg.doc +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/libjpeg.doc @@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ reason for using progressive JPEG. The IJG encoder library generates progressive JPEG files when given a suitable "scan script" defining how to divide the data into scans. -Creation of progressive JPEG files is otherwise transtqparent to the encoder. +Creation of progressive JPEG files is otherwise transparent to the encoder. Progressive JPEG files can also be read transparently by the decoder library. If the decoding application simply uses the library as defined above, it will receive a final decoded image without any indication that the file was @@ -1759,7 +1759,7 @@ Progressive decompression: When buffered-image mode is not used, the decoder library will read all of a multi-scan file during jpeg_start_decompress(), so that it can provide a final decoded image. (Here "multi-scan" means either progressive or -multi-scan sequential.) This makes multi-scan files transtqparent to the +multi-scan sequential.) This makes multi-scan files transparent to the decoding application. However, existing applications that used suspending input with version 5 of the IJG library will need to be modified to check for a suspension return from jpeg_start_decompress(). diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/structure.doc b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/structure.doc index 6440b8e..16b4270 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/structure.doc +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libjpeg/structure.doc @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ The basic element type JSAMPLE will typically be one of unsigned char, (signed) char, or short. Short will be used if samples wider than 8 bits are to be supported (this is a compile-time option). Otherwise, unsigned char is used if possible. If the compiler only supports signed chars, then it is -necessary to tqmask off the value when reading. Thus, all reads of JSAMPLE +necessary to mask off the value when reading. Thus, all reads of JSAMPLE values must be coded as "GETJSAMPLE(value)", where the macro will be defined as "((value) & 0xFF)" on signed-char machines and "((int) (value))" elsewhere. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/config.guess b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/config.guess index 6372bf0..dff9e48 100755 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/config.guess +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/config.guess @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ main: .prologue 1 .long 0x47e03d80 # implver \$0 lda \$2,-1 - .long 0x47e20c21 # atqmask \$2,\$1 + .long 0x47e20c21 # amask \$2,\$1 lda \$16,\$Lformat mov \$0,\$17 not \$1,\$18 diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/configure b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/configure index 9a796af..fb7d7be 100755 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/configure +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/configure @@ -647,7 +647,7 @@ ac_unique_file=libmng.h # Find the source files, if location was not specified. if test -z "$srcdir"; then ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes - # Try the directory containing this script, then its tqparent. + # Try the directory containing this script, then its parent. ac_prog=$0 ac_confdir=`echo $ac_prog|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'` test "x$ac_confdir" = "x$ac_prog" && ac_confdir=. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/libmng.txt b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/libmng.txt index 22ba338..ca6ee80 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/libmng.txt +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/libmng.txt @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ canvas and an optional separate alpha-channel canvas. The latter is used only with the MNG_CANVAS_RGB8_A8 canvas-style. If the getbkgdline() callback is not supplied the library will -composite full or partially transtqparent pixels in the image against +composite full or partially transparent pixels in the image against a specified background color. See mng_set_bgcolor() for more details. If a chosen canvas-style includes an alpha-channel, this callback is very likely not needed. @@ -674,13 +674,13 @@ actually need to be consecutive in memory. > Alpha composition and application backgrounds -All Network Graphics can be partially transtqparent. This requires +All Network Graphics can be partially transparent. This requires special processing if you need to display an image against some background. Note that the MNG header (MHDR chunk) contains a simplicity field indicating whether transparency information in the file is critical or not. This only applies to embedded images, which means the full image-frame of the MNG may still contain fully -transtqparent pixels! +transparent pixels! Depending on your needs you can supply a single background color, a background canvas or tell the library to return the alpha-channel @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ which matches your output requirements. This is somewhat more complicated. You will need to set the mng_getbkgdline() callback. This will be called whenever the library -needs to compose a partially transtqparent line. +needs to compose a partially transparent line. This canvas must hold the background against which the image should be composed. Its size must match exactly with the image dimensions @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ composing will still function properly. > Composing within the application If you have the option in your application to draw a (partially) -transtqparent canvas to the output tqdevice, this option is preferred. +transparent canvas to the output tqdevice, this option is preferred. Select one of the canvas styles that do have an alpha-channel. The library will now supply the appropriate alpha information, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/man/libmng.3 b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/man/libmng.3 index 782e424..7a6f544 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/man/libmng.3 +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/doc/man/libmng.3 @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ canvas and an optional separate alpha-channel canvas. The latter is used only with the MNG_CANVAS_RGB8_A8 canvas-style. If the getbkgdline() callback is not supplied the library will -composite full or partially transtqparent pixels in the image against +composite full or partially transparent pixels in the image against a specified background color. See mng_set_bgcolor() for more details. If a chosen canvas-style includes an alpha-channel, this callback is very likely not needed. @@ -692,13 +692,13 @@ actually need to be consecutive in memory. .SS Alpha composition and application backgrounds -All Network Graphics can be partially transtqparent. This requires +All Network Graphics can be partially transparent. This requires special processing if you need to display an image against some background. Note that the MNG header (MHDR chunk) contains a simplicity field indicating whether transparency information in the file is critical or not. This only applies to embedded images, which means the full image-frame of the MNG may still contain fully -transtqparent pixels! +transparent pixels! Depending on your needs you can supply a single background color, a background canvas or tell the library to return the alpha-channel @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ which matches your output requirements. This is somewhat more complicated. You will need to set the mng_getbkgdline() callback. This will be called whenever the library -needs to compose a partially transtqparent line. +needs to compose a partially transparent line. This canvas must hold the background against which the image should be composed. Its size must match exactly with the image dimensions @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ composing will still function properly. .SS Composing within the application If you have the option in your application to draw a (partially) -transtqparent canvas to the output tqdevice, this option is preferred. +transparent canvas to the output tqdevice, this option is preferred. Select one of the canvas styles that do have an alpha-channel. The library will now supply the appropriate alpha information, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng.h index 035bb0e..9fd6160 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng.h @@ -2137,7 +2137,7 @@ MNG_EXT mng_retcode MNG_DECL mng_updatemngsimplicity (mng_handle hHandle, #define MNG_WRONGCHUNK (mng_retcode)2050 /* accessing the wrong chunk */ #define MNG_INVALIDENTRYIX (mng_retcode)2051 /* accessing the wrong entry */ #define MNG_NOHEADER (mng_retcode)2052 /* must have had header first */ -#define MNG_NOCORRCHUNK (mng_retcode)2053 /* can't find tqparent chunk */ +#define MNG_NOCORRCHUNK (mng_retcode)2053 /* can't find parent chunk */ #define MNG_NOMHDR (mng_retcode)2054 /* no MNG header available */ #define MNG_IMAGETOOLARGE (mng_retcode)4097 /* input-image way too big */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_display.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_display.c index 9cf26de..1b17d2a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_display.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_display.c @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ mng_retcode clear_canvas (mng_datap pData) set_display_routine (pData); /* determine display routine */ /* get a temporary row-buffer */ - /* it's transtqparent black by default!! */ + /* it's transparent black by default!! */ MNG_ALLOC (pData, pData->pRGBArow, pData->iRowsize) iY = pData->iDestt; /* this is where we start */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_pixels.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_pixels.c index 2803e3b..7379217 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_pixels.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_pixels.c @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ mng_retcode display_rgba8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa16 = (mng_uint16)(iBGa16 << 8) | iBGa16; if (iFGa16) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa16 == 0xFFFF) || (iBGa16 == 0)) { /* plain copy it */ *pScanline = *pDataline; @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ mng_retcode display_rgba8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa8 = *(pScanline+3); if (iFGa8) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa8 == 0xFF) || (iBGa8 == 0)) { /* then simply copy the values */ *pScanline = *pDataline; @@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ mng_retcode display_argb8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa16 = (mng_uint16)(iBGa16 << 8) | iBGa16; if (iFGa16) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa16 == 0xFFFF) || (iBGa16 == 0)) { /* plain copy it */ *pScanline = *(pDataline+6); @@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ mng_retcode display_argb8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa8 = *pScanline; if (iFGa8) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa8 == 0xFF) || (iBGa8 == 0)) { /* then simply copy the values */ *pScanline = *(pDataline+3); @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ mng_retcode display_rgb8_a8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa16 = (mng_uint16)(iBGa16 << 8) | iBGa16; if (iFGa16) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa16 == 0xFFFF) || (iBGa16 == 0)) { /* plain copy it */ *pScanline = *pDataline; @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ mng_retcode display_rgb8_a8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa8 = *pAlphaline; if (iFGa8) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa8 == 0xFF) || (iBGa8 == 0)) { /* then simply copy the values */ *pScanline = *pDataline; @@ -1202,7 +1202,7 @@ mng_retcode display_bgra8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa16 = (mng_uint16)(iBGa16 << 8) | iBGa16; if (iFGa16) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa16 == 0xFFFF) || (iBGa16 == 0)) { /* plain copy it */ *pScanline = *(pDataline+4); @@ -1269,7 +1269,7 @@ mng_retcode display_bgra8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa8 = *(pScanline+3); if (iFGa8) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa8 == 0xFF) || (iBGa8 == 0)) { /* then simply copy the values */ *pScanline = *(pDataline+2); @@ -1408,7 +1408,7 @@ mng_retcode display_bgra8_pm (mng_datap pData) for (iX = pData->iSourcel + pData->iCol; iX < pData->iSourcer; iX += pData->iColinc) { /* get alpha values */ if ((s = pDataline[6]) != 0) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if (s == 255) { /* plain copy it */ pScanline[0] = pDataline[4]; @@ -1541,7 +1541,7 @@ mng_retcode display_abgr8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa16 = (mng_uint16)(iBGa16 << 8) | iBGa16; if (iFGa16) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa16 == 0xFFFF) || (iBGa16 == 0)) { /* plain copy it */ *pScanline = *(pDataline+6); @@ -1608,7 +1608,7 @@ mng_retcode display_abgr8 (mng_datap pData) iBGa8 = *pScanline; if (iFGa8) /* any opacity at all ? */ - { /* fully opaque or background fully transtqparent ? */ + { /* fully opaque or background fully transparent ? */ if ((iFGa8 == 0xFF) || (iBGa8 == 0)) { /* then simply copy the values */ *pScanline = *(pDataline+3); @@ -1945,7 +1945,7 @@ mng_retcode retrieve_g8 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { iG = *pWorkrow; /* get the gray-value */ - /* is it transtqparent ? */ + /* is it transparent ? */ if ((mng_uint16)iG == pBuf->iTRNSgray) { *pRGBArow = 0x00; /* nuttin to display */ @@ -2024,7 +2024,7 @@ mng_retcode retrieve_g16 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { iG = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow); /* get the gray-value */ - /* is it transtqparent ? */ + /* is it transparent ? */ if (iG == pBuf->iTRNSgray) { /* nuttin to display */ mng_put_uint16 (pRGBArow, 0x0000); @@ -2091,7 +2091,7 @@ mng_retcode retrieve_rgb8 (mng_datap pData) iR = *pWorkrow; /* get the rgb-values */ iG = *(pWorkrow+1); iB = *(pWorkrow+2); - /* is it transtqparent ? */ + /* is it transparent ? */ if (((mng_uint16)iR == pBuf->iTRNSred ) && ((mng_uint16)iG == pBuf->iTRNSgreen) && ((mng_uint16)iB == pBuf->iTRNSblue ) ) @@ -2158,7 +2158,7 @@ mng_retcode retrieve_rgb16 (mng_datap pData) iR = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow); /* get the rgb-values */ iG = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow+2); iB = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow+4); - /* is it transtqparent ? */ + /* is it transparent ? */ if ((iR == pBuf->iTRNSred ) && (iG == pBuf->iTRNSgreen) && (iB == pBuf->iTRNSblue ) ) @@ -2419,7 +2419,7 @@ mng_retcode store_g1 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -2468,7 +2468,7 @@ mng_retcode store_g2 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -2517,7 +2517,7 @@ mng_retcode store_g4 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -2693,7 +2693,7 @@ mng_retcode store_idx1 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -2741,7 +2741,7 @@ mng_retcode store_idx2 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -2788,7 +2788,7 @@ mng_retcode store_idx4 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3180,7 +3180,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g8_a1 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3190,7 +3190,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g8_a1 (mng_datap pData) if (iB & iM) /* is it opaque ? */ *pOutrow = 0xFF; /* opaque */ else - *pOutrow = 0x00; /* transtqparent */ + *pOutrow = 0x00; /* transparent */ pOutrow += 2; /* next pixel */ iM >>= 1; @@ -3228,7 +3228,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g8_a2 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3282,7 +3282,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g8_a4 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3394,7 +3394,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_rgb8_a1 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3404,7 +3404,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_rgb8_a1 (mng_datap pData) if (iB & iM) /* is it opaque ? */ *pOutrow = 0xFF; /* opaque */ else - *pOutrow = 0x00; /* transtqparent */ + *pOutrow = 0x00; /* transparent */ pOutrow += 4; /* next pixel */ iM >>= 1; @@ -3442,7 +3442,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_rgb8_a2 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3496,7 +3496,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_rgb8_a4 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3608,7 +3608,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g12_a1 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3618,7 +3618,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g12_a1 (mng_datap pData) if (iB & iM) /* opaque ? */ mng_put_uint16 (pOutrow, 0xFFFF);/* opaque */ else - mng_put_uint16 (pOutrow, 0x0000);/* transtqparent */ + mng_put_uint16 (pOutrow, 0x0000);/* transparent */ pOutrow += 4; /* next pixel */ iM >>= 1; @@ -3656,7 +3656,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g12_a2 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3710,7 +3710,7 @@ mng_retcode store_jpeg_g12_a4 (mng_datap pData) for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3840,7 +3840,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_g1 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3860,7 +3860,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_g1 (mng_datap pData) { /* pixel add ! */ for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3911,7 +3911,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_g2 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3936,7 +3936,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_g2 (mng_datap pData) { /* pixel add ! */ for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -3995,7 +3995,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_g4 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -4018,7 +4018,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_g4 (mng_datap pData) { /* pixel add ! */ for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -4276,7 +4276,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_idx1 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -4296,7 +4296,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_idx1 (mng_datap pData) { /* pixel add ! */ for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -4347,7 +4347,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_idx2 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -4366,7 +4366,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_idx2 (mng_datap pData) { /* pixel add ! */ for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -4418,7 +4418,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_idx4 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -4437,7 +4437,7 @@ mng_retcode delta_idx4 (mng_datap pData) { /* pixel add ! */ for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5629,11 +5629,11 @@ mng_retcode process_g1 (mng_datap pData) if (pBuf->bHasTRNS) /* tRNS encountered ? */ { - if (pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* white transtqparent ? */ + if (pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* white transparent ? */ { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5641,7 +5641,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g1 (mng_datap pData) } if (iB & iM) /* is it white ? */ - /* transtqparent ! */ + /* transparent ! */ mng_put_uint32 (pRGBArow, 0x00000000); else /* opaque black */ mng_put_uint32 (pRGBArow, 0x000000FF); @@ -5650,11 +5650,11 @@ mng_retcode process_g1 (mng_datap pData) iM >>= 1; } } - else /* black transtqparent */ + else /* black transparent */ { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5664,7 +5664,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g1 (mng_datap pData) if (iB & iM) /* is it white ? */ /* opaque white */ mng_put_uint32 (pRGBArow, 0xFFFFFFFF); - else /* transtqparent */ + else /* transparent */ mng_put_uint32 (pRGBArow, 0x00000000); pRGBArow += 4; /* next pixel */ @@ -5678,7 +5678,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g1 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5735,7 +5735,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g2 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5745,7 +5745,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g2 (mng_datap pData) /* determine gray level */ iQ = (mng_uint8)((iB & iM) >> iS); - if (iQ == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transtqparent ? */ + if (iQ == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transparent ? */ mng_put_uint32 (pRGBArow, 0x00000000); else { @@ -5769,7 +5769,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g2 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5830,7 +5830,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g4 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5840,7 +5840,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g4 (mng_datap pData) /* get the gray level */ iQ = (mng_uint8)((iB & iM) >> iS); - if (iQ == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transtqparent ? */ + if (iQ == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transparent ? */ { *pRGBArow = 0; /* put in intermediate row */ *(pRGBArow+1) = 0; @@ -5868,7 +5868,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g4 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -5925,7 +5925,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g8 (mng_datap pData) { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ - if (iB == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transtqparent ? */ + if (iB == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transparent ? */ { *pRGBArow = 0; /* put in intermediate row */ *(pRGBArow+1) = 0; @@ -5997,7 +5997,7 @@ mng_retcode process_g16 (mng_datap pData) { iW = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow); /* get input */ - if (iW == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transtqparent ? */ + if (iW == pBuf->iTRNSgray) /* transparent ? */ { /* put in intermediate row */ mng_put_uint16 (pRGBArow, 0); mng_put_uint16 (pRGBArow+2, 0); @@ -6070,11 +6070,11 @@ mng_retcode process_rgb8 (mng_datap pData) iR = *pWorkrow; /* get the RGB values */ iG = *(pWorkrow+1); iB = *(pWorkrow+2); - /* transtqparent ? */ + /* transparent ? */ if ((iR == pBuf->iTRNSred) && (iG == pBuf->iTRNSgreen) && (iB == pBuf->iTRNSblue)) { - *pRGBArow = 0; /* this pixel is transtqparent ! */ + *pRGBArow = 0; /* this pixel is transparent ! */ *(pRGBArow+1) = 0; *(pRGBArow+2) = 0; *(pRGBArow+3) = 0; @@ -6084,7 +6084,7 @@ mng_retcode process_rgb8 (mng_datap pData) *pRGBArow = iR; /* copy the RGB values */ *(pRGBArow+1) = iG; *(pRGBArow+2) = iB; - *(pRGBArow+3) = 0xFF; /* this one isn't transtqparent */ + *(pRGBArow+3) = 0xFF; /* this one isn't transparent */ } pWorkrow += 3; /* next pixel */ @@ -6143,10 +6143,10 @@ mng_retcode process_rgb16 (mng_datap pData) iR = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow); /* get the RGB values */ iG = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow+2); iB = mng_get_uint16 (pWorkrow+4); - /* transtqparent ? */ + /* transparent ? */ if ((iR == pBuf->iTRNSred) && (iG == pBuf->iTRNSgreen) && (iB == pBuf->iTRNSblue)) - { /* transtqparent then */ + { /* transparent then */ mng_put_uint16 (pRGBArow, 0); mng_put_uint16 (pRGBArow+2, 0); mng_put_uint16 (pRGBArow+4, 0); @@ -6219,7 +6219,7 @@ mng_retcode process_idx1 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -6254,7 +6254,7 @@ mng_retcode process_idx1 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -6319,7 +6319,7 @@ mng_retcode process_idx2 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -6354,7 +6354,7 @@ mng_retcode process_idx2 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = *pWorkrow; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -6419,7 +6419,7 @@ mng_retcode process_idx4 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = pWorkrow [0]; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; @@ -6454,7 +6454,7 @@ mng_retcode process_idx4 (mng_datap pData) { for (iX = 0; iX < pData->iRowsamples; iX++) { - if (!iM) /* tqmask underflow ? */ + if (!iM) /* mask underflow ? */ { iB = pWorkrow [0]; /* get next input-byte */ pWorkrow++; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_trace.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_trace.h index e8824da..2b493ec 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_trace.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libmng/libmng_trace.h @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ /* ************************************************************************** */ -/* TODO: add a trace-tqmask so certain functions can be excluded */ +/* TODO: add a trace-mask so certain functions can be excluded */ mng_retcode mng_trace (mng_datap pData, mng_uint32 iFunction, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/CHANGES b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/CHANGES index 939baeb..d151a41 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/CHANGES +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/CHANGES @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ version 0.97 [January, 1998] fixed memory leak in pngwrite.c (free info_ptr->text) (Glenn R-P) added more conditions for png_do_background, to avoid changing black pixels to background when a background is supplied and - no pixels are transtqparent + no pixels are transparent repaired PNG_NO_STDIO behaviour tested NODIV support and made it default behaviour (Greg Roelofs) added "-m" option and PNGTEST_DEBUG_MEMORY to pngtest (John Bowler) @@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ version 1.0.7beta12 [May 12, 2000] Made PNG_NO_CONSOLE_IO the default condition when PNG_BUILD_DLL is defined. Use MSC _RPTn debugging instead of fprintf if _MSC_VER is defined. Added png_access_version_number() function. - Check for tqmask&PNG_FREE_CHNK (for TEXT, SCAL, PCAL) in png_free_data(). + Check for mask&PNG_FREE_CHNK (for TEXT, SCAL, PCAL) in png_free_data(). Expanded libpng.3/libpng.txt information about png_data_freer(). version 1.0.7beta14 [May 17, 2000] (beta13 was not published) Changed pnggccrd.c and pngvcrd.c to handle bad adaptive filter types as @@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ version 1.2.2beta2 [February 23, 2002] Check for invalid image dimensions in png_get_IHDR. Added missing "fi;" in the install target of the SGI makefiles. Added install-static to all makefiles that make shared libraries. - Always do gamma compensation when image is partially transtqparent. + Always do gamma compensation when image is partially transparent. version 1.2.2beta3 [March 7, 2002] Compute background.gray and background_1.gray even when color_type is RGB in case image gets reduced to gray later. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/INSTALL b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/INSTALL index 93980f3..1d6dfc5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/INSTALL +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/INSTALL @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ or "zlib114") so that you have directories called "zlib" and "libpng". Your directory structure should look like this: - .. (the tqparent directory) + .. (the parent directory) libpng (this directory) INSTALL (this file) README diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/example.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/example.c index c7ebb4b..191d41b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/example.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/example.c @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ void read_png(FILE *fp, unsigned int sig_read) /* file is already open */ if (png_get_valid(png_ptr, info_ptr, PNG_INFO_tRNS)) png_set_tRNS_to_alpha(png_ptr); - /* Set the background color to draw transtqparent and alpha images over. + /* Set the background color to draw transparent and alpha images over. * It is possible to set the red, green, and blue components directly * for paletted images instead of supplying a palette index. Note that * even if the PNG file supplies a background, you are not required to diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.3 b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.3 index a0fc097..b54b547 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.3 +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.3 @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ libpng \- Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Reference Library 1.2.5 \fI\fB -\fBpng_uint_32 png_get_mmx_flagtqmask (int \fP\fIflag_select\fP\fB, int \fI*compilerID\fP\fB);\fP +\fBpng_uint_32 png_get_mmx_flagmask (int \fP\fIflag_select\fP\fB, int \fI*compilerID\fP\fB);\fP \fI\fB @@ -526,7 +526,7 @@ libpng \- Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Reference Library 1.2.5 \fI\fB -\fBvoid png_set_invalid (png_structp \fP\fIpng_ptr\fP\fB, png_infop \fP\fIinfo_ptr\fP\fB, int \fItqmask\fP\fB);\fP +\fBvoid png_set_invalid (png_structp \fP\fIpng_ptr\fP\fB, png_infop \fP\fIinfo_ptr\fP\fB, int \fImask\fP\fB);\fP \fI\fB @@ -1152,7 +1152,7 @@ dithering, and setting filler.) If this is the case, simply do this: where png_transforms is an integer containing the logical OR of some set of transformation flags. This call is equivalent to png_read_info(), -followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform tqmask, +followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform mask, then png_read_image(), and finally png_read_end(). (The final parameter of this call is not yet used. Someday it might point @@ -1326,12 +1326,12 @@ into the info_ptr is returned for any complex types. png_get_tRNS(png_ptr, info_ptr, &trans, &num_trans, &trans_values); - trans - array of transtqparent entries for + trans - array of transparent entries for palette (PNG_INFO_tRNS) trans_values - graylevel or color sample values of - the single transtqparent color for + the single transparent color for non-paletted images (PNG_INFO_tRNS) - num_trans - number of transtqparent entries + num_trans - number of transparent entries (PNG_INFO_tRNS) png_get_hIST(png_ptr, info_ptr, &hist); @@ -1564,7 +1564,7 @@ is the level of opacity. If you need the alpha channel in an image to be the level of transparency instead of opacity, you can invert the alpha channel (or the tRNS chunk data) after it's read, so that 0 is fully opaque and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or 65535 (in 16-bit -images) is fully transtqparent, with +images) is fully transparent, with png_set_invert_alpha(png_ptr); @@ -2003,8 +2003,8 @@ When you are done, you can free all memory allocated by libpng like this: It is also possible to individually free the info_ptr members that point to libpng-allocated storage with the following function: - png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, tqmask, seq) - tqmask - identifies data to be freed, a tqmask + png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask, seq) + mask - identifies data to be freed, a mask containing the logical OR of one or more of PNG_FREE_PLTE, PNG_FREE_TRNS, @@ -2022,7 +2022,7 @@ by the user and not by libpng, and will in those cases do nothing. The "seq" parameter is ignored if only one item of the selected data type, such as PLTE, is allowed. If "seq" is not -1, and multiple items are allowed for the data type identified in -the tqmask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure +the mask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure is freed, where n is "seq". The default behavior is only to free data that was allocated internally @@ -2030,8 +2030,8 @@ by libpng. This can be changed, so that libpng will not free the data, or so that it will free data that was allocated by the user with png_malloc() or png_zalloc() and passed in via a png_set_*() function, with - png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, tqmask) - tqmask - which data elements are affected + png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, mask) + mask - which data elements are affected same choices as in png_free_data() freer - one of PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA @@ -2065,8 +2065,8 @@ The png_free_data() function will turn off the "valid" flag for anything it frees. If you need to turn the flag off for a chunk that was freed by your application instead of by libpng, you can use - png_set_invalid(png_ptr, info_ptr, tqmask); - tqmask - identifies the chunks to be made invalid, + png_set_invalid(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask); + mask - identifies the chunks to be made invalid, containing the logical OR of one or more of PNG_INFO_gAMA, PNG_INFO_sBIT, @@ -2525,12 +2525,12 @@ Some of the more important parts of the png_info are: png_set_tRNS(png_ptr, info_ptr, trans, num_trans, trans_values); - trans - array of transtqparent entries for + trans - array of transparent entries for palette (PNG_INFO_tRNS) trans_values - graylevel or color sample values of - the single transtqparent color for + the single transparent color for non-paletted images (PNG_INFO_tRNS) - num_trans - number of transtqparent entries + num_trans - number of transparent entries (PNG_INFO_tRNS) png_set_hIST(png_ptr, info_ptr, hist); @@ -2746,7 +2746,7 @@ png_set_rows() to put image data in the info structure), simply do this: where png_transforms is an integer containing the logical OR of some set of transformation flags. This call is equivalent to png_write_info(), -followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform tqmask, +followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform mask, then png_write_image(), and finally png_write_end(). (The final parameter of this call is not yet used. Someday it might point @@ -2764,7 +2764,7 @@ Note that there is one transformation you may need to do before png_write_info(). In PNG files, the alpha channel in an image is the level of opacity. If your data is supplied as a level of transparency, you can invert the alpha channel before you write it, so -that 0 is fully transtqparent and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or +that 0 is fully transparent and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or 65535 (in 16-bit images) is fully opaque, with png_set_invert_alpha(png_ptr); @@ -2773,7 +2773,7 @@ This must appear before png_write_info() instead of later with the other transformations because in the case of paletted images the tRNS chunk data has to be inverted before the tRNS chunk is written. If your image is not a paletted image, the tRNS data (which in such cases -represents a single color to be rendered as transtqparent) won't need to +represents a single color to be rendered as transparent) won't need to be changed, and you can safely do this transformation after your png_write_info() call. @@ -2999,8 +2999,8 @@ When you are done, you can free all memory used by libpng like this: It is also possible to individually free the info_ptr members that point to libpng-allocated storage with the following function: - png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, tqmask, seq) - tqmask - identifies data to be freed, a tqmask + png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask, seq) + mask - identifies data to be freed, a mask containing the logical OR of one or more of PNG_FREE_PLTE, PNG_FREE_TRNS, @@ -3018,7 +3018,7 @@ by the user and not by libpng, and will in those cases do nothing. The "seq" parameter is ignored if only one item of the selected data type, such as PLTE, is allowed. If "seq" is not -1, and multiple items are allowed for the data type identified in -the tqmask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure +the mask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure is freed, where n is "seq". If you allocated data such as a palette that you passed @@ -3030,8 +3030,8 @@ by libpng. This can be changed, so that libpng will not free the data, or so that it will free data that was allocated by the user with png_malloc() or png_zalloc() and passed in via a png_set_*() function, with - png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, tqmask) - tqmask - which data elements are affected + png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, mask) + mask - which data elements are affected same choices as in png_free_data() freer - one of PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA @@ -3451,7 +3451,7 @@ A new feature in libpng 1.2.0 is the ability to dynamically switch between standard and optimized versions of some routines. Currently these are limited to three computationally intensive tasks when reading PNG files: decoding row filters, expanding interlacing, and combining interlaced or -transtqparent row data with previous row data. Currently the optimized +transparent row data with previous row data. Currently the optimized versions are available only for x86 (Intel, AMD, etc.) platforms with MMX support, though this may change in future versions. (For example, the non-MMX assembler optimizations for zlib might become similarly @@ -3468,32 +3468,32 @@ enable all possible optimizations (bearing in mind that some "optimizations" may actually run more slowly in rare cases): #if defined(PNG_LIBPNG_VER) && (PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10200) - png_uint_32 tqmask, flags; + png_uint_32 mask, flags; flags = png_get_asm_flags(png_ptr); - tqmask = png_get_asm_flagtqmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); - png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags | tqmask); + mask = png_get_asm_flagmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); + png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags | mask); #endif To enable only optimizations relevant to reading PNGs, use PNG_SELECT_READ -by itself when calling png_get_asm_flagtqmask(); similarly for optimizing +by itself when calling png_get_asm_flagmask(); similarly for optimizing only writing. To disable all optimizations: #if defined(PNG_LIBPNG_VER) && (PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10200) flags = png_get_asm_flags(png_ptr); - tqmask = png_get_asm_flagtqmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); - png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags & ~tqmask); + mask = png_get_asm_flagmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); + png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags & ~mask); #endif -To enable or disable only MMX-related features, use png_get_mmx_flagtqmask() -in place of png_get_asm_flagtqmask(). The mmx version takes one additional +To enable or disable only MMX-related features, use png_get_mmx_flagmask() +in place of png_get_asm_flagmask(). The mmx version takes one additional parameter: #if defined(PNG_LIBPNG_VER) && (PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10200) int selection = PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE; int compilerID; - tqmask = png_get_mmx_flagtqmask(selection, &compilerID); + mask = png_get_mmx_flagmask(selection, &compilerID); #endif On return, compilerID will indicate which version of the MMX assembler @@ -3502,7 +3502,7 @@ Visual C++ (compilerID == 1) and GNU C (a.k.a. gcc/gas, compilerID == 2). On non-x86 platforms or on systems compiled without MMX optimizations, a value of -1 is used. -Note that both png_get_asm_flagtqmask() and png_get_mmx_flagtqmask() return +Note that both png_get_asm_flagmask() and png_get_mmx_flagmask() return all valid, settable optimization bits for the version of the library that's currently in use. In the case of shared (dynamically linked) libraries, this may include optimizations that did not exist at the time the code was @@ -3534,8 +3534,8 @@ the png_mmx_support() function: It returns -1 if MMX support is not compiled into libpng, 0 if MMX code is compiled but MMX is not supported by the processor, or 1 if MMX support -is fully available. Note that png_mmx_support(), png_get_mmx_flagtqmask(), -and png_get_asm_flagtqmask() all may be called without allocating and ini- +is fully available. Note that png_mmx_support(), png_get_mmx_flagmask(), +and png_get_asm_flagmask() all may be called without allocating and ini- tializing any PNG structures (for example, as part of a usage screen or "about" box). @@ -3572,14 +3572,14 @@ certain extensions to PNG for PNG images that are embedded in MNG datastreams. Libpng can support some of these extensions. To enable them, use the png_permit_mng_features() function: - feature_set = png_permit_mng_features(png_ptr, tqmask) - tqmask is a png_uint_32 containing the logical OR of the + feature_set = png_permit_mng_features(png_ptr, mask) + mask is a png_uint_32 containing the logical OR of the features you want to enable. These include PNG_FLAG_MNG_EMPTY_PLTE PNG_FLAG_MNG_FILTER_64 PNG_ALL_MNG_FEATURES feature_set is a png_32_uint that is the logical AND of - your tqmask with the set of MNG features that is + your mask with the set of MNG features that is supported by the version of libpng that you are using. It is an error to use this function when reading or writing a standalone diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.txt b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.txt index 60139c1..689b564 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.txt +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpng.txt @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ dithering, and setting filler.) If this is the case, simply do this: where png_transforms is an integer containing the logical OR of some set of transformation flags. This call is equivalent to png_read_info(), -followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform tqmask, +followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform mask, then png_read_image(), and finally png_read_end(). (The final parameter of this call is not yet used. Someday it might point @@ -535,12 +535,12 @@ into the info_ptr is returned for any complex types. png_get_tRNS(png_ptr, info_ptr, &trans, &num_trans, &trans_values); - trans - array of transtqparent entries for + trans - array of transparent entries for palette (PNG_INFO_tRNS) trans_values - graylevel or color sample values of - the single transtqparent color for + the single transparent color for non-paletted images (PNG_INFO_tRNS) - num_trans - number of transtqparent entries + num_trans - number of transparent entries (PNG_INFO_tRNS) png_get_hIST(png_ptr, info_ptr, &hist); @@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ is the level of opacity. If you need the alpha channel in an image to be the level of transparency instead of opacity, you can invert the alpha channel (or the tRNS chunk data) after it's read, so that 0 is fully opaque and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or 65535 (in 16-bit -images) is fully transtqparent, with +images) is fully transparent, with png_set_invert_alpha(png_ptr); @@ -1212,8 +1212,8 @@ When you are done, you can free all memory allocated by libpng like this: It is also possible to individually free the info_ptr members that point to libpng-allocated storage with the following function: - png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, tqmask, seq) - tqmask - identifies data to be freed, a tqmask + png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask, seq) + mask - identifies data to be freed, a mask containing the logical OR of one or more of PNG_FREE_PLTE, PNG_FREE_TRNS, @@ -1231,7 +1231,7 @@ by the user and not by libpng, and will in those cases do nothing. The "seq" parameter is ignored if only one item of the selected data type, such as PLTE, is allowed. If "seq" is not -1, and multiple items are allowed for the data type identified in -the tqmask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure +the mask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure is freed, where n is "seq". The default behavior is only to free data that was allocated internally @@ -1239,8 +1239,8 @@ by libpng. This can be changed, so that libpng will not free the data, or so that it will free data that was allocated by the user with png_malloc() or png_zalloc() and passed in via a png_set_*() function, with - png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, tqmask) - tqmask - which data elements are affected + png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, mask) + mask - which data elements are affected same choices as in png_free_data() freer - one of PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA @@ -1274,8 +1274,8 @@ The png_free_data() function will turn off the "valid" flag for anything it frees. If you need to turn the flag off for a chunk that was freed by your application instead of by libpng, you can use - png_set_invalid(png_ptr, info_ptr, tqmask); - tqmask - identifies the chunks to be made invalid, + png_set_invalid(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask); + mask - identifies the chunks to be made invalid, containing the logical OR of one or more of PNG_INFO_gAMA, PNG_INFO_sBIT, @@ -1734,12 +1734,12 @@ Some of the more important parts of the png_info are: png_set_tRNS(png_ptr, info_ptr, trans, num_trans, trans_values); - trans - array of transtqparent entries for + trans - array of transparent entries for palette (PNG_INFO_tRNS) trans_values - graylevel or color sample values of - the single transtqparent color for + the single transparent color for non-paletted images (PNG_INFO_tRNS) - num_trans - number of transtqparent entries + num_trans - number of transparent entries (PNG_INFO_tRNS) png_set_hIST(png_ptr, info_ptr, hist); @@ -1955,7 +1955,7 @@ png_set_rows() to put image data in the info structure), simply do this: where png_transforms is an integer containing the logical OR of some set of transformation flags. This call is equivalent to png_write_info(), -followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform tqmask, +followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform mask, then png_write_image(), and finally png_write_end(). (The final parameter of this call is not yet used. Someday it might point @@ -1973,7 +1973,7 @@ Note that there is one transformation you may need to do before png_write_info(). In PNG files, the alpha channel in an image is the level of opacity. If your data is supplied as a level of transparency, you can invert the alpha channel before you write it, so -that 0 is fully transtqparent and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or +that 0 is fully transparent and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or 65535 (in 16-bit images) is fully opaque, with png_set_invert_alpha(png_ptr); @@ -1982,7 +1982,7 @@ This must appear before png_write_info() instead of later with the other transformations because in the case of paletted images the tRNS chunk data has to be inverted before the tRNS chunk is written. If your image is not a paletted image, the tRNS data (which in such cases -represents a single color to be rendered as transtqparent) won't need to +represents a single color to be rendered as transparent) won't need to be changed, and you can safely do this transformation after your png_write_info() call. @@ -2208,8 +2208,8 @@ When you are done, you can free all memory used by libpng like this: It is also possible to individually free the info_ptr members that point to libpng-allocated storage with the following function: - png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, tqmask, seq) - tqmask - identifies data to be freed, a tqmask + png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask, seq) + mask - identifies data to be freed, a mask containing the logical OR of one or more of PNG_FREE_PLTE, PNG_FREE_TRNS, @@ -2227,7 +2227,7 @@ by the user and not by libpng, and will in those cases do nothing. The "seq" parameter is ignored if only one item of the selected data type, such as PLTE, is allowed. If "seq" is not -1, and multiple items are allowed for the data type identified in -the tqmask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure +the mask, such as text or sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure is freed, where n is "seq". If you allocated data such as a palette that you passed @@ -2239,8 +2239,8 @@ by libpng. This can be changed, so that libpng will not free the data, or so that it will free data that was allocated by the user with png_malloc() or png_zalloc() and passed in via a png_set_*() function, with - png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, tqmask) - tqmask - which data elements are affected + png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, mask) + mask - which data elements are affected same choices as in png_free_data() freer - one of PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA @@ -2660,7 +2660,7 @@ A new feature in libpng 1.2.0 is the ability to dynamically switch between standard and optimized versions of some routines. Currently these are limited to three computationally intensive tasks when reading PNG files: decoding row filters, expanding interlacing, and combining interlaced or -transtqparent row data with previous row data. Currently the optimized +transparent row data with previous row data. Currently the optimized versions are available only for x86 (Intel, AMD, etc.) platforms with MMX support, though this may change in future versions. (For example, the non-MMX assembler optimizations for zlib might become similarly @@ -2677,32 +2677,32 @@ enable all possible optimizations (bearing in mind that some "optimizations" may actually run more slowly in rare cases): #if defined(PNG_LIBPNG_VER) && (PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10200) - png_uint_32 tqmask, flags; + png_uint_32 mask, flags; flags = png_get_asm_flags(png_ptr); - tqmask = png_get_asm_flagtqmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); - png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags | tqmask); + mask = png_get_asm_flagmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); + png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags | mask); #endif To enable only optimizations relevant to reading PNGs, use PNG_SELECT_READ -by itself when calling png_get_asm_flagtqmask(); similarly for optimizing +by itself when calling png_get_asm_flagmask(); similarly for optimizing only writing. To disable all optimizations: #if defined(PNG_LIBPNG_VER) && (PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10200) flags = png_get_asm_flags(png_ptr); - tqmask = png_get_asm_flagtqmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); - png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags & ~tqmask); + mask = png_get_asm_flagmask(PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE); + png_set_asm_flags(png_ptr, flags & ~mask); #endif -To enable or disable only MMX-related features, use png_get_mmx_flagtqmask() -in place of png_get_asm_flagtqmask(). The mmx version takes one additional +To enable or disable only MMX-related features, use png_get_mmx_flagmask() +in place of png_get_asm_flagmask(). The mmx version takes one additional parameter: #if defined(PNG_LIBPNG_VER) && (PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10200) int selection = PNG_SELECT_READ | PNG_SELECT_WRITE; int compilerID; - tqmask = png_get_mmx_flagtqmask(selection, &compilerID); + mask = png_get_mmx_flagmask(selection, &compilerID); #endif On return, compilerID will indicate which version of the MMX assembler @@ -2711,7 +2711,7 @@ Visual C++ (compilerID == 1) and GNU C (a.k.a. gcc/gas, compilerID == 2). On non-x86 platforms or on systems compiled without MMX optimizations, a value of -1 is used. -Note that both png_get_asm_flagtqmask() and png_get_mmx_flagtqmask() return +Note that both png_get_asm_flagmask() and png_get_mmx_flagmask() return all valid, settable optimization bits for the version of the library that's currently in use. In the case of shared (dynamically linked) libraries, this may include optimizations that did not exist at the time the code was @@ -2743,8 +2743,8 @@ the png_mmx_support() function: It returns -1 if MMX support is not compiled into libpng, 0 if MMX code is compiled but MMX is not supported by the processor, or 1 if MMX support -is fully available. Note that png_mmx_support(), png_get_mmx_flagtqmask(), -and png_get_asm_flagtqmask() all may be called without allocating and ini- +is fully available. Note that png_mmx_support(), png_get_mmx_flagmask(), +and png_get_asm_flagmask() all may be called without allocating and ini- tializing any PNG structures (for example, as part of a usage screen or "about" box). @@ -2781,14 +2781,14 @@ certain extensions to PNG for PNG images that are embedded in MNG datastreams. Libpng can support some of these extensions. To enable them, use the png_permit_mng_features() function: - feature_set = png_permit_mng_features(png_ptr, tqmask) - tqmask is a png_uint_32 containing the logical OR of the + feature_set = png_permit_mng_features(png_ptr, mask) + mask is a png_uint_32 containing the logical OR of the features you want to enable. These include PNG_FLAG_MNG_EMPTY_PLTE PNG_FLAG_MNG_FILTER_64 PNG_ALL_MNG_FEATURES feature_set is a png_32_uint that is the logical AND of - your tqmask with the set of MNG features that is + your mask with the set of MNG features that is supported by the version of libpng that you are using. It is an error to use this function when reading or writing a standalone diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpngpf.3 b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpngpf.3 index a75a669..3c1f379 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpngpf.3 +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/libpngpf.3 @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ libpng \- Portable Network Graphics (PNG) Reference Library 1.2.5 \fI\fB -\fBvoid png_combine_row (png_structp \fP\fIpng_ptr\fP\fB, png_bytep \fP\fIrow\fP\fB, int \fItqmask\fP\fB);\fP +\fBvoid png_combine_row (png_structp \fP\fIpng_ptr\fP\fB, png_bytep \fP\fIrow\fP\fB, int \fImask\fP\fB);\fP \fI\fB diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.c index d3370d8..fc120a2 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.c @@ -301,15 +301,15 @@ png_info_init_3(png_infopp ptr_ptr, png_size_t png_info_struct_size) #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED void PNGAPI png_data_freer(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, - int freer, png_uint_32 tqmask) + int freer, png_uint_32 mask) { png_debug(1, "in png_data_freer\n"); if (png_ptr == NULL || info_ptr == NULL) return; if(freer == PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA) - info_ptr->free_me |= tqmask; + info_ptr->free_me |= mask; else if(freer == PNG_USER_WILL_FREE_DATA) - info_ptr->free_me &= ~tqmask; + info_ptr->free_me &= ~mask; else png_warning(png_ptr, "Unknown freer parameter in png_data_freer."); @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ png_data_freer(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, #endif void PNGAPI -png_free_data(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, png_uint_32 tqmask, +png_free_data(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, png_uint_32 mask, int num) { png_debug(1, "in png_free_data\n"); @@ -327,9 +327,9 @@ png_free_data(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, png_uint_32 tqmask, #if defined(PNG_TEXT_SUPPORTED) /* free text item num or (if num == -1) all text items */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_TEXT) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_TEXT) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_TEXT) +if (mask & PNG_FREE_TEXT) #endif { if (num != -1) @@ -355,9 +355,9 @@ if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_TEXT) #if defined(PNG_tRNS_SUPPORTED) /* free any tRNS entry */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_TRNS) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_TRNS) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_TRNS) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_TRNS)) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_TRNS) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_TRNS)) #endif { png_free(png_ptr, info_ptr->trans); @@ -372,9 +372,9 @@ if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_TRNS) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_TRNS)) #if defined(PNG_sCAL_SUPPORTED) /* free any sCAL entry */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_SCAL) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_SCAL) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_SCAL) +if (mask & PNG_FREE_SCAL) #endif { #if defined(PNG_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED) && !defined(PNG_FLOATING_POINT_SUPPORTED) @@ -390,9 +390,9 @@ if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_SCAL) #if defined(PNG_pCAL_SUPPORTED) /* free any pCAL entry */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_PCAL) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_PCAL) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_PCAL) +if (mask & PNG_FREE_PCAL) #endif { png_free(png_ptr, info_ptr->pcal_purpose); @@ -417,9 +417,9 @@ if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_PCAL) #if defined(PNG_iCCP_SUPPORTED) /* free any iCCP entry */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_ICCP) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_ICCP) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_ICCP) +if (mask & PNG_FREE_ICCP) #endif { png_free(png_ptr, info_ptr->iccp_name); @@ -433,9 +433,9 @@ if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_ICCP) #if defined(PNG_sPLT_SUPPORTED) /* free a given sPLT entry, or (if num == -1) all sPLT entries */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_SPLT) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_SPLT) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_SPLT) +if (mask & PNG_FREE_SPLT) #endif { if (num != -1) @@ -467,9 +467,9 @@ if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_SPLT) #if defined(PNG_UNKNOWN_CHUNKS_SUPPORTED) #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_UNKN) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_UNKN) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_UNKN) +if (mask & PNG_FREE_UNKN) #endif { if (num != -1) @@ -500,9 +500,9 @@ if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_UNKN) #if defined(PNG_hIST_SUPPORTED) /* free any hIST entry */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_HIST) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_HIST) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_HIST) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_HIST)) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_HIST) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_HIST)) #endif { png_free(png_ptr, info_ptr->hist); @@ -516,9 +516,9 @@ if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_HIST) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_HIST)) /* free any PLTE entry that was internally allocated */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_PLTE) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_PLTE) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_PLTE) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_PLTE)) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_PLTE) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_PLTE)) #endif { png_zfree(png_ptr, info_ptr->palette); @@ -533,9 +533,9 @@ if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_PLTE) && (png_ptr->flags & PNG_FLAG_FREE_PLTE)) #if defined(PNG_INFO_IMAGE_SUPPORTED) /* free any image bits attached to the info structure */ #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED -if ((tqmask & PNG_FREE_ROWS) & info_ptr->free_me) +if ((mask & PNG_FREE_ROWS) & info_ptr->free_me) #else -if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_ROWS) +if (mask & PNG_FREE_ROWS) #endif { if(info_ptr->row_pointers) @@ -555,9 +555,9 @@ if (tqmask & PNG_FREE_ROWS) #ifdef PNG_FREE_ME_SUPPORTED if(num == -1) - info_ptr->free_me &= ~tqmask; + info_ptr->free_me &= ~mask; else - info_ptr->free_me &= ~(tqmask & ~PNG_FREE_MUL); + info_ptr->free_me &= ~(mask & ~PNG_FREE_MUL); #endif } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.h index 76fef59..a7e1a4a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/png.h @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ typedef struct png_info_struct png_uint_32 rowbytes; /* bytes needed to hold an untransformed row */ png_colorp palette; /* array of color values (valid & PNG_INFO_PLTE) */ png_uint_16 num_palette; /* number of color entries in "palette" (PLTE) */ - png_uint_16 num_trans; /* number of transtqparent palette color (tRNS) */ + png_uint_16 num_trans; /* number of transparent palette color (tRNS) */ png_byte bit_depth; /* 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 bits/channel (from IHDR) */ png_byte color_type; /* see PNG_COLOR_TYPE_ below (from IHDR) */ /* The following three should have been named *_method not *_type */ @@ -671,13 +671,13 @@ defined(PNG_READ_BACKGROUND_SUPPORTED) * other image types that don't need a full alpha channel. There are * "num_trans" transparency values for a paletted image, stored in the * same order as the palette colors, starting from index 0. Values - * for the data are in the range [0, 255], ranging from fully transtqparent + * for the data are in the range [0, 255], ranging from fully transparent * to fully opaque, respectively. For non-paletted images, there is a - * single color specified that should be treated as fully transtqparent. + * single color specified that should be treated as fully transparent. * Data is valid if (valid & PNG_INFO_tRNS) is non-zero. */ - png_bytep trans; /* transtqparent values for paletted image */ - png_color_16 trans_values; /* transtqparent color for non-palette image */ + png_bytep trans; /* transparent values for paletted image */ + png_color_16 trans_values; /* transparent color for non-palette image */ #endif #if defined(PNG_bKGD_SUPPORTED) || defined(PNG_READ_BACKGROUND_SUPPORTED) @@ -1867,7 +1867,7 @@ extern PNG_EXPORT(void,png_free_data) PNGARG((png_structp png_ptr, /* Reassign responsibility for freeing existing data, whether allocated * by libpng or by the application */ extern PNG_EXPORT(void,png_data_freer) PNGARG((png_structp png_ptr, - png_infop info_ptr, int freer, png_uint_32 tqmask)); + png_infop info_ptr, int freer, png_uint_32 mask)); #endif /* assignments for png_data_freer */ #define PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA 1 @@ -2276,7 +2276,7 @@ PNG_EXPORT(int,png_handle_as_unknown) PNGARG((png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep If you need to turn it off for a chunk that your application has freed, you can use png_set_invalid(png_ptr, info_ptr, PNG_INFO_CHNK); */ extern PNG_EXPORT(void, png_set_invalid) PNGARG((png_structp png_ptr, - png_infop info_ptr, int tqmask)); + png_infop info_ptr, int mask)); #if defined(PNG_INFO_IMAGE_SUPPORTED) /* The "params" pointer is currently not used and is for future expansion. */ @@ -2384,11 +2384,11 @@ extern PNG_EXPORT(png_uint_32,png_permit_mng_features) PNGARG((png_structp #if !defined(PNG_1_0_X) /* pngget.c */ -extern PNG_EXPORT(png_uint_32,png_get_mmx_flagtqmask) +extern PNG_EXPORT(png_uint_32,png_get_mmx_flagmask) PNGARG((int flag_select, int *compilerID)); /* pngget.c */ -extern PNG_EXPORT(png_uint_32,png_get_asm_flagtqmask) +extern PNG_EXPORT(png_uint_32,png_get_asm_flagmask) PNGARG((int flag_select)); /* pngget.c */ @@ -2950,7 +2950,7 @@ PNG_EXTERN void png_build_gamma_table PNGARG((png_structp png_ptr)); /* combine a row of data, dealing with alpha, etc. if requested */ PNG_EXTERN void png_combine_row PNGARG((png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, - int tqmask)); + int mask)); #if defined(PNG_READ_INTERLACING_SUPPORTED) /* expand an interlaced row */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pnggccrd.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pnggccrd.c index 1056251..88a1da2 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pnggccrd.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pnggccrd.c @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ * listings... Apparently register spillage has to do with ebx, since * it's used to index the global offset table. Commenting it out of the * input-reg lists in png_combine_row() eliminated compiler barfage, so - * ifdef'd with __PIC__ macro: if defined, use a global for untqmask + * ifdef'd with __PIC__ macro: if defined, use a global for unmask * * 19991107: * - verified CPUID clobberage: 12-char string constant ("GenuineIntel", @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ * pnggccrd.c:994: more than 10 operands in `asm' * pnggccrd.c:1177: more than 10 operands in `asm' * They are all the same problem and can be worked around by using the - * global _untqmask variable unconditionally, not just in the -fPIC case. + * global _unmask variable unconditionally, not just in the -fPIC case. * Reportedly earlier versions of gcc also have the problem with more than * 10 operands; they just don't report it. Much strangeness ensues, etc. * @@ -257,22 +257,22 @@ static const int FARDATA png_pass_width[7] = {8, 4, 4, 2, 2, 1, 1}; # define _mmx_supported mmx_supported # define _const4 const4 # define _const6 const6 -# define _mask8_0 tqmask8_0 -# define _mask16_1 tqmask16_1 -# define _mask16_0 tqmask16_0 -# define _mask24_2 tqmask24_2 -# define _mask24_1 tqmask24_1 -# define _mask24_0 tqmask24_0 -# define _mask32_3 tqmask32_3 -# define _mask32_2 tqmask32_2 -# define _mask32_1 tqmask32_1 -# define _mask32_0 tqmask32_0 -# define _mask48_5 tqmask48_5 -# define _mask48_4 tqmask48_4 -# define _mask48_3 tqmask48_3 -# define _mask48_2 tqmask48_2 -# define _mask48_1 tqmask48_1 -# define _mask48_0 tqmask48_0 +# define _mask8_0 mask8_0 +# define _mask16_1 mask16_1 +# define _mask16_0 mask16_0 +# define _mask24_2 mask24_2 +# define _mask24_1 mask24_1 +# define _mask24_0 mask24_0 +# define _mask32_3 mask32_3 +# define _mask32_2 mask32_2 +# define _mask32_1 mask32_1 +# define _mask32_0 mask32_0 +# define _mask48_5 mask48_5 +# define _mask48_4 mask48_4 +# define _mask48_3 mask48_3 +# define _mask48_2 mask48_2 +# define _mask48_1 mask48_1 +# define _mask48_0 mask48_0 # define _LBCarryMask LBCarryMask # define _HBClearMask HBClearMask # define _ActiveMask ActiveMask @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ static const int FARDATA png_pass_width[7] = {8, 4, 4, 2, 2, 1, 1}; # define _ShiftBpp ShiftBpp # define _ShiftRem ShiftRem #ifdef PNG_THREAD_UNSAFE_OK -# define _untqmask untqmask +# define _unmask unmask # define _FullLength FullLength # define _MMXLength MMXLength # define _dif dif @@ -295,14 +295,14 @@ static const int FARDATA png_pass_width[7] = {8, 4, 4, 2, 2, 1, 1}; /* These constants are used in the inlined MMX assembly code. Ignore gcc's "At top level: defined but not used" warnings. */ -/* GRR 20000706: originally _untqmask was needed only when compiling with -fPIC, +/* GRR 20000706: originally _unmask was needed only when compiling with -fPIC, * since that case uses the %ebx register for indexing the Global Offset Table * and there were no other registers available. But gcc 2.95 and later emit - * "more than 10 operands in `asm'" errors when %ebx is used to preload untqmask + * "more than 10 operands in `asm'" errors when %ebx is used to preload unmask * in the non-PIC case, so we'll just use the global unconditionally now. */ #ifdef PNG_THREAD_UNSAFE_OK -static int _untqmask; +static int _unmask; #endif static unsigned long long _mask8_0 = 0x0102040810204080LL; @@ -394,19 +394,19 @@ static int _mmx_supported = 2; /* Combines the row recently read in with the previous row. This routine takes care of alpha and transparency if requested. This routine also handles the two methods of progressive display - of interlaced images, depending on the tqmask value. - The tqmask value describes which pixels are to be combined with + of interlaced images, depending on the mask value. + The mask value describes which pixels are to be combined with the row. The pattern always repeats every 8 pixels, so just 8 bits are needed. A one indicates the pixel is to be combined; a zero indicates the pixel is to be skipped. This is in addition to any alpha or transparency value associated with the pixel. - If you want all pixels to be combined, pass 0xff (255) in tqmask. */ + If you want all pixels to be combined, pass 0xff (255) in mask. */ /* Use this routine for the x86 platform - it uses a faster MMX routine if the machine supports MMX. */ void /* PRIVATE */ -png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) +png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int mask) { png_debug(1, "in png_combine_row (pnggccrd.c)\n"); @@ -418,13 +418,13 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) } #endif - if (tqmask == 0xff) + if (mask == 0xff) { - png_debug(2,"tqmask == 0xff: doing single png_memcpy()\n"); + png_debug(2,"mask == 0xff: doing single png_memcpy()\n"); png_memcpy(row, png_ptr->row_buf + 1, (png_size_t)((png_ptr->width * png_ptr->row_info.pixel_depth + 7) >> 3)); } - else /* (png_combine_row() is never called with tqmask == 0) */ + else /* (png_combine_row() is never called with mask == 0) */ { switch (png_ptr->row_info.pixel_depth) { @@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < png_ptr->width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { int value; @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < png_ptr->width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { value = (*sp >> shift) & 0x3; *dp &= (png_byte)((0x3f3f >> (6 - shift)) & 0xff); @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < png_ptr->width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { value = (*sp >> shift) & 0xf; *dp &= (png_byte)((0xf0f >> (4 - shift)) & 0xff); @@ -614,14 +614,14 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) int dummy_value_c; int dummy_value_S; int dummy_value_D; - _untqmask = ~tqmask; // global variable for -fPIC version + _unmask = ~mask; // global variable for -fPIC version srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; len = png_ptr->width &~7; // reduce to multiple of 8 diff = (int) (png_ptr->width & 7); // amount lost __asm__ __volatile__ ( - "movd _untqmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern + "movd _unmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern "psubb %%mm6, %%mm6 \n\t" // zero mm6 "punpcklbw %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" "punpcklwd %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" @@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) "movl %%eax, %%ecx \n\t" "cmpl $0, %%ecx \n\t" "jz end8 \n\t" -// preload "movl tqmask, %%edx \n\t" +// preload "movl mask, %%edx \n\t" "sall $24, %%edx \n\t" // make low byte, high byte "secondloop8: \n\t" @@ -682,9 +682,9 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) : "3" (srcptr), // esi // input regs "4" (dstptr), // edi "0" (diff), // eax -// was (untqmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx +// was (unmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx "2" (len), // ecx - "1" (tqmask) // edx + "1" (mask) // edx #if 0 /* MMX regs (%mm0, etc.) not supported by gcc 2.7.2.3 or egcs 1.1 */ : "%mm0", "%mm4", "%mm6", "%mm7" // clobber list @@ -752,14 +752,14 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) int dummy_value_c; int dummy_value_S; int dummy_value_D; - _untqmask = ~tqmask; // global variable for -fPIC version + _unmask = ~mask; // global variable for -fPIC version srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; len = png_ptr->width &~7; // reduce to multiple of 8 diff = (int) (png_ptr->width & 7); // amount lost // __asm__ __volatile__ ( - "movd _untqmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern + "movd _unmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern "psubb %%mm6, %%mm6 \n\t" // zero mm6 "punpcklbw %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" "punpcklwd %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) "movl %%eax, %%ecx \n\t" "cmpl $0, %%ecx \n\t" "jz end16 \n\t" -// preload "movl tqmask, %%edx \n\t" +// preload "movl mask, %%edx \n\t" "sall $24, %%edx \n\t" // make low byte, high byte "secondloop16: \n\t" @@ -833,9 +833,9 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) "=D" (dummy_value_D) : "0" (diff), // eax // input regs -// was (untqmask) " " RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx +// was (unmask) " " RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx "1" (len), // ecx - "2" (tqmask), // edx + "2" (mask), // edx "3" (srcptr), // esi "4" (dstptr) // edi @@ -905,14 +905,14 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) int dummy_value_c; int dummy_value_S; int dummy_value_D; - _untqmask = ~tqmask; // global variable for -fPIC version + _unmask = ~mask; // global variable for -fPIC version srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; len = png_ptr->width &~7; // reduce to multiple of 8 diff = (int) (png_ptr->width & 7); // amount lost // __asm__ __volatile__ ( - "movd _untqmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern + "movd _unmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern "psubb %%mm6, %%mm6 \n\t" // zero mm6 "punpcklbw %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" "punpcklwd %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" @@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) "movl %%eax, %%ecx \n\t" "cmpl $0, %%ecx \n\t" "jz end24 \n\t" -// preload "movl tqmask, %%edx \n\t" +// preload "movl mask, %%edx \n\t" "sall $24, %%edx \n\t" // make low byte, high byte "secondloop24: \n\t" @@ -1003,9 +1003,9 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) : "3" (srcptr), // esi // input regs "4" (dstptr), // edi "0" (diff), // eax -// was (untqmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx +// was (unmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx "2" (len), // ecx - "1" (tqmask) // edx + "1" (mask) // edx #if 0 /* MMX regs (%mm0, etc.) not supported by gcc 2.7.2.3 or egcs 1.1 */ : "%mm0", "%mm1", "%mm2" // clobber list @@ -1073,14 +1073,14 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) int dummy_value_c; int dummy_value_S; int dummy_value_D; - _untqmask = ~tqmask; // global variable for -fPIC version + _unmask = ~mask; // global variable for -fPIC version srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; len = png_ptr->width &~7; // reduce to multiple of 8 diff = (int) (png_ptr->width & 7); // amount lost // __asm__ __volatile__ ( - "movd _untqmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern + "movd _unmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern "psubb %%mm6, %%mm6 \n\t" // zero mm6 "punpcklbw %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" "punpcklwd %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" @@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) "movl %%eax, %%ecx \n\t" "cmpl $0, %%ecx \n\t" "jz end32 \n\t" -// preload "movl tqmask, %%edx \n\t" +// preload "movl mask, %%edx \n\t" "sall $24, %%edx \n\t" // low byte => high byte "secondloop32: \n\t" @@ -1178,9 +1178,9 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) : "3" (srcptr), // esi // input regs "4" (dstptr), // edi "0" (diff), // eax -// was (untqmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx +// was (unmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx "2" (len), // ecx - "1" (tqmask) // edx + "1" (mask) // edx #if 0 /* MMX regs (%mm0, etc.) not supported by gcc 2.7.2.3 or egcs 1.1 */ : "%mm0", "%mm1", "%mm2", "%mm3" // clobber list @@ -1248,14 +1248,14 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) int dummy_value_c; int dummy_value_S; int dummy_value_D; - _untqmask = ~tqmask; // global variable for -fPIC version + _unmask = ~mask; // global variable for -fPIC version srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; len = png_ptr->width &~7; // reduce to multiple of 8 diff = (int) (png_ptr->width & 7); // amount lost // __asm__ __volatile__ ( - "movd _untqmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern + "movd _unmask, %%mm7 \n\t" // load bit pattern "psubb %%mm6, %%mm6 \n\t" // zero mm6 "punpcklbw %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" "punpcklwd %%mm7, %%mm7 \n\t" @@ -1343,7 +1343,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) "movl %%eax, %%ecx \n\t" "cmpl $0, %%ecx \n\t" "jz end48 \n\t" -// preload "movl tqmask, %%edx \n\t" +// preload "movl mask, %%edx \n\t" "sall $24, %%edx \n\t" // make low byte, high byte "secondloop48: \n\t" @@ -1370,9 +1370,9 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) : "3" (srcptr), // esi // input regs "4" (dstptr), // edi "0" (diff), // eax -// was (untqmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx +// was (unmask) "b" RESERVED // ebx // Global Offset Table idx "2" (len), // ecx - "1" (tqmask) // edx + "1" (mask) // edx #if 0 /* MMX regs (%mm0, etc.) not supported by gcc 2.7.2.3 or egcs 1.1 */ : "%mm0", "%mm1", "%mm2", "%mm3" // clobber list @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) } } /* end switch (png_ptr->row_info.pixel_depth) */ - } /* end if (non-trivial tqmask) */ + } /* end if (non-trivial mask) */ } /* end png_combine_row() */ @@ -2802,7 +2802,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_avg(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "movl %%edi, _dif \n\t" // take start of row "addl %%ebx, _dif \n\t" // add bpp "addl $0xf, _dif \n\t" // add 7+8 to incr past tqalignment bdry - "andl $0xfffffff8, _dif \n\t" // tqmask to tqalignment boundary + "andl $0xfffffff8, _dif \n\t" // mask to tqalignment boundary "subl %%edi, _dif \n\t" // subtract from start => value ebx at "jz avg_go \n\t" // tqalignment @@ -2901,7 +2901,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_avg(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // Avg for each Active // byte // add 2nd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to average with _LBCarry - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 mask to cover // bytes 3-5 "movq %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm2 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm2 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly @@ -2922,7 +2922,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_avg(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // byte // add 3rd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to average with _LBCarry - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift mm6 tqmask to cover last + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift mm6 mask to cover last // two // bytes "movq %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm2 @@ -2991,7 +2991,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_avg(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // preload "movl prev_row, %%esi \n\t" // esi: Prior(x) "movq %%mm7, %%mm6 \n\t" "movq _LBCarryMask, %%mm5 \n\t" - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // create tqmask for 2nd active + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // create mask for 2nd active // group // prime the pump: load the first Raw(x-bpp) data set @@ -3118,7 +3118,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_avg(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // for each Active byte // add 2nd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to average with _LBCarry - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 mask to cover // bytes 2 & 3 "movq %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm2 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm2 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly @@ -3139,7 +3139,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_avg(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // Avg for each Active byte // add 3rd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to average with _LBCarry - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 mask to cover // bytes 4 & 5 "movq %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm2 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm2 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly @@ -3159,7 +3159,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_avg(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // Avg for each Active byte // add 4th active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to average with _LBCarry - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // shift the mm6 mask to cover // bytes 6 & 7 "movq %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm2 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm2 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly @@ -3467,7 +3467,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "xorl %%ecx, %%ecx \n\t" "addl $0xf, _dif \n\t" // add 7 + 8 to incr past tqalignment // boundary - "andl $0xfffffff8, _dif \n\t" // tqmask to tqalignment boundary + "andl $0xfffffff8, _dif \n\t" // mask to tqalignment boundary "subl %%edi, _dif \n\t" // subtract from start ==> value ebx // at tqalignment "jz paeth_go \n\t" @@ -3609,16 +3609,16 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "paddw %%mm5, %%mm6 \n\t" "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" @@ -3627,9 +3627,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -3670,8 +3670,8 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "pand %%mm5, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "pand %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm5 \n\t" @@ -3679,7 +3679,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm4 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" // test pa <= pb @@ -3687,9 +3687,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -3733,8 +3733,8 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" @@ -3742,7 +3742,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" // test pa <= pb @@ -3750,9 +3750,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" @@ -3833,16 +3833,16 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "paddw %%mm5, %%mm6 \n\t" "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" @@ -3851,9 +3851,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -3897,16 +3897,16 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "paddw %%mm5, %%mm6 \n\t" "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" @@ -3915,9 +3915,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -3986,16 +3986,16 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "paddw %%mm5, %%mm6 \n\t" "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" @@ -4004,9 +4004,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4042,16 +4042,16 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "paddw %%mm5, %%mm6 \n\t" "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" @@ -4060,9 +4060,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4131,16 +4131,16 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "paddw %%mm5, %%mm6 \n\t" "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" @@ -4149,9 +4149,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4188,16 +4188,16 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pav bytes < 0 "paddw %%mm5, %%mm6 \n\t" "pand %%mm4, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // create mask pbv bytes < 0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "pand %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 "psubw %%mm0, %%mm4 \n\t" "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "pxor %%mm0, %%mm0 \n\t" - "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + "pcmpgtw %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // create mask pcv bytes < 0 "pand %%mm6, %%mm0 \n\t" // only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 "psubw %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" @@ -4206,9 +4206,9 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_paeth(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, "psubw %%mm0, %%mm6 \n\t" "pcmpgtw %%mm5, %%mm7 \n\t" // pa > pb? "movq %%mm7, %%mm0 \n\t" - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb "pand %%mm7, %%mm5 \n\t" - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b "pand %%mm0, %%mm2 \n\t" "pandn %%mm4, %%mm7 \n\t" "pandn %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4504,7 +4504,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_sub(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row) "addl $0xf, _dif \n\t" // add 7 + 8 to incr past // tqalignment boundary "xorl %%ecx, %%ecx \n\t" - "andl $0xfffffff8, _dif \n\t" // tqmask to tqalignment boundary + "andl $0xfffffff8, _dif \n\t" // mask to tqalignment boundary "subl %%edi, _dif \n\t" // subtract from start ==> value "jz sub_go \n\t" // ecx at tqalignment @@ -4556,13 +4556,13 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_sub(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row) "addl %%eax, %%edi \n\t" // rp = row + bpp "movq %%mm7, %%mm6 \n\t" "movl _dif, %%edx \n\t" - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // move tqmask in mm6 to cover + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // move mask in mm6 to cover // 3rd active byte group // prime the pump: load the first Raw(x-bpp) data set "movq -8(%%edi,%%edx,), %%mm1 \n\t" "sub_3lp: \n\t" // shift data for adding first - "psrlq _ShiftRem, %%mm1 \n\t" // bpp bytes (no need for tqmask; + "psrlq _ShiftRem, %%mm1 \n\t" // bpp bytes (no need for mask; // shift clears inactive bytes) // add 1st active group "movq (%%edi,%%edx,), %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4571,13 +4571,13 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_sub(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row) // add 2nd active group "movq %%mm0, %%mm1 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm1 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm1 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly - "pand %%mm7, %%mm1 \n\t" // tqmask to use 2nd active group + "pand %%mm7, %%mm1 \n\t" // mask to use 2nd active group "paddb %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" // add 3rd active group "movq %%mm0, %%mm1 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm1 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm1 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly - "pand %%mm6, %%mm1 \n\t" // tqmask to use 3rd active group + "pand %%mm6, %%mm1 \n\t" // mask to use 3rd active group "addl $8, %%edx \n\t" "paddb %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4651,7 +4651,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_sub(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row) "movq -8(%%edi,%%edx,), %%mm1 \n\t" "sub_4lp: \n\t" // shift data for adding first - "psrlq _ShiftRem, %%mm1 \n\t" // bpp bytes (no need for tqmask; + "psrlq _ShiftRem, %%mm1 \n\t" // bpp bytes (no need for mask; // shift clears inactive bytes) "movq (%%edi,%%edx,), %%mm0 \n\t" "paddb %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4693,19 +4693,19 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_sub(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row) "movl _dif, %%edx \n\t" "movq %%mm7, %%mm6 \n\t" // preload "movl row, %%edi \n\t" - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // move tqmask in mm6 to cover + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm6 \n\t" // move mask in mm6 to cover // 3rd active byte group "movl %%edi, %%esi \n\t" // lp = row "movq %%mm6, %%mm5 \n\t" // preload "movl bpp, %%eax \n\t" "addl %%eax, %%edi \n\t" // rp = row + bpp - "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm5 \n\t" // move tqmask in mm5 to cover + "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm5 \n\t" // move mask in mm5 to cover // 4th active byte group // prime the pump: load the first Raw(x-bpp) data set "movq -8(%%edi,%%edx,), %%mm1 \n\t" "sub_2lp: \n\t" // shift data for adding first - "psrlq _ShiftRem, %%mm1 \n\t" // bpp bytes (no need for tqmask; + "psrlq _ShiftRem, %%mm1 \n\t" // bpp bytes (no need for mask; // shift clears inactive bytes) // add 1st active group "movq (%%edi,%%edx,), %%mm0 \n\t" @@ -4714,19 +4714,19 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_sub(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row) // add 2nd active group "movq %%mm0, %%mm1 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm1 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm1 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly - "pand %%mm7, %%mm1 \n\t" // tqmask to use 2nd active group + "pand %%mm7, %%mm1 \n\t" // mask to use 2nd active group "paddb %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" // add 3rd active group "movq %%mm0, %%mm1 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm1 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm1 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly - "pand %%mm6, %%mm1 \n\t" // tqmask to use 3rd active group + "pand %%mm6, %%mm1 \n\t" // mask to use 3rd active group "paddb %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" // add 4th active group "movq %%mm0, %%mm1 \n\t" // mov updated Raws to mm1 "psllq _ShiftBpp, %%mm1 \n\t" // shift data to pos. correctly - "pand %%mm5, %%mm1 \n\t" // tqmask to use 4th active group + "pand %%mm5, %%mm1 \n\t" // mask to use 4th active group "addl $8, %%edx \n\t" "paddb %%mm1, %%mm0 \n\t" "cmpl _MMXLength, %%edx \n\t" @@ -5359,7 +5359,7 @@ png_mmx_support(void) "incl %%eax \n\t" // ...increment eax to 1. This pair is // faster than the instruction "mov eax, 1" "cpuid \n\t" // get the CPU identification info again - "andl $0x800000, %%edx \n\t" // tqmask out all bits but MMX bit (23) + "andl $0x800000, %%edx \n\t" // mask out all bits but MMX bit (23) "cmpl $0, %%edx \n\t" // 0 = MMX not supported "jz 0f \n\t" // non-zero = yes, MMX IS supported diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngget.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngget.c index c1b113c..f7f5c67 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngget.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngget.c @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ png_get_asm_flags (png_structp png_ptr) /* this function was added to libpng 1.2.0 and should exist by default */ png_uint_32 PNGAPI -png_get_asm_flagtqmask (int flag_select) +png_get_asm_flagmask (int flag_select) { png_uint_32 settable_asm_flags = 0; @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ png_get_asm_flagtqmask (int flag_select) /* GRR: could add this: && defined(PNG_MMX_CODE_SUPPORTED) */ /* this function was added to libpng 1.2.0 */ png_uint_32 PNGAPI -png_get_mmx_flagtqmask (int flag_select, int *compilerID) +png_get_mmx_flagmask (int flag_select, int *compilerID) { png_uint_32 settable_mmx_flags = 0; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrtran.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrtran.c index 167215f..f5b5281 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrtran.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrtran.c @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ png_set_dither(png_structp png_ptr, png_colorp palette, * are not close reciprocals, otherwise it slows things down slightly, and * also needlessly introduces small errors. * - * We will turn off gamma transformation later if no semitranstqparent entries + * We will turn off gamma transformation later if no semitransparent entries * are present in the tRNS array for palette images. We can't do it here * because we don't necessarily have the tRNS chunk yet. */ @@ -550,9 +550,9 @@ png_set_expand(png_structp png_ptr) /* GRR 19990627: the following three functions currently are identical * to png_set_expand(). However, it is entirely reasonable that someone * might wish to expand an indexed image to RGB but *not* expand a single, - * fully transtqparent palette entry to a full alpha channel--perhaps instead + * fully transparent palette entry to a full alpha channel--perhaps instead * convert tRNS to the grayscale/RGB format (16-bit RGB value), or replace - * the transtqparent color with a particular RGB value, or drop tRNS entirely. + * the transparent color with a particular RGB value, or drop tRNS entirely. * IOW, a future version of the library may make the transformations flag * a bit more fine-grained, with separate bits for each of these three * functions. @@ -1227,12 +1227,12 @@ From Andreas Dilger e-mail to png-implement, 26 March 1998: In most cases, the "simple transparency" should be done prior to doing gray-to-RGB, or you will have to test 3x as many bytes to check if a - pixel is transtqparent. You would also need to make sure that the + pixel is transparent. You would also need to make sure that the transparency information is upgraded to RGB. To summarize, the current flow is: - Gray + simple transparency -> compare 1 or 2 gray bytes and composite - with background "in place" if transtqparent, + with background "in place" if transparent, convert to RGB if necessary - Gray + alpha -> composite with gray background and remove alpha bytes, convert to RGB if necessary @@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ From Andreas Dilger e-mail to png-implement, 26 March 1998: To support RGB backgrounds for gray images we need: - Gray + simple transparency -> convert to RGB + simple transparency, compare 3 or 6 bytes and composite with background - "in place" if transtqparent (3x compare/pixel + "in place" if transparent (3x compare/pixel compared to doing composite with gray bkgrnd) - Gray + alpha -> convert to RGB + alpha, composite with background and remove alpha bytes (3x float operations/pixel @@ -1546,13 +1546,13 @@ png_do_unshift(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, png_color_8p sig_bits) png_bytep bp = row; png_uint_32 i; png_uint_32 istop = row_info->rowbytes; - png_byte tqmask = (png_byte)((((int)0xf0 >> shift[0]) & (int)0xf0) | + png_byte mask = (png_byte)((((int)0xf0 >> shift[0]) & (int)0xf0) | (png_byte)((int)0xf >> shift[0])); for (i = 0; i < istop; i++) { *bp >>= shift[0]; - *bp++ &= tqmask; + *bp++ &= mask; } break; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrutil.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrutil.c index 95df6f2..751b278 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrutil.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngrutil.c @@ -2237,19 +2237,19 @@ png_check_chunk_name(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep chunk_name) /* Combines the row recently read in with the existing pixels in the row. This routine takes care of alpha and transparency if requested. This routine also handles the two methods of progressive display - of interlaced images, depending on the tqmask value. - The tqmask value describes which pixels are to be combined with + of interlaced images, depending on the mask value. + The mask value describes which pixels are to be combined with the row. The pattern always repeats every 8 pixels, so just 8 bits are needed. A one indicates the pixel is to be combined, a zero indicates the pixel is to be skipped. This is in addition to any alpha or transparency value associated with the pixel. If - you want all pixels to be combined, pass 0xff (255) in tqmask. */ + you want all pixels to be combined, pass 0xff (255) in mask. */ #ifndef PNG_HAVE_ASSEMBLER_COMBINE_ROW void /* PRIVATE */ -png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) +png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int mask) { png_debug(1,"in png_combine_row\n"); - if (tqmask == 0xff) + if (mask == 0xff) { png_memcpy(row, png_ptr->row_buf + 1, (png_size_t)((png_ptr->width * @@ -2288,7 +2288,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < row_width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { int value; @@ -2343,7 +2343,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < row_width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { value = (*sp >> shift) & 0x03; *dp &= (png_byte)((0x3f3f >> (6 - shift)) & 0xff); @@ -2394,7 +2394,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < row_width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { value = (*sp >> shift) & 0xf; *dp &= (png_byte)((0xf0f >> (4 - shift)) & 0xff); @@ -2428,7 +2428,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < row_width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { png_memcpy(dp, sp, pixel_bytes); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngset.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngset.c index 86805b1..e082798 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngset.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngset.c @@ -282,7 +282,7 @@ png_set_IHDR(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, * 1. Libpng was compiled with PNG_MNG_FEATURES_SUPPORTED and * 2. Libpng did not read a PNG signature (this filter_method is only * used in PNG datastreams that are embedded in MNG datastreams) and - * 3. The application called png_permit_mng_features with a tqmask that + * 3. The application called png_permit_mng_features with a mask that * included PNG_FLAG_MNG_FILTER_64 and * 4. The filter_method is 64 and * 5. The color_type is RGB or RGBA @@ -1097,10 +1097,10 @@ png_set_compression_buffer_size(png_structp png_ptr, png_uint_32 size) } void PNGAPI -png_set_invalid(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, int tqmask) +png_set_invalid(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info_ptr, int mask) { if (png_ptr && info_ptr) - info_ptr->valid &= ~(tqmask); + info_ptr->valid &= ~(mask); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngvcrd.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngvcrd.c index 53ddb87..1221a60 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngvcrd.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngvcrd.c @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ png_mmx_support(void) _asm _emit 0x0f //CPUID instruction _asm _emit 0xa2 - and edx, 0x00800000 //tqmask out all bits but mmx bit(24) + and edx, 0x00800000 //mask out all bits but mmx bit(24) cmp edx, 0 // 0 = mmx not supported jz NOT_SUPPORTED // non-zero = Yes, mmx IS supported @@ -94,19 +94,19 @@ NOT_SUPPORTED: /* Combines the row recently read in with the previous row. This routine takes care of alpha and transparency if requested. This routine also handles the two methods of progressive display - of interlaced images, depending on the tqmask value. - The tqmask value describes which pixels are to be combined with + of interlaced images, depending on the mask value. + The mask value describes which pixels are to be combined with the row. The pattern always repeats every 8 pixels, so just 8 bits are needed. A one indicates the pixel is to be combined; a zero indicates the pixel is to be skipped. This is in addition to any alpha or transparency value associated with the pixel. If - you want all pixels to be combined, pass 0xff (255) in tqmask. */ + you want all pixels to be combined, pass 0xff (255) in mask. */ /* Use this routine for x86 platform - uses faster MMX routine if machine supports MMX */ void /* PRIVATE */ -png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) +png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int mask) { #ifdef PNG_USE_LOCAL_ARRAYS const int png_pass_inc[7] = {8, 8, 4, 4, 2, 2, 1}; @@ -120,12 +120,12 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) png_mmx_support(); } - if (tqmask == 0xff) + if (mask == 0xff) { png_memcpy(row, png_ptr->row_buf + 1, (png_size_t)((png_ptr->width * png_ptr->row_info.pixel_depth + 7) >> 3)); } - /* GRR: add "else if (tqmask == 0)" case? + /* GRR: add "else if (mask == 0)" case? * or does png_combine_row() not even get called in that case? */ else { @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < png_ptr->width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { int value; @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < png_ptr->width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { value = (*sp >> shift) & 0x3; *dp &= (png_byte)((0x3f3f >> (6 - shift)) & 0xff); @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) for (i = 0; i < png_ptr->width; i++) { - if (m & tqmask) + if (m & mask) { value = (*sp >> shift) & 0xf; *dp &= (png_byte)((0xf0f >> (4 - shift)) & 0xff); @@ -303,9 +303,9 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) png_bytep dstptr; png_uint_32 len; int m; - int diff, untqmask; + int diff, unmask; - __int64 tqmask0=0x0102040810204080; + __int64 mask0=0x0102040810204080; if ((png_ptr->asm_flags & PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_COMBINE_ROW) /* && mmx_supported */ ) @@ -313,19 +313,19 @@ png_combine_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row, int tqmask) srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; m = 0x80; - untqmask = ~tqmask; + unmask = ~mask; len = png_ptr->width &~7; //reduce to multiple of 8 diff = png_ptr->width & 7; //amount lost _asm { - movd mm7, untqmask //load bit pattern + movd mm7, unmask //load bit pattern psubb mm6,mm6 //zero mm6 punpcklbw mm7,mm7 punpcklwd mm7,mm7 punpckldq mm7,mm7 //fill register with 8 masks - movq mm0,tqmask0 + movq mm0,mask0 pand mm0,mm7 //nonzero if keep byte pcmpeqb mm0,mm6 //zeros->1s, v versa @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ mainloop8end: cmp ecx,0 jz end8 - mov edx,tqmask + mov edx,mask sal edx,24 //make low byte the high byte secondloop8: @@ -404,9 +404,9 @@ end8: png_bytep srcptr; png_bytep dstptr; png_uint_32 len; - int untqmask, diff; - __int64 tqmask1=0x0101020204040808, - tqmask0=0x1010202040408080; + int unmask, diff; + __int64 mask1=0x0101020204040808, + mask0=0x1010202040408080; if ((png_ptr->asm_flags & PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_COMBINE_ROW) /* && mmx_supported */ ) @@ -414,19 +414,19 @@ end8: srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; - untqmask = ~tqmask; + unmask = ~mask; len = (png_ptr->width)&~7; diff = (png_ptr->width)&7; _asm { - movd mm7, untqmask //load bit pattern + movd mm7, unmask //load bit pattern psubb mm6,mm6 //zero mm6 punpcklbw mm7,mm7 punpcklwd mm7,mm7 punpckldq mm7,mm7 //fill register with 8 masks - movq mm0,tqmask0 - movq mm1,tqmask1 + movq mm0,mask0 + movq mm1,mask1 pand mm0,mm7 pand mm1,mm7 @@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ mainloop16end: cmp ecx,0 jz end16 - mov edx,tqmask + mov edx,mask sal edx,24 //make low byte the high byte secondloop16: sal edx,1 //move high bit to CF @@ -516,16 +516,16 @@ end16: png_bytep srcptr; png_bytep dstptr; png_uint_32 len; - int untqmask, diff; + int unmask, diff; - __int64 tqmask2=0x0101010202020404, //24bpp - tqmask1=0x0408080810101020, - tqmask0=0x2020404040808080; + __int64 mask2=0x0101010202020404, //24bpp + mask1=0x0408080810101020, + mask0=0x2020404040808080; srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; - untqmask = ~tqmask; + unmask = ~mask; len = (png_ptr->width)&~7; diff = (png_ptr->width)&7; @@ -534,15 +534,15 @@ end16: { _asm { - movd mm7, untqmask //load bit pattern + movd mm7, unmask //load bit pattern psubb mm6,mm6 //zero mm6 punpcklbw mm7,mm7 punpcklwd mm7,mm7 punpckldq mm7,mm7 //fill register with 8 masks - movq mm0,tqmask0 - movq mm1,tqmask1 - movq mm2,tqmask2 + movq mm0,mask0 + movq mm1,mask1 + movq mm2,mask2 pand mm0,mm7 pand mm1,mm7 @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ mainloop24end: cmp ecx,0 jz end24 - mov edx,tqmask + mov edx,mask sal edx,24 //make low byte the high byte secondloop24: sal edx,1 //move high bit to CF @@ -647,17 +647,17 @@ end24: png_bytep srcptr; png_bytep dstptr; png_uint_32 len; - int untqmask, diff; + int unmask, diff; - __int64 tqmask3=0x0101010102020202, //32bpp - tqmask2=0x0404040408080808, - tqmask1=0x1010101020202020, - tqmask0=0x4040404080808080; + __int64 mask3=0x0101010102020202, //32bpp + mask2=0x0404040408080808, + mask1=0x1010101020202020, + mask0=0x4040404080808080; srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; - untqmask = ~tqmask; + unmask = ~mask; len = (png_ptr->width)&~7; diff = (png_ptr->width)&7; @@ -666,16 +666,16 @@ end24: { _asm { - movd mm7, untqmask //load bit pattern + movd mm7, unmask //load bit pattern psubb mm6,mm6 //zero mm6 punpcklbw mm7,mm7 punpcklwd mm7,mm7 punpckldq mm7,mm7 //fill register with 8 masks - movq mm0,tqmask0 - movq mm1,tqmask1 - movq mm2,tqmask2 - movq mm3,tqmask3 + movq mm0,mask0 + movq mm1,mask1 + movq mm2,mask2 + movq mm3,mask3 pand mm0,mm7 pand mm1,mm7 @@ -738,7 +738,7 @@ mainloop32end: cmp ecx,0 jz end32 - mov edx,tqmask + mov edx,mask sal edx,24 //make low byte the high byte secondloop32: sal edx,1 //move high bit to CF @@ -787,14 +787,14 @@ end32: png_bytep srcptr; png_bytep dstptr; png_uint_32 len; - int untqmask, diff; + int unmask, diff; - __int64 tqmask5=0x0101010101010202, - tqmask4=0x0202020204040404, - tqmask3=0x0404080808080808, - tqmask2=0x1010101010102020, - tqmask1=0x2020202040404040, - tqmask0=0x4040808080808080; + __int64 mask5=0x0101010101010202, + mask4=0x0202020204040404, + mask3=0x0404080808080808, + mask2=0x1010101010102020, + mask1=0x2020202040404040, + mask0=0x4040808080808080; if ((png_ptr->asm_flags & PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_COMBINE_ROW) /* && mmx_supported */ ) @@ -802,23 +802,23 @@ end32: srcptr = png_ptr->row_buf + 1; dstptr = row; - untqmask = ~tqmask; + unmask = ~mask; len = (png_ptr->width)&~7; diff = (png_ptr->width)&7; _asm { - movd mm7, untqmask //load bit pattern + movd mm7, unmask //load bit pattern psubb mm6,mm6 //zero mm6 punpcklbw mm7,mm7 punpcklwd mm7,mm7 punpckldq mm7,mm7 //fill register with 8 masks - movq mm0,tqmask0 - movq mm1,tqmask1 - movq mm2,tqmask2 - movq mm3,tqmask3 - movq mm4,tqmask4 - movq mm5,tqmask5 + movq mm0,mask0 + movq mm1,mask1 + movq mm2,mask2 + movq mm3,mask3 + movq mm4,mask4 + movq mm5,mask5 pand mm0,mm7 pand mm1,mm7 @@ -895,7 +895,7 @@ mainloop48end: cmp ecx,0 jz end48 - mov edx,tqmask + mov edx,mask sal edx,24 //make low byte the high byte secondloop48: @@ -966,7 +966,7 @@ end48: break; } } /* end switch (png_ptr->row_info.pixel_depth) */ - } /* end if (non-trivial tqmask) */ + } /* end if (non-trivial mask) */ } /* end png_combine_row() */ @@ -1931,7 +1931,7 @@ davgrlp: mov diff, edi // take start of row add diff, ebx // add bpp add diff, 0xf // add 7 + 8 to incr past tqalignment boundary - and diff, 0xfffffff8 // tqmask to tqalignment boundary + and diff, 0xfffffff8 // mask to tqalignment boundary sub diff, edi // subtract from start ==> value ebx at tqalignment jz davggo // fix tqalignment @@ -1999,7 +1999,7 @@ davg3lp: paddb mm0, mm2 // add (Raw/2) + LBCarrys to Avg for each Active // byte // Add 2nd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to Average with LBCarry - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover bytes 3-5 + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 mask to cover bytes 3-5 movq mm2, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm2 psllq mm2, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly movq mm1, mm3 // now use mm1 for getting LBCarrys @@ -2013,7 +2013,7 @@ davg3lp: // byte // Add 3rd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to Average with LBCarry - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover the last two + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 mask to cover the last two // bytes movq mm2, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm2 psllq mm2, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly @@ -2060,7 +2060,7 @@ davg3lp: mov esi, prev_row // esi ==> Prior(x) movq mm6, mm7 movq mm5, LBCarryMask - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // Create tqmask for 2nd active group + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // Create mask for 2nd active group // PRIME the pump (load the first Raw(x-bpp) data set movq mm2, [edi + ebx - 8] // Load previous aligned 8 bytes // (we correct position in loop below) @@ -2144,7 +2144,7 @@ davg2lp: pand mm2, mm6 // Leave only Active Group 1 bytes to add to Avg paddb mm0, mm2 // add (Raw/2) + LBCarrys to Avg for each Active byte // Add 2nd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to Average with LBCarry - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover bytes 2 & 3 + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 mask to cover bytes 2 & 3 movq mm2, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm2 psllq mm2, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly movq mm1, mm3 // now use mm1 for getting LBCarrys @@ -2157,7 +2157,7 @@ davg2lp: paddb mm0, mm2 // add (Raw/2) + LBCarrys to Avg for each Active byte // Add rdd active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to Average with LBCarry - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover bytes 4 & 5 + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 mask to cover bytes 4 & 5 movq mm2, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm2 psllq mm2, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly // Data only needs to be shifted once here to @@ -2172,7 +2172,7 @@ davg2lp: paddb mm0, mm2 // add (Raw/2) + LBCarrys to Avg for each Active byte // Add 4th active group (Raw(x-bpp)/2) to Average with LBCarry - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 tqmask to cover bytes 6 & 7 + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // shift the mm6 mask to cover bytes 6 & 7 movq mm2, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm2 psllq mm2, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly // Data only needs to be shifted once here to @@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ dpthrlp: add diff, ebx // add bpp xor ecx, ecx add diff, 0xf // add 7 + 8 to incr past tqalignment boundary - and diff, 0xfffffff8 // tqmask to tqalignment boundary + and diff, 0xfffffff8 // mask to tqalignment boundary sub diff, edi // subtract from start ==> value ebx at tqalignment jz dpthgo // fix tqalignment @@ -2478,16 +2478,16 @@ dpth3lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 paddw mm6, mm5 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 psubw mm4, mm0 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 @@ -2496,9 +2496,9 @@ dpth3lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -2538,8 +2538,8 @@ dpth3lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 pand mm7, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm0 @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ dpth3lp: psubw mm5, mm0 psubw mm4, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 // test pa <= pb @@ -2555,9 +2555,9 @@ dpth3lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -2600,8 +2600,8 @@ dpth3lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 @@ -2609,7 +2609,7 @@ dpth3lp: psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 // test pa <= pb @@ -2617,9 +2617,9 @@ dpth3lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 pandn mm0, mm1 pandn mm7, mm4 @@ -2686,16 +2686,16 @@ dpth6lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 paddw mm6, mm5 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 psubw mm4, mm0 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 @@ -2704,9 +2704,9 @@ dpth6lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -2750,16 +2750,16 @@ dpth6lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 paddw mm6, mm5 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 psubw mm4, mm0 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 @@ -2768,9 +2768,9 @@ dpth6lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -2826,16 +2826,16 @@ dpth4lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 paddw mm6, mm5 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 psubw mm4, mm0 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 @@ -2844,9 +2844,9 @@ dpth4lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -2882,16 +2882,16 @@ dpth4lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 paddw mm6, mm5 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 psubw mm4, mm0 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 @@ -2900,9 +2900,9 @@ dpth4lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -2957,16 +2957,16 @@ dpth8lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 paddw mm6, mm5 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 psubw mm4, mm0 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 @@ -2975,9 +2975,9 @@ dpth8lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -3014,16 +3014,16 @@ dpth8lp: // pa = abs(p-a) = abs(pav) // pb = abs(p-b) = abs(pbv) // pc = abs(p-c) = abs(pcv) - pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create tqmask pav bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm4 // Create mask pav bytes < 0 paddw mm6, mm5 pand mm0, mm4 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 - pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create tqmask pbv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // Create mask pbv bytes < 0 psubw mm4, mm0 pand mm7, mm5 // Only pbv bytes < 0 in mm0 psubw mm4, mm0 psubw mm5, mm7 pxor mm0, mm0 - pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create tqmask pcv bytes < 0 + pcmpgtw mm0, mm6 // Create mask pcv bytes < 0 pand mm0, mm6 // Only pav bytes < 0 in mm7 psubw mm5, mm7 psubw mm6, mm0 @@ -3032,9 +3032,9 @@ dpth8lp: psubw mm6, mm0 pcmpgtw mm7, mm5 // pa > pb? movq mm0, mm7 - // use mm7 tqmask to merge pa & pb + // use mm7 mask to merge pa & pb pand mm5, mm7 - // use mm0 tqmask copy to merge a & b + // use mm0 mask copy to merge a & b pand mm2, mm0 pandn mm7, mm4 pandn mm0, mm1 @@ -3245,7 +3245,7 @@ png_read_filter_row_mmx_sub(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row) add diff, 0xf // add 7 + 8 to incr past // tqalignment boundary xor ebx, ebx - and diff, 0xfffffff8 // tqmask to tqalignment boundary + and diff, 0xfffffff8 // mask to tqalignment boundary sub diff, edi // subtract from start ==> value // ebx at tqalignment jz dsubgo @@ -3280,25 +3280,25 @@ dsubgo: add edi, bpp // rp = row + bpp movq mm6, mm7 mov ebx, diff - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // Move tqmask in mm6 to cover 3rd active + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // Move mask in mm6 to cover 3rd active // byte group // PRIME the pump (load the first Raw(x-bpp) data set movq mm1, [edi+ebx-8] dsub3lp: psrlq mm1, ShiftRem // Shift data for adding 1st bpp bytes - // no need for tqmask; shift clears inactive bytes + // no need for mask; shift clears inactive bytes // Add 1st active group movq mm0, [edi+ebx] paddb mm0, mm1 // Add 2nd active group movq mm1, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm1 psllq mm1, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly - pand mm1, mm7 // tqmask to use only 2nd active group + pand mm1, mm7 // mask to use only 2nd active group paddb mm0, mm1 // Add 3rd active group movq mm1, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm1 psllq mm1, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly - pand mm1, mm6 // tqmask to use only 3rd active group + pand mm1, mm6 // mask to use only 3rd active group add ebx, 8 paddb mm0, mm1 cmp ebx, MMXLength @@ -3359,13 +3359,13 @@ dsub1end: movq mm1, [edi+ebx-8] dsub4lp: psrlq mm1, ShiftRem // Shift data for adding 1st bpp bytes - // no need for tqmask; shift clears inactive bytes + // no need for mask; shift clears inactive bytes movq mm0, [edi+ebx] paddb mm0, mm1 // Add 2nd active group movq mm1, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm1 psllq mm1, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly - // there is no need for any tqmask + // there is no need for any mask // since shift clears inactive bits/bytes add ebx, 8 paddb mm0, mm1 @@ -3387,36 +3387,36 @@ dsub4lp: mov ebx, diff movq mm6, mm7 mov edi, row - psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // Move tqmask in mm6 to cover 3rd active + psllq mm6, ShiftBpp // Move mask in mm6 to cover 3rd active // byte group mov esi, edi // lp = row movq mm5, mm6 add edi, bpp // rp = row + bpp - psllq mm5, ShiftBpp // Move tqmask in mm5 to cover 4th active + psllq mm5, ShiftBpp // Move mask in mm5 to cover 4th active // byte group // PRIME the pump (load the first Raw(x-bpp) data set movq mm1, [edi+ebx-8] dsub2lp: // Add 1st active group psrlq mm1, ShiftRem // Shift data for adding 1st bpp bytes - // no need for tqmask; shift clears inactive + // no need for mask; shift clears inactive // bytes movq mm0, [edi+ebx] paddb mm0, mm1 // Add 2nd active group movq mm1, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm1 psllq mm1, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly - pand mm1, mm7 // tqmask to use only 2nd active group + pand mm1, mm7 // mask to use only 2nd active group paddb mm0, mm1 // Add 3rd active group movq mm1, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm1 psllq mm1, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly - pand mm1, mm6 // tqmask to use only 3rd active group + pand mm1, mm6 // mask to use only 3rd active group paddb mm0, mm1 // Add 4th active group movq mm1, mm0 // mov updated Raws to mm1 psllq mm1, ShiftBpp // shift data to position correctly - pand mm1, mm5 // tqmask to use only 4th active group + pand mm1, mm5 // mask to use only 4th active group add ebx, 8 paddb mm0, mm1 cmp ebx, MMXLength diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwrite.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwrite.c index a8a9365..eb84b99 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwrite.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwrite.c @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ png_write_row(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep row) * 1. Libpng was compiled with PNG_MNG_FEATURES_SUPPORTED and * 2. Libpng did not write a PNG signature (this filter_method is only * used in PNG datastreams that are embedded in MNG datastreams) and - * 3. The application called png_permit_mng_features with a tqmask that + * 3. The application called png_permit_mng_features with a mask that * included PNG_FLAG_MNG_FILTER_64 and * 4. The filter_method is 64 and * 5. The color_type is RGB or RGBA diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwtran.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwtran.c index 582c10d..c28da11 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwtran.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwtran.c @@ -98,31 +98,31 @@ png_do_pack(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, png_uint_32 bit_depth) case 1: { png_bytep sp, dp; - int tqmask, v; + int mask, v; png_uint_32 i; png_uint_32 row_width = row_info->width; sp = row; dp = row; - tqmask = 0x80; + mask = 0x80; v = 0; for (i = 0; i < row_width; i++) { if (*sp != 0) - v |= tqmask; + v |= mask; sp++; - if (tqmask > 1) - tqmask >>= 1; + if (mask > 1) + mask >>= 1; else { - tqmask = 0x80; + mask = 0x80; *dp = (png_byte)v; dp++; v = 0; } } - if (tqmask != 0x80) + if (mask != 0x80) *dp = (png_byte)v; break; } @@ -253,15 +253,15 @@ png_do_shift(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, png_color_8p bit_depth) { png_bytep bp = row; png_uint_32 i; - png_byte tqmask; + png_byte mask; png_uint_32 row_bytes = row_info->rowbytes; if (bit_depth->gray == 1 && row_info->bit_depth == 2) - tqmask = 0x55; + mask = 0x55; else if (row_info->bit_depth == 4 && bit_depth->gray == 3) - tqmask = 0x11; + mask = 0x11; else - tqmask = 0xff; + mask = 0xff; for (i = 0; i < row_bytes; i++, bp++) { @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ png_do_shift(png_row_infop row_info, png_bytep row, png_color_8p bit_depth) if (j > 0) *bp |= (png_byte)((v << j) & 0xff); else - *bp |= (png_byte)((v >> (-j)) & tqmask); + *bp |= (png_byte)((v >> (-j)) & mask); } } } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwutil.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwutil.c index edcf828..d640179 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwutil.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/pngwutil.c @@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ png_write_IHDR(png_structp png_ptr, png_uint_32 width, png_uint_32 height, * 1. Libpng was compiled with PNG_MNG_FEATURES_SUPPORTED and * 2. Libpng did not write a PNG signature (this filter_method is only * used in PNG datastreams that are embedded in MNG datastreams) and - * 3. The application called png_permit_mng_features with a tqmask that + * 3. The application called png_permit_mng_features with a mask that * included PNG_FLAG_MNG_FILTER_64 and * 4. The filter_method is 64 and * 5. The color_type is RGB or RGBA @@ -1007,7 +1007,7 @@ png_write_tRNS(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep trans, png_color_16p tran, { if (num_trans <= 0 || num_trans > (int)png_ptr->num_palette) { - png_warning(png_ptr,"Invalid number of transtqparent colors specified"); + png_warning(png_ptr,"Invalid number of transparent colors specified"); return; } /* write the chunk out as it is */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/projects/msvc/png32ms.def b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/projects/msvc/png32ms.def index ae6abdd..c995371 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/projects/msvc/png32ms.def +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/projects/msvc/png32ms.def @@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ EXPORTS png_permit_mng_features @184 ; MMX support png_mmx_support @185 - png_get_mmx_flagtqmask @186 - png_get_asm_flagtqmask @187 + png_get_mmx_flagmask @186 + png_get_asm_flagmask @187 png_get_asm_flags @188 png_get_mmx_bitdepth_threshold @189 png_get_mmx_rowbytes_threshold @190 diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngdef.pas b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngdef.pas index 2ac50c8..6e20683 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngdef.pas +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngdef.pas @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ procedure png_set_hIST(png_ptr: png_structp; info_ptr: png_infop; function png_set_interlace_handling(png_ptr: png_structp): int; stdcall; procedure png_set_invalid(png_ptr: png_structp; info_ptr:png_infop; - tqmask: int); + mask: int); stdcall; procedure png_set_invert_alpha(png_ptr: png_structp); stdcall; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngos2.def b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngos2.def index 8d3c68c..3c4a3c8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngos2.def +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/libpng/scripts/pngos2.def @@ -188,8 +188,8 @@ EXPORTS png_mmx_support png_permit_empty_plte png_permit_mng_features - png_get_mmx_flagtqmask - png_get_asm_flagtqmask + png_get_mmx_flagmask + png_get_asm_flagmask png_get_asm_flags png_get_mmx_bitdepth_threshold png_get_mmx_rowbytes_threshold diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgdef.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgdef.c index a01ca64..702e29b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgdef.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgdef.c @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ { FT_Error error; FT_UShort class, new_class, index; - FT_UShort byte, bits, tqmask; + FT_UShort byte, bits, mask; FT_UShort array_index, glyph_index, count; TTO_ClassRangeRecord* gcrr; @@ -1157,9 +1157,9 @@ if ( !class ) { bits = new_class << ( 16 - ( glyph_index % 4 + 1 ) * 4 ); - tqmask = ~( 0x000F << ( 16 - ( glyph_index % 4 + 1 ) * 4 ) ); + mask = ~( 0x000F << ( 16 - ( glyph_index % 4 + 1 ) * 4 ) ); - ngc[array_index][glyph_index / 4] &= tqmask; + ngc[array_index][glyph_index / 4] &= mask; ngc[array_index][glyph_index / 4] |= bits; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgpos.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgpos.c index fbf60b9..47d015c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgpos.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxgpos.c @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ /* There is a subtle difference in the specs between a `table' and a `record' -- offsets for tqdevice tables in ValueRecords are taken from - the tqparent table and not the tqparent record. */ + the parent table and not the parent record. */ static FT_Error Load_ValueRecord( TTO_ValueRecord* vr, FT_UShort format, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxopen.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxopen.c index f45e778..75f66be 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxopen.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/opentype/ftxopen.c @@ -1479,37 +1479,37 @@ | | byte 1 byte 2 - 00: (byte >> 14) & tqmask - 11: (byte >> 12) & tqmask + 00: (byte >> 14) & mask + 11: (byte >> 12) & mask ... - tqmask = 0x0003 + mask = 0x0003 | | format = 2: 0000111122223333|4444555566667777|... | | byte 1 byte 2 - 0000: (byte >> 12) & tqmask - 1111: (byte >> 8) & tqmask + 0000: (byte >> 12) & mask + 1111: (byte >> 8) & mask ... - tqmask = 0x000F + mask = 0x000F | | format = 3: 0000000011111111|2222222233333333|... | | byte 1 byte 2 - 00000000: (byte >> 8) & tqmask - 11111111: (byte >> 0) & tqmask + 00000000: (byte >> 8) & mask + 11111111: (byte >> 0) & mask .... - tqmask = 0x00FF */ + mask = 0x00FF */ FT_Error Get_Device( TTO_Device* d, FT_UShort size, FT_Short* value ) { - FT_UShort byte, bits, tqmask, f, s; + FT_UShort byte, bits, mask, f, s; f = d->DeltaFormat; @@ -1519,14 +1519,14 @@ s = size - d->StartSize; byte = d->DeltaValue[s >> ( 4 - f )]; bits = byte >> ( 16 - ( ( s % ( 1 << ( 4 - f ) ) + 1 ) << f ) ); - tqmask = 0xFFFF >> ( 16 - ( 1 << f ) ); + mask = 0xFFFF >> ( 16 - ( 1 << f ) ); - *value = (FT_Short)( bits & tqmask ); + *value = (FT_Short)( bits & mask ); /* conversion to a signed value */ - if ( *value >= ( ( tqmask + 1 ) >> 1 ) ) - *value -= tqmask + 1; + if ( *value >= ( ( mask + 1 ) >> 1 ) ) + *value -= mask + 1; return TT_Err_Ok; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree.c index c7143e0..3ff88f6 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree.c @@ -313,9 +313,9 @@ struct FreelistInfo { ** page to hold as many as two more cells than it might otherwise hold. ** The extra two entries in apCell[] are an allowance for this situation. ** -** The pParent field points back to the tqparent page. This allows us to +** The pParent field points back to the parent page. This allows us to ** walk up the BTree from any leaf to the root. Care must be taken to -** unref() the tqparent page pointer when this page is no longer referenced. +** unref() the parent page pointer when this page is no longer referenced. ** The pageDestructor() routine handles that chore. */ struct MemPage { @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ struct MemPage { u8 isInit; /* True if auxiliary data is initialized */ u8 idxShift; /* True if apCell[] indices have changed */ u8 isOverfull; /* Some apCell[] points outside u.aDisk[] */ - MemPage *pParent; /* The tqparent of this page. NULL for root */ + MemPage *pParent; /* The parent of this page. NULL for root */ int idxParent; /* Index in pParent->apCell[] of this node */ int nFree; /* Number of free bytes in u.aDisk[] */ int nCell; /* Number of entries on this page */ @@ -567,8 +567,8 @@ static void freeSpace(Btree *pBt, MemPage *pPage, int start, int size){ ** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block. ** ** The pParent parameter must be a pointer to the MemPage which -** is the tqparent of the page being initialized. The root of the -** BTree (usually page 2) has no tqparent and so for that page, +** is the parent of the page being initialized. The root of the +** BTree (usually page 2) has no parent and so for that page, ** pParent==NULL. ** ** Return STQLITE_OK on success. If we see that the page does @@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ static int moveToChild(BtCursor *pCur, int newPgno){ } /* -** Move the cursor up to the tqparent page. +** Move the cursor up to the parent page. ** ** pCur->idx is set to the cell index that contains the pointer ** to the page we are coming from. If we are coming from the @@ -1446,7 +1446,7 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){ }else{ /* The MemPage.idxShift flag indicates that cell indices might have ** changed since idxParent was set and hence idxParent might be out - ** of date. So recompute the tqparent cell index by scanning all cells + ** of date. So recompute the parent cell index by scanning all cells ** and locating the one that points to the child we just came from. */ int i; @@ -1993,9 +1993,9 @@ static void reparentPage(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno, MemPage *pNewParent,int idx){ } /* -** Retqparent all tqchildren of the given page to be the given page. +** Reparent all tqchildren of the given page to be the given page. ** In other words, for every child of pPage, invoke reparentPage() -** to make sure that each child knows that pPage is its tqparent. +** to make sure that each child knows that pPage is its parent. ** ** This routine gets called after you memcpy() one page into ** another. @@ -2136,7 +2136,7 @@ static void copyPage(MemPage *pTo, MemPage *pFrom){ ** of pPage so that all pages have about the same amount of free space. ** Usually one sibling on either side of pPage is used in the balancing, ** though both siblings might come from one side if pPage is the first -** or last child of its tqparent. If pPage has fewer than two siblings +** or last child of its parent. If pPage has fewer than two siblings ** (something which can only happen if pPage is the root page or a ** child of root) then all available siblings participate in the balancing. ** @@ -2163,16 +2163,16 @@ static void copyPage(MemPage *pTo, MemPage *pFrom){ ** if the page is overfull. Part of the job of this routine is to ** make sure all Cells for pPage once again fit in pPage->u.aDisk[]. ** -** In the course of balancing the siblings of pPage, the tqparent of pPage +** In the course of balancing the siblings of pPage, the parent of pPage ** might become overfull or underfull. If that happens, then this routine -** is called recursively on the tqparent. +** is called recursively on the parent. ** ** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database ** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should ** be rolled back. */ static int balance(Btree *pBt, MemPage *pPage, BtCursor *pCur){ - MemPage *pParent; /* The tqparent of pPage */ + MemPage *pParent; /* The parent of pPage */ int nCell; /* Number of cells in apCell[] */ int nOld; /* Number of pages in apOld[] */ int nNew; /* Number of pages in apNew[] */ @@ -2210,8 +2210,8 @@ static int balance(Btree *pBt, MemPage *pPage, BtCursor *pCur){ } /* - ** Find the tqparent of the page to be balanceed. - ** If there is no tqparent, it means this page is the root page and + ** Find the parent of the page to be balanceed. + ** If there is no parent, it means this page is the root page and ** special rules apply. */ pParent = pPage->pParent; @@ -2286,7 +2286,7 @@ static int balance(Btree *pBt, MemPage *pPage, BtCursor *pCur){ assert( pParent->isInit ); /* - ** Find the Cell in the tqparent page whose h.leftChild points back + ** Find the Cell in the parent page whose h.leftChild points back ** to pPage. The "idx" variable is the index of that cell. If pPage ** is the rightmost child of pParent then set idx to pParent->nCell */ @@ -2542,7 +2542,7 @@ static int balance(Btree *pBt, MemPage *pPage, BtCursor *pCur){ } /* - ** Retqparent tqchildren of all cells. + ** Reparent tqchildren of all cells. */ for(i=0; i<nNew; i++){ reparentChildPages(pBt, apNew[i]); @@ -2550,7 +2550,7 @@ static int balance(Btree *pBt, MemPage *pPage, BtCursor *pCur){ reparentChildPages(pBt, pParent); /* - ** balance the tqparent page. + ** balance the parent page. */ rc = balance(pBt, pParent, pCur); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree_rb.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree_rb.c index fd81df2..e952b7a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree_rb.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/btree_rb.c @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ struct BtRbNode { int nData; void *pData; u8 isBlack; /* true for a black node, 0 for a red node */ - BtRbNode *pParent; /* Nodes tqparent node, NULL for the tree head */ + BtRbNode *pParent; /* Nodes parent node, NULL for the tree head */ BtRbNode *pLeft; /* Nodes left child, or NULL */ BtRbNode *pRight; /* Nodes right child, or NULL */ @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ static void check_redblack_tree(BtRbTree * tree, char ** msg) { BtRbNode *pNode; - /* 0 -> came from tqparent + /* 0 -> came from parent * 1 -> came from left * 2 -> came from right */ int prev_step = 0; @@ -400,34 +400,34 @@ static void check_redblack_tree(BtRbTree * tree, char ** msg) /* * Node pX has just been inserted into pTree (by code in sqliteRbtreeInsert()). - * It is possible that pX is a red node with a red tqparent, which is a violation + * It is possible that pX is a red node with a red parent, which is a violation * of the red-black tree properties. This function performs rotations and * color changes to rebalance the tree */ static void do_insert_balancing(BtRbTree *pTree, BtRbNode *pX) { /* In the first iteration of this loop, pX points to the red node just - * inserted in the tree. If the tqparent of pX exists (pX is not the root + * inserted in the tree. If the parent of pX exists (pX is not the root * node) and is red, then the properties of the red-black tree are * violated. * * At the start of any subsequent iterations, pX points to a red node - * with a red tqparent. In all other respects the tree is a legal red-black + * with a red parent. In all other respects the tree is a legal red-black * binary tree. */ while( pX != pTree->pHead && !pX->pParent->isBlack ){ BtRbNode *pUncle; - BtRbNode *pGrandtqparent; + BtRbNode *pGrandparent; - /* Grandtqparent of pX must exist and must be black. */ - pGrandtqparent = pX->pParent->pParent; - assert( pGrandtqparent ); - assert( pGrandtqparent->isBlack ); + /* Grandparent of pX must exist and must be black. */ + pGrandparent = pX->pParent->pParent; + assert( pGrandparent ); + assert( pGrandparent->isBlack ); /* Uncle of pX may or may not exist. */ - if( pX->pParent == pGrandtqparent->pLeft ) - pUncle = pGrandtqparent->pRight; + if( pX->pParent == pGrandparent->pLeft ) + pUncle = pGrandparent->pRight; else - pUncle = pGrandtqparent->pLeft; + pUncle = pGrandparent->pLeft; /* If the uncle of pX exists and is red, we do the following: * | | @@ -438,16 +438,16 @@ static void do_insert_balancing(BtRbTree *pTree, BtRbNode *pX) * X(r) X(r) * * BEFORE AFTER - * pX is then set to G. If the tqparent of G is red, then the while loop + * pX is then set to G. If the parent of G is red, then the while loop * will run again. */ if( pUncle && !pUncle->isBlack ){ - pGrandtqparent->isBlack = 0; + pGrandparent->isBlack = 0; pUncle->isBlack = 1; pX->pParent->isBlack = 1; - pX = pGrandtqparent; + pX = pGrandparent; }else{ - if( pX->pParent == pGrandtqparent->pLeft ){ + if( pX->pParent == pGrandparent->pLeft ){ if( pX == pX->pParent->pRight ){ /* If pX is a right-child, do the following transform, essentially * to change pX into a left-child: @@ -474,10 +474,10 @@ static void do_insert_balancing(BtRbTree *pTree, BtRbNode *pX) * * BEFORE AFTER */ - assert( pGrandtqparent == pX->pParent->pParent ); - pGrandtqparent->isBlack = 0; + assert( pGrandparent == pX->pParent->pParent ); + pGrandparent->isBlack = 0; pX->pParent->isBlack = 1; - rightRotate( pTree, pGrandtqparent ); + rightRotate( pTree, pGrandparent ); }else{ /* This code is symetric to the illustrated case above. */ @@ -485,10 +485,10 @@ static void do_insert_balancing(BtRbTree *pTree, BtRbNode *pX) pX = pX->pParent; rightRotate(pTree, pX); } - assert( pGrandtqparent == pX->pParent->pParent ); - pGrandtqparent->isBlack = 0; + assert( pGrandparent == pX->pParent->pParent ); + pGrandparent->isBlack = 0; pX->pParent->isBlack = 1; - leftRotate( pTree, pGrandtqparent ); + leftRotate( pTree, pGrandparent ); } } } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/func.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/func.c index 8d78e12..529b169 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/func.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/func.c @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ static void minmaxFunc(sqlite_func *context, int argc, const char **argv){ const char *zBest; int i; int (*xCompare)(const char*, const char*); - int tqmask; /* 0 for min() or 0xffffffff for max() */ + int mask; /* 0 for min() or 0xffffffff for max() */ if( argc==0 ) return; - tqmask = (int)sqlite_user_data(context); + mask = (int)sqlite_user_data(context); zBest = argv[0]; if( zBest==0 ) return; if( argv[1][0]=='n' ){ @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ static void minmaxFunc(sqlite_func *context, int argc, const char **argv){ } for(i=2; i<argc; i+=2){ if( argv[i]==0 ) return; - if( (xCompare(argv[i], zBest)^tqmask)<0 ){ + if( (xCompare(argv[i], zBest)^mask)<0 ){ zBest = argv[i]; } } @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ struct MinMaxCtx { static void minmaxStep(sqlite_func *context, int argc, const char **argv){ MinMaxCtx *p; int (*xCompare)(const char*, const char*); - int tqmask; /* 0 for min() or 0xffffffff for max() */ + int mask; /* 0 for min() or 0xffffffff for max() */ assert( argc==2 ); if( argv[1][0]=='n' ){ @@ -522,10 +522,10 @@ static void minmaxStep(sqlite_func *context, int argc, const char **argv){ }else{ xCompare = strcmp; } - tqmask = (int)sqlite_user_data(context); + mask = (int)sqlite_user_data(context); p = sqlite_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*p)); if( p==0 || argc<1 || argv[0]==0 ) return; - if( p->z==0 || (xCompare(argv[0],p->z)^tqmask)<0 ){ + if( p->z==0 || (xCompare(argv[0],p->z)^mask)<0 ){ int len; if( !p->zBuf[0] ){ sqliteFree(p->z); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/parse.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/parse.c index 7ead48a..5ecb220 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/parse.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/parse.c @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ typedef union { IdList* yy320; ExprList* yy322; int yy372; - struct {int value; int tqmask;} yy407; + struct {int value; int mask;} yy407; int yy441; } YYMINORTYPE; #define YYSTACKDEPTH 100 @@ -2218,33 +2218,33 @@ static void yy_reduce( break; case 62: #line 207 "parse.y" -{ yygotominor.yy372 = (yymsp[-1].minor.yy372 & yymsp[0].minor.yy407.tqmask) | yymsp[0].minor.yy407.value; } +{ yygotominor.yy372 = (yymsp[-1].minor.yy372 & yymsp[0].minor.yy407.mask) | yymsp[0].minor.yy407.value; } #line 2222 "parse.c" break; case 63: #line 209 "parse.y" -{ yygotominor.yy407.value = 0; yygotominor.yy407.tqmask = 0x000000; } +{ yygotominor.yy407.value = 0; yygotominor.yy407.mask = 0x000000; } #line 2227 "parse.c" /* No destructor defined for MATCH */ /* No destructor defined for nm */ break; case 64: #line 210 "parse.y" -{ yygotominor.yy407.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy372; yygotominor.yy407.tqmask = 0x0000ff; } +{ yygotominor.yy407.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy372; yygotominor.yy407.mask = 0x0000ff; } #line 2234 "parse.c" /* No destructor defined for ON */ /* No destructor defined for DELETE */ break; case 65: #line 211 "parse.y" -{ yygotominor.yy407.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy372<<8; yygotominor.yy407.tqmask = 0x00ff00; } +{ yygotominor.yy407.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy372<<8; yygotominor.yy407.mask = 0x00ff00; } #line 2241 "parse.c" /* No destructor defined for ON */ /* No destructor defined for UPDATE */ break; case 66: #line 212 "parse.y" -{ yygotominor.yy407.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy372<<16; yygotominor.yy407.tqmask = 0xff0000; } +{ yygotominor.yy407.value = yymsp[0].minor.yy372<<16; yygotominor.yy407.mask = 0xff0000; } #line 2248 "parse.c" /* No destructor defined for ON */ /* No destructor defined for INSERT */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/pragma.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/pragma.c index 28f8390..6534766 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/pragma.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/pragma.c @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ static int getTempStore(char *z){ static int flagPragma(Parse *pParse, const char *zLeft, const char *zRight){ static const struct { const char *zName; /* Name of the pragma */ - int tqmask; /* Mask for the db->flags value */ + int mask; /* Mask for the db->flags value */ } aPragma[] = { { "vdbe_trace", STQLITE_VdbeTrace }, { "full_column_names", STQLITE_FullColNames }, @@ -108,13 +108,13 @@ static int flagPragma(Parse *pParse, const char *zLeft, const char *zRight){ if( strcmp(zLeft,zRight)==0 && (v = sqliteGetVdbe(pParse))!=0 ){ sqliteVdbeOp3(v, OP_ColumnName, 0, 1, aPragma[i].zName, P3_STATIC); sqliteVdbeOp3(v, OP_ColumnName, 1, 0, "boolean", P3_STATIC); - sqliteVdbeCode(v, OP_Integer, (db->flags & aPragma[i].tqmask)!=0, 0, + sqliteVdbeCode(v, OP_Integer, (db->flags & aPragma[i].mask)!=0, 0, OP_Callback, 1, 0, 0); }else if( getBoolean(zRight) ){ - db->flags |= aPragma[i].tqmask; + db->flags |= aPragma[i].mask; }else{ - db->flags &= ~aPragma[i].tqmask; + db->flags &= ~aPragma[i].mask; } return 1; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/select.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/select.c index 21416aa..d29c4a5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/select.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/select.c @@ -1618,7 +1618,7 @@ substExprList(ExprList *pList, int iTable, ExprList *pEList){ */ static int flattenSubquery( Parse *pParse, /* The parsing context */ - Select *p, /* The tqparent or outer SELECT statement */ + Select *p, /* The parent or outer SELECT statement */ int iFrom, /* Index in p->pSrc->a[] of the inner subquery */ int isAgg, /* True if outer SELECT uses aggregate functions */ int subqueryIsAgg /* True if the subquery uses aggregate functions */ @@ -1957,8 +1957,8 @@ static int simpleMinMaxQuery(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int eDest, int iParm){ ** ** The pParent, parentTab, and *pParentAgg fields are filled in if this ** SELECT is a subquery. This routine may try to combine this SELECT -** with its tqparent to form a single flat query. In so doing, it might -** change the tqparent query from a non-aggregate to an aggregate query. +** with its parent to form a single flat query. In so doing, it might +** change the parent query from a non-aggregate to an aggregate query. ** For that reason, the pParentAgg flag is passed as a pointer, so it ** can be changed. ** @@ -2198,7 +2198,7 @@ int sqliteSelect( isDistinct = p->isDistinct; } - /* Check to see if this is a subquery that can be "flattened" into its tqparent. + /* Check to see if this is a subquery that can be "flattened" into its parent. ** If flattening is a possiblity, do so and return immediately. */ if( pParent && pParentAgg && @@ -2379,7 +2379,7 @@ int sqliteSelect( } /* If this was a subquery, we have now converted the subquery into a - ** temporary table. So delete the subquery structure from the tqparent + ** temporary table. So delete the subquery structure from the parent ** to prevent this subquery from being evaluated again and to force the ** the use of the temporary table. */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/sqliteInt.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/sqliteInt.h index aea8271..3f713cd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/sqliteInt.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/sqliteInt.h @@ -1049,9 +1049,9 @@ struct TriggerStep { * * struct TriggerStack has a "pNext" member, to allow linked lists to be * constructed. When coding nested triggers (triggers fired by other triggers) - * each nested trigger stores its tqparent trigger's TriggerStack as the "pNext" + * each nested trigger stores its parent trigger's TriggerStack as the "pNext" * pointer. Once the nested trigger has been coded, the pNext value is restored - * to the pTriggerStack member of the Parse stucture and coding of the tqparent + * to the pTriggerStack member of the Parse stucture and coding of the parent * trigger continues. * * Before a nested trigger is coded, the linked list pointed to by the diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/where.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/where.c index 3ab7eca..c849d1c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/where.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/sqlite/where.c @@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ struct ExprInfo { ** p->pLeft is not the column of any table */ short int idxRight; /* p->pRight is a column in this table number. -1 if ** p->pRight is not the column of any table */ - unsigned prereqLeft; /* Bittqmask of tables referenced by p->pLeft */ - unsigned prereqRight; /* Bittqmask of tables referenced by p->pRight */ - unsigned prereqAll; /* Bittqmask of tables referenced by p */ + unsigned prereqLeft; /* Bitmask of tables referenced by p->pLeft */ + unsigned prereqRight; /* Bitmask of tables referenced by p->pRight */ + unsigned prereqAll; /* Bitmask of tables referenced by p */ }; /* @@ -81,12 +81,12 @@ static int exprSplit(int nSlot, ExprInfo *aSlot, Expr *pExpr){ } /* -** Initialize an expression tqmask set +** Initialize an expression mask set */ #define initMaskSet(P) memset(P, 0, sizeof(*P)) /* -** Return the bittqmask for the given cursor. Assign a new bittqmask +** Return the bitmask for the given cursor. Assign a new bitmask ** if this is the first time the cursor has been seen. */ static int getMask(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, int iCursor){ @@ -103,13 +103,13 @@ static int getMask(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, int iCursor){ } /* -** Destroy an expression tqmask set +** Destroy an expression mask set */ #define freeMaskSet(P) /* NO-OP */ /* ** This routine walks (recursively) an expression tree and generates -** a bittqmask indicating which tables are used in that expression +** a bitmask indicating which tables are used in that expression ** tree. ** ** In order for this routine to work, the calling function must have @@ -120,24 +120,24 @@ static int getMask(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, int iCursor){ ** the VDBE cursor number of the table. */ static int exprTableUsage(ExprMaskSet *pMaskSet, Expr *p){ - unsigned int tqmask = 0; + unsigned int mask = 0; if( p==0 ) return 0; if( p->op==TK_COLUMN ){ return getMask(pMaskSet, p->iTable); } if( p->pRight ){ - tqmask = exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pRight); + mask = exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pRight); } if( p->pLeft ){ - tqmask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pLeft); + mask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pLeft); } if( p->pList ){ int i; for(i=0; i<p->pList->nExpr; i++){ - tqmask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pList->a[i].pExpr); + mask |= exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, p->pList->a[i].pExpr); } } - return tqmask; + return mask; } /* @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqliteWhereBegin( int nExpr; /* Number of subexpressions in the WHERE clause */ int loopMask; /* One bit set for each outer loop */ int haveKey; /* True if KEY is on the stack */ - ExprMaskSet maskSet; /* The expression tqmask set */ + ExprMaskSet maskSet; /* The expression mask set */ int iDirectEq[32]; /* Term of the form ROWID==X for the N-th table */ int iDirectLt[32]; /* Term of the form ROWID<X or ROWID<=X */ int iDirectGt[32]; /* Term of the form ROWID>X or ROWID>=X */ @@ -417,16 +417,16 @@ WhereInfo *sqliteWhereBegin( if( pParse->trigStack ){ int x; if( (x = pParse->trigStack->newIdx) >= 0 ){ - int tqmask = ~getMask(&maskSet, x); - aExpr[i].prereqRight &= tqmask; - aExpr[i].prereqLeft &= tqmask; - aExpr[i].prereqAll &= tqmask; + int mask = ~getMask(&maskSet, x); + aExpr[i].prereqRight &= mask; + aExpr[i].prereqLeft &= mask; + aExpr[i].prereqAll &= mask; } if( (x = pParse->trigStack->oldIdx) >= 0 ){ - int tqmask = ~getMask(&maskSet, x); - aExpr[i].prereqRight &= tqmask; - aExpr[i].prereqLeft &= tqmask; - aExpr[i].prereqAll &= tqmask; + int mask = ~getMask(&maskSet, x); + aExpr[i].prereqRight &= mask; + aExpr[i].prereqLeft &= mask; + aExpr[i].prereqAll &= mask; } } } @@ -445,13 +445,13 @@ WhereInfo *sqliteWhereBegin( ** ** Actually, if there are more than 32 tables in the join, only the ** first 32 tables are candidates for indices. This is (again) due - ** to the limit of 32 bits in an integer bittqmask. + ** to the limit of 32 bits in an integer bitmask. */ loopMask = 0; for(i=0; i<pTabList->nSrc && i<ARRAYSIZE(iDirectEq); i++){ int j; int iCur = pTabList->a[i].iCursor; /* The cursor for this table */ - int tqmask = getMask(&maskSet, iCur); /* Cursor tqmask for this table */ + int mask = getMask(&maskSet, iCur); /* Cursor mask for this table */ Table *pTab = pTabList->a[i].pTab; Index *pIdx; Index *pBestIdx = 0; @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqliteWhereBegin( } } if( iDirectEq[i]>=0 ){ - loopMask |= tqmask; + loopMask |= mask; pWInfo->a[i].pIdx = 0; continue; } @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ WhereInfo *sqliteWhereBegin( pWInfo->a[i].pIdx = pBestIdx; pWInfo->a[i].score = bestScore; pWInfo->a[i].bRev = 0; - loopMask |= tqmask; + loopMask |= mask; if( pBestIdx ){ pWInfo->a[i].iCur = pParse->nTab++; pWInfo->peakNTab = pParse->nTab; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/ChangeLog b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/ChangeLog index 808c5f6..d60b6d3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/ChangeLog +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/ChangeLog @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ Changes in 1.1.0 (24 Feb 98) Changes in 1.0.9 (17 Feb 1998) - added gzputs and gzgets functions - do not clear eof flag in gzseek (Mark Diekhans) -- fix gzseek for files in transtqparent mode (Mark Diekhans) +- fix gzseek for files in transparent mode (Mark Diekhans) - do not assume that vsprintf returns the number of bytes written (Jens Krinke) - replace EXPORT with ZEXPORT to avoid conflict with other programs - added compress2 in zconf.h, zlib.def, zlib.dnt @@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ Changes in 0.61 (12 April 95) Changes in 0.6 (11 April 95) - added minigzip.c - added gzdopen to reopen a file descriptor as gzFile -- added transtqparent reading of non-gziped files in gzread. +- added transparent reading of non-gziped files in gzread. - fixed bug in gzread (don't read crc as data) - fixed bug in destroy (gzio.c) (don't return Z_STREAM_END for gzclose). - don't allocate big arrays in the stack (for MSDOS) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/deflate.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/deflate.c index 87d2da1..c7f75a3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/deflate.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/deflate.c @@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ local uInt longest_match(s, cur_match) * we prevent matches with the string of window index 0. */ Posf *prev = s->prev; - uInt wtqmask = s->w_mask; + uInt wmask = s->w_mask; #ifdef UNALIGNED_OK /* Compare two bytes at a time. Note: this is not always beneficial. @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ local uInt longest_match(s, cur_match) scan_end = scan[best_len]; #endif } - } while ((cur_match = prev[cur_match & wtqmask]) > limit + } while ((cur_match = prev[cur_match & wmask]) > limit && --chain_length != 0); if ((uInt)best_len <= s->lookahead) return (uInt)best_len; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/gzio.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/gzio.c index 4b56f31..03a4cc6 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/gzio.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/gzio.c @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ typedef struct gz_stream { uLong crc; /* crc32 of uncompressed data */ char *msg; /* error message */ char *path; /* path name for debugging only */ - int transtqparent; /* 1 if input file is not a .gz file */ + int transparent; /* 1 if input file is not a .gz file */ char mode; /* 'w' or 'r' */ z_off_t start; /* start of compressed data in file (header skipped) */ z_off_t in; /* bytes into deflate or inflate */ @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ local gzFile gz_open (path, mode, fd) s->back = EOF; s->crc = crc32(0L, Z_NULL, 0); s->msg = NULL; - s->transtqparent = 0; + s->transparent = 0; s->path = (char*)ALLOC(strlen(path)+1); if (s->path == NULL) { @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ local int get_byte(s) /* =========================================================================== Check the gzip header of a gz_stream opened for reading. Set the stream - mode to transtqparent if the gzip magic header is not present; set s->err + mode to transparent if the gzip magic header is not present; set s->err to Z_DATA_ERROR if the magic header is present but the rest of the header is incorrect. IN assertion: the stream s has already been created sucessfully; @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ local void check_header(s) s->stream.avail_in += len; s->stream.next_in = s->inbuf; if (s->stream.avail_in < 2) { - s->transtqparent = s->stream.avail_in; + s->transparent = s->stream.avail_in; return; } } @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ local void check_header(s) /* Peek ahead to check the gzip magic header */ if (s->stream.next_in[0] != gz_magic[0] || s->stream.next_in[1] != gz_magic[1]) { - s->transtqparent = 1; + s->transparent = 1; return; } s->stream.avail_in -= 2; @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ int TQ_ZEXPORT gzread (file, buf, len) while (s->stream.avail_out != 0) { - if (s->transtqparent) { + if (s->transparent) { /* Copy first the lookahead bytes: */ uInt n = s->stream.avail_in; if (n > s->stream.avail_out) n = s->stream.avail_out; @@ -811,7 +811,7 @@ z_off_t ZEXPORT gzseek (file, offset, whence) } if (offset < 0) return -1L; - if (s->transtqparent) { + if (s->transparent) { /* map to fseek */ s->back = EOF; s->stream.avail_in = 0; @@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ int ZEXPORT gzrewind (file) s->stream.avail_in = 0; s->stream.next_in = s->inbuf; s->crc = crc32(0L, Z_NULL, 0); - if (!s->transtqparent) (void)inflateReset(&s->stream); + if (!s->transparent) (void)inflateReset(&s->stream); s->in = 0; s->out = 0; return fseek(s->file, s->start, SEEK_SET); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/infback.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/infback.c index 8b2f431..262f97c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/infback.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/infback.c @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ void FAR *out_desc; unsigned copy; /* number of stored or match bytes to copy */ unsigned char FAR *from; /* where to copy match bytes from */ code this; /* current decoding table entry */ - code last; /* tqparent table entry */ + code last; /* parent table entry */ unsigned len; /* length to copy for repeats, bits to drop */ int ret; /* return code */ static const unsigned short order[19] = /* permutation of code lengths */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inffast.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inffast.c index 8f0930a..8c02a17 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inffast.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inffast.c @@ -82,8 +82,8 @@ unsigned start; /* inflate()'s starting value for strm->avail_out */ unsigned bits; /* local strm->bits */ code const FAR *lcode; /* local strm->lencode */ code const FAR *dcode; /* local strm->distcode */ - unsigned ltqmask; /* tqmask for first level of length codes */ - unsigned dtqmask; /* tqmask for first level of distance codes */ + unsigned lmask; /* mask for first level of length codes */ + unsigned dmask; /* mask for first level of distance codes */ code this; /* retrieved table entry */ unsigned op; /* code bits, operation, extra bits, or */ /* window position, window bytes to copy */ @@ -106,8 +106,8 @@ unsigned start; /* inflate()'s starting value for strm->avail_out */ bits = state->bits; lcode = state->lencode; dcode = state->distcode; - ltqmask = (1U << state->lenbits) - 1; - dtqmask = (1U << state->distbits) - 1; + lmask = (1U << state->lenbits) - 1; + dmask = (1U << state->distbits) - 1; /* decode literals and length/distances until end-of-block or not enough input data or output space */ @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ unsigned start; /* inflate()'s starting value for strm->avail_out */ hold += (unsigned long)(PUP(in)) << bits; bits += 8; } - this = lcode[hold & ltqmask]; + this = lcode[hold & lmask]; dolen: op = (unsigned)(this.bits); hold >>= op; @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ unsigned start; /* inflate()'s starting value for strm->avail_out */ hold += (unsigned long)(PUP(in)) << bits; bits += 8; } - this = dcode[hold & dtqmask]; + this = dcode[hold & dmask]; dodist: op = (unsigned)(this.bits); hold >>= op; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inflate.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inflate.c index 09a5e1e..c6d3826 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inflate.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inflate.c @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ int flush; unsigned copy; /* number of stored or match bytes to copy */ unsigned char FAR *from; /* where to copy match bytes from */ code this; /* current decoding table entry */ - code last; /* tqparent table entry */ + code last; /* parent table entry */ unsigned len; /* length to copy for repeats, bits to drop */ int ret; /* return code */ #ifdef GUNZIP diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inftrees.c b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inftrees.c index 0eb643c..509461d 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inftrees.c +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/3rdparty/zlib/inftrees.c @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ unsigned short FAR *work; unsigned incr; /* for incrementing code, index */ unsigned fill; /* index for replicating entries */ unsigned low; /* low bits for current root entry */ - unsigned tqmask; /* tqmask for low root bits */ + unsigned mask; /* mask for low root bits */ code this; /* table entry for duplication */ code FAR *next; /* next available space in table */ const unsigned short FAR *base; /* base value table to use */ @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ unsigned short FAR *work; drop = 0; /* current bits to drop from code for index */ low = (unsigned)(-1); /* trigger new sub-table when len > root */ used = 1U << root; /* use root table entries */ - tqmask = used - 1; /* tqmask for comparing low */ + mask = used - 1; /* mask for comparing low */ /* check available table space */ if (type == LENS && used >= ENOUGH - MAXD) @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ unsigned short FAR *work; } /* create new sub-table if needed */ - if (len > root && (huff & tqmask) != low) { + if (len > root && (huff & mask) != low) { /* if first time, transition to sub-tables */ if (drop == 0) drop = root; @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ unsigned short FAR *work; return 1; /* point entry in root table to sub-table */ - low = huff & tqmask; + low = huff & mask; (*table)[low].op = (unsigned char)curr; (*table)[low].bits = (unsigned char)root; (*table)[low].val = (unsigned short)(next - *table); @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ unsigned short FAR *work; this.val = (unsigned short)0; while (huff != 0) { /* when done with sub-table, drop back to root table */ - if (drop != 0 && (huff & tqmask) != low) { + if (drop != 0 && (huff & mask) != low) { drop = 0; len = root; next = *table; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.cpp index 8442e14..104ff60 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.cpp @@ -557,12 +557,12 @@ static int xPosToCursorPos( const TQString &s, const TQFontMetrics &fm, } /* - Constructs a new, empty, TQtMultiLineEdit with tqparent \a tqparent and + Constructs a new, empty, TQtMultiLineEdit with parent \a parent and called \a name. */ -TQtMultiLineEdit::TQtMultiLineEdit( TQWidget *tqparent , const char *name ) - :TQtTableView( tqparent, name, WStaticContents | WRepaintNoErase ) +TQtMultiLineEdit::TQtMultiLineEdit( TQWidget *parent , const char *name ) + :TQtTableView( parent, name, WStaticContents | WRepaintNoErase ) { d = new TQtMultiLineData; TQFontMetrics fm( font() ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.h index ef50a18..99604ed 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qtmultilineedit.h @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ class TQtMultiLineEdit : public TQtTableView Q_PROPERTY( int length READ length ) public: - TQtMultiLineEdit( TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQtMultiLineEdit( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); ~TQtMultiLineEdit(); TQString textLine( int line ) const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.cpp index 34499aa..d0005f0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.cpp @@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ public: void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ); }; -TQCornerSquare::TQCornerSquare( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQCornerSquare::TQCornerSquare( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { } @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ void TQCornerSquare::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ) /* - Constructs a table view. The \a tqparent, \a name and \f arguments + Constructs a table view. The \a parent, \a name and \f arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. The \link setTableFlags() table flags\endlink are all cleared (set to 0). @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ void TQCornerSquare::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ) */ -TQtTableView::TQtTableView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f ) +TQtTableView::TQtTableView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f ) { nRows = nCols = 0; // zero rows/cols xCellOffs = yCellOffs = 0; // zero offset diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.h index b8e7c56..68b1437 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/attic/qttableview.h @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ public: void tqrepaint( const TQRect &, bool erase=TRUE ); protected: - TQtTableView( TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char *name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQtTableView( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQtTableView(); int numRows() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp index a827602..7ce0e14 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.cpp @@ -618,14 +618,14 @@ void TQCanvas::init(int w, int h, int chunksze, int mxclusters) } /*! - Create a TQCanvas with no size. \a tqparent and \a name are passed to + Create a TQCanvas with no size. \a parent and \a name are passed to the TQObject superclass. \warning You \e must call resize() at some time after creation to be able to use the canvas. */ -TQCanvas::TQCanvas( TQObject* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQCanvas::TQCanvas( TQObject* parent, const char* name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { init(0,0); } @@ -2890,8 +2890,8 @@ void TQCanvasPixmap::init(const TQPixmap& pixmap, int hx, int hy) (TQPixmap&)*this = pixmap; hotx = hx; hoty = hy; - if( pixmap.tqmask() ) { - TQImage i = tqmask()->convertToImage(); + if( pixmap.mask() ) { + TQImage i = mask()->convertToImage(); collision_mask = new TQImage(i); } else collision_mask = 0; @@ -2955,7 +2955,7 @@ TQCanvasPixmap::~TQCanvasPixmap() image(). The number of pixmaps in the array is returned by count(). - TQCanvasSprite uses an image's tqmask for collision detection. You + TQCanvasSprite uses an image's mask for collision detection. You can change this by reading in a separate set of image masks using readCollisionMasks(). @@ -3101,13 +3101,13 @@ bool TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps( const TQString& filenamepattern, /*! Reads new collision masks for the array. - By default, TQCanvasSprite uses the image tqmask of a sprite to + By default, TQCanvasSprite uses the image mask of a sprite to detect collisions. Use this function to set your own collision image masks. If count() is 1 \a filename must specify a real filename to read - the tqmask from. If count() is greater than 1, the \a filename must - contain a "%1" that will get replaced by the number of the tqmask to + the mask from. If count() is greater than 1, the \a filename must + contain a "%1" that will get replaced by the number of the mask to be loaded, just like TQCanvasPixmapArray::readPixmaps(). All collision masks must be 1-bit images or this function call @@ -3356,7 +3356,7 @@ TQCanvasPixmap* TQCanvasSprite::imageAdvanced() const /*! Returns the bounding rectangle for the image in the sprite's current frame. This assumes that the images are tightly cropped - (i.e. do not have transtqparent pixels all along a side). + (i.e. do not have transparent pixels all along a side). */ TQRect TQCanvasSprite::boundingRect() const { @@ -3524,13 +3524,13 @@ void TQCanvasSprite::draw(TQPainter& painter) */ /*! - Constructs a TQCanvasView with tqparent \a tqparent, and name \a name, + Constructs a TQCanvasView with parent \a parent, and name \a name, using the widget flags \a f. The canvas view is not associated with a canvas, so you must to call setCanvas() to view a canvas. */ -TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView(TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f) : - TQScrollView(tqparent,name,(WFlags)(f|TQt::WResizeNoErase|TQt::WStaticContents)) +TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView(TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f) : + TQScrollView(parent,name,(WFlags)(f|TQt::WResizeNoErase|TQt::WStaticContents)) { d = new TQCanvasViewData; viewing = 0; @@ -3541,11 +3541,11 @@ TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView(TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f) : /*! \overload - Constructs a TQCanvasView which views canvas \a canvas, with tqparent - \a tqparent, and name \a name, using the widget flags \a f. + Constructs a TQCanvasView which views canvas \a canvas, with parent + \a parent, and name \a name, using the widget flags \a f. */ -TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView(TQCanvas* canvas, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f) : - TQScrollView(tqparent,name,(WFlags)(f|TQt::WResizeNoErase|TQt::WStaticContents)) +TQCanvasView::TQCanvasView(TQCanvas* canvas, TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f) : + TQScrollView(parent,name,(WFlags)(f|TQt::WResizeNoErase|TQt::WStaticContents)) { d = new TQCanvasViewData; viewing = 0; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h index 2aaba6e..49a2b20 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/canvas/tqcanvas.h @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_CANVAS TQCanvas : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQCanvas( TQObject* tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); + TQCanvas( TQObject* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); TQCanvas(int w, int h); TQCanvas( TQPixmap p, int h, int v, int tilewidth, int tileheight ); @@ -368,8 +368,8 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_CANVAS TQCanvasView : public TQScrollView TQ_OBJECT public: - TQCanvasView(TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0); - TQCanvasView(TQCanvas* viewing, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0); + TQCanvasView(TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0); + TQCanvasView(TQCanvas* viewing, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0); ~TQCanvasView(); TQCanvas* canvas() const diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp index be0d14c..af60fdc 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/codecs/tqbig5codec.cpp @@ -3846,7 +3846,7 @@ static int qt_Big5hkscsToUnicode(const uchar *s, uint *pwc) typedef struct { ushort index; /* index into big table */ - ushort used; /* bittqmask of used entries */ + ushort used; /* bitmask of used entries */ } Summary16; /* UCS4 to big5hkscs convert table */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp index cd13476..d99c63f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.cpp @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ #include "tqpopupmenu.h" #ifdef TQ_WS_MAC -TQRgb macGetRgba( TQRgb initial, bool *ok, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name ); -TQColor macGetColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ); +TQRgb macGetRgba( TQRgb initial, bool *ok, TQWidget *parent, const char* name ); +TQColor macGetColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ); #endif //////////// TQWellArray BEGIN @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ class TQWellArray : public TQGridView Q_PROPERTY( int selectedRow READ selectedRow ) public: - TQWellArray( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool popup = FALSE ); + TQWellArray( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool popup = FALSE ); ~TQWellArray() {} TQString cellContent( int row, int col ) const; @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ struct TQWellArrayData { \ingroup advanced */ -TQWellArray::TQWellArray( TQWidget *tqparent, const char * name, bool popup ) - : TQGridView( tqparent, name, +TQWellArray::TQWellArray( TQWidget *parent, const char * name, bool popup ) + : TQGridView( parent, name, (popup ? (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize|TQt::WStyle_Tool|TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) : (WFlags)0 ) ) { d = 0; @@ -517,8 +517,8 @@ static inline void rgb2hsv( TQRgb rgb, int&h, int&s, int&v ) class TQColorWell : public TQWellArray { public: - TQColorWell( TQWidget *tqparent, int r, int c, TQRgb *vals ) - :TQWellArray( tqparent, "" ), values( vals ), mousePressed( FALSE ), oldCurrent( -1, -1 ) + TQColorWell( TQWidget *parent, int r, int c, TQRgb *vals ) + :TQWellArray( parent, "" ), values( vals ), mousePressed( FALSE ), oldCurrent( -1, -1 ) { setNumRows(r), setNumCols(c); tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum) ); } protected: @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ class TQColorPicker : public TQFrame Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQColorPicker(TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); + TQColorPicker(TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); ~TQColorPicker(); public Q_SLOTS: @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ class TQColorLuminancePicker : public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQColorLuminancePicker(TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); + TQColorLuminancePicker(TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); ~TQColorLuminancePicker(); public Q_SLOTS: @@ -708,9 +708,9 @@ int TQColorLuminancePicker::val2y( int v ) return coff + (255-v)*d/255; } -TQColorLuminancePicker::TQColorLuminancePicker(TQWidget* tqparent, +TQColorLuminancePicker::TQColorLuminancePicker(TQWidget* parent, const char* name) - :TQWidget( tqparent, name ) + :TQWidget( parent, name ) { hue = 100; val = 100; sat = 100; pix = 0; @@ -800,8 +800,8 @@ int TQColorPicker::satPt( const TQPoint &pt ) void TQColorPicker::setCol( const TQPoint &pt ) { setCol( huePt(pt), satPt(pt) ); } -TQColorPicker::TQColorPicker(TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) +TQColorPicker::TQColorPicker(TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { hue = 0; sat = 0; setCol( 150, 255 ); @@ -879,8 +879,8 @@ class TQColIntValidator: public TQIntValidator { public: TQColIntValidator( int bottom, int top, - TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name = 0 ) - :TQIntValidator( bottom, top, TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) {} + TQWidget * parent, const char *name = 0 ) + :TQIntValidator( bottom, top, TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) {} TQValidator::State validate( TQString &, int & ) const; }; @@ -908,8 +908,8 @@ TQValidator::State TQColIntValidator::validate( TQString &s, int &pos ) const class TQColNumLineEdit : public TQLineEdit { public: - TQColNumLineEdit( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ) - : TQLineEdit( tqparent, name ) { setMaxLength( 3 );} + TQColNumLineEdit( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ) + : TQLineEdit( parent, name ) { setMaxLength( 3 );} TQSize tqsizeHint() const { return TQSize( fontMetrics().width( "999" ) + 2 * ( margin() + frameWidth() ), TQLineEdit::tqsizeHint().height() ); } @@ -930,7 +930,7 @@ class TQColorShower : public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQColorShower( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name=0 ); + TQColorShower( TQWidget *parent, const char *name=0 ); //things that don't emit Q_SIGNALS void setHsv( int h, int s, int v ); @@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ class TQColorShowLabel : public TQFrame TQ_OBJECT public: - TQColorShowLabel( TQWidget *tqparent ) : TQFrame( tqparent, "qt_colorshow_lbl" ) { + TQColorShowLabel( TQWidget *parent ) : TQFrame( parent, "qt_colorshow_lbl" ) { setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel|TQFrame::Sunken ); setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBackground ); setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); @@ -1075,8 +1075,8 @@ void TQColorShowLabel::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * ) mousePressed = FALSE; } -TQColorShower::TQColorShower( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - :TQWidget( tqparent, name) +TQColorShower::TQColorShower( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + :TQWidget( parent, name) { curCol = tqRgb( -1, -1, -1 ); TQColIntValidator *val256 = new TQColIntValidator( 0, 255, this ); @@ -1447,15 +1447,15 @@ void TQColorDialogPrivate::addCustom() */ /*! - Constructs a default color dialog with tqparent \a tqparent and called + Constructs a default color dialog with parent \a parent and called \a name. If \a modal is TRUE the dialog will be modal. Use setColor() to set an initial value. \sa getColor() */ -TQColorDialog::TQColorDialog(TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, bool modal) : - TQDialog(tqparent, name, modal, (WFlags)( TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_Title | +TQColorDialog::TQColorDialog(TQWidget* parent, const char* name, bool modal) : + TQDialog(parent, name, modal, (WFlags)( TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_Title | TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu ) ) { setSizeGripEnabled( FALSE ); @@ -1478,21 +1478,21 @@ TQColorDialog::TQColorDialog(TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, bool modal) : /*! Pops up a modal color dialog, lets the user choose a color, and returns that color. The color is initially set to \a initial. The - dialog is a child of \a tqparent and is called \a name. It returns + dialog is a child of \a parent and is called \a name. It returns an invalid (see TQColor::isValid()) color if the user cancels the dialog. All colors allocated by the dialog will be deallocated before this function returns. */ -TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) { #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) - return macGetColor(initial, tqparent, name); + return macGetColor(initial, parent, name); #endif int allocContext = TQColor::enterAllocContext(); - TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( tqparent, name, TRUE ); //modal + TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( parent, name, TRUE ); //modal #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg->setCaption( TQColorDialog::tr( "Select color" ) ); #endif @@ -1512,7 +1512,7 @@ TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *tqparent, /*! Pops up a modal color dialog to allow the user to choose a color and an alpha channel (transparency) value. The color+alpha is - initially set to \a initial. The dialog is a child of \a tqparent + initially set to \a initial. The dialog is a child of \a parent and called \a name. If \a ok is non-null, \e *\a ok is set to TRUE if the user clicked @@ -1522,14 +1522,14 @@ TQColor TQColorDialog::getColor( const TQColor& initial, TQWidget *tqparent, */ TQRgb TQColorDialog::getRgba( TQRgb initial, bool *ok, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name ) + TQWidget *parent, const char* name ) { #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) - return macGetRgba(initial, ok, tqparent, name); + return macGetRgba(initial, ok, parent, name); #endif int allocContext = TQColor::enterAllocContext(); - TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( tqparent, name, TRUE ); //modal + TQColorDialog *dlg = new TQColorDialog( parent, name, TRUE ); //modal TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h index 46f5bdc..eaffc37 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqcolordialog.h @@ -54,9 +54,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQColorDialog : public TQDialog TQ_OBJECT public: - static TQColor getColor( const TQColor& init = Qt::white, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + static TQColor getColor( const TQColor& init = Qt::white, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); static TQRgb getRgba( TQRgb, bool* ok = 0, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); static int customCount(); static TQRgb customColor( int ); @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ public: private: ~TQColorDialog(); - TQColorDialog( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE ); + TQColorDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE ); void setColor( const TQColor& ); TQColor color() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp index 31341ca..bbb0ad5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.cpp @@ -75,11 +75,11 @@ buttons\endlink. TQDialogs can also have a TQSizeGrip in their lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled(). - Note that TQDialog uses the tqparent widget slightly differently from + Note that TQDialog uses the parent widget slightly differently from other classes in TQt. A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if - it has a tqparent, its default location is centered on top of the - tqparent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will - also share the tqparent's taskbar entry. + it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the + parent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will + also share the parent's taskbar entry. \target modal \section1 Modal Dialogs @@ -234,11 +234,11 @@ public: }; /*! - Constructs a dialog called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs a dialog called \a name, with parent \a parent. - A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a tqparent, its - default location is centered on top of the tqparent. It will also - share the tqparent's taskbar entry. + A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its + default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also + share the parent's taskbar entry. The widget flags \a f are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. If, for example, you don't want a What's This button in the titlebar @@ -253,8 +253,8 @@ public: \sa TQWidget::setWFlags() TQt::WidgetFlags */ -TQDialog::TQDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, +TQDialog::TQDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags f ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, (WFlags)((modal ? (WFlags)(f|TQt::WShowModal) : f) | TQt::WType_Dialog )), rescode(0), did_move(0), has_relpos(0), did_resize(0), in_loop(0) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h index 972fc1d..8320704 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqdialog.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ friend class TQPushButton; Q_PROPERTY( bool modal READ isModal WRITE setModal ) public: - TQ_EXPLICIT TQDialog( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQ_EXPLICIT TQDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQDialog(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp index 86c50dc..3b5cf4b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.cpp @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ class TQErrorMessageTextView : public TQTextView { public: - TQErrorMessageTextView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQTextView( tqparent, name ) { } + TQErrorMessageTextView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQTextView( parent, name ) { } virtual TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const; virtual TQSize tqsizeHint() const; @@ -153,12 +153,12 @@ void jump( TQtMsgType t, const char * m ) /*! Constructs and installs an error handler window. - The tqparent \a tqparent and name \a name are passed on to the TQDialog + The parent \a parent and name \a name are passed on to the TQDialog constructor. */ -TQErrorMessage::TQErrorMessage( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name ) +TQErrorMessage::TQErrorMessage( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQDialog( parent, name ) { TQGridLayout * grid = new TQGridLayout( this, 3, 2, 11, 6 ); icon = new TQLabel( this, "qt_icon_lbl" ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.h index 6809ba4..8513c5e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqerrormessage.h @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQErrorMessage: public TQDialog { Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQErrorMessage( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQErrorMessage( TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 ); ~TQErrorMessage(); static TQErrorMessage * qtHandler(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp index 424ac7e..d2763bf 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.cpp @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ static void resolveLibs() class TQWindowsIconProvider : public TQFileIconProvider { public: - TQWindowsIconProvider( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQWindowsIconProvider( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); ~TQWindowsIconProvider(); const TQPixmap * pixmap( const TQFileInfo &fi ); @@ -629,8 +629,8 @@ class TQRenameEdit : public TQLineEdit TQ_OBJECT public: - TQRenameEdit( TQWidget *tqparent ) - : TQLineEdit( tqparent, "qt_rename_edit" ), doRenameAlreadyEmitted(FALSE) + TQRenameEdit( TQWidget *parent ) + : TQLineEdit( parent, "qt_rename_edit" ), doRenameAlreadyEmitted(FALSE) { connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(returnPressed()), TQT_SLOT(slotReturnPressed()) ); } @@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ class TQFileListBox : public TQListBox TQ_OBJECT private: - TQFileListBox( TQWidget *tqparent, TQFileDialog *d ); + TQFileListBox( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *d ); void clear(); void show(); @@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ class TQFileDialogTQFileListView : public TQListView TQ_OBJECT public: - TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *tqparent, TQFileDialog *d ); + TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *d ); void clear(); void startRename( bool check = TRUE ); @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ class TQFDProgressAnimation : public TQWidget TQ_OBJECT public: - TQFDProgressAnimation( TQWidget *tqparent ); + TQFDProgressAnimation( TQWidget *parent ); void start(); private Q_SLOTS: @@ -786,8 +786,8 @@ private: }; -TQFDProgressAnimation::TQFDProgressAnimation( TQWidget *tqparent ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, "qt_progressanimation" ) +TQFDProgressAnimation::TQFDProgressAnimation( TQWidget *parent ) + : TQWidget( parent, "qt_progressanimation" ) { setFixedSize( 300, 50 ); step = -1; @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ class TQFDProgressDialog : public TQDialog TQ_OBJECT public: - TQFDProgressDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &fn, int steps ); + TQFDProgressDialog( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &fn, int steps ); void setReadProgress( int p ); void setWriteProgress( int p ); @@ -863,8 +863,8 @@ private: }; -TQFDProgressDialog::TQFDProgressDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &fn, int steps ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, "", TRUE ) +TQFDProgressDialog::TQFDProgressDialog( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &fn, int steps ) + : TQDialog( parent, "", TRUE ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA setCaption( TQFileDialog::tr( "Copy or Move a File" ) ); @@ -955,16 +955,16 @@ public: struct File: public TQListViewItem { File( TQFileDialogPrivate * dlgp, - const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListViewItem * tqparent ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) + const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListViewItem * parent ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) { setup(); dlgp->last = this; } File( TQFileDialogPrivate * dlgp, - const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListView * tqparent ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) + const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListView * parent ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, dlgp->last ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) { setup(); dlgp->last = this; } File( TQFileDialogPrivate * dlgp, - const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, after ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) + const TQUrlInfo * fi, TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, after ), info( *fi ), d(dlgp), i( 0 ), hasMimePixmap( FALSE ) { setup(); if ( !nextSibling() ) dlgp->last = this; } ~File(); @@ -1171,8 +1171,8 @@ void TQRenameEdit::slotReturnPressed() * ************************************************************************/ -TQFileListBox::TQFileListBox( TQWidget *tqparent, TQFileDialog *dlg ) - : TQListBox( tqparent, "filelistbox" ), filedialog( dlg ), +TQFileListBox::TQFileListBox( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *dlg ) + : TQListBox( parent, "filelistbox" ), filedialog( dlg ), renaming( FALSE ), renameItem( 0 ), mousePressed( FALSE ), firstMousePressEvent( TRUE ) { @@ -1572,8 +1572,8 @@ void TQFileListBox::contentsMoved( int, int ) * ************************************************************************/ -TQFileDialogTQFileListView::TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *tqparent, TQFileDialog *dlg ) - : TQListView( tqparent, "qt_filedlg_listview" ), renaming( FALSE ), renameItem( 0 ), +TQFileDialogTQFileListView::TQFileDialogTQFileListView( TQWidget *parent, TQFileDialog *dlg ) + : TQListView( parent, "qt_filedlg_listview" ), renaming( FALSE ), renameItem( 0 ), filedialog( dlg ), mousePressed( FALSE ), firstMousePressEvent( TRUE ) { @@ -2189,7 +2189,7 @@ static TQStringList makeFiltersList( const TQString &filter ) In the above example, a modal TQFileDialog is created using a static function. The startup directory is set to "/home". The file filter - is set to "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)". The tqparent of the file dialog + is set to "Images (*.png *.xpm *.jpg)". The parent of the file dialog is set to \e this and it is given the identification name - "open file dialog". The caption at the top of file dialog is set to "Choose a file". If you want to use multiple filters, separate each one with @@ -2275,7 +2275,7 @@ static TQStringList makeFiltersList( const TQString &filter ) class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview { public: - Preview( TQWidget *tqparent=0 ) : TQLabel( tqparent ) {} + Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {} void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u ) { @@ -2386,13 +2386,13 @@ extern const char qt_file_dialog_filter_reg_exp[] = "([a-zA-Z0-9 ]*)\\(([a-zA-Z0-9_.*? +;#\\[\\]]*)\\)$"; /*! - Constructs a file dialog called \a name, with the tqparent, \a tqparent. + Constructs a file dialog called \a name, with the parent, \a parent. If \a modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless. */ -TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal, +TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, (modal ? (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder | TQt::WStyle_Title | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu) : (WFlags)0) ) { @@ -2406,7 +2406,7 @@ TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal ) /*! - Constructs a file dialog called \a name with the tqparent, \a tqparent. + Constructs a file dialog called \a name with the parent, \a parent. If \a modal is TRUE then the file dialog is modal; otherwise it is modeless. @@ -2418,8 +2418,8 @@ TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal ) */ TQFileDialog::TQFileDialog( const TQString& dirName, const TQString & filter, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal, + TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, (modal ? (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder | TQt::WStyle_Title | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu) : (WFlags)0) ) { @@ -2615,7 +2615,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::init() #endif d->goBack->setIconSet( *goBackIcon ); - d->cdToParent = new TQToolButton( this, "cd to tqparent" ); + d->cdToParent = new TQToolButton( this, "cd to parent" ); d->cdToParent->setFocusPolicy( Qt::TabFocus ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP TQToolTip::add( d->cdToParent, tr( "One directory up" ) ); @@ -2995,17 +2995,17 @@ void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter( int n ) /*! Sets the current filter selected in the file dialog to the first - one that contains the text \a tqmask. + one that contains the text \a mask. */ -void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter( const TQString& tqmask ) +void TQFileDialog::setSelectedFilter( const TQString& mask ) { int n; for ( n = 0; n < d->types->count(); n++ ) { - if ( d->types->text( n ).contains( tqmask, FALSE ) ) { + if ( d->types->text( n ).contains( mask, FALSE ) ) { d->types->setCurrentItem( n ); - TQString f = tqmask; + TQString f = mask; TQRegExp r( TQString::tqfromLatin1(qt_file_dialog_filter_reg_exp) ); int index = r.search( f ); if ( index >= 0 ) @@ -3423,8 +3423,8 @@ bool TQ_EXPORT qt_use_native_dialogs = TRUE; \endcode The function creates a modal file dialog called \a name, with - tqparent, \a tqparent. If a tqparent is not 0, the dialog will be shown - centered over the tqparent. + parent, \a parent. If a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown + centered over the parent. The file dialog's working directory will be set to \a startWith. If \a startWith includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter @@ -3439,8 +3439,8 @@ bool TQ_EXPORT qt_use_native_dialogs = TRUE; file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any - TQTimers and if tqparent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under - the tqparent's titlebar). + TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under + the parent's titlebar). Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, @@ -3453,7 +3453,7 @@ bool TQ_EXPORT qt_use_native_dialogs = TRUE; TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( const TQString & startWith, const TQString& filter, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name, + TQWidget *parent, const char* name, const TQString& caption, TQString *selectedFilter, bool resolveSymlinks ) @@ -3497,16 +3497,16 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( const TQString & startWith, #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( qt_use_native_dialogs && tqApp->tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle ) == WindowsStyle ) return winGetOpenFileName( initialSelection, filter, workingDirectory, - tqparent, name, caption, selectedFilter ); + parent, name, caption, selectedFilter ); #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) if (qt_use_native_dialogs && (tqApp->tqstyle().inherits(TQMAC_DEFAULT_STYLE) || tqApp->tqstyle().inherits("TQMacStyle"))) return qt_mac_precomposeFileName(macGetOpenFileNames(filter, startWith.isEmpty() ? 0 : workingDirectory, - tqparent, name, caption, selectedFilter, FALSE).first()); + parent, name, caption, selectedFilter, FALSE).first()); #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, tqparent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofn", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofn", TRUE ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -3540,9 +3540,9 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( const TQString & startWith, This is a convenience static function that will return a file name selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. - It creates a modal file dialog called \a name, with tqparent, \a tqparent. - If a tqparent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the - tqparent. + It creates a modal file dialog called \a name, with parent, \a parent. + If a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown centered over the + parent. \code TQString s = TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( @@ -3566,8 +3566,8 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( const TQString & startWith, file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any - TQTimers and if tqparent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under - the tqparent's titlebar. + TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under + the parent's titlebar. Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, @@ -3580,7 +3580,7 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getOpenFileName( const TQString & startWith, TQString TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( const TQString & startWith, const TQString& filter, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name, + TQWidget *parent, const char* name, const TQString& caption, TQString *selectedFilter, bool resolveSymlinks) @@ -3618,16 +3618,16 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getSaveFileName( const TQString & startWith, #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( qt_use_native_dialogs && tqApp->tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle ) == WindowsStyle ) return winGetSaveFileName( initialSelection, filter, workingDirectory, - tqparent, name, caption, selectedFilter ); + parent, name, caption, selectedFilter ); #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) if (qt_use_native_dialogs && (tqApp->tqstyle().inherits(TQMAC_DEFAULT_STYLE) || tqApp->tqstyle().inherits("TQMacStyle"))) return qt_mac_precomposeFileName(macGetSaveFileName(initialSelection, filter, - startWith.isEmpty() ? 0 : workingDirectory, tqparent, name, + startWith.isEmpty() ? 0 : workingDirectory, parent, name, caption, selectedFilter)); #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, tqparent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gsfn", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gsfn", TRUE ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -4461,8 +4461,8 @@ void TQFileDialog::createdDirectory( const TQUrlInfo &info, TQNetworkOperation * \endcode This function creates a modal file dialog called \a name, with - tqparent, \a tqparent. If tqparent is not 0, the dialog will be shown - centered over the tqparent. + parent, \a parent. If parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown + centered over the parent. The dialog's working directory is set to \a dir, and the caption is set to \a caption. Either of these may be TQString::null in which case @@ -4484,14 +4484,14 @@ void TQFileDialog::createdDirectory( const TQUrlInfo &info, TQNetworkOperation * file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any - TQTimers and if tqparent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under - the tqparent's titlebar). + TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under + the parent's titlebar). \sa getOpenFileName(), getOpenFileNames(), getSaveFileName() */ TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory( const TQString & dir, - TQWidget *tqparent, + TQWidget *parent, const char* name, const TQString& caption, bool dirOnly, @@ -4514,7 +4514,7 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory( const TQString & dir, } else initialDir = TQString::null; if ( qt_use_native_dialogs && tqApp->tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle ) == WindowsStyle && dirOnly ) - return winGetExistingDirectory( initialDir, tqparent, name, caption ); + return winGetExistingDirectory( initialDir, parent, name, caption ); #endif #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) TQString *initialDir = 0; @@ -4525,11 +4525,11 @@ TQString TQFileDialog::getExistingDirectory( const TQString & dir, } if( qt_use_native_dialogs && (tqApp->tqstyle().inherits(TQMAC_DEFAULT_STYLE) || tqApp->tqstyle().inherits("TQMacStyle"))) - return qt_mac_precomposeFileName(macGetOpenFileNames("", initialDir, tqparent, name, + return qt_mac_precomposeFileName(macGetOpenFileNames("", initialDir, parent, name, caption, 0, FALSE, TRUE).first()); #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( tqparent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_ged", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_ged", TRUE ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -4784,8 +4784,8 @@ TQFileDialog::PreviewMode TQFileDialog::previewMode() const The button \a b is placed underneath the Cancel pushbutton. \code - MyFileDialog::MyFileDialog( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) : - TQFileDialog( tqparent, name ) + MyFileDialog::MyFileDialog( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) : + TQFileDialog( parent, name ) { TQLabel* label = new TQLabel( "Added widgets", this ); TQLineEdit* lineedit = new TQLineEdit( this ); @@ -4972,11 +4972,11 @@ void TQFileDialog::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * ke ) /*! Constructs an empty file icon provider called \a name, with the - tqparent \a tqparent. + parent \a parent. */ -TQFileIconProvider::TQFileIconProvider( TQObject * tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQFileIconProvider::TQFileIconProvider( TQObject * parent, const char* name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { // nothing necessary } @@ -5081,8 +5081,8 @@ static void initPixmap( TQPixmap &pm ) } -TQWindowsIconProvider::TQWindowsIconProvider( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFileIconProvider( tqparent, name ) +TQWindowsIconProvider::TQWindowsIconProvider( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFileIconProvider( parent, name ) { pixw = GetSystemMetrics( SM_CXSMICON ); pixh = GetSystemMetrics( SM_CYSMICON ); @@ -5600,8 +5600,8 @@ void TQFileDialog::modeButtonsDestroyed() \endcode This function creates a modal file dialog called \a name, with - tqparent \a tqparent. If \a tqparent is not 0, the dialog will be shown - centered over the tqparent. + parent \a parent. If \a parent is not 0, the dialog will be shown + centered over the parent. The file dialog's working directory will be set to \a dir. If \a dir includes a file name, the file will be selected. The filter @@ -5616,8 +5616,8 @@ void TQFileDialog::modeButtonsDestroyed() file dialog and not a TQFileDialog, unless the style of the application is set to something other than the native style. (Note that on Windows the dialog will spin a blocking modal event loop that will not dispatch any - TQTimers and if tqparent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under - the tqparent's titlebar). + TQTimers and if parent is not 0 then it will position the dialog just under + the parent's titlebar). Under Unix/X11, the normal behavior of the file dialog is to resolve and follow symlinks. For example, if /usr/tmp is a symlink to /var/tmp, @@ -5641,7 +5641,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::modeButtonsDestroyed() TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames( const TQString & filter, const TQString& dir, - TQWidget *tqparent, + TQWidget *parent, const char* name, const TQString& caption, TQString *selectedFilter, @@ -5671,11 +5671,11 @@ TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames( const TQString & filter, #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( qt_use_native_dialogs && tqApp->tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle ) == WindowsStyle ) - return winGetOpenFileNames( filter, workingDirectory, tqparent, name, caption, selectedFilter ); + return winGetOpenFileNames( filter, workingDirectory, parent, name, caption, selectedFilter ); #elif defined(TQ_WS_MAC) if (qt_use_native_dialogs && (tqApp->tqstyle().inherits(TQMAC_DEFAULT_STYLE) || tqApp->tqstyle().inherits("TQMacStyle"))) { - TQStringList sl = macGetOpenFileNames(filter, dir.isEmpty() ? 0 : workingDirectory, tqparent, + TQStringList sl = macGetOpenFileNames(filter, dir.isEmpty() ? 0 : workingDirectory, parent, name, caption, selectedFilter); TQStringList::iterator it = sl.begin(); while (it != sl.end()) { @@ -5686,7 +5686,7 @@ TQStringList TQFileDialog::getOpenFileNames( const TQString & filter, } #endif - TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, tqparent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofns", TRUE ); + TQFileDialog *dlg = new TQFileDialog( *workingDirectory, TQString::null, parent, name ? name : "qt_filedlg_gofns", TRUE ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( dlg ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -6144,7 +6144,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setContentsPreviewEnabled( bool contents ) class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview { public: - Preview( TQWidget *tqparent=0 ) : TQLabel( tqparent ) {} + Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {} void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u ) { @@ -6204,7 +6204,7 @@ void TQFileDialog::setInfoPreview( TQWidget *w, TQFilePreview *preview ) class Preview : public TQLabel, public TQFilePreview { public: - Preview( TQWidget *tqparent=0 ) : TQLabel( tqparent ) {} + Preview( TQWidget *parent=0 ) : TQLabel( parent ) {} void previewUrl( const TQUrl &u ) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h index eef857e..4af0627 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfiledialog.h @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQFileIconProvider : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQFileIconProvider( TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); + TQFileIconProvider( TQObject * parent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); virtual const TQPixmap * pixmap( const TQFileInfo & ); private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= @@ -110,33 +110,33 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQFileDialog : public TQDialog public: TQFileDialog( const TQString& dirName, const TQString& filter = TQString::null, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); - TQFileDialog( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); + TQFileDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = FALSE ); ~TQFileDialog(); // recommended static functions static TQString getOpenFileName( const TQString &initially = TQString::null, const TQString &filter = TQString::null, - TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0, + TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); static TQString getSaveFileName( const TQString &initially = TQString::null, const TQString &filter = TQString::null, - TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0, + TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); static TQString getExistingDirectory( const TQString &dir = TQString::null, - TQWidget *tqparent = 0, + TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, bool dirOnly = TRUE, bool resolveSymlinks = TRUE); static TQStringList getOpenFileNames( const TQString &filter= TQString::null, const TQString &dir = TQString::null, - TQWidget *tqparent = 0, + TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString &caption = TQString::null, TQString *selectedFilter = 0, @@ -304,25 +304,25 @@ private: static TQString winGetOpenFileName( const TQString &initialSelection, const TQString &filter, TQString* workingDirectory, - TQWidget *tqparent = 0, + TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString& caption = TQString::null, TQString* selectedFilter = 0 ); static TQString winGetSaveFileName( const TQString &initialSelection, const TQString &filter, TQString* workingDirectory, - TQWidget *tqparent = 0, + TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString& caption = TQString::null, TQString* selectedFilter = 0 ); static TQStringList winGetOpenFileNames( const TQString &filter, TQString* workingDirectory, - TQWidget *tqparent = 0, + TQWidget *parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString& caption = TQString::null, TQString* selectedFilter = 0 ); static TQString winGetExistingDirectory( const TQString &initialDirectory, - TQWidget* tqparent = 0, + TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0, const TQString& caption = TQString::null); static TQString resolveLinkFile( const TQString& linkfile ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp index 5a10f04..deed5d5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.cpp @@ -146,15 +146,15 @@ public: Use setFont() to set the initial font attributes. - The \a tqparent, \a name, \a modal and \a f parameters are passed to + The \a parent, \a name, \a modal and \a f parameters are passed to the TQDialog constructor. \sa getFont() */ -TQFontDialog::TQFontDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, +TQFontDialog::TQFontDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags f ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal, f ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, f ) { setSizeGripEnabled( TRUE ); d = new TQFontDialogPrivate; @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ TQFontDialog::~TQFontDialog() If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the \a initial font is returned. - The dialog is called \a name, with the tqparent \a tqparent. + The dialog is called \a name, with the parent \a parent. \a initial is the initially selected font. If the \a ok parameter is not-null, \e *\a ok is set to TRUE if the user clicked OK, and set to FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. @@ -349,9 +349,9 @@ TQFontDialog::~TQFontDialog() used, and if they click Cancel the original font is used. */ TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont &initial, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name) + TQWidget *parent, const char* name) { - return getFont( ok, &initial, tqparent, name ); + return getFont( ok, &initial, parent, name ); } /*! @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont &initial, If the user clicks OK, the selected font is returned. If the user clicks Cancel, the TQt default font is returned. - The dialog is called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. + The dialog is called \a name, with parent \a parent. If the \a ok parameter is not-null, \e *\a ok is set to TRUE if the user clicked OK, and FALSE if the user clicked Cancel. @@ -382,19 +382,19 @@ TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont &initial, \endcode */ -TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, TQWidget *tqparent,const char* name) +TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, TQWidget *parent,const char* name) { - return getFont( ok, 0, tqparent, name ); + return getFont( ok, 0, parent, name ); } TQFont TQFontDialog::getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont *def, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name) + TQWidget *parent, const char* name) { TQFont result; if ( def ) result = *def; - TQFontDialog *dlg = new TQFontDialog( tqparent, name, TRUE ); + TQFontDialog *dlg = new TQFontDialog( parent, name, TRUE ); dlg->setFont( ( def ? *def : TQFont() ) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h index 2862fe5..6dc0b7f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqfontdialog.h @@ -69,14 +69,14 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQFontDialog: public TQDialog public: static TQFont getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont &def, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); - static TQFont getFont( bool *ok, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); + static TQFont getFont( bool *ok, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); private: static TQFont getFont( bool *ok, const TQFont *def, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); - TQFontDialog( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQFontDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQFontDialog(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp index 951826b..a9ae81f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.cpp @@ -116,17 +116,17 @@ public: /*! Constructs the dialog. The \a label is the text which is shown to the user - (it should tell the user what they are expected to enter). The \a tqparent - is the dialog's tqparent widget. The widget is called \a name. If \a + (it should tell the user what they are expected to enter). The \a parent + is the dialog's parent widget. The widget is called \a name. If \a modal is TRUE (the default) the dialog will be modal. The \a type parameter is used to specify which type of dialog to construct. \sa getText(), getInteger(), getDouble(), getItem() */ -TQInputDialog::TQInputDialog( const TQString &label, TQWidget* tqparent, +TQInputDialog::TQInputDialog( const TQString &label, TQWidget* parent, const char* name, bool modal, Type type ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal ) { d = new TQInputDialogPrivate; d->lineEdit = 0; @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ TQInputDialog::~TQInputDialog() placed in the line edit. The \a mode is the echo mode the line edit will use. If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The - dialog's tqparent is \a tqparent; the dialog is called \a name. The + dialog's parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. This function returns the text which has been entered in the line @@ -298,9 +298,9 @@ TQInputDialog::~TQInputDialog() TQString TQInputDialog::getText( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode, const TQString &text, - bool *ok, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) + bool *ok, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) { - TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, tqparent, + TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_gettext", TRUE, LineEdit ); @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getText( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, If \a ok is not-null *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's - tqparent is \a tqparent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will + parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. This function returns the integer which has been entered by the user. @@ -356,9 +356,9 @@ TQString TQInputDialog::getText( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, int TQInputDialog::getInteger( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, int value, int minValue, int maxValue, int step, bool *ok, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) { - TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, tqparent, + TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getint", TRUE, SpinBox ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ int TQInputDialog::getInteger( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's - tqparent is \a tqparent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will + parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. This function returns the floating point number which has been @@ -414,10 +414,10 @@ int TQInputDialog::getInteger( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, double TQInputDialog::getDouble( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, double value, double minValue, double maxValue, - int decimals, bool *ok, TQWidget *tqparent, + int decimals, bool *ok, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) { - TQInputDialog dlg( label, tqparent, + TQInputDialog dlg( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getdbl", TRUE, LineEdit ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg.setCaption( caption ); @@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ double TQInputDialog::getDouble( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, If \a ok is not-null \e *\a ok will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's - tqparent is \a tqparent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will + parent is \a parent; the dialog is called \a name. The dialog will be modal. This function returns the text of the current item, or if \a @@ -469,9 +469,9 @@ double TQInputDialog::getDouble( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, TQString TQInputDialog::getItem( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, const TQStringList &list, int current, bool editable, - bool *ok, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) + bool *ok, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) { - TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, tqparent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getitem", TRUE, editable ? EditableComboBox : ComboBox ); + TQInputDialog *dlg = new TQInputDialog( label, parent, name ? name : "qt_inputdlg_getitem", TRUE, editable ? EditableComboBox : ComboBox ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA dlg->setCaption( caption ); #endif diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h index 8b7be71..38aac9b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqinputdialog.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQInputDialog : public TQDialog private: enum Type { LineEdit, SpinBox, ComboBox, EditableComboBox }; - TQInputDialog( const TQString &label, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, + TQInputDialog( const TQString &label, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal = TRUE, Type type = LineEdit ); //### 4.0: widget flag! ~TQInputDialog(); @@ -76,16 +76,16 @@ private: public: //### 4.0: widget flag! static TQString getText( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode echo = TQLineEdit::Normal, - const TQString &text = TQString::null, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + const TQString &text = TQString::null, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); static int getInteger( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, - int step = 1, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + int step = 1, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); static double getDouble( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, - int decimals = 1, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + int decimals = 1, bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); static TQString getItem( const TQString &caption, const TQString &label, const TQStringList &list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, - bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + bool *ok = 0, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); private Q_SLOTS: void textChanged( const TQString &s ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp index 878a618..a31c218 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.cpp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ class TQMessageBoxLabel : public TQLabel { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQMessageBoxLabel( TQWidget* tqparent ) : TQLabel( tqparent, "messageBoxText") + TQMessageBoxLabel( TQWidget* parent ) : TQLabel( parent, "messageBoxText") { tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignAuto|TQt::ExpandTabs ); } @@ -1404,8 +1404,8 @@ static char * qtlogo_xpm[] = { struct TQMessageBoxData { - TQMessageBoxData(TQMessageBox* tqparent) : - iconLabel( tqparent, "icon" ) + TQMessageBoxData(TQMessageBox* parent) : + iconLabel( parent, "icon" ) { } @@ -1447,16 +1447,16 @@ const char * mb_texts[] = { Constructs a message box with no text and a button with the label "OK". - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQDialog + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. */ -TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, TRUE, (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder | TQt::WStyle_Title | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu) ) +TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, TRUE, (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder | TQt::WStyle_Title | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu) ) { init( Ok, 0, 0 ); } @@ -1514,14 +1514,14 @@ TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) // try again \endcode - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. If \a modal is TRUE the message box is modal; otherwise it is modeless. - The \a tqparent, \a name, \a modal, and \a f arguments are passed to + The \a parent, \a name, \a modal, and \a f arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. \sa setCaption(), setText(), setIcon() @@ -1530,9 +1530,9 @@ TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) TQMessageBox::TQMessageBox( const TQString& caption, const TQString &text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, + TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags f ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal, (WFlags)(f | (WFlags)WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder | TQt::WStyle_Title | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu) ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, (WFlags)(f | (WFlags)WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder | TQt::WStyle_Title | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu) ) { init( button0, button1, button2 ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA @@ -2076,20 +2076,20 @@ void TQMessageBox::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e ) Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.) of the button that was clicked. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. \sa question(), warning(), critical() */ -int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *tqparent, +int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *parent, const TQString& caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1, int button2 ) { TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Information, button0, button1, button2, - tqparent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, (WFlags)TQt::WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -2123,20 +2123,20 @@ int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *tqparent, Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Yes, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.) of the button that was clicked. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. \sa information(), warning(), critical() */ -int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *tqparent, +int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *parent, const TQString& caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1, int button2 ) { TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Question, button0, button1, button2, - tqparent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, (WFlags)TQt::WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -2171,20 +2171,20 @@ int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *tqparent, Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.) of the button that was clicked. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. \sa information(), question(), critical() */ -int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *tqparent, +int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *parent, const TQString& caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1, int button2 ) { TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Warning, button0, button1, button2, - tqparent, "qt_msgbox_warning", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_warning", TRUE, (WFlags)TQt::WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -2219,20 +2219,20 @@ int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *tqparent, Returns the identity (TQMessageBox::Ok, or TQMessageBox::No, etc.) of the button that was clicked. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. \sa information(), question(), warning() */ -int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *tqparent, +int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *parent, const TQString& caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1, int button2 ) { TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Critical, button0, button1, button2, - tqparent, "qt_msgbox_critical", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_critical", TRUE, (WFlags)TQt::WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); return mb->exec(); @@ -2241,12 +2241,12 @@ int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *tqparent, /*! Displays a simple about box with caption \a caption and text \a - text. The about box's tqparent is \a tqparent. + text. The about box's parent is \a parent. about() looks for a suitable icon in four locations: \list 1 - \i It prefers \link TQWidget::icon() tqparent->icon() \endlink if that exists. - \i If not, it tries the top-level widget containing \a tqparent. + \i It prefers \link TQWidget::icon() parent->icon() \endlink if that exists. + \i If not, it tries the top-level widget containing \a parent. \i If that fails, it tries the \link TQApplication::mainWidget() main widget. \endlink \i As a last resort it uses the Information icon. @@ -2257,21 +2257,21 @@ int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *tqparent, \sa TQWidget::icon() TQApplication::mainWidget() */ -void TQMessageBox::about( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, +void TQMessageBox::about( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text ) { TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, Information, Ok + Default, 0, 0, - tqparent, "qt_msgbox_simple_about_box", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_simple_about_box", TRUE, (WFlags)TQt::WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); #ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA - const TQPixmap *pm = tqparent ? tqparent->icon() : 0; + const TQPixmap *pm = parent ? parent->icon() : 0; if ( pm && !pm->isNull() ) mb->setIconPixmap( *pm ); else { - pm = tqparent ? tqparent->tqtopLevelWidget()->icon() : 0; + pm = parent ? parent->tqtopLevelWidget()->icon() : 0; if ( pm && !pm->isNull() ) mb->setIconPixmap( *pm ); else { @@ -2297,7 +2297,7 @@ void TQMessageBox::styleChanged( TQStyle& ) } -static int textBox( TQWidget *tqparent, TQMessageBox::Icon severity, +static int textBox( TQWidget *parent, TQMessageBox::Icon severity, const TQString& caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text, const TQString& button1Text, @@ -2320,7 +2320,7 @@ static int textBox( TQWidget *tqparent, TQMessageBox::Icon severity, TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( caption, text, severity, b[0], b[1], b[2], - tqparent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, + parent, "qt_msgbox_information", TRUE, (WFlags)TQt::WDestructiveClose); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); if ( button0Text.isEmpty() ) @@ -2358,9 +2358,9 @@ static int textBox( TQWidget *tqparent, TQMessageBox::Icon severity, supply 0, 1 or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking the relevant button. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape button is pressed then -1 will be returned. It is suggested that @@ -2369,7 +2369,7 @@ static int textBox( TQWidget *tqparent, TQMessageBox::Icon severity, \sa question(), warning(), critical() */ -int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, +int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text, const TQString& button1Text, @@ -2377,7 +2377,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, int defaultButtonNumber, int escapeButtonNumber ) { - return textBox( tqparent, Information, caption, text, + return textBox( parent, Information, caption, text, button0Text, button1Text, button2Text, defaultButtonNumber, escapeButtonNumber ); } @@ -2401,9 +2401,9 @@ int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, supply 0, 1 or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking the relevant button. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape button is pressed then -1 will be returned. It is suggested that @@ -2411,7 +2411,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::information( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, \sa information(), warning(), critical() */ -int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, +int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text, const TQString& button1Text, @@ -2419,7 +2419,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, int defaultButtonNumber, int escapeButtonNumber ) { - return textBox( tqparent, Question, caption, text, + return textBox( parent, Question, caption, text, button0Text, button1Text, button2Text, defaultButtonNumber, escapeButtonNumber ); } @@ -2444,9 +2444,9 @@ int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, supply 0, 1, or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking the relevant button. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. Note: If you do not specify an Escape button then if the Escape button is pressed then -1 will be returned. It is suggested that @@ -2455,7 +2455,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::question( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, \sa information(), question(), critical() */ -int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, +int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text, const TQString& button1Text, @@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, int defaultButtonNumber, int escapeButtonNumber ) { - return textBox( tqparent, Warning, caption, text, + return textBox( parent, Warning, caption, text, button0Text, button1Text, button2Text, defaultButtonNumber, escapeButtonNumber ); } @@ -2488,14 +2488,14 @@ int TQMessageBox::warning( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, supply 0, 1, or 2 to make pressing Escape equivalent to clicking the relevant button. - If \a tqparent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global - modal dialog box. If \a tqparent is a widget, the message box - becomes modal relative to \a tqparent. + If \a parent is 0, the message box becomes an application-global + modal dialog box. If \a parent is a widget, the message box + becomes modal relative to \a parent. \sa information(), question(), warning() */ -int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, +int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text, const TQString& button1Text, @@ -2503,7 +2503,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, int defaultButtonNumber, int escapeButtonNumber ) { - return textBox( tqparent, Critical, caption, text, + return textBox( parent, Critical, caption, text, button0Text, button1Text, button2Text, defaultButtonNumber, escapeButtonNumber ); } @@ -2511,7 +2511,7 @@ int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, /*! Displays a simple message box about TQt, with caption \a caption - and centered over \a tqparent (if \a tqparent is not 0). The message + and centered over \a parent (if \a parent is not 0). The message includes the version number of TQt being used by the application. This is useful for inclusion in the Help menu of an application. @@ -2522,9 +2522,9 @@ int TQMessageBox::critical( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, \sa TQApplication::aboutTQt() */ -void TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption ) +void TQMessageBox::aboutTQt( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption ) { - TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( tqparent, "qt_msgbox_about_qt" ); + TQMessageBox *mb = new TQMessageBox( parent, "qt_msgbox_about_qt" ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( mb ); mb->setWFlags( TQt::WDestructiveClose ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h index c567814..f9b0ac9 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqmessagebox.h @@ -65,10 +65,10 @@ public: enum Icon { NoIcon = 0, Information = 1, Warning = 2, Critical = 3, Question = 4 }; - TQMessageBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQMessageBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQMessageBox( const TQString& caption, const TQString &text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=TRUE, + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=TRUE, WFlags f=(WFlags)TQt::WStyle_DialogBorder ); ~TQMessageBox(); @@ -76,10 +76,10 @@ public: Retry = 6, Ignore = 7, YesAll = 8, NoAll = 9, ButtonMask = 0xff, Default = 0x100, Escape = 0x200, FlagMask = 0x300 }; - static int information( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int information( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1=0, int button2=0 ); - static int information( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int information( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString& button1Text = TQString::null, @@ -87,10 +87,10 @@ public: int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ); - static int question( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int question( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1=0, int button2=0 ); - static int question( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int question( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString& button1Text = TQString::null, @@ -98,10 +98,10 @@ public: int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ); - static int warning( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int warning( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1, int button2=0 ); - static int warning( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int warning( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString& button1Text = TQString::null, @@ -109,10 +109,10 @@ public: int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ); - static int critical( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int critical( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, int button0, int button1, int button2=0 ); - static int critical( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static int critical( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& button0Text = TQString::null, const TQString& button1Text = TQString::null, @@ -120,18 +120,18 @@ public: int defaultButtonNumber = 0, int escapeButtonNumber = -1 ); - static void about( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQString &caption, + static void about( TQWidget *parent, const TQString &caption, const TQString& text ); - static void aboutTQt( TQWidget *tqparent, + static void aboutTQt( TQWidget *parent, const TQString& caption=TQString::null ); /* OBSOLETE */ static int message( const TQString &caption, const TQString& text, const TQString& buttonText=TQString::null, - TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char * =0 ) { - return TQMessageBox::information( tqparent, caption, text, + TQWidget *parent=0, const char * =0 ) { + return TQMessageBox::information( parent, caption, text, buttonText.isEmpty() ? tqtr("OK") : buttonText ) == 0; } @@ -141,8 +141,8 @@ public: const TQString& text, const TQString& yesButtonText=TQString::null, const TQString& noButtonText=TQString::null, - TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char * = 0 ) { - return TQMessageBox::information( tqparent, caption, text, + TQWidget *parent=0, const char * = 0 ) { + return TQMessageBox::information( parent, caption, text, yesButtonText.isEmpty() ? tqtr("OK") : yesButtonText, noButtonText ) == 0; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp index d4f2472..2050c82 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.cpp @@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ class TQPrintDialogSpinBox : public TQSpinBox { public: - TQPrintDialogSpinBox(int min, int max, int steps, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name) - : TQSpinBox(min, max, steps, tqparent, name) + TQPrintDialogSpinBox(int min, int max, int steps, TQWidget *parent, const char *name) + : TQSpinBox(min, max, steps, parent, name) {} void interpretText() @@ -856,11 +856,11 @@ static void qpd_cleanup_globaldialog() /*! Constructs a new modal printer dialog that configures \a prn and is a - child of \a tqparent named \a name. + child of \a parent named \a name. */ -TQPrintDialog::TQPrintDialog( TQPrinter *prn, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, TRUE ) +TQPrintDialog::TQPrintDialog( TQPrinter *prn, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, TRUE ) { d = new TQPrintDialogPrivate; d->numCopies = 1; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h index b1d8014..48c89ef 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprintdialog.h @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQPrintDialog : public TQDialog Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQPrintDialog( TQPrinter *, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQPrintDialog( TQPrinter *, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQPrintDialog(); static bool getPrinterSetup( TQPrinter *, TQWidget* = 0 ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp index 74bf69f..6e5da3f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.cpp @@ -68,10 +68,10 @@ static const int spacing = 4; class TQProgressDialogData { public: - TQProgressDialogData( TQProgressDialog* that, TQWidget* tqparent, + TQProgressDialogData( TQProgressDialog* that, TQWidget* parent, const TQString& labelText, int totalSteps ) : - creator( tqparent ), + creator( parent ), label( new TQLabel(labelText,that,"label") ), cancel( 0 ), bar( new TQProgressBar(totalSteps,that,"bar") ), @@ -163,8 +163,8 @@ progress.setProgress( numFiles ); canceled() signal to a slot that stops the operation, and call \l setProgress() at intervals. For example: \code -Operation::Operation( TQObject *tqparent = 0 ) - : TQObject( tqparent ), steps( 0 ) +Operation::Operation( TQObject *parent = 0 ) + : TQObject( parent ), steps( 0 ) { pd = new TQProgressDialog( "Operation in progress.", "Cancel", 100 ); connect( pd, TQT_SIGNAL(canceled()), this, TQT_SLOT(cancel()) ); @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ TQProgressBar *TQProgressDialog::bar() const \i The total number of steps is 100. \endlist - The \a creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's tqparent. + The \a creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \a name, \a modal, and the widget flags, \a f, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \a modal is FALSE (the default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ TQProgressDialog::TQProgressDialog( TQWidget *creator, const char *name, processed call setProgress(1), setProgress(2), etc., finally calling setProgress(50) after examining the last file. - The \a creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's tqparent. + The \a creator argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \a name, \a modal, and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \a modal is FALSE (the default), you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h index 96ed191..6c5dbe7 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqprogressdialog.h @@ -67,10 +67,10 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQProgressDialog : public TQDialog Q_PROPERTY( TQString labelText READ labelText WRITE setLabelText ) public: - TQProgressDialog( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQProgressDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); TQProgressDialog( const TQString& labelText, const TQString &cancelButtonText, - int totalSteps, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, + int totalSteps, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQProgressDialog(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqsemimodal.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqsemimodal.h index fafa0af..d114b90 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqsemimodal.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqsemimodal.h @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSemiModal : public TQDialog Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSemiModal( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal, f ) { } + TQSemiModal( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, f ) { } private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= #if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp index 66b9a64..fd91293 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.cpp @@ -178,13 +178,13 @@ TQTabDialogPrivate::TQTabDialogPrivate() /*! Constructs a TQTabDialog with only an OK button. - The \a tqparent, \a name, \a modal and widget flag, \a f, arguments + The \a parent, \a name, \a modal and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed on to the TQDialog constructor. */ -TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal, +TQTabDialog::TQTabDialog( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags f ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal, f ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, f ) { d = new TQTabDialogPrivate; TQ_CHECK_PTR( d ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h index d485dfe..6e98d16 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqtabdialog.h @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTabDialog : public TQDialog Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQTabDialog( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQTabDialog( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQTabDialog(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp index 93c3173..4e3f592 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.cpp @@ -157,13 +157,13 @@ public: /*! - Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The \a tqparent, \a name, \a + Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The \a parent, \a name, \a modal and \a f arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. */ -TQWizard::TQWizard( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, bool modal, +TQWizard::TQWizard( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, bool modal, WFlags f ) - : TQDialog( tqparent, name, modal, f ) + : TQDialog( parent, name, modal, f ) { d = new TQWizardPrivate(); d->current = 0; // not quite true, but... diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h index 89f69f8..f3a5fad 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/dialogs/tqwizard.h @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQWizard : public TQDialog Q_PROPERTY( TQFont titleFont READ titleFont WRITE setTitleFont ) public: - TQWizard( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, + TQWizard( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, bool modal=FALSE, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQWizard(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.cpp index d1e1e14..586e5ff 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.cpp @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ static int cmpIconViewItems( const void *n1, const void *n2 ) class TQIconViewToolTip : public TQToolTip { public: - TQIconViewToolTip( TQWidget *tqparent, TQIconView *iv ); + TQIconViewToolTip( TQWidget *parent, TQIconView *iv ); void maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ); @@ -388,8 +388,8 @@ private: TQIconView *view; }; -TQIconViewToolTip::TQIconViewToolTip( TQWidget *tqparent, TQIconView *iv ) - : TQToolTip( tqparent ), view( iv ) +TQIconViewToolTip::TQIconViewToolTip( TQWidget *parent, TQIconView *iv ) + : TQToolTip( parent ), view( iv ) { } @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ class TQIconViewItemLineEdit : public TQTextEdit friend class TQIconViewItem; public: - TQIconViewItemLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *theItem, const char* name=0 ); + TQIconViewItemLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, TQIconViewItem *theItem, const char* name=0 ); protected: void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ); @@ -448,9 +448,9 @@ private: }; -TQIconViewItemLineEdit::TQIconViewItemLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQIconViewItemLineEdit::TQIconViewItemLineEdit( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, TQIconViewItem *theItem, const char *name ) - : TQTextEdit( tqparent, name ), item( theItem ), startText( text ) + : TQTextEdit( parent, name ), item( theItem ), startText( text ) { setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Plain | TQFrame::Box ); setLineWidth( 1 ); @@ -874,24 +874,24 @@ void TQIconDragData::setTextRect( const TQRect &r ) */ /*! - Constructs a TQIconViewItem and inserts it into icon view \a tqparent + Constructs a TQIconViewItem and inserts it into icon view \a parent with no text and a default icon. */ -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent ) - : view( tqparent ), itemText(), itemIcon( unknown_icon ) +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent ) + : view( parent ), itemText(), itemIcon( unknown_icon ) { init(); } /*! Constructs a TQIconViewItem and inserts it into the icon view \a - tqparent with no text and a default icon, after the icon view item + parent with no text and a default icon, after the icon view item \a after. */ -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after ) - : view( tqparent ), itemText(), itemIcon( unknown_icon ), +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after ) + : view( parent ), itemText(), itemIcon( unknown_icon ), prev( 0 ), next( 0 ) { init( after ); @@ -899,36 +899,36 @@ TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after ) /*! Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view \a - tqparent using \a text as the text and a default icon. + parent using \a text as the text and a default icon. */ -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, const TQString &text ) - : view( tqparent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( unknown_icon ) +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text ) + : view( parent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( unknown_icon ) { init( 0 ); } /*! Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view \a - tqparent using \a text as the text and a default icon, after the + parent using \a text as the text and a default icon, after the icon view item \a after. */ -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text ) - : view( tqparent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( unknown_icon ) + : view( parent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( unknown_icon ) { init( after ); } /*! Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view \a - tqparent using \a text as the text and \a icon as the icon. + parent using \a text as the text and \a icon as the icon. */ -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, const TQString &text, +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap &icon ) - : view( tqparent ), + : view( parent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( new TQPixmap( icon ) ) { init( 0 ); @@ -937,41 +937,41 @@ TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, const TQString &text, /*! Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view \a - tqparent using \a text as the text and \a icon as the icon, after + parent using \a text as the text and \a icon as the icon, after the icon view item \a after. \sa setPixmap() */ -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap &icon ) - : view( tqparent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( new TQPixmap( icon ) ) + : view( parent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( new TQPixmap( icon ) ) { init( after ); } /*! Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view \a - tqparent using \a text as the text and \a picture as the icon. + parent using \a text as the text and \a picture as the icon. */ #ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, const TQString &text, +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPicture &picture ) - : view( tqparent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( 0 ) + : view( parent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( 0 ) { init( 0, new TQPicture( picture ) ); } /*! Constructs an icon view item and inserts it into the icon view \a - tqparent using \a text as the text and \a picture as the icon, after + parent using \a text as the text and \a picture as the icon, after the icon view item \a after. */ -TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, +TQIconViewItem::TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text, const TQPicture &picture ) - : view( tqparent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( 0 ) + : view( parent ), itemText( text ), itemIcon( 0 ) { init( after, new TQPicture( picture ) ); } @@ -1015,7 +1015,7 @@ void TQIconViewItem::init( TQIconViewItem *after } /*! - Destroys the icon view item and tells the tqparent icon view that + Destroys the icon view item and tells the parent icon view that the item has been destroyed. */ @@ -1400,7 +1400,7 @@ bool TQIconViewItem::dropEnabled() const } /*! - Returns a pointer to this item's icon view tqparent. + Returns a pointer to this item's icon view parent. */ TQIconView *TQIconViewItem::iconView() const @@ -2066,13 +2066,13 @@ void TQIconViewItem::paintItem( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg ) TQPixmap *pix = pixmap() ? pixmap() : unknown_icon; if ( pix && !pix->isNull() ) { TQPixmap *buffer = get_qiv_buffer_pixmap( pix->size() ); - TQBitmap tqmask = view->tqmask( pix ); + TQBitmap mask = view->mask( pix ); TQPainter p2( buffer ); p2.fillRect( pix->rect(), white ); p2.drawPixmap( 0, 0, *pix ); p2.end(); - buffer->setMask( tqmask ); + buffer->setMask( mask ); p2.begin( buffer ); #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) p2.fillRect( pix->rect(), TQBrush( cg.highlight(), Qt::Dense4Pattern) ); @@ -2317,7 +2317,7 @@ void TQIconViewItem::checkRect() The simplest way to create a TQIconView is to create a TQIconView object and create some TQIconViewItems with the TQIconView as their - tqparent, set the icon view's tqgeometry and show it. + parent, set the icon view's tqgeometry and show it. For example: \code TQIconView *iv = new TQIconView( this ); @@ -2768,12 +2768,12 @@ void TQIconViewItem::checkRect() */ /*! - Constructs an empty icon view called \a name, with tqparent \a - tqparent and using the widget flags \a f. + Constructs an empty icon view called \a name, with parent \a + parent and using the widget flags \a f. */ -TQIconView::TQIconView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase | f) ) +TQIconView::TQIconView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase | f) ) { if ( !unknown_icon ) { unknown_icon = new TQPixmap( (const char **)unknown_xpm ); @@ -6439,7 +6439,7 @@ void TQIconView::handleItemChange( TQIconViewItem *old, bool shift, } } -TQBitmap TQIconView::tqmask( TQPixmap *pix ) const +TQBitmap TQIconView::mask( TQPixmap *pix ) const { TQPixmap m; if ( d->maskCache.find( TQT_TQSTRING(TQString::number( pix->serialNumber() )), m ) ) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.h index 2ef7472..2cbd9a3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/iconview/tqiconview.h @@ -130,15 +130,15 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_ICONVIEW TQIconViewItem : public TQt friend class TQIconViewItemLineEdit; public: - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent ); - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after ); - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, const TQString &text ); - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text ); - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap &icon ); - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap &icon ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap &icon ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap &icon ); #ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, const TQString &text, const TQPicture &picture ); - TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *tqparent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text, const TQPicture &picture ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPicture &picture ); + TQIconViewItem( TQIconView *parent, TQIconViewItem *after, const TQString &text, const TQPicture &picture ); #endif virtual ~TQIconViewItem(); @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ public: Right }; - TQIconView( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQIconView( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); virtual ~TQIconView(); virtual void insertItem( TQIconViewItem *item, TQIconViewItem *after = 0L ); @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ private: bool neighbourItem( Direction dir, const TQPoint &relativeTo, const TQIconViewItem *item ) const; - TQBitmap tqmask( TQPixmap *pix ) const; + TQBitmap mask( TQPixmap *pix ) const; TQIconViewPrivate *d; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/qpsprinter.ps b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/qpsprinter.ps index 9ea2dc0..5275016 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/qpsprinter.ps +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/qpsprinter.ps @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ /Cx 0 d % current x position /Cy 0 d % current y position /WFi false d % winding fill -/OMo false d % opaque mode (not transtqparent) +/OMo false d % opaque mode (not transparent) /BCol [ 1 1 1 ] d % brush color /PCol [ 0 0 0 ] d % pen color @@ -252,13 +252,13 @@ % general image drawing routine, used from the postscript driver % -% Draws images with and without tqmask with 1, 8 and 24(rgb) bits depth. +% Draws images with and without mask with 1, 8 and 24(rgb) bits depth. % -% width height matrix image 1|8|24 tqmask|false x y di +% width height matrix image 1|8|24 mask|false x y di % % width and height specify the width/height of the image, % matrix a transformation matrix, image a procedure holding the image data -% (same for tqmask) and x/y an additional translation. +% (same for mask) and x/y an additional translation. % % ### should move the translation into the matrix!!! /di @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ gsave translate 1 index 1 eq { % bitmap - false eq { % no tqmask, draw solid background + false eq { % no mask, draw solid background pop true 3 1 roll % width height false matrix image 4 index @@ -274,17 +274,17 @@ false 4 index 4 index - imagetqmask + imagemask BkCol SC - imagetqmask + imagemask } { pop false 3 1 roll % width height false matrix image - imagetqmask + imagemask } ifelse } { dup false ne { - % have a tqmask, see if we can use it + % have a mask, see if we can use it /languagelevel where { pop languagelevel 3 ge @@ -294,9 +294,9 @@ } ifelse { - % languagelevel3, we can use image tqmask and dicts + % languagelevel3, we can use image mask and dicts - % store the image tqmask + % store the image mask /ma exch d % select colorspace according to 8|24 bit depth and set the decode array /dc 8 eq { @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ /BitsPerComponent 8 d /Decode dc d end d - % the tqmask dictionary + % the mask dictionary /md 7 dict dup begin /ImageType 1 d @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ end image } { - pop % no tqmask or can't use it, get rid of it + pop % no mask or can't use it, get rid of it 8 % width height image 8|24 8 matrix 4 1 roll 8 eq { % grayscale diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp index 6954cb3..6be7f97 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqabstractlayout.cpp @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ bool TQWidgetItem::isEmpty() const /*! Constructs a new top-level TQLayout called \a name, with main - widget \a tqparent. \a tqparent may not be 0. + widget \a parent. \a parent may not be 0. The \a margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the widget and the managed tqchildren. The \a spacing sets the value of @@ -756,20 +756,20 @@ bool TQWidgetItem::isEmpty() const There can be only one top-level tqlayout for a widget. It is returned by TQWidget::tqlayout() */ -TQLayout::TQLayout( QWidget *tqparent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQLayout::TQLayout( QWidget *parent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { init(); - if ( tqparent ) { - if ( tqparent->tqlayout() ) { + if ( parent ) { + if ( parent->tqlayout() ) { qWarning( "TQLayout \"%s\" added to %s \"%s\", which already has a" - " tqlayout", TQObject::name(), tqparent->className(), - tqparent->name() ); - tqparent->removeChild( this ); + " tqlayout", TQObject::name(), parent->className(), + parent->name() ); + parent->removeChild( this ); } else { topLevel = TRUE; - tqparent->installEventFilter( this ); - setWidgetLayout( tqparent, this ); + parent->installEventFilter( this ); + setWidgetLayout( parent, this ); } } outsideBorder = margin; @@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ TQLayout::TQLayout( QLayout *parentLayout, int spacing, const char *name ) /*! Constructs a new child TQLayout called \a name. If \a spacing is - -1, this TQLayout inherits its tqparent's spacing(); otherwise the + -1, this TQLayout inherits its parent's spacing(); otherwise the value of \a spacing is used. This tqlayout has to be inserted into another tqlayout before tqgeometry @@ -920,22 +920,22 @@ void TQLayout::setSpacing( int spacing ) } /*! - Returns the main widget (tqparent widget) of this tqlayout, or 0 if + Returns the main widget (parent widget) of this tqlayout, or 0 if this tqlayout is a sub-tqlayout that is not yet inserted. */ TQWidget *TQLayout::mainWidget() { if ( !topLevel ) { - if ( tqparent() ) { - TQLayout *parentLayout = ::tqqt_cast<TQLayout*>(tqparent()); + if ( parent() ) { + TQLayout *parentLayout = ::tqqt_cast<TQLayout*>(parent()); TQ_ASSERT(parentLayout); return parentLayout->mainWidget(); } else { return 0; } } else { - TQ_ASSERT(tqparent() && tqparent()->isWidgetType()); - return (TQWidget*)tqparent(); + TQ_ASSERT(parent() && parent()->isWidgetType()); + return (TQWidget*)parent(); } } @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ static bool removeWidgetRecursively( TQLayoutItem *lay, TQWidget *w ) /*! \reimp - Performs child widget tqlayout when the tqparent widget is resized. + Performs child widget tqlayout when the parent widget is resized. Also handles removal of widgets and child layouts. \a e is the event the occurred on object \a o. */ @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ void TQLayout::childEvent( TQChildEvent *e ) int TQLayout::totalHeightForWidth( int w ) const { if ( topLevel ) { - TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)tqparent(); + TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)parent(); if ( mw && !mw->testWState(WState_Polished) ) { mw->polish(); } @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ int TQLayout::totalHeightForWidth( int w ) const TQSize TQLayout::totalMinimumSize() const { if ( topLevel ) { - TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)tqparent(); + TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)parent(); if ( mw && !mw->testWState(WState_Polished) ) mw->polish(); } @@ -1139,7 +1139,7 @@ TQSize TQLayout::totalMinimumSize() const TQSize TQLayout::totalSizeHint() const { if ( topLevel ) { - TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)tqparent(); + TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)parent(); if ( mw && !mw->testWState(WState_Polished) ) mw->polish(); } @@ -1162,7 +1162,7 @@ TQSize TQLayout::totalSizeHint() const TQSize TQLayout::totalMaximumSize() const { if ( topLevel ) { - TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)tqparent(); + TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget*)parent(); if ( mw && !mw->testWState(WState_Polished) ) { mw->polish(); } @@ -1193,11 +1193,11 @@ TQLayout::~TQLayout() { /* This function may be called during the TQObject destructor, - when the tqparent no longer is a TQWidget. + when the parent no longer is a TQWidget. */ - if ( isTopLevel() && tqparent() && tqparent()->isWidgetType() && - ((TQWidget*)tqparent())->tqlayout() == this ) - setWidgetLayout( (TQWidget*)tqparent(), 0 ); + if ( isTopLevel() && parent() && parent()->isWidgetType() && + ((TQWidget*)parent())->tqlayout() == this ) + setWidgetLayout( (TQWidget*)parent(), 0 ); } /*! @@ -1217,9 +1217,9 @@ void TQLayout::deleteAllItems() */ void TQLayout::addChildLayout( TQLayout *l ) { - if ( l->tqparent() ) { + if ( l->parent() ) { #if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL) - qWarning( "TQLayout::addChildLayout: tqlayout already has a tqparent" ); + qWarning( "TQLayout::addChildLayout: tqlayout already has a parent" ); #endif return; } @@ -2089,14 +2089,14 @@ bool TQLayout::isEnabled() const return enabled; } -void TQLayout::propagateSpacing( TQLayout *tqparent ) +void TQLayout::propagateSpacing( TQLayout *parent ) { - TQLayoutIterator it = tqparent->iterator(); + TQLayoutIterator it = parent->iterator(); TQLayoutItem *child; while ( (child = it.current()) ) { TQLayout *childLayout = child->tqlayout(); if ( childLayout && childLayout->insideSpacing < 0 ) { - childLayout->insideSpacing = tqparent->insideSpacing; + childLayout->insideSpacing = parent->insideSpacing; propagateSpacing( childLayout ); } ++it; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp index 96a3470..0e5d66c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.cpp @@ -1060,9 +1060,9 @@ QT_END_NAMESPACE TQGroupBox, TQLabel (with TQLabel::setBuddy()), TQMenuBar and TQTabBar. Example: \code - TQPushButton p( "&Exit", tqparent ); // automatic shortcut ALT+Key_E - TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new fileMenu( tqparent ); - fileMenu->insertItem( "Undo", tqparent, TQT_SLOT(undo()), CTRL+Key_Z ); + TQPushButton p( "&Exit", parent ); // automatic shortcut ALT+Key_E + TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new fileMenu( parent ); + fileMenu->insertItem( "Undo", parent, TQT_SLOT(undo()), CTRL+Key_Z ); \endcode A TQAccel contains a list of accelerator items that can be @@ -1103,7 +1103,7 @@ QT_END_NAMESPACE The function setWhatsThis() specifies a help text that appears when the user presses an accelerator key in What's This mode. - The accelerator will be deleted when \e tqparent is deleted, + The accelerator will be deleted when \e parent is deleted, and will consume relevant key events until then. Please note that the accelerator @@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@ public: bool enabled; TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> watch; bool ignorewhatsthis; - TQAccel* tqparent; + TQAccel* parent; void activate( TQAccelItem* item ); void activateAmbiguously( TQAccelItem* item ); @@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::correctSubWindow( TQWidget* w, TQAccelPrivate* d ) { TQWidget* tlw = w->tqtopLevelWidget(); TQWidget* wtlw = d->watch->tqtopLevelWidget(); - /* if we live in a floating dock window, keep our tqparent's + /* if we live in a floating dock window, keep our parent's * accelerators working */ #ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW if ( tlw->isDialog() && tlw->parentWidget() && ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(tlw) ) // [FIXME] Can I safely use the TQT_TQOBJECT macro here? @@ -1503,7 +1503,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) #ifndef TQT_NO_STATUSBAR if ( maintqStatusBar && !lastitem->signal && - !(lastaccel->tqparent->tqreceivers( "activatedAmbiguously(int)" )) ) + !(lastaccel->parent->tqreceivers( "activatedAmbiguously(int)" )) ) maintqStatusBar->message( message, 2000 ); #endif lastaccel->activateAmbiguously( lastitem ); @@ -1514,7 +1514,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) #ifndef TQT_NO_STATUSBAR if ( maintqStatusBar && !firstitem->signal && - !(firstaccel->tqparent->tqreceivers( "activatedAmbiguously(int)" )) ) + !(firstaccel->parent->tqreceivers( "activatedAmbiguously(int)" )) ) maintqStatusBar->message( message, 2000 ); #endif firstaccel->activateAmbiguously( firstitem ); @@ -1524,7 +1524,7 @@ bool TQAccelManager::dispatchAccelEvent( TQWidget* w, TQKeyEvent* e ) } TQAccelPrivate::TQAccelPrivate( TQAccel* p ) - : tqparent( p ) + : parent( p ) { TQAccelManager::self()->registerAccel( this ); aitems.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); @@ -1553,55 +1553,55 @@ static TQAccelItem *find_key( TQAccelList &list, const TQKeySequence &key ) } /*! - Constructs a TQAccel object called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. - The accelerator operates on \a tqparent. + Constructs a TQAccel object called \a name, with parent \a parent. + The accelerator operates on \a parent. */ -TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQAccelPrivate( this ); d->enabled = TRUE; - d->watch = tqparent; + d->watch = parent; #if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL) if ( !d->watch ) - qWarning( "TQAccel: An accelerator must have a tqparent or a watch widget" ); + qWarning( "TQAccel: An accelerator must have a parent or a watch widget" ); #endif } /*! Constructs a TQAccel object called \a name, that operates on \a - watch, and is a child of \a tqparent. + watch, and is a child of \a parent. This constructor is not needed for normal application programming. */ -TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQAccelPrivate( this ); d->enabled = TRUE; d->watch = watch; #if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL) if ( !d->watch ) - qWarning( "TQAccel: An accelerator must have a tqparent or a watch widget" ); + qWarning( "TQAccel: An accelerator must have a parent or a watch widget" ); #endif } /*! Constructs a TQAccel object called \a name, that operates on \a - watch, and is a child of \a tqparent. + watch, and is a child of \a parent. This constructor is not needed for normal application programming. */ -TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQAccel::TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQAccelPrivate( this ); d->enabled = TRUE; d->watch = watch; #if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL) if ( !d->watch ) - qWarning( "TQAccel: An accelerator must have a tqparent or a watch widget" ); + qWarning( "TQAccel: An accelerator must have a parent or a watch widget" ); #endif } @@ -1843,7 +1843,7 @@ void TQAccelPrivate::activate( TQAccelItem* item ) if ( item->signal ) item->signal->activate(); else - emit tqparent->activated( item->id ); + emit parent->activated( item->id ); } void TQAccelPrivate::activateAmbiguously( TQAccelItem* item ) @@ -1851,7 +1851,7 @@ void TQAccelPrivate::activateAmbiguously( TQAccelItem* item ) if ( item->signal ) item->signal->activate(); else - emit tqparent->activatedAmbiguously( item->id ); + emit parent->activatedAmbiguously( item->id ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.h index 1726aca..d8740d0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccel.h @@ -173,9 +173,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQAccel : public TQObject // accelerator class Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQAccel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name=0 ); - TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name=0 ); - TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name=0 ); + TQAccel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name=0 ); + TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQObject *parent, const char *name=0 ); + TQAccel( TQWidget* watch, TQWidget *parent, const char *name=0 ); ~TQAccel(); bool isEnabled() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp index 8d7e588..118e1c1 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqaccessible.cpp @@ -362,7 +362,7 @@ void AccessibleCache::removeObject(TQObject *object) The function uses the \link TQObject::className() classname \endlink of \a object to find a suitable implementation. If no implementation for the object's class is available the function - tries to find an implementation for the object's tqparent class. + tries to find an implementation for the object's parent class. This function is called to answer an accessibility client's request for object information. You should never need to call this @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ bool TQAccessible::isActive() \fn TQRESULT TQAccessibleInterface::queryParent( TQAccessibleInterface **iface ) const Sets \a iface to point to the implementation of the - TQAccessibleInterface for the tqparent object, or to 0 if there is + TQAccessibleInterface for the parent object, or to 0 if there is no such implementation or object. All objects provide this information. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp index 0e3b55c..d2cc4a2 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication.cpp @@ -545,7 +545,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool qt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ) { if ( !top || modal == top ) // don't block event return TRUE; - TQWidget * p = widget->parentWidget(); // Check if the active modal widget is a tqparent of our widget + TQWidget * p = widget->parentWidget(); // Check if the active modal widget is a parent of our widget while ( p ) { if ( p == top ) return TRUE; @@ -1397,22 +1397,22 @@ static TQVFuncList *postRList = 0; // list of post routines long before the TQApplication destructor is called, for example. For modules and libraries, using a reference-counted initialization - manager or TQt' tqparent-child delete mechanism may be better. Here is - an example of a private class which uses the tqparent-child mechanism + manager or TQt' parent-child delete mechanism may be better. Here is + an example of a private class which uses the parent-child mechanism to call a cleanup function at the right time: \code class MyPrivateInitStuff: public TQObject { private: - MyPrivateInitStuff( TQObject * tqparent ): TQObject( tqparent) { + MyPrivateInitStuff( TQObject * parent ): TQObject( parent) { // initialization goes here } MyPrivateInitStuff * p; public: - static MyPrivateInitStuff * initStuff( TQObject * tqparent ) { + static MyPrivateInitStuff * initStuff( TQObject * parent ) { if ( !p ) - p = new MyPrivateInitStuff( tqparent ); + p = new MyPrivateInitStuff( parent ); return p; } @@ -1422,7 +1422,7 @@ static TQVFuncList *postRList = 0; // list of post routines } \endcode - By selecting the right tqparent widget/object, this can often be made + By selecting the right parent widget/object, this can often be made to clean up the module's data at the exact right moment. */ @@ -2920,7 +2920,7 @@ void TQApplication::setFont( const TQFont &font, bool informWidgets, // make sure the application font is complete app_font->detach(); - app_font->d->tqmask = TQFontPrivate::Complete; + app_font->d->mask = TQFontPrivate::Complete; all = app_fonts != 0; delete app_fonts; @@ -3226,7 +3226,7 @@ void TQApplication::aboutTQt() Returns the value that is returned from the receiver's event handler. For certain types of events (e.g. mouse and key events), - the event will be propagated to the receiver's tqparent and so on up to + the event will be propagated to the receiver's parent and so on up to the top-level object if the receiver is not interested in the event (i.e., it returns FALSE). @@ -4656,7 +4656,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool qt_tryModalHelper( TQWidget *widget, TQWidget **rettop ) { if ( !top || modal == top ) // don't block event return TRUE; - TQWidget * p = widget->parentWidget(); // Check if the active modal widget is a tqparent of our widget + TQWidget * p = widget->parentWidget(); // Check if the active modal widget is a parent of our widget while ( p ) { if ( p == top ) return TRUE; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp index 64a2704..f4e3bad 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqapplication_x11.cpp @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ static int xsync_errorbase; // modifier masks for alt/meta - detected when the application starts static long qt_alt_mask = 0; static long qt_meta_mask = 0; -// modifier tqmask to remove mode switch from modifiers that have alt/meta set +// modifier mask to remove mode switch from modifiers that have alt/meta set // this problem manifests itself on HP/UX 10.20 at least, and without it // modifiers do not work at all... static long qt_mode_switch_remove_mask = 0; @@ -2909,7 +2909,7 @@ TQ_EXPORT bool qt_use_xrender = FALSE; // modifier masks for alt/meta - detected when the application starts static long qt_alt_mask = 0; static long qt_meta_mask = 0; -// modifier tqmask to remove mode switch from modifiers that have alt/meta set +// modifier mask to remove mode switch from modifiers that have alt/meta set // this problem manifests itself on HP/UX 10.20 at least, and without it // modifiers do not work at all... static long qt_mode_switch_remove_mask = 0; @@ -5301,7 +5301,7 @@ void TQApplication::setMainWidget( TQWidget *mainWidget ) if ( mainWidget && mainWidget->parentWidget() && ! mainWidget->parentWidget()->isDesktop() ) qWarning( "TQApplication::setMainWidget(): New main widget (%s/%s) " - "has a tqparent!", + "has a parent!", mainWidget->className(), mainWidget->name() ); #endif main_widget = mainWidget; @@ -5531,7 +5531,7 @@ Window qt_x11_findClientWindow( Window win, Atom property, bool leaf ) int format, i; ulong nitems, after; uchar *data; - Window root, tqparent, target=0, *tqchildren=0; + Window root, parent, target=0, *tqchildren=0; uint ntqchildren; if ( XGetWindowProperty( appDpy, win, property, 0, 0, FALSE, AnyPropertyType, &type, &format, &nitems, &after, &data ) == Success ) { @@ -5540,7 +5540,7 @@ Window qt_x11_findClientWindow( Window win, Atom property, bool leaf ) if ( type ) return win; } - if ( !XQueryTree(appDpy,win,&root,&tqparent,&tqchildren,&ntqchildren) ) { + if ( !XQueryTree(appDpy,win,&root,&parent,&tqchildren,&ntqchildren) ) { if ( tqchildren ) XFree( (char *)tqchildren ); return 0; @@ -6251,17 +6251,17 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) ReparentNotify, event ) ) ; // skip old reparent events - if ( event->xreparent.tqparent == TQPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow() ) { + if ( event->xreparent.parent == TQPaintDevice::x11AppRootWindow() ) { if ( widget->isTopLevel() ) { - widget->topData()->parentWinId = event->xreparent.tqparent; + widget->topData()->parentWinId = event->xreparent.parent; if ( qt_deferred_map_contains( widget ) ) { qt_deferred_map_take( widget ); XMapWindow( appDpy, widget->winId() ); } } } else - // store the tqparent. Useful for many things, embedding for instance. - widget->topData()->parentWinId = event->xreparent.tqparent; + // store the parent. Useful for many things, embedding for instance. + widget->topData()->parentWinId = event->xreparent.parent; if ( widget->isTopLevel() ) { // the widget frame strut should also be invalidated widget->topData()->fleft = widget->topData()->fright = @@ -6269,9 +6269,9 @@ int TQApplication::x11ProcessEvent( XEvent* event ) if ( qt_focus_model != FocusModel_Unknown ) { // toplevel reparented... - TQWidget *newtqparent = TQWidget::find( event->xreparent.tqparent ); - if ( ! newtqparent || newtqparent->isDesktop() ) { - // we dont' know about the new tqparent (or we've been + TQWidget *newparent = TQWidget::find( event->xreparent.parent ); + if ( ! newparent || newparent->isDesktop() ) { + // we dont' know about the new parent (or we've been // reparented to root), perhaps a window manager // has been (re)started? reset the focus model to unknown qt_focus_model = FocusModel_Unknown; @@ -6350,8 +6350,8 @@ bool TQApplication::x11EventFilter( XEvent * ) /***************************************************************************** Modal widgets; Since Xlib has little support for this we roll our own modal widget mechanism. - A modal widget without a tqparent becomes application-modal. - A modal widget with a tqparent becomes modal to its tqparent and grandparents.. + A modal widget without a parent becomes application-modal. + A modal widget with a parent becomes modal to its parent and grandparents.. qt_enter_modal() Enters modal state @@ -7238,7 +7238,7 @@ bool TQETWidget::translatePropertyEvent(const XEvent *event) // WM_STATE property (ICCCM 4.1.3.1) XDeleteProperty(appDpy, winId(), qt_wm_state); - // set the tqparent id to zero, so that show() will + // set the parent id to zero, so that show() will // work again topData()->parentWinId = 0; // map the window if we were waiting for a diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp index 8c6ba74..6c8121e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqasyncimageio.cpp @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ void TQGIFFormat::disposePrevious( TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer ) break; case RestoreBackground: if (trans_index>=0) { - // Easy: we use the transtqparent color + // Easy: we use the transparent color fillRect(img, l, t, r-l+1, b-t+1, TQ_TRANSPARENT); } else if (bgcol>=0) { // Easy: we use the bgcol given @@ -944,7 +944,7 @@ int TQGIFFormat::decode(TQImage& img, TQImageConsumer* consumer, frame++; if ( frame == 0 ) { if ( left || top || width<swidth || height<sheight ) { - // Not full-size image - erase with bg or transtqparent + // Not full-size image - erase with bg or transparent if ( trans_index >= 0 ) { fillRect(img, 0, 0, swidth, sheight, color(trans_index)); if (consumer) consumer->changed(TQRect(0,0,swidth,sheight)); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp index 3e2ee39..e44b37e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.cpp @@ -128,8 +128,8 @@ void TQBitmap::resize_helper(const QSize s) } // Mask too.... - if (!mask().isNull()) { - TQBitmap m = mask(); + if (!QBitmap::mask().isNull()) { + TQBitmap m = QBitmap::mask(); if (m.size() != QSize(w,h)) { TQBitmap pmr(QSize(w, h)); pmr.fill(Qt::color0); @@ -153,8 +153,8 @@ void TQBitmap::resize_helper(const QSize s) } // This is the only correct way to return a pointer to an object returned by another function -const TQBitmap *TQBitmap::tqmask() const { - const QBitmap& ptrRef = mask(); +const TQBitmap *TQBitmap::mask() const { + const QBitmap& ptrRef = QBitmap::mask(); if (ptrRef.isNull() == true) { return 0; } @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ TQBitmap &TQBitmap::operator=( const TQImage &image ) using the TQColor objects \c TQt::color0 and \c TQt::color1. Painting with \c color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0, and painting with \c color1 sets the bits to 1. For a bitmap, 0-bits indicate - background (or transtqparent) and 1-bits indicate foreground (or + background (or transparent) and 1-bits indicate foreground (or opaque). Using the \c black and \c white TQColor objects make no sense because the TQColor::pixel() value is not necessarily 0 for black and 1 for white. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h index e4a2fd9..74b8cff 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqbitmap.h @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public: bool convertFromImage(const QImage &img, int flags = Qt::AutoColor); TQBitmap xForm(const QMatrix &matrix) const; - const TQBitmap *tqmask() const; + const TQBitmap *mask() const; private: void resize_helper(const QSize s); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp index 4c2b341..045e1f6 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.cpp @@ -336,8 +336,8 @@ void TQClipboard::setData(QMimeSource *source, Mode mode) more than one object to represent it is almost certainly an error. */ -TQClipboard::TQClipboard( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQClipboard::TQClipboard( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { // nothing } @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ void TQClipboard::setImage( const TQImage &image ) contain a pixmap. Note that this can lose information. For example, if the image is 24-bit and the display is 8-bit, the result is converted to 8 bits, and if the image has an alpha - channel, the result just has a tqmask. + channel, the result just has a mask. The \a mode argument is used to control which part of the system clipboard is used. If \a mode is TQClipboard::Clipboard, the @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ TQMimeSource *TQClipboard::data() const The TQDragObject subclasses are reasonable objects to put into the clipboard (but do not try to call TQDragObject::drag() on the same object). Any TQDragObject placed in the clipboard should have a - tqparent of 0. Do not put TQDragMoveEvent or TQDropEvent subclasses in + parent of 0. Do not put TQDragMoveEvent or TQDropEvent subclasses in the clipboard, as they do not belong to the event handler which receives them. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.h index 8e49f8d..7833006 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqclipboard.h @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ class TQClipboardPrivate; class TQ_EXPORT TQClipboard : public QClipboard, virtual public TQt { public: -// TQClipboard( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ) : QClipboard( tqparent ) { setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); } +// TQClipboard( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *parent=0, const char *name=0 ) : QClipboard( parent ) { setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); } TQMimeSource *data(Mode mode = Clipboard) const; void setData(QMimeSource*, Mode mode = Clipboard); @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQClipboard : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT private: - TQClipboard( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQClipboard( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); ~TQClipboard(); public: diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp index f6fcce6..e307663 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcolor.cpp @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ void TQColor::initGlobalColors() The colors \c color0 (zero pixel value) and \c color1 (non-zero pixel value) are special colors for drawing in \link TQBitmap bitmaps\endlink. Painting with \c color0 sets the bitmap bits to 0 - (transtqparent, i.e. background), and painting with \c color1 sets the + (transparent, i.e. background), and painting with \c color1 sets the bits to 1 (opaque, i.e. foreground). The TQColor class has an efficient, dynamic color allocation diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.cpp index 16e74cf..3be2c23 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.cpp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ of the mouse cursor. TQt has a number of standard cursor tqshapes, but you can also make - custom cursor tqshapes based on a TQBitmap, a tqmask and a hotspot. + custom cursor tqshapes based on a TQBitmap, a mask and a hotspot. To associate a cursor with a widget, use TQWidget::setCursor(). To associate a cursor with all widgets (normally for a short period @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ of the predefined cursors defined in the \l tqCursorShape enum. If you want to create a cursor with your own bitmap, either use - the TQCursor constructor which takes a bitmap and a tqmask or the + the TQCursor constructor which takes a bitmap and a mask or the constructor which takes a pixmap as arguments. To set or get the position of the mouse cursor use the static @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ TQDataStream &operator<<( TQDataStream &s, const TQCursor &c ) s << (TQ_INT16)c.tqshape(); // write tqshape id to stream if ( c.tqshape() == TQt::BitmapCursor ) { // bitmap cursor #if !defined(TQT_NO_IMAGEIO) - s << *c.bitmap() << *c.tqmask(); + s << *c.bitmap() << *c.mask(); s << c.hotSpot(); #else qWarning("No Image Cursor I/O"); @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ TQDataStream &operator>>( TQDataStream &s, TQCursor &c ) /*! Constructs a custom pixmap cursor. - \a pixmap is the image. It is usual to give it a tqmask (set using + \a pixmap is the image. It is usual to give it a mask (set using TQPixmap::setMask()). \a hotX and \a hotY define the cursor's hot spot. @@ -229,13 +229,13 @@ TQCursor::TQCursor( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int hotX, int hotY ) TQBitmap bm; bm.convertFromImage( img, TQt::ThresholdDither|TQt::AvoidDither ); TQBitmap bmm; - if ( bm.tqmask() ) { - bmm = *bm.tqmask(); + if ( bm.mask() ) { + bmm = *bm.mask(); TQBitmap nullBm; bm.setMask( nullBm ); } - else if ( pixmap.tqmask() ) { - TQImage mimg = pixmap.tqmask()->convertToImage(). + else if ( pixmap.mask() ) { + TQImage mimg = pixmap.mask()->convertToImage(). convertDepth( 8, TQt::ThresholdDither|TQt::AvoidDither ); bmm.convertFromImage( mimg, TQt::ThresholdDither|TQt::AvoidDither ); } @@ -253,18 +253,18 @@ TQCursor::TQCursor( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int hotX, int hotY ) Constructs a custom bitmap cursor. \a bitmap and - \a tqmask make up the bitmap. + \a mask make up the bitmap. \a hotX and \a hotY define the cursor's hot spot. If \a hotX is negative, it is set to the \c{bitmap().width()/2}. If \a hotY is negative, it is set to the \c{bitmap().height()/2}. - The cursor \a bitmap (B) and \a tqmask (M) bits are combined like this: + The cursor \a bitmap (B) and \a mask (M) bits are combined like this: \list \i B=1 and M=1 gives black. \i B=0 and M=1 gives white. - \i B=0 and M=0 gives transtqparent. + \i B=0 and M=0 gives transparent. \i B=1 and M=0 gives an undefined result. \endlist @@ -279,10 +279,10 @@ TQCursor::TQCursor( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int hotX, int hotY ) \sa TQBitmap::TQBitmap(), TQBitmap::setMask() */ -TQCursor::TQCursor( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &tqmask, +TQCursor::TQCursor( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &mask, int hotX, int hotY ) { - setBitmap(bitmap,tqmask,hotX,hotY); + setBitmap(bitmap,mask,hotX,hotY); } #endif // USE_QT4 diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.h index 1c1d4c1..135a44f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor.h @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public: TQCursor() : QCursor() {} TQCursor( int tqshape ) : QCursor( tqshape ) {} TQCursor( Qt::CursorShape shape ) : QCursor( shape ) {} - TQCursor( const QBitmap &bitmap, const QBitmap &tqmask, int hotX=-1, int hotY=-1 ) : QCursor( bitmap, tqmask, hotX, hotY ) {} + TQCursor( const QBitmap &bitmap, const QBitmap &mask, int hotX=-1, int hotY=-1 ) : QCursor( bitmap, mask, hotX, hotY ) {} TQCursor( const QPixmap &pixmap, int hotX=-1, int hotY=-1 ) : QCursor( pixmap, hotX, hotY ) {} TQCursor( const QCursor & c ) : QCursor( c ) {} @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQCursor : public TQt public: TQCursor(); // create default arrow cursor TQCursor( int tqshape ); - TQCursor( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &tqmask, + TQCursor( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &mask, int hotX=-1, int hotY=-1 ); TQCursor( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int hotX=-1, int hotY=-1 ); @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public: void setShape( int ); const TQBitmap *bitmap() const; - const TQBitmap *tqmask() const; + const TQBitmap *mask() const; TQPoint hotSpot() const; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ public: static int x11Screen(); #endif private: - void setBitmap( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &tqmask, + void setBitmap( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &mask, int hotX, int hotY ); void update() const; TQCursorData *data; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp index aac3336..4b9bd06 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqcursor_x11.cpp @@ -404,13 +404,13 @@ TQCursor::TQCursor( HANDLE cursor ) -void TQCursor::setBitmap( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &tqmask, +void TQCursor::setBitmap( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &mask, int hotX, int hotY ) { if ( !initialized ) initialize(); - if ( bitmap.depth() != 1 || tqmask.depth() != 1 || - bitmap.size() != tqmask.size() ) { + if ( bitmap.depth() != 1 || mask.depth() != 1 || + bitmap.size() != mask.size() ) { #if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL) qWarning( "TQCursor: Cannot create bitmap cursor; invalid bitmap(s)" ); #endif @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ void TQCursor::setBitmap( const TQBitmap &bitmap, const TQBitmap &tqmask, data = new TQCursorData; TQ_CHECK_PTR( data ); data->bm = new TQBitmap( bitmap ); - data->bmm = new TQBitmap( tqmask ); + data->bmm = new TQBitmap( mask ); data->hcurs = 0; data->ctqshape = BitmapCursor; data->hx = hotX >= 0 ? hotX : bitmap.width()/2; @@ -526,11 +526,11 @@ const TQBitmap *TQCursor::bitmap() const } /*! - Returns the cursor bitmap tqmask, or 0 if it is one of the standard + Returns the cursor bitmap mask, or 0 if it is one of the standard cursors. */ -const TQBitmap *TQCursor::tqmask() const +const TQBitmap *TQCursor::mask() const { if ( !initialized ) initialize(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdnd_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdnd_x11.cpp index 471df70..6292a07 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdnd_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdnd_x11.cpp @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ public: void setPixmap(TQPixmap pm, TQPoint hot) { - int bmser = pm.tqmask() ? pm.tqmask()->serialNumber() : 0; + int bmser = pm.mask() ? pm.mask()->serialNumber() : 0; if( oldpmser == pm.serialNumber() && oldbmser == bmser && oldhot == hot ) return; @@ -283,17 +283,17 @@ public: // of finding this pixmap, and therefore there won't be needed any (slow) search for the window // using findRealWindow() if( hotspot_in ) { - TQBitmap tqmask = pm.tqmask() ? *pm.tqmask() : TQBitmap( pm.width(), pm.height()); - if( !pm.tqmask()) - tqmask.fill( TQt::color1 ); - TQPainter p( &tqmask ); + TQBitmap mask = pm.mask() ? *pm.mask() : TQBitmap( pm.width(), pm.height()); + if( !pm.mask()) + mask.fill( TQt::color1 ); + TQPainter p( &mask ); p.setPen( TQt::color0 ); p.drawPoint( hot.x(), hot.y()); p.end(); - pm.setMask( tqmask ); - setMask( tqmask ); - } else if ( pm.tqmask() ) { - setMask( *pm.tqmask() ); + pm.setMask( mask ); + setMask( mask ); + } else if ( pm.mask() ) { + setMask( *pm.mask() ); } else { clearMask(); } @@ -913,10 +913,10 @@ void TQDragManager::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent* e ) if( need_modifiers_check ) { Window root, child; int root_x, root_y, win_x, win_y; - unsigned int tqmask; + unsigned int mask; XQueryPointer( qt_xdisplay(), qt_xrootwin( qt_xdnd_current_screen ), - &root, &child, &root_x, &root_y, &win_x, &win_y, &tqmask ); - if( updateMode( (ButtonState)qt_x11_translateButtonState( tqmask ))) + &root, &child, &root_x, &root_y, &win_x, &win_y, &mask ); + if( updateMode( (ButtonState)qt_x11_translateButtonState( mask ))) qt_xdnd_source_sameanswer = TQRect(); // force move } need_modifiers_check = TRUE; @@ -1737,7 +1737,7 @@ const char* TQDropEvent::format( int n ) const bool TQDragManager::drag( TQDragObject * o, TQDragObject::DragMode mode ) { - if ( object == o || !o || !o->tqparent() ) + if ( object == o || !o || !o->parent() ) return FALSE; if ( object ) { @@ -1781,7 +1781,7 @@ bool TQDragManager::drag( TQDragObject * o, TQDragObject::DragMode mode ) object = o; updatePixmap(); - dragSource = (TQWidget *)(object->tqparent()); + dragSource = (TQWidget *)(object->parent()); qt_xdnd_deco->x11SetWindowTransient( dragSource->tqtopLevelWidget()); tqApp->installEventFilter( this ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp index 579eab8..c062bfd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdragobject.cpp @@ -2136,8 +2136,8 @@ bool TQDragObject::drag( DragMode mode ) TQWidget * TQDragObject::source() { - if ( tqparent() && tqparent()->isWidgetType() ) - return (TQWidget *)tqparent(); + if ( parent() && parent()->isWidgetType() ) + return (TQWidget *)parent(); else return 0; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp index 07e2bb4..b220e58 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdrawutil.cpp @@ -621,27 +621,27 @@ void qDrawItem( TQPainter *p, TQt::GUIStyle gs, x += w - pm.width(); if ( !enabled ) { - if ( pm.tqmask() ) { // pixmap with a tqmask - if ( !pm.selfMask() ) { // tqmask is not pixmap itself - TQPixmap pmm( *pm.tqmask() ); + if ( pm.mask() ) { // pixmap with a mask + if ( !pm.selfMask() ) { // mask is not pixmap itself + TQPixmap pmm( *pm.mask() ); pmm.setMask( *((TQBitmap *)&pmm) ); pm = pmm; } - } else if ( pm.depth() == 1 ) { // monochrome pixmap, no tqmask + } else if ( pm.depth() == 1 ) { // monochrome pixmap, no mask pm.setMask( *((TQBitmap *)&pm) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK - } else { // color pixmap, no tqmask + } else { // color pixmap, no mask TQString k; k.sprintf( "$qt-drawitem-%x", pm.serialNumber() ); - TQPixmap *tqmask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); + TQPixmap *mask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); bool del=FALSE; - if ( !tqmask ) { - tqmask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); - tqmask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)tqmask) ); - del = !TQPixmapCache::insert( k, tqmask ); + if ( !mask ) { + mask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); + mask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)mask) ); + del = !TQPixmapCache::insert( k, mask ); } - pm = *tqmask; - if (del) delete tqmask; + pm = *mask; + if (del) delete mask; #endif } if ( gs == TQt::WindowsStyle ) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdropsite.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdropsite.h index cd650fa..5beb6fd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdropsite.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqdropsite.h @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ class TQWidget; class TQ_EXPORT TQDropSite { public: - TQDropSite( TQWidget* tqparent ); + TQDropSite( TQWidget* parent ); virtual ~TQDropSite(); }; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp index 6b9f90b..eebcf50 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.cpp @@ -235,9 +235,9 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) \value AltButton an Alt key on the keyboard is also pressed. \value MetaButton a Meta key on the keyboard is also pressed. \value Keypad a keypad button is pressed. - \value KeyButtonMask a tqmask for ShiftButton, ControlButton, + \value KeyButtonMask a mask for ShiftButton, ControlButton, AltButton and MetaButton. - \value MouseButtonMask a tqmask for LeftButton, RightButton and MidButton. + \value MouseButtonMask a mask for LeftButton, RightButton and MidButton. */ /*! @@ -286,10 +286,10 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) \value WindowDeactivate Window was deactivated. \value CaptionChange Widget's caption changed. \value IconChange Widget's icon changed. - \value ParentFontChange Font of the tqparent widget changed. + \value ParentFontChange Font of the parent widget changed. \value ApplicationFontChange Default application font changed. \value PaletteChange Palette of the widget changed. - \value ParentPaletteChange Palette of the tqparent widget changed. + \value ParentPaletteChange Palette of the parent widget changed. \value ApplicationPaletteChange Default application palette changed. \value Clipboard Clipboard contents have changed. \value SockAct Socket activated, used to implement \l{TQSocketNotifier}. @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) \value Quit Reserved. \value Create Reserved. \value Destroy Reserved. - \value Retqparent Reserved. + \value Reparent Reserved. \value Speech Reserved for speech input. \value TabletMove A Wacom Tablet Move Event. \value Style Internal use only @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ TQCustomEvent::TQCustomEvent( int type ) A mouse event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the event. You should call TQMouseEvent::ignore() if the mouse event is not handled by your - widget. A mouse event is propagated up the tqparent widget chain + widget. A mouse event is propagated up the parent widget chain until a widget accepts it with TQMouseEvent::accept() or an event filter consumes it. @@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQMouseEvent::stateAfter() const Setting the accept parameter indicates that the receiver of the event wants the mouse event. Unwanted mouse events are sent to the - tqparent widget. + parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQMouseEvent::stateAfter() const Clearing the accept parameter indicates that the event receiver does not want the mouse event. Unwanted mouse events are sent to - the tqparent widget. + the parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQMouseEvent::stateAfter() const A wheel event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the event. You should call TQWheelEvent::accept() if you handle the wheel event; otherwise it - will be sent to the tqparent widget. + will be sent to the parent widget. The TQWidget::setEnable() function can be used to enable or disable mouse and keyboard events for a widget. @@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientatio Setting the accept parameter indicates that the receiver of the event wants the wheel event. Unwanted wheel events are sent to the - tqparent widget. + parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientatio Clearing the accept parameter indicates that the event receiver does not want the wheel event. Unwanted wheel events are sent to - the tqparent widget. The accept flag is set by default. + the parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. \sa accept() */ @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientatio \value META the Meta keys. \value CTRL the Ctrl keys. \value ALT the normal Alt keys, but not e.g. AltGr. - \value MODIFIER_MASK is a tqmask of Shift, Ctrl, Alt and Meta. + \value MODIFIER_MASK is a mask of Shift, Ctrl, Alt and Meta. \value UNICODE_ACCEL the accelerator is specified as a Unicode code point, not as a TQt Key. */ @@ -830,7 +830,7 @@ TQWheelEvent::TQWheelEvent( const TQPoint &pos, int delta, int state, Orientatio A key event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the key event. You should call TQKeyEvent::ignore() if the key press or release event is not handled by your widget. A key event is - propagated up the tqparent widget chain until a widget accepts it with + propagated up the parent widget chain until a widget accepts it with TQKeyEvent::accept() or an event filter consumes it. Key events for multi media keys are ignored by default. You should call TQKeyEvent::accept() if your widget handles those events. @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQKeyEvent::stateAfter() const Setting the accept parameter indicates that the receiver of the event wants the key event. Unwanted key events are sent to the - tqparent widget. + parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ TQt::ButtonState TQKeyEvent::stateAfter() const Clearing the accept parameter indicates that the event receiver does not want the key event. Unwanted key events are sent to the - tqparent widget. + parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. @@ -1473,7 +1473,7 @@ void TQFocusEvent::resetReason() \ingroup events Move events are sent to widgets that have been moved to a new position - relative to their tqparent. + relative to their parent. The event handler TQWidget::moveEvent() receives move events. @@ -1835,7 +1835,7 @@ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int s Setting the consume flag indicates that the receiver of this event does not want the event to be propagated further (i.e. not sent to - tqparent classes.) + parent classes.) The consumed flag is not set by default. @@ -2063,7 +2063,7 @@ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int s A tablet event contains a special accept flag that indicates whether the receiver wants the event. You should call TQTabletEvent::accept() if you handle the tablet event; otherwise - it will be sent to the tqparent widget. + it will be sent to the parent widget. The TQWidget::setEnabled() function can be used to enable or disable mouse and keyboard events for a widget. @@ -2083,7 +2083,7 @@ TQContextMenuEvent::TQContextMenuEvent( Reason reason, const TQPoint &pos, int s \value NoDevice No tqdevice, or an unknown tqdevice. \value Puck A Puck (a tqdevice that is similar to a flat mouse with - a transtqparent circle with cross-hairs). + a transparent circle with cross-hairs). \value Stylus A Stylus (the narrow end of the pen). \value Eraser An Eraser (the broad end of the pen). \omit @@ -2252,7 +2252,7 @@ TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent( Type t, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalP Setting the accept flag indicates that the receiver of the event wants the tablet event. Unwanted tablet events are sent to the - tqparent widget. + parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. @@ -2266,7 +2266,7 @@ TQTabletEvent::TQTabletEvent( Type t, const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &globalP Clearing the accept flag indicates that the event receiver does not want the tablet event. Unwanted tablet events are sent to the - tqparent widget. + parent widget. The accept flag is set by default. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.h index 143c766..9dc10ad 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqevent.h @@ -417,13 +417,13 @@ public: Hide = 18, // widget is hidden Close = 19, // request to close widget Quit = 20, // request to quit application - Retqparent = 21, // widget has been reparented + Reparent = 21, // widget has been reparented ShowMinimized = 22, // widget is shown minimized ShowNormal = 23, // widget is shown normal WindowActivate = 24, // window was activated WindowDeactivate = 25, // window was deactivated - ShowToParent = 26, // widget is shown to tqparent - HideToParent = 27, // widget is hidden to tqparent + ShowToParent = 26, // widget is shown to parent + HideToParent = 27, // widget is hidden to parent ShowMaximized = 28, // widget is shown maximized ShowFullScreen = 29, // widget is shown full-screen Accel = 30, // accelerator event @@ -431,9 +431,9 @@ public: AccelAvailable = 32, // accelerator available event CaptionChange = 33, // caption changed IconChange = 34, // icon changed - ParentFontChange = 35, // tqparent font changed + ParentFontChange = 35, // parent font changed ApplicationFontChange = 36, // application font changed - ParentPaletteChange = 37, // tqparent palette changed + ParentPaletteChange = 37, // parent palette changed ApplicationPaletteChange = 38, // application palette changed PaletteChange = 39, // widget palette changed Clipboard = 40, // internal clipboard event diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp index 704fc43..57dfca1 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.cpp @@ -94,10 +94,10 @@ by calling TQApplication::eventLoop(). To create your own event loop object create it before you instantiate the TQApplication object. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor. + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor. */ -TQEventLoop::TQEventLoop( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQEventLoop::TQEventLoop( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { #if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE) if ( TQApplication::eventloop ) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.h index d837a75..3ec45cf 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqeventloop.h @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQEventLoop : public TQObject TQ_OBJECT public: - TQEventLoop( TQObject *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + TQEventLoop( TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); ~TQEventLoop(); enum ProcessEvents { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp index 5570afd..e054114 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont.cpp @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ bool TQFontDef::operator==( const TQFontDef &other ) const TQFontPrivate::TQFontPrivate() : engineData( 0 ), painttqdevice( 0 ), rawMode( FALSE ), underline( FALSE ), overline( FALSE ), strikeOut( FALSE ), - tqmask( 0 ) + mask( 0 ) { #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 screen = TQPaintDevice::x11AppScreen(); @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ TQFontPrivate::TQFontPrivate( const TQFontPrivate &other ) : TQShared(), request( other.request ), engineData( 0 ), painttqdevice( other.painttqdevice ), screen( other.screen ), rawMode( other.rawMode ), underline( other.underline ), overline( other.overline ), - strikeOut( other.strikeOut ), tqmask( other.tqmask ) + strikeOut( other.strikeOut ), mask( other.mask ) { } @@ -181,42 +181,42 @@ void TQFontPrivate::resolve( const TQFontPrivate *other ) TQ_ASSERT( other != 0 ); #endif - if ( ( tqmask & Complete ) == Complete ) return; + if ( ( mask & Complete ) == Complete ) return; // assign the unset-bits with the set-bits of the other font def - if ( ! ( tqmask & Family ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & Family ) ) request.family = other->request.family; - if ( ! ( tqmask & Size ) ) { + if ( ! ( mask & Size ) ) { request.pointSize = other->request.pointSize; request.pixelSize = other->request.pixelSize; } - if ( ! ( tqmask & StyleHint ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & StyleHint ) ) request.tqstyleHint = other->request.tqstyleHint; - if ( ! ( tqmask & StyleStrategy ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & StyleStrategy ) ) request.styleStrategy = other->request.styleStrategy; - if ( ! ( tqmask & Weight ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & Weight ) ) request.weight = other->request.weight; - if ( ! ( tqmask & Italic ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & Italic ) ) request.italic = other->request.italic; - if ( ! ( tqmask & FixedPitch ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & FixedPitch ) ) request.fixedPitch = other->request.fixedPitch; - if ( ! ( tqmask & Stretch ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & Stretch ) ) request.stretch = other->request.stretch; - if ( ! ( tqmask & Underline ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & Underline ) ) underline = other->underline; - if ( ! ( tqmask & Overline ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & Overline ) ) overline = other->overline; - if ( ! ( tqmask & StrikeOut ) ) + if ( ! ( mask & StrikeOut ) ) strikeOut = other->strikeOut; } @@ -578,12 +578,12 @@ void TQFont::detach() /* if this font is a copy of the application default font, set the - fontdef tqmask to zero to indicate that *nothing* has been + fontdef mask to zero to indicate that *nothing* has been explicitly set by the programmer. */ const TQFont appfont = TQApplication::font(); if ( old_d == appfont.d ) - d->tqmask = 0; + d->mask = 0; if ( old_d->deref() ) delete old_d; @@ -624,18 +624,18 @@ TQFont::TQFont( const TQString &family, int pointSize, int weight, bool italic ) d = new TQFontPrivate; TQ_CHECK_PTR( d ); - d->tqmask = TQFontPrivate::Family; + d->mask = TQFontPrivate::Family; if (pointSize <= 0) { pointSize = 12; } else { - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; } if (weight < 0) { weight = Normal; } else { - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Weight | TQFontPrivate::Italic; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Weight | TQFontPrivate::Italic; } d->request.family = family; @@ -713,7 +713,7 @@ void TQFont::setFamily( const TQString &family ) d->request.addStyle = TQString::null; #endif // TQ_WS_X11 - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Family; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Family; } /*! @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ void TQFont::setPointSize( int pointSize ) d->request.pointSize = pointSize * 10; d->request.pixelSize = -1; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; } /*! @@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ void TQFont::setPointSizeFloat( float pointSize ) d->request.pointSize = tqRound(pointSize * 10.0); d->request.pixelSize = -1; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; } /*! @@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ void TQFont::setPixelSize( int pixelSize ) d->request.pixelSize = pixelSize; d->request.pointSize = -1; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Size; } /*! @@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ void TQFont::setItalic( bool enable ) detach(); d->request.italic = enable; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Italic; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Italic; } /*! @@ -919,7 +919,7 @@ void TQFont::setWeight( int weight ) detach(); d->request.weight = weight; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Weight; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Weight; } /*! @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ void TQFont::setUnderline( bool enable ) detach(); d->underline = enable; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Underline; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Underline; } /*! @@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ void TQFont::setOverline( bool enable ) detach(); d->overline = enable; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Overline; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Overline; } /*! @@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ void TQFont::setStrikeOut( bool enable ) detach(); d->strikeOut = enable; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::StrikeOut; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::StrikeOut; } /*! @@ -1036,7 +1036,7 @@ void TQFont::setFixedPitch( bool enable ) d->request.fixedPitch = enable; d->request.ignorePitch = FALSE; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::FixedPitch; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::FixedPitch; } /*! @@ -1138,15 +1138,15 @@ void TQFont::setStyleHint( StyleHint hint, StyleStrategy strategy ) { detach(); - if ( ( d->tqmask & ( TQFontPrivate::StyleHint | TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy ) ) && + if ( ( d->mask & ( TQFontPrivate::StyleHint | TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy ) ) && (StyleHint) d->request.tqstyleHint == hint && (StyleStrategy) d->request.styleStrategy == strategy ) return; d->request.tqstyleHint = hint; d->request.styleStrategy = strategy; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::StyleHint; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::StyleHint; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy; #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) d->request.addStyle = TQString::null; @@ -1162,12 +1162,12 @@ void TQFont::setStyleStrategy( StyleStrategy s ) { detach(); - if ( ( d->tqmask & TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy ) && + if ( ( d->mask & TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy ) && s == (StyleStrategy)d->request.styleStrategy ) return; d->request.styleStrategy = s; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::StyleStrategy; } @@ -1229,12 +1229,12 @@ void TQFont::setStretch( int factor ) detach(); - if ( ( d->tqmask & TQFontPrivate::Stretch ) && + if ( ( d->mask & TQFontPrivate::Stretch ) && d->request.stretch == (uint)factor ) return; d->request.stretch = (uint)factor; - d->tqmask |= TQFontPrivate::Stretch; + d->mask |= TQFontPrivate::Stretch; } /*! @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ bool TQFont::rawMode() const */ TQFont TQFont::resolve( const TQFont &other ) const { - if ( *this == other && d->tqmask == other.d->tqmask ) + if ( *this == other && d->mask == other.d->mask ) return *this; TQFont font( *this ); @@ -1349,12 +1349,12 @@ TQFont TQFont::resolve( const TQFont &other ) const /* if this font is a copy of the application default font, set the - fontdef tqmask to zero to indicate that *nothing* has been + fontdef mask to zero to indicate that *nothing* has been explicitly set by the programmer. */ const TQFont appfont = TQApplication::font(); if ( d == appfont.d ) - font.d->tqmask = 0; + font.d->mask = 0; font.d->resolve( other.d ); @@ -1782,7 +1782,7 @@ TQDataStream &operator>>( TQDataStream &s, TQFont &font ) if (font.d->deref()) delete font.d; font.d = new TQFontPrivate; - font.d->tqmask = TQFontPrivate::Complete; + font.d->mask = TQFontPrivate::Complete; TQ_INT16 pointSize, pixelSize = -1; TQ_UINT8 tqstyleHint, styleStrategy = TQFont::PreferDefault, charSet, weight, bits; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp index fda292f..55e0bee 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfont_x11.cpp @@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ void TQFont::setRawName( const TQString &name ) setFamily( name ); setRawMode( TRUE ); } else { - d->tqmask = TQFontPrivate::Complete; + d->mask = TQFontPrivate::Complete; } } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h index 36b709f..28fc990 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqfontdata_p.h @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ public: Complete = 0x07ff }; - uint tqmask; + uint mask; void resolve( const TQFontPrivate *other ); }; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp index 09a1126..95656c0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqiconset.cpp @@ -794,11 +794,11 @@ TQPixmap *TQIconSet::createScaled( Size size, const TQPixmap *suppliedPix ) cons img = img.smoothScale( imgSize ); TQPixmap *pixmap = new TQPixmap( img ); - if ( !pixmap->tqmask() ) { - TQBitmap tqmask; - tqmask.convertFromImage( img.createHeuristicMask(), + if ( !pixmap->mask() ) { + TQBitmap mask; + mask.convertFromImage( img.createHeuristicMask(), TQt::MonoOnly | TQt::ThresholdDither ); - pixmap->setMask( tqmask ); + pixmap->setMask( mask ); } return pixmap; } @@ -816,8 +816,8 @@ TQPixmap *TQIconSet::createDisabled( Size size, State state ) const TQImage img; TQPixmap *pixmap = 0; TQBitmap normalMask; - if ( normalPix.tqmask() ) { - normalMask = *normalPix.tqmask(); + if ( normalPix.mask() ) { + normalMask = *normalPix.mask(); } else { img = normalPix.convertToImage(); normalMask.convertFromImage( img.createHeuristicMask(), @@ -837,16 +837,16 @@ TQPixmap *TQIconSet::createDisabled( Size size, State state ) const painter.drawPixmap( 0, 0, normalMask ); painter.end(); - if ( !normalMask.tqmask() ) + if ( !normalMask.mask() ) normalMask.setMask( normalMask ); - TQBitmap tqmask( pixmap->size() ); - tqmask.fill( TQt::color0 ); - painter.begin( &tqmask ); + TQBitmap mask( pixmap->size() ); + mask.fill( TQt::color0 ); + painter.begin( &mask ); painter.drawPixmap( 0, 0, normalMask ); painter.drawPixmap( 1, 1, normalMask ); painter.end(); - pixmap->setMask( tqmask ); + pixmap->setMask( mask ); return pixmap; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp index 2a99fc9..3483e2a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqimage.cpp @@ -1606,12 +1606,12 @@ TQDataStream &operator<<( TQDataStream &s, const BMP_INFOHDR &bi ) } static -int calc_shift(int tqmask) +int calc_shift(int mask) { int result = 0; - while (!(tqmask & 1)) { + while (!(mask & 1)) { result++; - tqmask >>= 1; + mask >>= 1; } return result; } @@ -4224,10 +4224,10 @@ void TQImage::setNumColors( int numColors ) contain the alpha component. The alpha component specifies the transparency of a pixel. 0 means - completely transtqparent and 255 means opaque. The alpha component + completely transparent and 255 means opaque. The alpha component is ignored if you do not enable alpha buffer mode. - The alpha buffer is used to set a tqmask when a TQImage is translated + The alpha buffer is used to set a mask when a TQImage is translated to a TQPixmap. \sa hasAlphaBuffer() createAlphaMask() @@ -4430,7 +4430,7 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl const int tablesize = 997; // prime TQRgbMap table[tablesize]; int pix=0; - TQRgb atqmask = src->hasAlphaBuffer() ? 0xffffffff : 0x00ffffff; + TQRgb amask = src->hasAlphaBuffer() ? 0xffffffff : 0x00ffffff; if ( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ) dst->setAlphaBuffer(TRUE); @@ -4441,10 +4441,10 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl // Almost same code as pixel insertion below while ( palette_count-- > 0 ) { // Find in table... - int hash = (*p & atqmask) % tablesize; + int hash = (*p & amask) % tablesize; for (;;) { if ( table[hash].used() ) { - if ( table[hash].rgb == (*p & atqmask) ) { + if ( table[hash].rgb == (*p & amask) ) { // Found previous insertion - use it break; } else { @@ -4455,9 +4455,9 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl // Cannot be in table TQ_ASSERT ( pix != 256 ); // too many colors // Insert into table at this unused position - dst->setColor( pix, (*p & atqmask) ); + dst->setColor( pix, (*p & amask) ); table[hash].pix = pix++; - table[hash].rgb = *p & atqmask; + table[hash].rgb = *p & amask; break; } } @@ -4474,10 +4474,10 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl x = src->width(); while ( x-- ) { // Find in table... - int hash = (*p & atqmask) % tablesize; + int hash = (*p & amask) % tablesize; for (;;) { if ( table[hash].used() ) { - if ( table[hash].rgb == (*p & atqmask) ) { + if ( table[hash].rgb == (*p & amask) ) { // Found previous insertion - use it break; } else { @@ -4493,9 +4493,9 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl y = src->height(); } else { // Insert into table at this unused position - dst->setColor( pix, (*p & atqmask) ); + dst->setColor( pix, (*p & amask) ); table[hash].pix = pix++; - table[hash].rgb = (*p & atqmask); + table[hash].rgb = (*p & amask); } break; } @@ -4548,7 +4548,7 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl for ( gc=0; gc<=MAX_G; gc++ ) for ( bc=0; bc<=MAX_B; bc++ ) { dst->setColor( INDEXOF(rc,gc,bc), - (atqmask&0xff000000) + (amask&0xff000000) | tqRgb( rc*255/MAX_R, gc*255/MAX_G, bc*255/MAX_B ) ); } @@ -4679,12 +4679,12 @@ static bool convert_32_to_8( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int conversion_fl #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_DITHER_TO_1 if ( src->hasAlphaBuffer() ) { const int trans = 216; - dst->setColor(trans, 0x00000000); // transtqparent - TQImage tqmask = src->createAlphaMask(conversion_flags); + dst->setColor(trans, 0x00000000); // transparent + TQImage mask = src->createAlphaMask(conversion_flags); uchar* m; for ( y=0; y < src->height(); y++ ) { uchar bit = 0x80; - m = tqmask.scanLine(y); + m = mask.scanLine(y); b = dst->scanLine(y); int w = src->width(); for ( x = 0; x<w; x++ ) { @@ -5045,7 +5045,7 @@ static bool dither_to_1( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, if ( fromalpha ) { while ( p < end ) { if ( (*p++ >> 24) >= 128 ) - *m |= 1 << bit; // Set tqmask "on" + *m |= 1 << bit; // Set mask "on" if ( bit == 0 ) { m++; bit = 7; @@ -5077,7 +5077,7 @@ static bool dither_to_1( const TQImage *src, TQImage *dst, int bit = 7; while ( p < end ) { if ( gray[*p++] < 128 ) - *m |= 1 << bit; // Set tqmask "on"/ pixel "black" + *m |= 1 << bit; // Set mask "on"/ pixel "black" if ( bit == 0 ) { m++; bit = 7; @@ -6040,7 +6040,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const break; case 8: if ( dImage.data->ncols < 256 ) { - // colors are left in the color table, so pick that one as transtqparent + // colors are left in the color table, so pick that one as transparent dImage.setNumColors( dImage.data->ncols+1 ); dImage.setColor( dImage.data->ncols-1, 0x00 ); memset( dImage.bits(), dImage.data->ncols-1, dImage.numBytes() ); @@ -6069,7 +6069,7 @@ TQImage TQImage::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const #endif /*! - Builds and returns a 1-bpp tqmask from the alpha buffer in this + Builds and returns a 1-bpp mask from the alpha buffer in this image. Returns a \link isNull() null\endlink image if \link setAlphaBuffer() alpha buffer mode\endlink is disabled. @@ -6099,15 +6099,15 @@ TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask( int conversion_flags ) const .createAlphaMask( conversion_flags ); } - TQImage tqmask1; - dither_to_1( this, &tqmask1, conversion_flags, TRUE ); - return tqmask1; + TQImage mask1; + dither_to_1( this, &mask1, conversion_flags, TRUE ); + return mask1; } #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK /*! - Creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic tqmask for this image. It + Creates and returns a 1-bpp heuristic mask for this image. It works by selecting a color from one of the corners, then chipping away pixels of that color starting at all the edges. @@ -6118,8 +6118,8 @@ TQImage TQImage::createAlphaMask( int conversion_flags ) const The returned image has little-endian bit order, which you can convert to big-endianness using convertBitOrder(). - If \a clipTight is TRUE the tqmask is just large enough to cover the - pixels; otherwise, the tqmask is larger than the data pixels. + If \a clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the + pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels. This function disregards the \link hasAlphaBuffer() alpha buffer \endlink. @@ -7644,12 +7644,12 @@ TQDataStream &operator<<( TQDataStream &s, const BMP_INFOHDR &bi ) } static -int calc_shift(int tqmask) +int calc_shift(int mask) { int result = 0; - while (!(tqmask & 1)) { + while (!(mask & 1)) { result++; - tqmask >>= 1; + mask >>= 1; } return result; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp index 79d9542..d6e7d75 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.cpp @@ -298,8 +298,8 @@ public: holderWidget is set immediately after this constructor has been returned on the X11 platform. */ -TQInputContext::TQInputContext( TQObject *tqparent ) - : TQObject( tqparent ) +TQInputContext::TQInputContext( TQObject *parent ) + : TQObject( parent ) { d = new TQInputContextPrivate; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.h index 14a1a7e..b8fb660 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqinputcontext.h @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ class TQInputContext : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQInputContext( TQObject *tqparent = 0 ); + TQInputContext( TQObject *parent = 0 ); virtual ~TQInputContext(); virtual TQString identifierName(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp index 9c3132a..f42cf8e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.cpp @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ int menuBarHeightForWidth( QWidget *menubar_w, int w ) return 0; } -TQLayout::TQLayout( QWidget *tqparent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name ) : QLayout( tqparent ), autoNewChild(false) +TQLayout::TQLayout( QWidget *parent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name ) : QLayout( parent ), autoNewChild(false) { setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); setMargin(margin); @@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ TQLayout::TQLayout( QWidget *tqparent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name setSpacing(margin); else setSpacing(spacing); - if ( tqparent ) tqparent->installEventFilter( this ); - TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(tqparent) + if ( parent ) parent->installEventFilter( this ); + TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(parent) } TQLayout::TQLayout( QLayout *parentLayout, int spacing, const char *name ) : QLayout(), autoNewChild(false) @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ void TQLayout::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQWheelEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ void TQLayout::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQTabletEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -539,10 +539,10 @@ void TQLayout::tabletEvent( TQTabletEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you explicitly \link TQKeyEvent::ignore() ignore\endlink the event - if you do not understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can + if you do not understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it; otherwise, the event will be implicitly accepted. Although top-level widgets are able to choose whether to accept - or ignore unknown events because they have no tqparent widgets that + or ignore unknown events because they have no parent widgets that could otherwise handle them, it is good practice to explicitly ignore events to make widgets as reusable as possible. @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ void TQLayout::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQKeyEvent ignore()\endlink the release if you do not - understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ void TQGridLayout::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQWheelEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -1023,7 +1023,7 @@ void TQGridLayout::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQTabletEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -1045,10 +1045,10 @@ void TQGridLayout::tabletEvent( TQTabletEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you explicitly \link TQKeyEvent::ignore() ignore\endlink the event - if you do not understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can + if you do not understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it; otherwise, the event will be implicitly accepted. Although top-level widgets are able to choose whether to accept - or ignore unknown events because they have no tqparent widgets that + or ignore unknown events because they have no parent widgets that could otherwise handle them, it is good practice to explicitly ignore events to make widgets as reusable as possible. @@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ void TQGridLayout::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQKeyEvent ignore()\endlink the release if you do not - understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -2277,7 +2277,7 @@ inline TQGridLayoutDataIterator::TQGridLayoutDataIterator( TQGridLayoutData *d ) \ingroup appearance \mainclass - TQGridLayout takes the space made available to it (by its tqparent + TQGridLayout takes the space made available to it (by its parent tqlayout or by the mainWidget()), divides it up into rows and columns, and puts each widget it manages into the correct cell. @@ -2321,7 +2321,7 @@ inline TQGridLayoutDataIterator::TQGridLayoutDataIterator( TQGridLayoutData *d ) If the TQGridLayout is not the top-level tqlayout (i.e. does not manage all of the widget's area and tqchildren), you must add it to - its tqparent tqlayout when you create it, but before you do anything + its parent tqlayout when you create it, but before you do anything with it. The normal way to add a tqlayout is by calling parentLayout-\>addLayout(). @@ -2388,16 +2388,16 @@ static bool checkWidget( TQLayout *l, TQWidget *w ) /*! Constructs a new TQGridLayout with \a nRows rows, \a nCols columns - and tqparent widget, \a tqparent. \a tqparent may not be 0. The grid + and parent widget, \a parent. \a parent may not be 0. The grid tqlayout is called \a name. \a margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the widget and its managed tqchildren. \a space is the default number of pixels between cells. If \a space is -1, the value of \a margin is used. */ -TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int nRows, int nCols, int margin, +TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout( TQWidget *parent, int nRows, int nCols, int margin, int space, const char *name ) - : TQLayout( tqparent, margin, space, name ) + : TQLayout( parent, margin, space, name ) { init( nRows, nCols ); } @@ -2405,7 +2405,7 @@ TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int nRows, int nCols, int margin /*! Constructs a new grid that is placed inside \a parentLayout with \a nRows rows and \a nCols columns. If \a spacing is -1, this - TQGridLayout inherits its tqparent's spacing(); otherwise \a spacing + TQGridLayout inherits its parent's spacing(); otherwise \a spacing is used. The grid tqlayout is called \a name. This grid is placed according to \a parentLayout's default @@ -2420,7 +2420,7 @@ TQGridLayout::TQGridLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int nRows, int nCols, /*! Constructs a new grid with \a nRows rows and \a nCols columns. If - \a spacing is -1, this TQGridLayout inherits its tqparent's + \a spacing is -1, this TQGridLayout inherits its parent's spacing(); otherwise \a spacing is used. The grid tqlayout is called \a name. @@ -2691,9 +2691,9 @@ void TQGridLayout::addMultiCellWidget( TQWidget *w, int fromRow, int toRow, \a tqlayout becomes a child of the grid tqlayout. - When a tqlayout is constructed with another tqlayout as its tqparent, + When a tqlayout is constructed with another tqlayout as its parent, you don't need to call addLayout(); the child tqlayout is - automatically added to the tqparent tqlayout as it is constructed. + automatically added to the parent tqlayout as it is constructed. \sa addMultiCellLayout() */ @@ -3046,7 +3046,7 @@ private: \ingroup geomanagement \ingroup appearance - TQBoxLayout takes the space it gets (from its tqparent tqlayout or from + TQBoxLayout takes the space it gets (from its parent tqlayout or from the mainWidget()), divides it up into a row of boxes, and makes each managed widget fill one box. @@ -3071,7 +3071,7 @@ private: If the TQBoxLayout is not the top-level tqlayout (i.e. it is not managing all of the widget's area and tqchildren), you must add it - to its tqparent tqlayout before you can do anything with it. The + to its parent tqlayout before you can do anything with it. The normal way to add a tqlayout is by calling parentLayout-\>addLayout(). @@ -3107,7 +3107,7 @@ private: \endlist The margin defaults to 0. The spacing defaults to the same as the - margin width for a top-level tqlayout, or to the same as the tqparent + margin width for a top-level tqlayout, or to the same as the parent tqlayout. Both are parameters to the constructor. To remove a widget from a tqlayout, call remove(). Calling @@ -3140,7 +3140,7 @@ static inline bool horz( TQBoxLayout::Direction dir ) /*! Constructs a new TQBoxLayout with direction \a d and main widget \a - tqparent. \a tqparent may not be 0. + parent. \a parent may not be 0. The \a margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the widget and its managed tqchildren. The \a spacing is the default @@ -3151,9 +3151,9 @@ static inline bool horz( TQBoxLayout::Direction dir ) \sa direction() */ -TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, Direction d, +TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( TQWidget *parent, Direction d, int margin, int spacing, const char *name ) - : TQLayout( tqparent, margin, spacing, name ) + : TQLayout( parent, margin, spacing, name ) { data = new TQBoxLayoutData; dir = d; @@ -3166,7 +3166,7 @@ TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, Direction d, The \a spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring tqchildren. If \a spacing is -1, the tqlayout will inherit its - tqparent's spacing(). + parent's spacing(). */ TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, Direction d, int spacing, const char *name ) @@ -3180,7 +3180,7 @@ TQBoxLayout::TQBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, Direction d, int spacing, /*! Constructs a new TQBoxLayout called \a name, with direction \a d. - If \a spacing is -1, the tqlayout will inherit its tqparent's + If \a spacing is -1, the tqlayout will inherit its parent's spacing(); otherwise \a spacing is used. You must insert this box into another tqlayout. @@ -3606,9 +3606,9 @@ void TQBoxLayout::addWidget( TQWidget *widget, int stretch, Adds \a tqlayout to the end of the box, with serial stretch factor \a stretch. - When a tqlayout is constructed with another tqlayout as its tqparent, + When a tqlayout is constructed with another tqlayout as its parent, you don't need to call addLayout(); the child tqlayout is - automatically added to the tqparent tqlayout as it is constructed. + automatically added to the parent tqlayout as it is constructed. \sa insertLayout(), setAutoAdd(), addWidget(), addSpacing() */ @@ -3920,16 +3920,16 @@ void TQBoxLayout::calcHfw( int w ) /*! Constructs a new top-level horizontal box called \a name, with - tqparent \a tqparent. + parent \a parent. The \a margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the widget and its managed tqchildren. The \a spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring tqchildren. If \a spacing is -1 the value of \a margin is used for \a spacing. */ -TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int margin, +TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout( TQWidget *parent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name ) - : TQBoxLayout( tqparent, LeftToRight, margin, spacing, name ) + : TQBoxLayout( parent, LeftToRight, margin, spacing, name ) { } @@ -3939,7 +3939,7 @@ TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int margin, The \a spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring tqchildren. If \a spacing is -1, this TQHBoxLayout will inherit its - tqparent's spacing(). + parent's spacing(). */ TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int spacing, const char *name ) @@ -3953,7 +3953,7 @@ TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int spacing, The \a spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring tqchildren. If \a spacing is -1, this TQHBoxLayout will inherit its - tqparent's spacing(). + parent's spacing(). */ TQHBoxLayout::TQHBoxLayout( int spacing, const char *name ) : TQBoxLayout( LeftToRight, spacing, name ) @@ -3995,16 +3995,16 @@ TQHBoxLayout::~TQHBoxLayout() /*! Constructs a new top-level vertical box called \a name, with - tqparent \a tqparent. + parent \a parent. The \a margin is the number of pixels between the edge of the widget and its managed tqchildren. The \a spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring tqchildren. If \a spacing is -1 the value of \a margin is used for \a spacing. */ -TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int margin, int spacing, +TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout( TQWidget *parent, int margin, int spacing, const char *name ) - : TQBoxLayout( tqparent, TopToBottom, margin, spacing, name ) + : TQBoxLayout( parent, TopToBottom, margin, spacing, name ) { } @@ -4015,7 +4015,7 @@ TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int margin, int spacing, The \a spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring tqchildren. If \a spacing is -1, this TQVBoxLayout will inherit its - tqparent's spacing(). + parent's spacing(). */ TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int spacing, const char *name ) @@ -4029,7 +4029,7 @@ TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int spacing, The \a spacing is the default number of pixels between neighboring tqchildren. If \a spacing is -1, this TQVBoxLayout will inherit its - tqparent's spacing(). + parent's spacing(). */ TQVBoxLayout::TQVBoxLayout( int spacing, const char *name ) : TQBoxLayout( TopToBottom, spacing, name ) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.h index 38dd33e..0778bc1 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqlayout.h @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ public: Auto = QLayout::SetDefaultConstraint }; - TQLayout( QWidget *tqparent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); + TQLayout( QWidget *parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQLayout( QLayout *parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQLayout( int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); virtual TQ_SPExpandData expandingDirections() const; @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ public: // ### TQt 4.0: put 'Auto' first in enum enum ResizeMode { FreeResize, Minimum, Fixed, Auto }; - TQLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, + TQLayout( TQWidget *parent, int margin = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQLayout( int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); @@ -686,14 +686,14 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQGridLayout : public QGridLayout, virtual public TQt Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQGridLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int border = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ) : QGridLayout( tqparent ), autoNewChild(false) + TQGridLayout( TQWidget *parent, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int border = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ) : QGridLayout( parent ), autoNewChild(false) { expand(nRows, nCols); setMargin(border); setSpacing(spacing < 0 ? border : spacing); setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); - if ( tqparent ) tqparent->installEventFilter( this ); - TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(tqparent) + if ( parent ) parent->installEventFilter( this ); + TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(parent) } TQGridLayout( int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ) : QGridLayout(), autoNewChild(false) { @@ -948,7 +948,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQGridLayout : public TQLayout Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQGridLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int border = 0, + TQGridLayout( TQWidget *parent, int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int border = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQGridLayout( int nRows = 1, int nCols = 1, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); @@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ public: enum Direction { LeftToRight, RightToLeft, TopToBottom, BottomToTop, Down = TopToBottom, Up = BottomToTop }; - TQBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, Direction, int border = 0, int spacing = -1, + TQBoxLayout( TQWidget *parent, Direction, int border = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, Direction, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); @@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQHBoxLayout : public TQBoxLayout Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQHBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int border = 0, + TQHBoxLayout( TQWidget *parent, int border = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQHBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); @@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQVBoxLayout : public TQBoxLayout Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQVBoxLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int border = 0, + TQVBoxLayout( TQWidget *parent, int border = 0, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); TQVBoxLayout( TQLayout *parentLayout, int spacing = -1, const char *name = 0 ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp index 6b2b17f..0476c8b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmetaobject.cpp @@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::stdSet() const // if ( !testFlags( Override ) || testFlags( Writable ) ) // return testFlags( StdSet ); // const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); -// const TQMetaProperty* tqparent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); -// return tqparent ? tqparent->stdSet() : FALSE; +// const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); +// return parent ? parent->stdSet() : FALSE; // [FIXME] printf("[WARNING] bool TQMetaProperty::stdSet() const unimplemented\n\r"); @@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ int TQMetaObject::indexOfProperty( const TQMetaProperty* prop, bool super ) cons /*!\internal - Returns the tqparent property of property \a p or 0, if the property + Returns the parent property of property \a p or 0, if the property cannot be resolved. \a p has to be contained in this meta object @@ -1535,8 +1535,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::writable() const if ( !testFlags( Override ) || testFlags( Writable ) ) return testFlags( Writable ); const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); - const TQMetaProperty* tqparent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return tqparent ? tqparent->writable() : FALSE; + const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); + return parent ? parent->writable() : FALSE; } /*!\internal @@ -1546,8 +1546,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::stdSet() const if ( !testFlags( Override ) || testFlags( Writable ) ) return testFlags( StdSet ); const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); - const TQMetaProperty* tqparent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return tqparent ? tqparent->stdSet() : FALSE; + const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); + return parent ? parent->stdSet() : FALSE; } /*!\internal @@ -1577,8 +1577,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::isValid() const if ( !testFlags( Override ) || testFlags( Readable ) ) return testFlags( Readable ); const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); - const TQMetaProperty* tqparent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return tqparent ? tqparent->isValid() : FALSE; + const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); + return parent ? parent->isValid() : FALSE; } bool TQMetaProperty::isSetType() const @@ -1659,8 +1659,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::designable( TQObject* o ) const } if ( testFlags( DesignableOverride ) ) { const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); - const TQMetaProperty* tqparent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return tqparent ? tqparent->designable() : FALSE; + const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); + return parent ? parent->designable() : FALSE; } return !testFlags( NotDesignable ); } @@ -1680,8 +1680,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::scriptable( TQObject* o ) const } if ( testFlags( ScriptableOverride ) ) { const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); - const TQMetaProperty* tqparent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return tqparent ? tqparent->scriptable() : FALSE; + const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); + return parent ? parent->scriptable() : FALSE; } return !testFlags( NotScriptable ); } @@ -1703,8 +1703,8 @@ bool TQMetaProperty::stored( TQObject* o ) const } if ( testFlags( StoredOverride ) ) { const TQMetaObject* mo = (*meta); - const TQMetaProperty* tqparent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); - return tqparent ? tqparent->stored() : FALSE; + const TQMetaProperty* parent = mo->resolveProperty( this ); + return parent ? parent->stored() : FALSE; } return !testFlags( NotStored ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp index 87a339c..68d3a5c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqmovie.cpp @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ public: TQDataPump *pump; TQDataSource *source; TQPixmap mypixmap; - TQBitmap mytqmask; + TQBitmap mymask; TQColor bg; int error; @@ -388,12 +388,12 @@ void TQMoviePrivate::updatePixmapFromImage(const TQPoint& off, } else { if (gimg.hasAlphaBuffer()) { // Resize to size of image - if (mytqmask.isNull()) { - mytqmask.resize(gimg.width(), gimg.height()); - mytqmask.fill( TQt::color1 ); + if (mymask.isNull()) { + mymask.resize(gimg.width(), gimg.height()); + mymask.fill( TQt::color1 ); } } - mypixmap.setMask(TQBitmap()); // Remove reference to my tqmask + mypixmap.setMask(TQBitmap()); // Remove reference to my mask copyBlt( &mypixmap, area.left(), area.top(), &lines, off.x(), off.y(), area.width(), area.height() ); } @@ -786,8 +786,8 @@ TQMovie& TQMovie::operator=(const TQMovie& movie) /*! Sets the background color of the pixmap to \a c. If the background - color isValid(), the pixmap will never have a tqmask because the - background color will be used in transtqparent regions of the image. + color isValid(), the pixmap will never have a mask because the + background color will be used in transparent regions of the image. \sa backgroundColor() */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp index 4f465d1..6c93075 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.cpp @@ -73,9 +73,9 @@ public: */ -TQObject::TQObject( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *tqparent, const char *name ) : TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME ( tqparent ) { +TQObject::TQObject( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *parent, const char *name ) : TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME ( parent ) { setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); - TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(tqparent) + TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(parent) } const char * TQObject::name(const char *defaultName) const { @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ const TQObjectList TQObject::objectTreesListObject() { return TQObjectList(); } -TQObject *TQObject::tqparent() const { +TQObject *TQObject::parent() const { return static_cast<TQObject*>(parent()); } @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ static void objSearch( TQObjectList *result, without notice (as soon as the user closes a window you may have dangling pointers, for example). - \sa child() childrenListObject(), tqparent(), inherits(), name(), TQRegExp + \sa child() childrenListObject(), parent(), inherits(), name(), TQRegExp */ TQObjectList *TQObject::queryList( const char *inheritsClass, @@ -851,7 +851,7 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) class MyMainWindow : public TQMainWindow { public: - MyMainWindow( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); protected: bool eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *ev ); @@ -860,8 +860,8 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) TQTextEdit *textEdit; }; - MyMainWindow::MyMainWindow( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQMainWindow( tqparent, name ) + MyMainWindow::MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQMainWindow( parent, name ) { textEdit = new TQTextEdit( this ); setCentralWidget( textEdit ); @@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) return FALSE; } } else { - // pass the event on to the tqparent class + // pass the event on to the parent class return TQMainWindow::eventFilter( obj, ev ); } } @@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ bool TQObject::eventFilter( TQObject * /* watched */, TQEvent * /* e */ ) \relates TQObject Returns a pointer to the object named \a name that inherits \a - type and with a given \a tqparent. + type and with a given \a parent. Returns 0 if there is no such child. @@ -918,10 +918,10 @@ bool TQObject::eventFilter( TQObject * /* watched */, TQEvent * /* e */ ) \endcode */ -void *qt_find_obj_child( TQObject *tqparent, const char *type, const char *name ) +void *qt_find_obj_child( TQObject *parent, const char *type, const char *name ) { - if ( !tqparent->childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) { - TQObjectListIt it( tqparent->childrenListObject() ); + if ( !parent->childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) { + TQObjectListIt it( parent->childrenListObject() ); TQObject *obj; while ( (obj = it.current()) ) { ++it; @@ -1099,9 +1099,9 @@ public: possible to track connections. TQObjects organize themselves in object trees. When you create a - TQObject with another object as tqparent, the object will - automatically do an insertChild() on the tqparent and thus show up - in the tqparent's childrenListObject() list. The tqparent takes ownership of the + TQObject with another object as parent, the object will + automatically do an insertChild() on the parent and thus show up + in the parent's childrenListObject() list. The parent takes ownership of the object i.e. it will automatically delete its tqchildren in its destructor. You can look for an object by name and optionally type using child() or queryList(), and get the list of tree roots using @@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ static void removeObjFromList( TQObjectList *objList, const TQObject *obj, \relates TQObject Returns a pointer to the object named \a name that inherits \a - type and with a given \a tqparent. + type and with a given \a parent. Returns 0 if there is no such child. @@ -1228,10 +1228,10 @@ static void removeObjFromList( TQObjectList *objList, const TQObject *obj, \endcode */ -void *qt_find_obj_child( TQObject *tqparent, const char *type, const char *name ) +void *qt_find_obj_child( TQObject *parent, const char *type, const char *name ) { - if ( !tqparent->childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) { - TQObjectListIt it( tqparent->childrenListObject() ); + if ( !parent->childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) { + TQObjectListIt it( parent->childrenListObject() ); TQObject *obj; while ( (obj = it.current()) ) { ++it; @@ -1340,15 +1340,15 @@ static void remove_tree( TQObject* obj ) *****************************************************************************/ /*! - Constructs an object called \a name with tqparent object, \a tqparent. + Constructs an object called \a name with parent object, \a parent. - The tqparent of an object may be viewed as the object's owner. For - instance, a \link TQDialog dialog box\endlink is the tqparent of the + The parent of an object may be viewed as the object's owner. For + instance, a \link TQDialog dialog box\endlink is the parent of the "OK" and "Cancel" buttons it contains. - The destructor of a tqparent object destroys all child objects. + The destructor of a parent object destroys all child objects. - Setting \a tqparent to 0 constructs an object with no tqparent. If the + Setting \a parent to 0 constructs an object with no parent. If the object is a widget, it will become a top-level window. The object name is some text that can be used to identify a @@ -1357,10 +1357,10 @@ static void remove_tree( TQObject* obj ) object by name (and type) using child(). To find several objects use queryList(). - \sa tqparent(), name(), child(), queryList() + \sa parent(), name(), child(), queryList() */ -TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) +TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : isSignal( FALSE ), // assume not a signal object isWidget( FALSE ), // assume not a widget object @@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) wasDeleted( FALSE ), // double-delete catcher isTree( FALSE ), // no tree yet objname( name ? qstrdup(name) : 0 ), // set object name - parentObj( 0 ), // no tqparent yet. It is set by insertChild() + parentObj( 0 ), // no parent yet. It is set by insertChild() childObjects( 0 ), // no tqchildren yet connections( 0 ), // no connections yet senderObjects( 0 ), // no Q_SIGNALS connected yet @@ -1380,8 +1380,8 @@ TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) if ( !metaObj ) // will create object dict (void) staticMetaObject(); - if ( tqparent ) { // add object to tqparent - tqparent->insertChild( this ); + if ( parent ) { // add object to parent + parent->insertChild( this ); } else { insert_tree( this ); isTree = TRUE; @@ -1397,7 +1397,7 @@ TQObject::TQObject( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) \warning All child objects are deleted. If any of these objects are on the stack or global, sooner or later your program will crash. We do not recommend holding pointers to child objects from - outside the tqparent. If you still do, the TQObject::destroyed() + outside the parent. If you still do, the TQObject::destroyed() signal gives you an opportunity to detect when an object is destroyed. @@ -1431,7 +1431,7 @@ TQObject::~TQObject() remove_tree( this ); // remove from global root list isTree = FALSE; } - if ( parentObj ) // remove it from tqparent object + if ( parentObj ) // remove it from parent object parentObj->removeChild( this ); register TQObject *obj; if ( senderObjects ) { // disconnect from senders @@ -1810,7 +1810,7 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) class MyMainWindow : public TQMainWindow { public: - MyMainWindow( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); protected: bool eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *ev ); @@ -1819,8 +1819,8 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) TQTextEdit *textEdit; }; - MyMainWindow::MyMainWindow( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQMainWindow( tqparent, name ) + MyMainWindow::MyMainWindow( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQMainWindow( parent, name ) { textEdit = new TQTextEdit( this ); setCentralWidget( textEdit ); @@ -1838,7 +1838,7 @@ void TQObject::customEvent( TQCustomEvent * ) return FALSE; } } else { - // pass the event on to the tqparent class + // pass the event on to the parent class return TQMainWindow::eventFilter( obj, ev ); } } @@ -1938,14 +1938,14 @@ void TQObject::blockSignals( bool block ) { TQ_OBJECT public: - MyObject( TQObject *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + MyObject( TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ); protected: void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * ); }; - MyObject::MyObject( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) + MyObject::MyObject( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { startTimer( 50 ); // 50-millisecond timer startTimer( 1000 ); // 1-second timer @@ -2043,9 +2043,9 @@ static void objSearch( TQObjectList *result, } /*! - \fn TQObject *TQObject::tqparent() const + \fn TQObject *TQObject::parent() const - Returns a pointer to the tqparent object. + Returns a pointer to the parent object. \sa childrenListObject() */ @@ -2070,7 +2070,7 @@ static void objSearch( TQObjectList *result, in the list, and a widget that is lowered becomes the first object in the list. - \sa child(), queryList(), tqparent(), insertChild(), removeChild() + \sa child(), queryList(), parent(), insertChild(), removeChild() */ @@ -2085,7 +2085,7 @@ static void objSearch( TQObjectList *result, first\endlink object in the list and the first root object added is the \link TQPtrList::last() last\endlink object in the list. - \sa childrenListObject(), tqparent(), insertChild(), removeChild() + \sa childrenListObject(), parent(), insertChild(), removeChild() */ const TQObjectList *TQObject::objectTrees() { @@ -2140,7 +2140,7 @@ const TQObjectList *TQObject::objectTrees() without notice (as soon as the user closes a window you may have dangling pointers, for example). - \sa child() childrenListObject(), tqparent(), inherits(), name(), TQRegExp + \sa child() childrenListObject(), parent(), inherits(), name(), TQRegExp */ TQObjectList *TQObject::queryList( const char *inheritsClass, @@ -2220,7 +2220,7 @@ TQConnectionList *TQObject::tqreceivers( int signal ) const \warning This function cannot be used to make one widget the child widget of another widget. Child widgets can only be created by - setting the tqparent widget in the constructor or by calling + setting the parent widget in the constructor or by calling TQWidget::reparent(). \sa removeChild(), TQWidget::reparent() @@ -2262,7 +2262,7 @@ void TQObject::insertChild( TQObject *obj ) Removes the child object \a obj from the list of tqchildren. \warning This function will not remove a child widget from the - screen. It will only remove it from the tqparent widget's list of + screen. It will only remove it from the parent widget's list of tqchildren. \sa insertChild(), TQWidget::reparent() diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.h index 347cafe..7e5be4a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobject.h @@ -93,9 +93,9 @@ class TQObject: public QObject, virtual public TQt Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQObject( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQObject( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); - TQObject *tqparent() const; + TQObject *parent() const; TQObjectList childrenListObject(); const TQObjectList childrenListObject() const; const char *tqname() const; @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQObject: public TQt Q_PROPERTY( TQCString name READ name WRITE setName ) public: - TQObject( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQObject( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); virtual ~TQObject(); #ifdef TQ_TQDOC @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Q_SIGNALS: void destroyed( TQObject* obj ); public: - TQObject *tqparent() const { return parentObj; } + TQObject *parent() const { return parentObj; } public Q_SLOTS: void deleteLater(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobjectdefs.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobjectdefs.h index c876898..454019a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobjectdefs.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqobjectdefs.h @@ -248,8 +248,8 @@ class TQObjectListIt; class TQMemberDict; TQ_EXPORT void *qt_find_obj_child( TQObject *, const char *, const char * ); -#define TQ_CHILD(tqparent,type,name) \ - ((type*)qt_find_obj_child(tqparent,#type,name)) +#define TQ_CHILD(parent,type,name) \ + ((type*)qt_find_obj_child(parent,#type,name)) TQ_EXPORT void *qt_inheritedBy( TQMetaObject *super, const TQObject *cls ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp index fd4cc0b..de0695f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpaintdevice_x11.cpp @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ int TQPaintDevice::x11AppDpiY(int screen) TQt::RasterOp documentation defines all the possible values. If \a ignoreMask is FALSE (the default) and \a src is a - masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by \a{src}->tqmask(). + masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by \a{src}->mask(). If \a src, \a dst, \a sw or \a sh is 0, bitBlt() does nothing. If \a sw or \a sh is negative bitBlt() copies starting at \a sx (and @@ -311,11 +311,11 @@ printf("[WARNING] bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevic // sw != pm->width() || sh != pm->height() || ignoreMask ) { // TQPixmap *tmp = new TQPixmap( sw, sh, pm->depth() ); // bitBlt( tmp, 0, 0, pm, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); -// if ( pm->tqmask() && !ignoreMask ) { -// TQBitmap tqmask( sw, sh ); -// bitBlt( &tqmask, 0, 0, pm->tqmask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, +// if ( pm->mask() && !ignoreMask ) { +// TQBitmap mask( sw, sh ); +// bitBlt( &mask, 0, 0, pm->mask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, // TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); -// tmp->setMask( tqmask ); +// tmp->setMask( mask ); // } // pm = tmp; // } else { @@ -389,18 +389,18 @@ printf("[WARNING] bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevic // bool include_inferiors = FALSE; // bool graphics_exposure = FALSE; // TQPixmap *src_pm; -// TQBitmap *tqmask; +// TQBitmap *mask; // // if ( ts == TQInternal::Pixmap ) { // src_pm = (TQPixmap*)src; // if ( src_pm->x11Screen() != dst->x11Screen() ) // src_pm->x11SetScreen( dst->x11Screen() ); // mono_src = src_pm->depth() == 1; -// tqmask = ignoreMask ? 0 : src_pm->data->tqmask; +// mask = ignoreMask ? 0 : src_pm->data->mask; // } else { // src_pm = 0; // mono_src = FALSE; -// tqmask = 0; +// mask = 0; // include_inferiors = ((TQWidget*)src)->testWFlags(TQt::WPaintUnclipped); // graphics_exposure = td == TQInternal::Widget; // } @@ -430,25 +430,25 @@ printf("[WARNING] bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevic // alpha->x11RenderHandle() && // dst->x11RenderHandle()) { // XRenderPictureAttributes pattr; -// ulong pictqmask = 0; +// ulong picmask = 0; // if (include_inferiors) { // pattr.subwindow_mode = IncludeInferiors; -// pictqmask |= CPSubwindowMode; +// picmask |= CPSubwindowMode; // } // if (graphics_exposure) { // pattr.graphics_exposures = TRUE; -// pictqmask |= CPGraphicsExposure; +// picmask |= CPGraphicsExposure; // } -// if (pictqmask) -// XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), pictqmask, &pattr); +// if (picmask) +// XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), picmask, &pattr); // XRenderComposite(dpy, PictOpOver, src->x11RenderHandle(), // alpha->x11RenderHandle(), dst->x11RenderHandle(), // sx, sy, sx, sy, dx, dy, sw, sh); // // restore attributes // pattr.subwindow_mode = ClipByChildren; // pattr.graphics_exposures = FALSE; -// if (pictqmask) -// XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), pictqmask, &pattr); +// if (picmask) +// XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), picmask, &pattr); // return; // } // } @@ -456,25 +456,25 @@ printf("[WARNING] bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevic // // GC gc; // -// if ( tqmask && !mono_src ) { // fast masked blt +// if ( mask && !mono_src ) { // fast masked blt // bool temp_gc = FALSE; -// if ( tqmask->data->maskgc ) { -// gc = (GC)tqmask->data->maskgc; // we have a premade tqmask GC +// if ( mask->data->maskgc ) { +// gc = (GC)mask->data->maskgc; // we have a premade mask GC // } else { // if ( FALSE && src_pm->optimization() == TQPixmap::NormalOptim ) { // #### cache disabled // // Compete for the global cache // gc = cache_mask_gc( dpy, dst->handle(), -// tqmask->data->ser_no, -// tqmask->handle() ); +// mask->data->ser_no, +// mask->handle() ); // } else { -// // Create a new tqmask GC. If BestOptim, we store the tqmask GC -// // with the tqmask (not at the pixmap). This way, many pixmaps -// // which have a common tqmask will be optimized at no extra cost. +// // Create a new mask GC. If BestOptim, we store the mask GC +// // with the mask (not at the pixmap). This way, many pixmaps +// // which have a common mask will be optimized at no extra cost. // gc = XCreateGC( dpy, dst->handle(), 0, 0 ); // XSetGraphicsExposures( dpy, gc, False ); -// XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, tqmask->handle() ); +// XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, mask->handle() ); // if ( src_pm->optimization() == TQPixmap::BestOptim ) { -// tqmask->data->maskgc = gc; +// mask->data->maskgc = gc; // } else { // temp_gc = TRUE; // } @@ -509,14 +509,14 @@ printf("[WARNING] bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevic // XCopyArea( dpy, src->handle(), dst->handle(), gc, sx, sy, sw, sh, dx, dy ); // } else if ( mono_src ) { // src is bitmap // XGCValues gcvals; -// ulong valtqmask = GCBackground | GCForeground | GCFillStyle | +// ulong valmask = GCBackground | GCForeground | GCFillStyle | // GCStipple | GCTileStipXOrigin | GCTileStipYOrigin; // if ( td == TQInternal::Widget ) { // set GC colors // TQWidget *w = (TQWidget *)dst; // gcvals.background = w->backgroundColor().pixel( dst->x11Screen() ); // gcvals.foreground = w->foregroundColor().pixel( dst->x11Screen() ); // if ( include_inferiors ) { -// valtqmask |= GCSubwindowMode; +// valmask |= GCSubwindowMode; // gcvals.subwindow_mode = IncludeInferiors; // } // } else if ( mono_dst ) { @@ -532,31 +532,31 @@ printf("[WARNING] bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, const TQPaintDevic // gcvals.ts_x_origin = dx - sx; // gcvals.ts_y_origin = dy - sy; // -// bool cliptqmask = FALSE; -// if ( tqmask ) { +// bool clipmask = FALSE; +// if ( mask ) { // if ( ((TQPixmap*)src)->data->selfmask ) { // gcvals.fill_style = FillStippled; // } else { -// XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, tqmask->handle() ); +// XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, mask->handle() ); // XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, dx-sx, dy-sy ); -// cliptqmask = TRUE; +// clipmask = TRUE; // } // } // -// XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valtqmask, &gcvals ); +// XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valmask, &gcvals ); // XFillRectangle( dpy,dst->handle(), gc, dx, dy, sw, sh ); // -// valtqmask = GCFillStyle | GCTileStipXOrigin | GCTileStipYOrigin; +// valmask = GCFillStyle | GCTileStipXOrigin | GCTileStipYOrigin; // gcvals.fill_style = FillSolid; // gcvals.ts_x_origin = 0; // gcvals.ts_y_origin = 0; // if ( include_inferiors ) { -// valtqmask |= GCSubwindowMode; +// valmask |= GCSubwindowMode; // gcvals.subwindow_mode = ClipByChildren; // } -// XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valtqmask, &gcvals ); +// XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valmask, &gcvals ); // -// if ( cliptqmask ) { +// if ( clipmask ) { // XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, 0, 0 ); // XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, None ); // } @@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ static void cleanup_mask_gc() } } -static GC cache_mask_gc( Display *dpy, Drawable hd, int mask_no, Pixmap tqmask ) +static GC cache_mask_gc( Display *dpy, Drawable hd, int mask_no, Pixmap mask ) { if ( !init_mask_gc ) { // first time initialization init_mask_gc = TRUE; @@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ static GC cache_mask_gc( Display *dpy, Drawable hd, int mask_no, Pixmap tqmask ) p->gc = XCreateGC( dpy, hd, 0, 0 ); XSetGraphicsExposures( dpy, p->gc, False ); } - XSetClipMask( dpy, p->gc, tqmask ); + XSetClipMask( dpy, p->gc, mask ); p->mask_no = mask_no; } return p->gc; @@ -1390,7 +1390,7 @@ static GC cache_mask_gc( Display *dpy, Drawable hd, int mask_no, Pixmap tqmask ) TQt::RasterOp documentation defines all the possible values. If \a ignoreMask is FALSE (the default) and \a src is a - masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by \a{src}->tqmask(). + masked TQPixmap, the entire blit is masked by \a{src}->mask(). If \a src, \a dst, \a sw or \a sh is 0, bitBlt() does nothing. If \a sw or \a sh is negative bitBlt() copies starting at \a sx (and @@ -1450,11 +1450,11 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, sw != pm->width() || sh != pm->height() || ignoreMask ) { TQPixmap *tmp = new TQPixmap( sw, sh, pm->depth() ); bitBlt( tmp, 0, 0, pm, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); - if ( pm->tqmask() && !ignoreMask ) { - TQBitmap tqmask( sw, sh ); - bitBlt( &tqmask, 0, 0, pm->tqmask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, + if ( pm->mask() && !ignoreMask ) { + TQBitmap mask( sw, sh ); + bitBlt( &mask, 0, 0, pm->mask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); - tmp->setMask( tqmask ); + tmp->setMask( mask ); } pm = tmp; } else { @@ -1528,18 +1528,18 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, bool include_inferiors = FALSE; bool graphics_exposure = FALSE; TQPixmap *src_pm; - TQBitmap *tqmask; + TQBitmap *mask; if ( ts == TQInternal::Pixmap ) { src_pm = (TQPixmap*)src; if ( src_pm->x11Screen() != dst->x11Screen() ) src_pm->x11SetScreen( dst->x11Screen() ); mono_src = src_pm->depth() == 1; - tqmask = ignoreMask ? 0 : src_pm->data->tqmask; + mask = ignoreMask ? 0 : src_pm->data->mask; } else { src_pm = 0; mono_src = FALSE; - tqmask = 0; + mask = 0; include_inferiors = ((TQWidget*)src)->testWFlags(TQt::WPaintUnclipped); graphics_exposure = td == TQInternal::Widget; } @@ -1569,25 +1569,25 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, alpha->x11RenderHandle() && dst->x11RenderHandle()) { XRenderPictureAttributes pattr; - ulong pictqmask = 0; + ulong picmask = 0; if (include_inferiors) { pattr.subwindow_mode = IncludeInferiors; - pictqmask |= CPSubwindowMode; + picmask |= CPSubwindowMode; } if (graphics_exposure) { pattr.graphics_exposures = TRUE; - pictqmask |= CPGraphicsExposure; + picmask |= CPGraphicsExposure; } - if (pictqmask) - XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), pictqmask, &pattr); + if (picmask) + XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), picmask, &pattr); XRenderComposite(dpy, PictOpOver, src->x11RenderHandle(), alpha->x11RenderHandle(), dst->x11RenderHandle(), sx, sy, sx, sy, dx, dy, sw, sh); // restore attributes pattr.subwindow_mode = ClipByChildren; pattr.graphics_exposures = FALSE; - if (pictqmask) - XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), pictqmask, &pattr); + if (picmask) + XRenderChangePicture(dpy, dst->x11RenderHandle(), picmask, &pattr); return; } } @@ -1595,25 +1595,25 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, GC gc; - if ( tqmask && !mono_src ) { // fast masked blt + if ( mask && !mono_src ) { // fast masked blt bool temp_gc = FALSE; - if ( tqmask->data->maskgc ) { - gc = (GC)tqmask->data->maskgc; // we have a premade tqmask GC + if ( mask->data->maskgc ) { + gc = (GC)mask->data->maskgc; // we have a premade mask GC } else { if ( FALSE && src_pm->optimization() == TQPixmap::NormalOptim ) { // #### cache disabled // Compete for the global cache gc = cache_mask_gc( dpy, dst->handle(), - tqmask->data->ser_no, - tqmask->handle() ); + mask->data->ser_no, + mask->handle() ); } else { - // Create a new tqmask GC. If BestOptim, we store the tqmask GC - // with the tqmask (not at the pixmap). This way, many pixmaps - // which have a common tqmask will be optimized at no extra cost. + // Create a new mask GC. If BestOptim, we store the mask GC + // with the mask (not at the pixmap). This way, many pixmaps + // which have a common mask will be optimized at no extra cost. gc = XCreateGC( dpy, dst->handle(), 0, 0 ); XSetGraphicsExposures( dpy, gc, False ); - XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, tqmask->handle() ); + XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, mask->handle() ); if ( src_pm->optimization() == TQPixmap::BestOptim ) { - tqmask->data->maskgc = gc; + mask->data->maskgc = gc; } else { temp_gc = TRUE; } @@ -1648,14 +1648,14 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, XCopyArea( dpy, src->handle(), dst->handle(), gc, sx, sy, sw, sh, dx, dy ); } else if ( mono_src ) { // src is bitmap XGCValues gcvals; - ulong valtqmask = GCBackground | GCForeground | GCFillStyle | + ulong valmask = GCBackground | GCForeground | GCFillStyle | GCStipple | GCTileStipXOrigin | GCTileStipYOrigin; if ( td == TQInternal::Widget ) { // set GC colors TQWidget *w = (TQWidget *)dst; gcvals.background = w->backgroundColor().pixel( dst->x11Screen() ); gcvals.foreground = w->foregroundColor().pixel( dst->x11Screen() ); if ( include_inferiors ) { - valtqmask |= GCSubwindowMode; + valmask |= GCSubwindowMode; gcvals.subwindow_mode = IncludeInferiors; } } else if ( mono_dst ) { @@ -1671,31 +1671,31 @@ void bitBlt( TQPaintDevice *dst, int dx, int dy, gcvals.ts_x_origin = dx - sx; gcvals.ts_y_origin = dy - sy; - bool cliptqmask = FALSE; - if ( tqmask ) { + bool clipmask = FALSE; + if ( mask ) { if ( ((TQPixmap*)src)->data->selfmask ) { gcvals.fill_style = FillStippled; } else { - XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, tqmask->handle() ); + XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, mask->handle() ); XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, dx-sx, dy-sy ); - cliptqmask = TRUE; + clipmask = TRUE; } } - XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valtqmask, &gcvals ); + XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valmask, &gcvals ); XFillRectangle( dpy,dst->handle(), gc, dx, dy, sw, sh ); - valtqmask = GCFillStyle | GCTileStipXOrigin | GCTileStipYOrigin; + valmask = GCFillStyle | GCTileStipXOrigin | GCTileStipYOrigin; gcvals.fill_style = FillSolid; gcvals.ts_x_origin = 0; gcvals.ts_y_origin = 0; if ( include_inferiors ) { - valtqmask |= GCSubwindowMode; + valmask |= GCSubwindowMode; gcvals.subwindow_mode = ClipByChildren; } - XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valtqmask, &gcvals ); + XChangeGC( dpy, gc, valmask, &gcvals ); - if ( cliptqmask ) { + if ( clipmask ) { XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, 0, 0 ); XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, None ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp index 6d48128..0ed8c15 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter.cpp @@ -1528,7 +1528,7 @@ typedef TQPtrStack<TQWMatrix> TQWMatrixStack; \i pen() is the currently set pen; the color or stipple that's used for drawing lines or boundaries. - \i backgroundMode() is \c Opaque or \c Transtqparent, i.e. whether + \i backgroundMode() is \c Opaque or \c Transparent, i.e. whether backgroundColor() is used or not. \i backgroundColor() only applies when backgroundMode() is Opaque @@ -1821,7 +1821,7 @@ typedef TQPtrStack<TQWMatrix> TQWMatrixStack; \value DashDotDotLine one dash, two dots, one dash, two dots. - \value MPenStyle tqmask of the pen styles. + \value MPenStyle mask of the pen styles. \img pen-styles.png Pen Styles */ @@ -1837,7 +1837,7 @@ typedef TQPtrStack<TQWMatrix> TQWMatrixStack; \value SquareCap a square line end that covers the end point and extends beyond it with half the line width. \value RoundCap a rounded line end. - \value MPenCapStyle tqmask of the pen cap styles. + \value MPenCapStyle mask of the pen cap styles. \img pen-cap-styles.png Pen Cap Styles */ @@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ typedef TQPtrStack<TQWMatrix> TQWMatrixStack; meet at an angle, and this area is filled. \value BevelJoin The triangular notch between the two lines is filled. \value RoundJoin A circular arc between the two lines is filled. - \value MPenJoinStyle tqmask of the pen join styles. + \value MPenJoinStyle mask of the pen join styles. \img pen-join-styles.png Pen Join Styles */ @@ -5203,7 +5203,7 @@ TQBrush TQBrush::copy() const \row \i CustomPattern \i set when a pixmap pattern is being used. \endtable - On Windows, dense and custom patterns cannot be transtqparent. + On Windows, dense and custom patterns cannot be transparent. See the \link #details Detailed Description\endlink for a picture of all the styles. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp index 05d5c76..7e68625 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpainter_x11.cpp @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ void TQPainter::flush() The background color is the color that is filled in when drawing opaque text, stippled lines and bitmaps. The background color has - no effect in transtqparent background mode (which is the default). + no effect in transparent background mode (which is the default). \sa backgroundColor() setBackgroundMode() BackgroundMode */ @@ -1504,7 +1504,7 @@ void TQPainter::setBackgroundColor( const TQColor &c ) Sets the background mode of the painter to \a m, which must be either \c TransparentMode (the default) or \c OpaqueMode. - Transtqparent mode draws stippled lines and text without setting the + Transparent mode draws stippled lines and text without setting the background pixels. Opaque mode fills these space with the current background color. @@ -2736,7 +2736,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawCubicBezier( const TQPointArray &a, int index ) The default, (-1, -1), means all the way to the bottom right of the pixmap. - Currently the tqmask of the pixmap or it's alpha channel are ignored + Currently the mask of the pixmap or it's alpha channel are ignored when painting on a TQPrinter. \sa bitBlt(), TQPixmap::setMask() @@ -2786,11 +2786,11 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, sw != pixmap.width() || sh != pixmap.height() ) { TQPixmap tmp( sw, sh, pixmap.depth() ); bitBlt( &tmp, 0, 0, &pixmap, sx, sy, sw, sh, CopyROP, TRUE ); - if ( pixmap.tqmask() ) { - TQBitmap tqmask( sw, sh ); - bitBlt( &tqmask, 0, 0, pixmap.tqmask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, + if ( pixmap.mask() ) { + TQBitmap mask( sw, sh ); + bitBlt( &mask, 0, 0, pixmap.mask(), sx, sy, sw, sh, CopyROP, TRUE ); - tmp.setMask( tqmask ); + tmp.setMask( mask ); } drawPixmap( x, y, tmp ); return; @@ -2809,7 +2809,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, dx(), dy() ); mat = TQPixmap::trueMatrix( mat, sw, sh ); TQPixmap pm = pixmap.xForm( mat ); - if ( !pm.tqmask() && txop == TxRotShear ) { + if ( !pm.mask() && txop == TxRotShear ) { TQBitmap bm_clip( sw, sh, 1 ); bm_clip.fill( color1 ); pm.setMask( bm_clip.xForm(mat) ); @@ -2827,10 +2827,10 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, map( x, y, &x, &y ); } - TQBitmap *tqmask = (TQBitmap *)pixmap.tqmask(); + TQBitmap *mask = (TQBitmap *)pixmap.mask(); bool mono = pixmap.depth() == 1; - if ( tqmask && !hasClipping() && pdev != paintEventDevice ) { + if ( mask && !hasClipping() && pdev != paintEventDevice ) { if ( mono ) { // needs GCs pen color bool selfmask = pixmap.data->selfmask; if ( selfmask ) { @@ -2839,7 +2839,7 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, } else { XSetFillStyle( dpy, gc, FillOpaqueStippled ); XSetStipple( dpy, gc, pixmap.handle() ); - XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, tqmask->handle() ); + XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, mask->handle() ); XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, x-sx, y-sy ); } XSetTSOrigin( dpy, gc, x-sx, y-sy ); @@ -2861,9 +2861,9 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, TQRegion rgn = crgn; - if ( tqmask ) { // pixmap has clip tqmask + if ( mask ) { // pixmap has clip mask // Implies that clipping is on, either explicit or implicit - // Create a new tqmask that combines the tqmask with the clip region + // Create a new mask that combines the mask with the clip region if ( pdev == paintEventDevice && paintEventClipRegion ) { if ( hasClipping() ) @@ -2883,15 +2883,15 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, XRectangle *rects = (XRectangle *)qt_getClipRects( rgn, num ); XSetClipRectangles( dpy, cgc, -x, -y, rects, num, YXBanded ); XSetFillStyle( dpy, cgc, FillOpaqueStippled ); - XSetStipple( dpy, cgc, tqmask->handle() ); + XSetStipple( dpy, cgc, mask->handle() ); XSetTSOrigin( dpy, cgc, -sx, -sy ); XFillRectangle( dpy, comb->handle(), cgc, 0, 0, sw, sh ); XSetTSOrigin( dpy, cgc, 0, 0 ); // restore cgc XSetFillStyle( dpy, cgc, FillSolid ); XSetClipMask( dpy, cgc, None ); - tqmask = comb; // it's deleted below + mask = comb; // it's deleted below - XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, tqmask->handle() ); + XSetClipMask( dpy, gc, mask->handle() ); XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, x, y ); } @@ -2920,10 +2920,10 @@ void TQPainter::drawPixmap( int x, int y, const TQPixmap &pixmap, } } - if ( tqmask ) { // restore clipping + if ( mask ) { // restore clipping XSetClipOrigin( dpy, gc, 0, 0 ); XSetRegion( dpy, gc, rgn.handle() ); - delete tqmask; // delete comb, created above + delete mask; // delete comb, created above } } @@ -3010,11 +3010,11 @@ void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap( int x, int y, int w, int h, - not an external tqdevice - not scale or rotshear - not mono pixmap - - no tqmask + - no mask */ - TQBitmap *tqmask = (TQBitmap *)pixmap.tqmask(); + TQBitmap *mask = (TQBitmap *)pixmap.mask(); if ( !testf(ExtDev) && txop <= TxTranslate && pixmap.depth() > 1 && - tqmask == 0 ) { + mask == 0 ) { if ( txop == TxTranslate ) map( x, y, &x, &y ); @@ -3074,10 +3074,10 @@ void TQPainter::drawTiledPixmap( int x, int y, int w, int h, } TQPixmap tile( tw, th, pixmap.depth(), TQPixmap::NormalOptim ); fillTile( &tile, pixmap ); - if ( tqmask ) { - TQBitmap tiletqmask( tw, th, TQPixmap::NormalOptim ); - fillTile( &tiletqmask, *tqmask ); - tile.setMask( tiletqmask ); + if ( mask ) { + TQBitmap tilemask( tw, th, TQPixmap::NormalOptim ); + fillTile( &tilemask, *mask ); + tile.setMask( tilemask ); } drawTile( this, x, y, w, h, tile, sx, sy ); } else { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp index 8fb5380..0e0cfee 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.cpp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ #define VERIFY_TQPIXMAP_OBJECT_FUNCTION(x) \ if (!dynamic_cast<const TQPixmap*>(static_cast<const QPixmap*>(this))) { \ - printf("[WARNING] An attempt was made to access the TQPixmap::tqmask method from an object not of type TQPixmap [possibly QPixmap]\n\r\tThis may indicate creation and subsequent [illegal] downcasting of a QPixmap object to a TQPixmap object within your application\n\r\tNo pixmap was returned\n\r"); \ + printf("[WARNING] An attempt was made to access the TQPixmap::mask method from an object not of type TQPixmap [possibly QPixmap]\n\r\tThis may indicate creation and subsequent [illegal] downcasting of a QPixmap object to a TQPixmap object within your application\n\r\tNo pixmap was returned\n\r"); \ return x; \ } @@ -201,12 +201,12 @@ TQt::HANDLE TQPixmap::x11AppRootWindow( int screen ) { return QX11Info::appRootWindow(screen); } -const TQBitmap *TQPixmap::tqmask() const { +const TQBitmap *TQPixmap::mask() const { // HACK // Make absolutely sure that this is a TQPixmap object! VERIFY_TQPIXMAP_OBJECT_FUNCTION(0) - const QBitmap& ptrRef = mask(); + const QBitmap& ptrRef = QPixmap::mask(); if (ptrRef.isNull() == true) { return 0; } @@ -241,8 +241,8 @@ void TQPixmap::resize_helper(const QSize s) } // Mask too.... - if (!mask().isNull()) { - TQBitmap m = mask(); + if (!QPixmap::mask().isNull()) { + TQBitmap m = QPixmap::mask(); if (m.size() != QSize(w,h)) { TQBitmap pmr(QSize(w, h)); pmr.fill(Qt::color0); @@ -466,8 +466,8 @@ TQBitmap TQPixmap::createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight ) const { You can retrieve the width(), height(), depth() and size() of a pixmap. The enclosing rectangle is given by rect(). Pixmaps can be filled with fill() and resized with resize(). You can create and - set a tqmask with createHeuristicMask() and setMask(). Use - selfMask() to see if the pixmap is identical to its tqmask. + set a mask with createHeuristicMask() and setMask(). Use + selfMask() to see if the pixmap is identical to its mask. In addition to loading a pixmap from file using load() you can also loadFromData(). You can control optimization with @@ -1047,11 +1047,11 @@ void TQPixmap::resize( int w, int h ) qWarning("TQPixmap::resize: TODO: resize alpha data"); else #endif // TQ_WS_X11 - if ( data->tqmask ) { // resize tqmask as well - if ( data->selfmask ) { // preserve self-tqmask + if ( data->mask ) { // resize mask as well + if ( data->selfmask ) { // preserve self-mask pm.setMask( *((TQBitmap*)&pm) ); - } else { // independent tqmask - TQBitmap m = *data->tqmask; + } else { // independent mask + TQBitmap m = *data->mask; m.resize( w, h ); pm.setMask( m ); } @@ -1061,53 +1061,53 @@ void TQPixmap::resize( int w, int h ) /*! - \fn const TQBitmap *TQPixmap::tqmask() const + \fn const TQBitmap *TQPixmap::mask() const - Returns the tqmask bitmap, or 0 if no tqmask has been set. + Returns the mask bitmap, or 0 if no mask has been set. \sa setMask(), TQBitmap, hasAlpha() */ /*! - Sets a tqmask bitmap. + Sets a mask bitmap. - The \a newtqmask bitmap defines the clip tqmask for this pixmap. Every - pixel in \a newtqmask corresponds to a pixel in this pixmap. Pixel - value 1 means opaque and pixel value 0 means transtqparent. The tqmask + The \a newmask bitmap defines the clip mask for this pixmap. Every + pixel in \a newmask corresponds to a pixel in this pixmap. Pixel + value 1 means opaque and pixel value 0 means transparent. The mask must have the same size as this pixmap. - \warning Setting the tqmask on a pixmap will cause any alpha channel + \warning Setting the mask on a pixmap will cause any alpha channel data to be cleared. For example: \code TQPixmap alpha( "image-with-alpha.png" ); TQPixmap alphacopy = alpha; - alphacopy.setMask( *alphacopy.tqmask() ); + alphacopy.setMask( *alphacopy.mask() ); \endcode Now, alpha and alphacopy are visually different. - Setting a \link isNull() null\endlink tqmask resets the tqmask. + Setting a \link isNull() null\endlink mask resets the mask. - \sa tqmask(), createHeuristicMask(), TQBitmap + \sa mask(), createHeuristicMask(), TQBitmap */ -void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newtqmask ) +void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newmask ) { - const TQPixmap *tmp = &newtqmask; // dec cxx bug + const TQPixmap *tmp = &newmask; // dec cxx bug if ( (data == tmp->data) || - ( newtqmask.handle() && newtqmask.handle() == handle() ) ) { + ( newmask.handle() && newmask.handle() == handle() ) ) { TQPixmap m = tmp->copy( TRUE ); setMask( *((TQBitmap*)&m) ); - data->selfmask = TRUE; // tqmask == pixmap + data->selfmask = TRUE; // mask == pixmap return; } - if ( newtqmask.isNull() ) { // reset the tqmask - if (data->tqmask) { + if ( newmask.isNull() ) { // reset the mask + if (data->mask) { detach(); data->selfmask = FALSE; - delete data->tqmask; - data->tqmask = 0; + delete data->mask; + data->mask = 0; } return; } @@ -1115,48 +1115,48 @@ void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newtqmask ) detach(); data->selfmask = FALSE; - if ( newtqmask.width() != width() || newtqmask.height() != height() ) { + if ( newmask.width() != width() || newmask.height() != height() ) { #if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE) - qWarning( "TQPixmap::setMask: The pixmap and the tqmask must have " + qWarning( "TQPixmap::setMask: The pixmap and the mask must have " "the same size" ); #endif return; } #if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) || (defined(TQ_WS_X11) && !defined(TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE)) - // when setting the tqmask, we get rid of the alpha channel completely + // when setting the mask, we get rid of the alpha channel completely delete data->alphapm; data->alphapm = 0; #endif // TQ_WS_X11 && !TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE - delete data->tqmask; + delete data->mask; TQBitmap* newmaskcopy; - if ( newtqmask.tqmask() ) + if ( newmask.mask() ) newmaskcopy = (TQBitmap*)new TQPixmap( tmp->copy( TRUE ) ); else - newmaskcopy = new TQBitmap( newtqmask ); + newmaskcopy = new TQBitmap( newmask ); #ifdef TQ_WS_X11 newmaskcopy->x11SetScreen( x11Screen() ); #endif - data->tqmask = newmaskcopy; + data->mask = newmaskcopy; } /*! \fn bool TQPixmap::selfMask() const - Returns TRUE if the pixmap's tqmask is identical to the pixmap + Returns TRUE if the pixmap's mask is identical to the pixmap itself; otherwise returns FALSE. - \sa tqmask() + \sa mask() */ #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK /*! - Creates and returns a heuristic tqmask for this pixmap. It works by + Creates and returns a heuristic mask for this pixmap. It works by selecting a color from one of the corners and then chipping away pixels of that color, starting at all the edges. - The tqmask may not be perfect but it should be reasonable, so you + The mask may not be perfect but it should be reasonable, so you can do things such as the following: \code pm->setMask( pm->createHeuristicMask() ); @@ -1166,8 +1166,8 @@ void TQPixmap::setMask( const TQBitmap &newtqmask ) TQImage, non-trivial computations and a transformation back to a TQBitmap. - If \a clipTight is TRUE the tqmask is just large enough to cover the - pixels; otherwise, the tqmask is larger than the data pixels. + If \a clipTight is TRUE the mask is just large enough to cover the + pixels; otherwise, the mask is larger than the data pixels. \sa TQImage::createHeuristicMask() */ @@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ static TQPixmap grabChildWidgets( TQWidget * w ) ((TQWidget *)child)->tqgeometry().intersects( w->rect() ) ) { // those conditions aren't quite right, it's possible // to have a grandchild completely outside its - // grandtqparent, but partially inside its tqparent. no + // grandparent, but partially inside its parent. no // point in optimizing for that. // make sure to evaluate pos() first - who knows what diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h index 13a0a2c..a489706 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap.h @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ public: TQBitmap createHeuristicMask( bool clipTight = TRUE ) const; #endif - const TQBitmap *tqmask() const; + const TQBitmap *mask() const; TQImage convertToImage() const; bool selfMask() const; @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ public: void resize( int width, int height ); void resize( const TQSize & ); - const TQBitmap *tqmask() const; + const TQBitmap *mask() const; void setMask( const TQBitmap & ); bool selfMask() const; bool hasAlpha() const; @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ protected: uint mcp : 1; #endif int ser_no; - TQBitmap *tqmask; + TQBitmap *mask; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) TQPixmap *maskpm; union { @@ -425,9 +425,9 @@ inline void TQPixmap::resize( const TQSize &s ) resize( s.width(), s.height() ); } -inline const TQBitmap *TQPixmap::tqmask() const +inline const TQBitmap *TQPixmap::mask() const { - return data->tqmask; + return data->mask; } inline bool TQPixmap::selfMask() const diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp index 37bb0ee..1caf3a3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpixmap_x11.cpp @@ -482,7 +482,7 @@ void TQPixmap::init( int w, int h, int d, bool bitmap, Optimization optim ) void TQPixmap::deref() { if ( data && data->deref() ) { // last reference lost - delete data->tqmask; + delete data->mask; delete data->alphapm; if ( data->ximage ) qSafeXDestroyImage( (XImage*)data->ximage ); @@ -617,8 +617,8 @@ int TQPixmap::defaultDepth() Sets pixmap drawing optimization for this pixmap. The \a optimization setting affects pixmap operations, in - particular drawing of transtqparent pixmaps (bitBlt() a pixmap with - a tqmask set) and pixmap transformations (the xForm() function). + particular drawing of transparent pixmaps (bitBlt() a pixmap with + a mask set) and pixmap transformations (the xForm() function). Pixmap optimization involves keeping intermediate results in a cache buffer and using the cache to speed up bitBlt() and xForm(). @@ -781,7 +781,7 @@ TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage() const return image; } - const TQPixmap* msk = tqmask(); + const TQPixmap* msk = mask(); const TQPixmap *alf = data->alphapm; TQImage alpha; @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ TQImage TQPixmap::convertToImage() const image.setColor( trans, 0x00000000 ); } else { image.setNumColors( ncols ); // create color table - // oh dear... no spare "transtqparent" pixel. + // oh dear... no spare "transparent" pixel. // use first pixel in image (as good as any). trans = image.scanLine( i )[0]; } @@ -1128,9 +1128,9 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) if ( w >= 32768 || h >= 32768 ) return FALSE; - // get rid of the tqmask - delete data->tqmask; - data->tqmask = 0; + // get rid of the mask + delete data->mask; + data->mask = 0; // get rid of alpha pixmap delete data->alphapm; @@ -1404,18 +1404,18 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) ? g << green_shift : g >> -green_shift; \ b = blue_shift > 0 \ ? b << blue_shift : b >> -blue_shift; \ - pixel = (r & red_tqmask)|(g & green_tqmask) | (b & blue_tqmask) \ + pixel = (r & red_mask)|(g & green_mask) | (b & blue_mask) \ | ~(blue_mask | green_mask | red_mask); \ } -// optimized case - no d8 case, shift only once instead of twice, tqmask only once instead of twice, +// optimized case - no d8 case, shift only once instead of twice, mask only once instead of twice, // use direct values instead of variables, and use only one statement // (*p >> 16), (*p >> 8 ) and (*p) are tqRed(),tqGreen() and tqBlue() without masking // shifts have to be passed including the shift operator (e.g. '>>3'), because of the direction -#define GET_PIXEL_OPT(red_shift,green_shift,blue_shift,red_tqmask,green_tqmask,blue_tqmask) \ - int pixel = ((( *p >> 16 ) red_shift ) & red_tqmask ) \ - | ((( *p >> 8 ) green_shift ) & green_tqmask ) \ - | ((( *p ) blue_shift ) & blue_tqmask ); \ +#define GET_PIXEL_OPT(red_shift,green_shift,blue_shift,red_mask,green_mask,blue_mask) \ + int pixel = ((( *p >> 16 ) red_shift ) & red_mask ) \ + | ((( *p >> 8 ) green_shift ) & green_mask ) \ + | ((( *p ) blue_shift ) & blue_mask ); \ ++p; @@ -1443,7 +1443,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) // again, optimized case // can't be optimized that much :( -#define GET_PIXEL_DITHER_TC_OPT(red_shift,green_shift,blue_shift,red_tqmask,green_tqmask,blue_tqmask, \ +#define GET_PIXEL_DITHER_TC_OPT(red_shift,green_shift,blue_shift,red_mask,green_mask,blue_mask, \ rbits,gbits,bbits) \ const int thres = D[x%16][y%16]; \ int r = tqRed ( *p ); \ @@ -1458,9 +1458,9 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) if ( b <= (255-(1<<(8-bbits))) && ((b<<bbits) & 255) \ > thres) \ b += (1<<(8-bbits)); \ - int pixel = (( r red_shift ) & red_tqmask ) \ - | (( g green_shift ) & green_tqmask ) \ - | (( b blue_shift ) & blue_tqmask ); + int pixel = (( r red_shift ) & red_mask ) \ + | (( g green_shift ) & green_mask ) \ + | (( b blue_shift ) & blue_mask ); #define CYCLE(body) \ for ( uint y=0; y<h; y++ ) { \ @@ -1841,7 +1841,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::convertFromImage( const TQImage &img, int conversion_flags ) setMask( m ); #ifndef TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE - // does this image have an alphamap (and not just a 1bpp tqmask)? + // does this image have an alphamap (and not just a 1bpp mask)? bool alphamap = image.depth() == 32; if (image.depth() == 8) { const TQRgb * const rgb = image.colorTable(); @@ -2221,11 +2221,11 @@ TQPixmap TQPixmap::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const TQPixmap pm( w, h, dptr, TQImage::systemBitOrder() != TQImage::BigEndian ); pm.data->bitmap = data->bitmap; free( dptr ); - if ( data->tqmask ) { - if ( data->selfmask ) // pixmap == tqmask + if ( data->mask ) { + if ( data->selfmask ) // pixmap == mask pm.setMask( *((TQBitmap*)(&pm)) ); else - pm.setMask( data->tqmask->xForm(matrix) ); + pm.setMask( data->mask->xForm(matrix) ); } return pm; } else { // color pixmap @@ -2246,8 +2246,8 @@ TQPixmap TQPixmap::xForm( const TQWMatrix &matrix ) const } #endif - if ( data->tqmask ) // xform tqmask, too - pm.setMask( data->tqmask->xForm(matrix) ); + if ( data->mask ) // xform mask, too + pm.setMask( data->mask->xForm(matrix) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE if ( qt_use_xrender && qt_has_xft && data->alphapm ) { // xform the alpha channel @@ -2359,23 +2359,23 @@ void TQPixmap::x11SetScreen( int screen ) } /*! - Returns TRUE this pixmap has an alpha channel or a tqmask. + Returns TRUE this pixmap has an alpha channel or a mask. - \sa hasAlphaChannel() tqmask() + \sa hasAlphaChannel() mask() */ bool TQPixmap::hasAlpha() const { - return data->alphapm || data->tqmask; + return data->alphapm || data->mask; } /*! Returns TRUE if the pixmap has an alpha channel; otherwise it returns FALSE. - NOTE: If the pixmap has a tqmask but not alpha channel, this + NOTE: If the pixmap has a mask but not alpha channel, this function returns FALSE. - \sa hasAlpha() tqmask() + \sa hasAlpha() mask() */ bool TQPixmap::hasAlphaChannel() const { @@ -2386,7 +2386,7 @@ bool TQPixmap::hasAlphaChannel() const \relates TQPixmap Copies a block of pixels from \a src to \a dst. The alpha channel - and tqmask data (if any) is also copied from \a src. NOTE: \a src + and mask data (if any) is also copied from \a src. NOTE: \a src is \e not alpha blended or masked when copied to \a dst. Use bitBlt() or TQPainter::drawPixmap() to perform alpha blending or masked drawing. @@ -2416,17 +2416,17 @@ TQ_EXPORT void copyBlt( TQPixmap *dst, int dx, int dy, // copy pixel data bitBlt( dst, dx, dy, src, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); - // copy tqmask data - if ( src->data->tqmask ) { - if ( ! dst->data->tqmask ) { - dst->data->tqmask = new TQBitmap( dst->width(), dst->height() ); + // copy mask data + if ( src->data->mask ) { + if ( ! dst->data->mask ) { + dst->data->mask = new TQBitmap( dst->width(), dst->height() ); // new masks are fully opaque by default - dst->data->tqmask->fill( TQt::color1 ); + dst->data->mask->fill( TQt::color1 ); } - bitBlt( dst->data->tqmask, dx, dy, - src->data->tqmask, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); + bitBlt( dst->data->mask, dx, dy, + src->data->mask, sx, sy, sw, sh, TQt::CopyROP, TRUE ); } #ifndef TQT_NO_XFTFREETYPE diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter.h index a719a95..e1e6cc5 100755 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter.h @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ public: bool abort(); bool aborted() const; - bool setup( TQWidget *tqparent = 0 ); + bool setup( TQWidget *parent = 0 ); PaperSource paperSource() const; virtual void setPaperSource( PaperSource ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp index 0472479..8094686 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprinter_unix.cpp @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ bool TQPrinter::cmd( int c, TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) // // // try to replace this process with "true" - this prevents // // global destructors from being called (that could possibly -// // do wrong things to the tqparent process) +// // do wrong things to the parent process) // (void)execlp("true", "true", (char *)0); // (void)execl("/bin/true", "true", (char *)0); // (void)execl("/usr/bin/true", "true", (char *)0); @@ -200,13 +200,13 @@ bool TQPrinter::cmd( int c, TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) // (void)execv( "/usr/bin/lpr", lprargs); // } // // if we couldn't exec anything, close the fd, -// // wait for a second so the tqparent process (the +// // wait for a second so the parent process (the // // child of the GUI process) has exited. then // // exit. // ::close( 0 ); // (void)::sleep( 1 ); // ::exit( 0 ); -// } else { // tqparent process +// } else { // parent process // ::close( fds[0] ); // pdrv = new TQPSPrinter( this, fds[1] ); // state = PST_ACTIVE; @@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ static void deleteGlobalPrinterDefaults() } /*! - Opens a printer setup dialog, with tqparent \a tqparent, and asks the + Opens a printer setup dialog, with parent \a parent, and asks the user to specify which printer they wish to use and what settings it should have. @@ -427,10 +427,10 @@ static void deleteGlobalPrinterDefaults() user canceled the operation. */ -bool TQPrinter::setup( TQWidget * tqparent ) +bool TQPrinter::setup( TQWidget * parent ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_PRINTDIALOG - bool result = TQPrintDialog::getPrinterSetup( this, tqparent ); + bool result = TQPrintDialog::getPrinterSetup( this, parent ); #else bool result = FALSE; #endif @@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ bool TQPrinter::cmd( int c, TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) // try to replace this process with "true" - this prevents // global destructors from being called (that could possibly - // do wrong things to the tqparent process) + // do wrong things to the parent process) (void)execlp("true", "true", (char *)0); (void)execl("/bin/true", "true", (char *)0); (void)execl("/usr/bin/true", "true", (char *)0); @@ -619,13 +619,13 @@ bool TQPrinter::cmd( int c, TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) (void)execv( "/usr/bin/lpr", lprargs); } // if we couldn't exec anything, close the fd, - // wait for a second so the tqparent process (the + // wait for a second so the parent process (the // child of the GUI process) has exited. then // exit. ::close( 0 ); (void)::sleep( 1 ); ::exit( 0 ); - } else { // tqparent process + } else { // parent process ::close( fds[0] ); pdrv = new TQPSPrinter( this, fds[1] ); state = PST_ACTIVE; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp index c85e2de..8249ff2 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.cpp @@ -219,13 +219,13 @@ */ /*! - Constructs a TQProcess object. The \a tqparent and \a name parameters + Constructs a TQProcess object. The \a parent and \a name parameters are passed to the TQObject constructor. \sa setArguments() addArgument() start() */ -TQProcess::TQProcess( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), +TQProcess::TQProcess( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), wroteToStdinConnected( FALSE ), readStdoutCalled( FALSE ), readStderrCalled( FALSE ), comms( Stdin|Stdout|Stderr ) @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ TQProcess::TQProcess( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs a TQProcess with \a arg0 as the command to be executed. - The \a tqparent and \a name parameters are passed to the TQObject + The \a parent and \a name parameters are passed to the TQObject constructor. The process is not started. You must call start() or launch() to @@ -243,8 +243,8 @@ TQProcess::TQProcess( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) \sa setArguments() addArgument() start() */ -TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), +TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), wroteToStdinConnected( FALSE ), readStdoutCalled( FALSE ), readStderrCalled( FALSE ), comms( Stdin|Stdout|Stderr ) @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name Constructs a TQProcess with \a args as the arguments of the process. The first element in the list is the command to be executed. The other elements in the list are the arguments to this - command. The \a tqparent and \a name parameters are passed to the + command. The \a parent and \a name parameters are passed to the TQObject constructor. The process is not started. You must call start() or launch() to @@ -265,8 +265,8 @@ TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name \sa setArguments() addArgument() start() */ -TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQStringList& args, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), +TQProcess::TQProcess( const TQStringList& args, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ), ioRedirection( FALSE ), notifyOnExit( FALSE ), wroteToStdinConnected( FALSE ), readStdoutCalled( FALSE ), readStderrCalled( FALSE ), comms( Stdin|Stdout|Stderr ) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.h index ad00b30..741077c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqprocess.h @@ -58,9 +58,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQProcess : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQProcess( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); - TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); - TQProcess( const TQStringList& args, TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQProcess( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQProcess( const TQString& arg0, TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQProcess( const TQStringList& args, TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); ~TQProcess(); // set and get the arguments and working directory diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp index f881bf8..0109512 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqpsprinter.cpp @@ -148,8 +148,8 @@ static const char *const ps_header = "TQCIcolor length 3 idiv 1 sub{/TQCIindex ED/x TQCIindex 3 mul d TQCIgray\n" "TQCIindex TQCIcolor x get 0.30 mul TQCIcolor x 1 add get 0.59 mul TQCIcolor x 2\n" "add get 0.11 mul add add cvi put}for TQCIgray image}ie}D/di{gsave TR 1 i 1 eq\n" -"{false eq{pop true 3 1 roll 4 i 4 i false 4 i 4 i imagetqmask BkCol SC\n" -"imagetqmask}{pop false 3 1 roll imagetqmask}ie}{dup false ne{/languagelevel\n" +"{false eq{pop true 3 1 roll 4 i 4 i false 4 i 4 i imagemask BkCol SC\n" +"imagemask}{pop false 3 1 roll imagemask}ie}{dup false ne{/languagelevel\n" "where{pop languagelevel 3 ge}{false}ie}{false}ie{/ma ED 8 eq{/dc[0 1]d\n" "/DeviceGray}{/dc[0 1 0 1 0 1]d/DeviceRGB}ie scs/im ED/mt ED/h ED/w ED/id 7\n" "DB/ImageType 1 d/Width w d/Height h d/ImageMatrix mt d/DataSource im d\n" @@ -1379,7 +1379,7 @@ public: void resetDrawingTools( TQPainter * ); void emitHeader( bool finished ); void setFont( const TQFont &, int script ); - void drawImage( TQPainter *, float x, float y, float w, float h, const TQImage &img, const TQImage &tqmask ); + void drawImage( TQPainter *, float x, float y, float w, float h, const TQImage &img, const TQImage &mask ); void initPage( TQPainter *paint ); void flushPage( bool last = FALSE ); @@ -5807,7 +5807,7 @@ static const char * psJoin( TQt::PenJoinStyle p ) { void TQPSPrinterPrivate::drawImage( TQPainter *paint, float x, float y, float w, float h, - const TQImage &img, const TQImage &tqmask ) + const TQImage &img, const TQImage &mask ) { if ( !w || !h || img.isNull() ) return; @@ -5831,7 +5831,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::drawImage( TQPainter *paint, float x, float y, float w, while( suby < height ) { drawImage(paint, x, y + suby/scaleY, w, TQMIN( subheight, height-suby )/scaleY, img.copy( 0, suby, width, TQMIN( subheight, height-suby ) ), - tqmask.isNull() ? tqmask : tqmask.copy( 0, suby, width, TQMIN( subheight, height-suby ) )); + mask.isNull() ? mask : mask.copy( 0, suby, width, TQMIN( subheight, height-suby ) )); suby += subheight; } } else { @@ -5839,10 +5839,10 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::drawImage( TQPainter *paint, float x, float y, float w, int size = 0; const char *bits; - if ( !tqmask.isNull() ) { - out = ::compress( tqmask, TRUE ); + if ( !mask.isNull() ) { + out = ::compress( mask, TRUE ); size = (width+7)/8*height; - pageStream << "/tqmask " << size << " string uc\n"; + pageStream << "/mask " << size << " string uc\n"; ps_r7( pageStream, out, out.size() ); pageStream << "d\n"; } @@ -5862,7 +5862,7 @@ void TQPSPrinterPrivate::drawImage( TQPainter *paint, float x, float y, float w, ps_r7( pageStream, out, out.size() ); pageStream << "d\n" << width << ' ' << height << "[" << scaleX << " 0 0 " << scaleY << " 0 0]sl " - << bits << (!tqmask.isNull() ? "tqmask " : "false ") + << bits << (!mask.isNull() ? "mask " : "false ") << x << ' ' << y << " di\n"; } } @@ -6486,10 +6486,10 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) TQRect r = *p[0].rect; TQImage img; img = *(p[1].pixmap); - TQImage tqmask; - if ( p[1].pixmap->tqmask() ) - tqmask = *(p[1].pixmap->tqmask()); - d->drawImage(paint, r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), img, tqmask); + TQImage mask; + if ( p[1].pixmap->mask() ) + mask = *(p[1].pixmap->mask()); + d->drawImage(paint, r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), img, mask); break; } case PdcDrawImage: { @@ -6497,12 +6497,12 @@ bool TQPSPrinter::cmd( int c , TQPainter *paint, TQPDevCmdParam *p ) break; TQRect r = *(p[0].rect); TQImage img = *(p[1].image); - TQImage tqmask; + TQImage mask; #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_DITHER_TO_1 if ( img.hasAlphaBuffer() ) - tqmask = img.createAlphaMask(); + mask = img.createAlphaMask(); #endif - d->drawImage(paint, r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), img, tqmask); + d->drawImage(paint, r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), img, mask); break; } case PdcSetBkColor: diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp index e8e91b3..644255b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext.cpp @@ -6724,7 +6724,7 @@ TQTextImage::TQTextImage(TQTextDocument *p, const QMap<TQString, TQString> &attr } } if (pm.hasAlphaChannel()) { - QRegion mask(pm.mask()); + QRegion mask(pm.QPixmap::mask()); QRegion all(0, 0, pm.width(), pm.height()); reg = new QRegion(all.subtracted(mask)); } @@ -8954,7 +8954,7 @@ void TQTextCursor::insert( const QString &str, bool checkNewLine, TQMemArray<TQT para->format( -1, TRUE ); if ( h != para->rect().height() ) invalidateNested(); - else if ( para->document() && para->document()->tqparent() ) + else if ( para->document() && para->document()->parent() ) para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE; fixCursorPosition(); @@ -9597,7 +9597,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::remove() para->format( -1, TRUE ); if ( h != para->rect().height() ) invalidateNested(); - else if ( para->document() && para->document()->tqparent() ) + else if ( para->document() && para->document()->parent() ) para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE; return FALSE; } else if ( para->next() ) { @@ -9621,7 +9621,7 @@ bool TQTextCursor::removePreviousChar() para->format( -1, TRUE ); if ( h != para->rect().height() ) invalidateNested(); - else if ( para->document() && para->document()->tqparent() ) + else if ( para->document() && para->document()->parent() ) para->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE; return FALSE; } else if ( para->prev() ) { @@ -11025,7 +11025,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::setSelectionEnd( int id, const TQTextCursor &cursor ) if ( p == lastParagraph() && c.atParagEnd() ) break; } else { - if ( p->document()->tqparent() ) + if ( p->document()->parent() ) do { c.gotoNextLetter(); } while ( c.paragraph() == p ); @@ -11090,7 +11090,7 @@ bool TQTextDocument::removeSelection( int id ) p = start.paragraph(); p->removeSelection( id ); //### avoid endless loop by all means necessary, did somebody mention refactoring? - if ( !tqparent() && p == lParag ) + if ( !parent() && p == lParag ) break; } start.gotoNextLetter(); @@ -11147,7 +11147,7 @@ TQString TQTextDocument::selectedText( int id, bool asRichText ) const // end selection 3.0.3 improvement - if ( asRichText && !tqparent() ) { + if ( asRichText && !parent() ) { richTextExportStart = &c1; richTextExportEnd = &c2; @@ -11670,7 +11670,7 @@ TQTextParagraph *TQTextDocument::draw( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int floating: if ( parag->rect().y() + parag->rect().height() < parag->document()->height() ) { - if ( !parag->document()->tqparent() ) { + if ( !parag->document()->parent() ) { TQRect fillRect = TQRect( 0, parag->rect().y() + parag->rect().height(), parag->document()->width(), parag->document()->height() - ( parag->rect().y() + parag->rect().height() ) ); if ( TQRect( cx, cy, cw, ch ).intersects( fillRect ) ) @@ -14444,7 +14444,7 @@ void TQTextFormatCollection::setPaintDevice( TQPaintDevice *pd ) TQTextFormat *TQTextFormatCollection::format( TQTextFormat *f ) { - if ( f->tqparent() == this || f == defFormat ) { + if ( f->parent() == this || f == defFormat ) { lastFormat = f; lastFormat->addRef(); return lastFormat; @@ -14998,10 +14998,10 @@ TQTextImage::TQTextImage( TQTextDocument *p, const QMap<TQString, TQString> &att pmi.ref++; } } - if ( pm.tqmask() ) { - TQRegion tqmask( *pm.tqmask() ); + if ( pm.mask() ) { + TQRegion mask( *pm.mask() ); TQRegion all( 0, 0, pm.width(), pm.height() ); - reg = new TQRegion( all.subtract( tqmask ) ); + reg = new TQRegion( all.subtract( mask ) ); } } @@ -16261,7 +16261,7 @@ bool TQTextTable::enterAt( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagrap doc = cell->richText(); parag = doc->firstParagraph(); idx = 0; - ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + tqparent->x(); + ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->tqgeometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; return TRUE; } @@ -16294,7 +16294,7 @@ bool TQTextTable::next( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph * doc = cell->richText(); parag = doc->firstParagraph(); idx = 0; - ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + tqparent->x(); + ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->tqgeometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; return TRUE; } @@ -16327,7 +16327,7 @@ bool TQTextTable::prev( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph * doc = cell->richText(); parag = doc->lastParagraph(); idx = parag->length() - 1; - ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + tqparent->x(); + ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->tqgeometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; return TRUE; } @@ -16365,7 +16365,7 @@ bool TQTextTable::down( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph * return FALSE; parag = doc->firstParagraph(); idx = 0; - ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + tqparent->x(); + ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->tqgeometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; return TRUE; } @@ -16403,7 +16403,7 @@ bool TQTextTable::up( TQTextCursor *c, TQTextDocument *&doc, TQTextParagraph *&p return FALSE; parag = doc->lastParagraph(); idx = parag->length() - 1; - ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + tqparent->x(); + ox += cell->tqgeometry().x() + cell->horizontalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder + parent->x(); oy += cell->tqgeometry().y() + cell->verticalAlignmentOffset() + outerborder; return TRUE; } @@ -16422,12 +16422,12 @@ TQTextTableCell::TQTextTableCell( TQTextTable* table, maxw = TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX; minw = 0; - tqparent = table; + parent = table; row_ = row; col_ = column; stretch_ = 0; - richtext = new TQTextDocument( table->tqparent ); - richtext->formatCollection()->setPaintDevice( table->tqparent->formatCollection()->paintDevice() ); + richtext = new TQTextDocument( table->parent ); + richtext->formatCollection()->setPaintDevice( table->parent->formatCollection()->paintDevice() ); richtext->bodyText = fmt.color(); richtext->setTableCell( this ); TQString a = *attr.find( "align" ); @@ -16451,8 +16451,8 @@ TQTextTableCell::TQTextTableCell( TQTextTable* table, else if ( va == "bottom" ) align |= TQt::AlignBottom; } - richtext->setFormatter( table->tqparent->formatter() ); - richtext->setUseFormatCollection( table->tqparent->useFormatCollection() ); + richtext->setFormatter( table->parent->formatter() ); + richtext->setUseFormatCollection( table->parent->useFormatCollection() ); richtext->setMimeSourceFactory( &factory ); richtext->setStyleSheet( sheet ); richtext->setRichText( doc, context, &fmt ); @@ -16487,7 +16487,7 @@ TQTextTableCell::TQTextTableCell( TQTextTable* table, attributes = attr; - tqparent->addCell( this ); + parent->addCell( this ); } TQTextTableCell::~TQTextTableCell() @@ -16500,11 +16500,11 @@ TQTextTableCell::~TQTextTableCell() TQSize TQTextTableCell::tqsizeHint() const { - int extra = 2 * ( tqparent->innerborder + tqparent->cellpadding + border_tolerance); + int extra = 2 * ( parent->innerborder + parent->cellpadding + border_tolerance); int used = richtext->widthUsed() + extra; if (stretch_ ) { - int w = tqparent->width * stretch_ / 100 - 2*tqparent->cellspacing - 2*tqparent->cellpadding; + int w = parent->width * stretch_ / 100 - 2*parent->cellspacing - 2*parent->cellpadding; return TQSize( TQMIN( w, maxw ), 0 ).expandedTo( tqminimumSize() ); } @@ -16513,7 +16513,7 @@ TQSize TQTextTableCell::tqsizeHint() const TQSize TQTextTableCell::tqminimumSize() const { - int extra = 2 * ( tqparent->innerborder + tqparent->cellpadding + border_tolerance); + int extra = 2 * ( parent->innerborder + parent->cellpadding + border_tolerance); return TQSize( TQMAX( richtext->minimumWidth() + extra, minw), 0 ); } @@ -16533,7 +16533,7 @@ bool TQTextTableCell::isEmpty() const } void TQTextTableCell::setGeometry( const TQRect& r ) { - int extra = 2 * ( tqparent->innerborder + tqparent->cellpadding ); + int extra = 2 * ( parent->innerborder + parent->cellpadding ); if ( r.width() != cached_width ) richtext->doLayout( TQTextFormat::painter(), r.width() - extra ); cached_width = r.width(); @@ -16552,7 +16552,7 @@ bool TQTextTableCell::hasHeightForWidth() const int TQTextTableCell::heightForWidth( int w ) const { - int extra = 2 * ( tqparent->innerborder + tqparent->cellpadding ); + int extra = 2 * ( parent->innerborder + parent->cellpadding ); w = TQMAX( minw, w ); if ( cached_width != w ) { @@ -16574,7 +16574,7 @@ void TQTextTableCell::adjustToPainter( TQPainter* p ) int TQTextTableCell::horizontalAlignmentOffset() const { - return tqparent->cellpadding; + return parent->cellpadding; } int TQTextTableCell::verticalAlignmentOffset() const @@ -16582,14 +16582,14 @@ int TQTextTableCell::verticalAlignmentOffset() const if ( (align & TQt::AlignVCenter ) == TQt::AlignVCenter ) return ( geom.height() - richtext->height() ) / 2; else if ( ( align & TQt::AlignBottom ) == TQt::AlignBottom ) - return geom.height() - tqparent->cellpadding - richtext->height() ; - return tqparent->cellpadding; + return geom.height() - parent->cellpadding - richtext->height() ; + return parent->cellpadding; } void TQTextTableCell::draw( TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool ) { if ( cached_width != geom.width() ) { - int extra = 2 * ( tqparent->innerborder + tqparent->cellpadding ); + int extra = 2 * ( parent->innerborder + parent->cellpadding ); richtext->doLayout( p, geom.width() - extra ); cached_width = geom.width(); } @@ -16622,4 +16622,4 @@ void TQTextTableCell::draw( TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, #endif //TQT_NO_RICHTEXT -#endif // USE_QT4
\ No newline at end of file +#endif // USE_QT4 diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp index 31649dd..83927c7 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.cpp @@ -892,7 +892,7 @@ TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style ) addRef(); } -TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, TQTextFormatCollection *tqparent ) +TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, TQTextFormatCollection *parent ) : fn( f ), col( c ), fm( TQFontMetrics( f ) ), linkColor( TRUE ), logicalFontSize( 3 ), stdSize( f.pointSize() ) { @@ -902,7 +902,7 @@ TQTextFormat::TQTextFormat( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, TQTextFormatColle stdSize = f.pixelSize(); usePixelSizes = TRUE; } - collection = tqparent; + collection = parent; leftBearing = fm.minLeftBearing(); rightBearing = fm.minRightBearing(); hei = fm.lineSpacing(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h index bcfdb9b..90dc963 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqrichtext_p.h @@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTextCustomItem { public: TQTextCustomItem( TQTextDocument *p ) - : xpos(0), ypos(-1), width(-1), height(0), tqparent( p ) + : xpos(0), ypos(-1), width(-1), height(0), parent( p ) {} virtual ~TQTextCustomItem(); virtual void draw(TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool selected ) = 0; @@ -2657,7 +2657,7 @@ public: virtual void setParagraph( TQTextParagraph *p ) { parag = p; } TQTextParagraph *paragraph() const { return parag; } - TQTextDocument *tqparent; + TQTextDocument *parent; TQTextParagraph *parag; virtual void pageBreak( int y, TQTextFlow* flow ); @@ -2808,7 +2808,7 @@ public: int stretch() const { return stretch_; } TQTextDocument* richText() const { return richtext; } - TQTextTable* table() const { return tqparent; } + TQTextTable* table() const { return parent; } void draw( TQPainter* p, int x, int y, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool selected ); @@ -2820,7 +2820,7 @@ public: private: TQRect geom; - TQTextTable* tqparent; + TQTextTable* parent; TQTextDocument* richtext; int row_; int col_; @@ -2953,7 +2953,7 @@ public: TQTextDocument( TQTextDocument *p ); virtual ~TQTextDocument(); - TQTextDocument *tqparent() const { return par; } + TQTextDocument *parent() const { return par; } TQTextParagraph *parentParagraph() const { return parentPar; } void setText( const TQString &text, const TQString &context ); @@ -3665,7 +3665,7 @@ public: virtual ~TQTextFormat(); TQTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *s ); - TQTextFormat( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, TQTextFormatCollection *tqparent = 0 ); + TQTextFormat( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, TQTextFormatCollection *parent = 0 ); TQTextFormat( const TQTextFormat &fm ); TQTextFormat makeTextFormat( const TQStyleSheetItem *style, const TQMap<TQString,TQString>& attr, double scaleFontsFactor ) const; TQTextFormat& operator=( const TQTextFormat &fm ); @@ -3696,7 +3696,7 @@ public: void setVAlign( VerticalAlignment a ); bool operator==( const TQTextFormat &f ) const; - TQTextFormatCollection *tqparent() const; + TQTextFormatCollection *parent() const; const TQString &key() const; static TQString getKey( const TQFont &f, const TQColor &c, bool misspelled, VerticalAlignment vAlign ); @@ -4006,7 +4006,7 @@ inline void TQTextDocument::takeFlow() inline bool TQTextDocument::useDoubleBuffer( TQTextParagraph *parag, TQPainter *p ) { - return ( !parag->document()->tqparent() || parag->document()->nextDoubleBuffered ) && + return ( !parag->document()->parent() || parag->document()->nextDoubleBuffered ) && ( !p || !p->tqdevice() || p->tqdevice()->devType() != TQInternal::Printer ); } @@ -4037,7 +4037,7 @@ inline bool TQTextFormat::operator==( const TQTextFormat &f ) const return k == f.k; } -inline TQTextFormatCollection *TQTextFormat::tqparent() const +inline TQTextFormatCollection *TQTextFormat::parent() const { return collection; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp index 0bb29fc..2156fe8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqscriptengine.cpp @@ -564,8 +564,8 @@ enum ArabicGroup { // NonJoining ArabicNone, ArabicSpace, - // Transtqparent - Transtqparent, + // Transparent + Transparent, // Causing Center, Kashida, @@ -641,8 +641,8 @@ static const unsigned char arabic_group[0x150] = { ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, @@ -659,12 +659,12 @@ static const unsigned char arabic_group[0x150] = { // 0x640 Kashida, Feh, Qaf, Kaf, Lam, Meem, Noon, Heh, - Waw, Yeh, Yeh, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, + Waw, Yeh, Yeh, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ static const unsigned char arabic_group[0x150] = { ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, Beh, Qaf, - Transtqparent, Alef, Alef, Alef, + Transparent, Alef, Alef, Alef, ArabicNone, Alef, Waw, Waw, Yeh, Beh, Beh, Beh, Beh, Beh, Beh, Beh, @@ -705,14 +705,14 @@ static const unsigned char arabic_group[0x150] = { Yeh, YehWithTail, Yeh, Waw, Yeh, Yeh, YehBarre, YehBarre, - ArabicNone, TehMarbuta, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, Transtqparent, + ArabicNone, TehMarbuta, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, Transparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, ArabicNone, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Dal, Reh, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, Transparent, + Transparent, ArabicNone, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Dal, Reh, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, @@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ static const unsigned char arabic_group[0x150] = { ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, - Alaph, Transtqparent, Beth, Gamal, + Alaph, Transparent, Beth, Gamal, Gamal, Dalath, Dalath, He, SyriacWaw, Zain, Heth, Teth, Teth, Yudh, YudhHe, Kaph, @@ -735,14 +735,14 @@ static const unsigned char arabic_group[0x150] = { Sadhe, Qaph, Dalath, Shin, Taw, Beth, Gamal, Dalath, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, - Transtqparent, Transtqparent, Transtqparent, ArabicNone, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, + Transparent, Transparent, Transparent, ArabicNone, ArabicNone, Zain, Kaph, Fe, }; @@ -763,15 +763,15 @@ static inline ArabicGroup arabicGroup(unsigned short uc) Arabic shaping obeys a number of rules according to the joining classes (see Unicode book, section on arabic). - Each tqunicode char has a joining class (right, dual (left&right), center (joincausing) or transtqparent). - transtqparent joining is not encoded in TQChar::joining(), but applies to all combining marks and format marks. + Each tqunicode char has a joining class (right, dual (left&right), center (joincausing) or transparent). + transparent joining is not encoded in TQChar::joining(), but applies to all combining marks and format marks. Right join-causing: dual + center Left join-causing: dual + right + center Rules are as follows (for a string already in visual order, as we have it here): - R1 Transtqparent characters do not affect joining behaviour. + R1 Transparent characters do not affect joining behaviour. R2 A right joining character, that has a right join-causing char on the right will get form XRight (R3 A left joining character, that has a left join-causing char on the left will get form XLeft) Note: the above rule is meaningless, as there are no pure left joining characters defined in Unicode @@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ static inline ArabicGroup arabicGroup(unsigned short uc) Additionally we have to do the minimal ligature support for lam-alef ligatures: - L1 Transtqparent characters do not affect ligature behaviour. + L1 Transparent characters do not affect ligature behaviour. L2 Any sequence of Alef(XRight) + Lam(XMedial) will form the ligature Alef.Lam(XLeft) L3 Any sequence of Alef(XRight) + Lam(XLeft) will form the ligature Alef.Lam(XIsolated) @@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ enum Joining { JCausing, JDual, JRight, - JTranstqparent + JTransparent }; @@ -815,8 +815,8 @@ static const Joining joining_for_group[ArabicGroupsEnd] = { // NonJoining JNone, // ArabicNone JNone, // ArabicSpace - // Transtqparent - JTranstqparent, // Transtqparent + // Transparent + JTransparent, // Transparent // Causing JCausing, // Center JCausing, // Kashida @@ -919,7 +919,7 @@ static void getArabicProperties(const unsigned short *chars, int len, TQArabicPr group = arabicGroup(chars[i]); j = joining_for_group[group]; - if (j == JTranstqparent) { + if (j == JTransparent) { properties[i].tqshape = XIsolated; continue; } @@ -959,8 +959,8 @@ static void getArabicProperties(const unsigned short *chars, int len, TQArabicPr switch(group) { case ArabicNone: - case Transtqparent: - // ### Center should probably be treated as transtqparent when it comes to justification. + case Transparent: + // ### Center should probably be treated as transparent when it comes to justification. case Center: break; case ArabicSpace: @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ static inline const TQChar nextChar(const TQString *str, int pos) //qDebug("rightChar: %d isLetter=%d, joining=%d", pos, ch.isLetter(), ch.joining()); if(::category(*ch) != TQChar::Mark_NonSpacing) return *ch; - // assume it's a transtqparent char, this might not be 100% correct + // assume it's a transparent char, this might not be 100% correct pos++; ch++; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp index 836f870..2d6dbac 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.cpp @@ -341,12 +341,12 @@ QT_END_NAMESPACE */ /*! - Constructs a signal object called \a name, with the tqparent object - \a tqparent. These arguments are passed directly to TQObject. + Constructs a signal object called \a name, with the parent object + \a parent. These arguments are passed directly to TQObject. */ -TQSignal::TQSignal( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQSignal::TQSignal( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { isSignal = TRUE; #ifndef TQT_NO_VARIANT diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.h index 72fd880..f4da0ee 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignal.h @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSignal : public TQObject TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSignal( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQSignal( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); ~TQSignal(); bool connect( const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char *member ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp index 40b08ee..560640b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.cpp @@ -78,11 +78,11 @@ public: */ /*! - Constructs a TQSignalMapper called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. - Like all TQObjects, it will be deleted when the tqparent is deleted. + Constructs a TQSignalMapper called \a name, with parent \a parent. + Like all TQObjects, it will be deleted when the parent is deleted. */ -TQSignalMapper::TQSignalMapper( TQObject* tqparent, const char* name ) : - TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQSignalMapper::TQSignalMapper( TQObject* parent, const char* name ) : + TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQSignalMapperData; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.h index 903dad2..fbe25b3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsignalmapper.h @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSignalMapper : public TQObject { Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSignalMapper( TQObject* tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQSignalMapper( TQObject* parent, const char* name=0 ); ~TQSignalMapper(); virtual void setMapping( const TQObject* sender, int identifier ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp index bcea2db..96d3c81 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.cpp @@ -106,10 +106,10 @@ static TQWidget* qt_sizegrip_workspace( TQWidget* w ) /*! Constructs a resize corner called \a name, as a child widget of \a - tqparent. + parent. */ -TQSizeGrip::TQSizeGrip( TQWidget * tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQSizeGrip::TQSizeGrip( TQWidget * parent, const char* name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR #ifndef TQ_WS_MAC diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.h index fa893a2..94e8c60 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsizegrip.h @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSizeGrip: public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSizeGrip( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQSizeGrip( TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 ); ~TQSizeGrip(); TQSize tqsizeHint() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp index a9b3943..770b710 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.cpp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ #if 0 //#ifdef USE_QT4 -TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) : QSocketNotifier(socket, type, tqparent) { +TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : QSocketNotifier(socket, type, parent) { setObjectName(name); } @@ -139,8 +139,8 @@ TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *tqparent, c /*! - Constructs a socket notifier called \a name, with the tqparent, \a - tqparent. It watches \a socket for \a type events, and enables it. + Constructs a socket notifier called \a name, with the parent, \a + parent. It watches \a socket for \a type events, and enables it. It is generally advisable to explicitly enable or disable the socket notifier, especially for write notifiers. @@ -148,9 +148,9 @@ TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *tqparent, c \sa setEnabled(), isEnabled() */ -TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *tqparent, +TQSocketNotifier::TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { #if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE) if ( socket < 0 ) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.h index 4904471..816f839 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsocketnotifier.h @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSocketNotifier : public QSocketNotifier Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type type, TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); }; #else // USE_QT4 @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSocketNotifier : public TQObject public: enum Type { Read, Write, Exception }; - TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type, TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQSocketNotifier( int socket, Type, TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); ~TQSocketNotifier(); int socket() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp index afb3871..4a6e96b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.cpp @@ -46,8 +46,8 @@ static TQPtrList<TQAuServer> *servers=0; -TQAuServer::TQAuServer(TQObject* tqparent, const char* name) : - TQObject(tqparent,name) +TQAuServer::TQAuServer(TQObject* parent, const char* name) : + TQObject(parent,name) { if ( !servers ) { servers = new TQPtrList<TQAuServer>; @@ -161,11 +161,11 @@ void TQSound::play(const TQString& filename) This may use more memory than the static \c play function. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments (default 0) are passed on to + The \a parent and \a name arguments (default 0) are passed on to the TQObject constructor. */ -TQSound::TQSound(const TQString& filename, TQObject* tqparent, const char* name) : - TQObject(tqparent,name), +TQSound::TQSound(const TQString& filename, TQObject* parent, const char* name) : + TQObject(parent,name), d(new TQSoundData(filename)) { server().init(this); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.h index a24a63f..043dd1f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public: static bool isAvailable(); static void play(const TQString& filename); - TQSound(const TQString& filename, TQObject* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); + TQSound(const TQString& filename, TQObject* parent=0, const char* name=0); ~TQSound(); /* Coming soon... @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ class TQAuServer : public TQObject { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQAuServer(TQObject* tqparent, const char* name); + TQAuServer(TQObject* parent, const char* name); ~TQAuServer(); virtual void init(TQSound*); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp index 80b6dbf..52d7523 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqsound_x11.cpp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ class TQAuServerNAS : public TQAuServer { TQSocketNotifier* sn; public: - TQAuServerNAS(TQObject* tqparent); + TQAuServerNAS(TQObject* parent); ~TQAuServerNAS(); void init(TQSound*); @@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ private: } }; -TQAuServerNAS::TQAuServerNAS(TQObject* tqparent) : - TQAuServer(tqparent,"Network Audio System") +TQAuServerNAS::TQAuServerNAS(TQObject* parent) : + TQAuServer(parent,"Network Audio System") { nas = AuOpenServer(NULL, 0, NULL, 0, NULL, NULL); if (nas) { @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ void TQAuServerNAS::dataReceived() class TQAuServerNull : public TQAuServer { public: - TQAuServerNull(TQObject* tqparent); + TQAuServerNull(TQObject* parent); void play(const TQString&) { } void play(TQSound*s) { while(decLoop(s) > 0) /* nothing */ ; } @@ -262,8 +262,8 @@ public: bool okay() { return FALSE; } }; -TQAuServerNull::TQAuServerNull(TQObject* tqparent) : - TQAuServer(tqparent,"Null Audio Server") +TQAuServerNull::TQAuServerNull(TQObject* parent) : + TQAuServer(parent,"Null Audio Server") { } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp index 9aa3a59..b2861b0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.cpp @@ -217,27 +217,27 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, x += w - pm.width(); if ( !enabled ) { - if ( pm.tqmask() ) { // pixmap with a tqmask - if ( !pm.selfMask() ) { // tqmask is not pixmap itself - TQPixmap pmm( *pm.tqmask() ); + if ( pm.mask() ) { // pixmap with a mask + if ( !pm.selfMask() ) { // mask is not pixmap itself + TQPixmap pmm( *pm.mask() ); pmm.setMask( *((TQBitmap *)&pmm) ); pm = pmm; } - } else if ( pm.depth() == 1 ) { // monochrome pixmap, no tqmask + } else if ( pm.depth() == 1 ) { // monochrome pixmap, no mask pm.setMask( *((TQBitmap *)&pm) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK - } else { // color pixmap, no tqmask + } else { // color pixmap, no mask TQString k; k.sprintf( "$qt-drawitem-%x", pm.serialNumber() ); - TQPixmap *tqmask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); + TQPixmap *mask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); bool del=FALSE; - if ( !tqmask ) { - tqmask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); - tqmask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)tqmask) ); - del = !TQPixmapCache::insert( k, tqmask ); + if ( !mask ) { + mask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); + mask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)mask) ); + del = !TQPixmapCache::insert( k, mask ); } - pm = *tqmask; - if (del) delete tqmask; + pm = *mask; + if (del) delete mask; #endif } if ( gs == TQt::WindowsStyle ) { @@ -898,27 +898,27 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, x += w - pm.width(); if ( !enabled ) { - if ( pm.tqmask() ) { // pixmap with a tqmask - if ( !pm.selfMask() ) { // tqmask is not pixmap itself - TQPixmap pmm( *pm.tqmask() ); + if ( pm.mask() ) { // pixmap with a mask + if ( !pm.selfMask() ) { // mask is not pixmap itself + TQPixmap pmm( *pm.mask() ); pmm.setMask( *((TQBitmap *)&pmm) ); pm = pmm; } - } else if ( pm.depth() == 1 ) { // monochrome pixmap, no tqmask + } else if ( pm.depth() == 1 ) { // monochrome pixmap, no mask pm.setMask( *((TQBitmap *)&pm) ); #ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_HEURISTIC_MASK - } else { // color pixmap, no tqmask + } else { // color pixmap, no mask TQString k; k.sprintf( "$qt-drawitem-%x", pm.serialNumber() ); - TQPixmap *tqmask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); + TQPixmap *mask = TQPixmapCache::find(k); bool del=FALSE; - if ( !tqmask ) { - tqmask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); - tqmask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)tqmask) ); - del = !TQPixmapCache::insert( k, tqmask ); + if ( !mask ) { + mask = new TQPixmap( pm.createHeuristicMask() ); + mask->setMask( *((TQBitmap*)mask) ); + del = !TQPixmapCache::insert( k, mask ); } - pm = *tqmask; - if (del) delete tqmask; + pm = *mask; + if (del) delete mask; #endif } if ( gs == TQt::WindowsStyle ) { @@ -974,10 +974,10 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, \value PE_Indicator on/off indicator, for example, a TQCheckBox. - \value PE_IndicatorMask bitmap tqmask for an indicator. + \value PE_IndicatorMask bitmap mask for an indicator. \value PE_ExclusiveIndicator exclusive on/off indicator, for example, a TQRadioButton. - \value PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask bitmap tqmask for an exclusive indicator. + \value PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask bitmap mask for an exclusive indicator. \value PE_DockWindowHandle tear off handle for dock windows and @@ -1376,7 +1376,7 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, /*! \fn void TQStyle::tqdrawControlMask( ControlElement element, TQPainter *p, const TQWidget *widget, const TQRect &r, const TQStyleOption& opt) const - Draw a bittqmask for the ControlElement \a element using the painter + Draw a bitmask for the ControlElement \a element using the painter \a p in the area \a r. See tqdrawControl() for an explanation of the use of the \a widget and \a opt arguments. @@ -1665,7 +1665,7 @@ void TQStyle::drawItem( TQPainter *p, const TQRect &r, /*! \fn void TQStyle::tqdrawComplexControlMask( ComplexControl control, TQPainter *p, const TQWidget *widget, const TQRect &r, const TQStyleOption& opt) const - Draw a bittqmask for the ComplexControl \a control using the painter + Draw a bitmask for the ComplexControl \a control using the painter \a p in the area \a r. See tqdrawComplexControl() for an explanation of the use of the \a widget and \a opt arguments. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.h index 02682cb..0ae52a0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstyle.h @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ public: // typedef State SFlags; typedef StandardPixmap StylePixmap; - TQStyle() : QStyle() { TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(tqparent) } + TQStyle() : QStyle() { TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(parent) } enum SH_NewTypes { SH_GUIStyle = 0x00000100, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp index 08a29dc..c3fc72f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.cpp @@ -141,20 +141,20 @@ public: /*! Constructs a new style called \a name for the stylesheet \a - tqparent. + parent. All properties in TQStyleSheetItem are initially in the "do not change" state, except \link TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayMode display mode\endlink, which defaults to \c DisplayInline. */ -TQStyleSheetItem::TQStyleSheetItem( TQStyleSheet* tqparent, const TQString& name ) +TQStyleSheetItem::TQStyleSheetItem( TQStyleSheet* parent, const TQString& name ) { d = new TQStyleSheetItemData; d->stylename = name.lower(); - d->sheet = tqparent; + d->sheet = parent; init(); - if (tqparent) - tqparent->insert( this ); + if (parent) + parent->insert( this ); } /*! @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ TQStyleSheetItem::VerticalAlignment TQStyleSheetItem::verticalAlignment() const \value VAlignBaseline align the baseline of the element (or the bottom, if the element doesn't have a baseline) with the - baseline of the tqparent + baseline of the parent \value VAlignSub subscript the element @@ -1086,14 +1086,14 @@ int TQStyleSheetItem::lineSpacing() const */ /*! - Creates a style sheet called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. Like - any TQObject it will be deleted when its tqparent is destroyed (if + Creates a style sheet called \a name, with parent \a parent. Like + any TQObject it will be deleted when its parent is destroyed (if the child still exists). By default the style sheet has the tag definitions defined above. */ -TQStyleSheet::TQStyleSheet( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQStyleSheet::TQStyleSheet( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { init(); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.h index 7f650be..c207357 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqstylesheet.h @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ class TQStyleSheetItemData; class TQ_EXPORT TQStyleSheetItem : public TQt { public: - TQStyleSheetItem( TQStyleSheet* tqparent, const TQString& name ); + TQStyleSheetItem( TQStyleSheet* parent, const TQString& name ); TQStyleSheetItem( const TQStyleSheetItem & ); ~TQStyleSheetItem(); @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQStyleSheet : public TQObject { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQStyleSheet( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQStyleSheet( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); virtual ~TQStyleSheet(); static TQStyleSheet* defaultSheet(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtaddons_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtaddons_x11.cpp index 4ad2199..81d10ac 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtaddons_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtaddons_x11.cpp @@ -100,11 +100,11 @@ XftDraw *XftDrawCreateAlpha( Display *display, XRenderPictFormat *format = 0; XRenderPictFormat req; - unsigned long tqmask = PictFormatType | PictFormatDepth | PictFormatAlphaMask; + unsigned long mask = PictFormatType | PictFormatDepth | PictFormatAlphaMask; req.type = PictTypeDirect; req.depth = depth; req.direct.alphaMask = 0xff; - format = XRenderFindFormat(draw->dpy, tqmask, &req, 0); + format = XRenderFindFormat(draw->dpy, mask, &req, 0); if (format) { draw->render.pict = XRenderCreatePicture(draw->dpy, draw->drawable, format, 0, 0); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp index 7062b6a..c3ddda5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.cpp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ emit the timeout() signal. Note that a TQTimer object is destroyed automatically when its - tqparent object is destroyed. + parent object is destroyed. Example: \code @@ -113,14 +113,14 @@ static const int INV_TIMER = -1; // invalid timer id /*! - Constructs a timer called \a name, with the tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs a timer called \a name, with the parent \a parent. - Note that the tqparent object's destructor will destroy this timer + Note that the parent object's destructor will destroy this timer object. */ -TQTimer::TQTimer( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ), id(INV_TIMER), single(0), nulltimer(0) +TQTimer::TQTimer( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ), id(INV_TIMER), single(0), nulltimer(0) { } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.h index 1d2398a..111daf4 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtimer.h @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTimer : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQTimer( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQTimer( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); ~TQTimer(); bool isActive() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp index fabbb98..4a3e34e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.cpp @@ -1304,11 +1304,11 @@ extern int qt_ntfs_permission_lookup; /*! Constructs an empty message file object that is not connected to - any file. The object is called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent. + any file. The object is called \a name with parent \a parent. */ -TQTranslator::TQTranslator( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQTranslator::TQTranslator( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQTranslatorPrivate; #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h index 6713568..e1726ce 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqtranslator.h @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTranslator: public QTranslator, virtual public TQt Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQTranslator( TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) : QTranslator( tqparent ) { setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); } + TQTranslator( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) : QTranslator( parent ) { setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); } // inline TQString find(const char *context, const char *sourceText, const char * comment = 0) const { return translate(context, sourceText, comment); } @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTranslator: public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQTranslator( TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); + TQTranslator( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); ~TQTranslator(); #ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp index c6523df..31b7fc9 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.cpp @@ -217,11 +217,11 @@ void TQWidget::destroyInputContext( void ) { printf("[TQT UNIMPLEMENTED CALL] destroyInputContext()\n\r"); } -TQWidget::TQWidget( QWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f ) : QWidget( tqparent, (Qt::WindowFlags)(f&(~WTQtFlagMask)) ), TQtUpperWidgetFlags((WFlags)0) { +TQWidget::TQWidget( QWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f ) : QWidget( parent, (Qt::WindowFlags)(f&(~WTQtFlagMask)) ), TQtUpperWidgetFlags((WFlags)0) { TQtUpperWidgetFlags = f & WTQtFlagMask; TQT_TQWIDGET_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION static_cast<QWidget*>(this)->setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name)); - TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(tqparent) + TQT_TQOBJECT_REQUIRED_INITIALIZATION(parent) } void TQWidget::setActiveWindow( void ) { @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ void TQWidget::setName(const char *aName) { TQWidget *TQWidget::parentWidget( bool sameWindow ) { TQ_UNUSED(sameWindow); - return static_cast<TQWidget*>(this->parent()); + return static_cast<TQWidget*>(this->QWidget::parent()); } bool TQWidget::isDialog() const { @@ -984,11 +984,11 @@ void TQWidget::createTLExtra() /*! \property TQWidget::autoMask - \brief whether the auto tqmask feature is enabled for the widget + \brief whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget - Transtqparent widgets use a tqmask to define their visible region. + Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region. TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of - recalculating the tqmask easier. When setting auto tqmask to TRUE, + recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE, updateMask() will be called whenever the widget is resized or changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement updateMask() (which should include a call to setMask()) or nothing @@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ void TQWidget::createTLExtra() Note: when you re-implement resizeEvent(), focusInEvent() or focusOutEvent() in your custom widgets and still want to ensure - that the auto tqmask calculation works, you should add: + that the auto mask calculation works, you should add: \code if ( autoMask() ) @@ -1005,17 +1005,17 @@ void TQWidget::createTLExtra() at the end of your event handlers. This is true for all member functions that change the appearance of the widget in a way that - requires a recalculation of the tqmask. + requires a recalculation of the mask. While being a technically appealing concept, masks have a big drawback: when using complex masks that cannot be expressed easily with relatively simple regions, they can be very slow on some - window systems. The classic example is a transtqparent label. The + window systems. The classic example is a transparent label. The complex tqshape of its contents makes it necessary to represent its - tqmask by a bitmap, which consumes both memory and time. If all you + mask by a bitmap, which consumes both memory and time. If all you want is to blend the background of several neighboring widgets together seamlessly, you will probably want to use - setBackgroundOrigin() rather than a tqmask. + setBackgroundOrigin() rather than a mask. \sa autoMask() updateMask() setMask() clearMask() setBackgroundOrigin() */ @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ void TQWidget::setFocus(TQFocusEvent::Reason reason) setFocus((Qt::FocusReason)reason); } -TQObject *TQWidget::tqparent() const { +TQObject *TQWidget::parent() const { return TQT_TQOBJECT(parent()); } @@ -1388,8 +1388,8 @@ const TQPixmap TQWidget::iconPixmap() const { /*! This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to support - transtqparent widgets. It should be called whenever a widget changes - state in a way that means that the tqshape tqmask must be recalculated. + transparent widgets. It should be called whenever a widget changes + state in a way that means that the tqshape mask must be recalculated. \sa setAutoMask(), updateMask(), setMask(), clearMask() */ @@ -2054,7 +2054,7 @@ void TQWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQWheelEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -2074,7 +2074,7 @@ void TQWidget::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQTabletEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -2096,10 +2096,10 @@ void TQWidget::tabletEvent( TQTabletEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you explicitly \link TQKeyEvent::ignore() ignore\endlink the event - if you do not understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can + if you do not understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it; otherwise, the event will be implicitly accepted. Although top-level widgets are able to choose whether to accept - or ignore unknown events because they have no tqparent widgets that + or ignore unknown events because they have no parent widgets that could otherwise handle them, it is good practice to explicitly ignore events to make widgets as reusable as possible. @@ -2130,7 +2130,7 @@ void TQWidget::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQKeyEvent ignore()\endlink the release if you do not - understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -2748,26 +2748,26 @@ WState TQWidget::testWState( TQt::WidgetState s ) const { keyboard and other events from the window system, and paints a representation of itself on the screen. Every widget is rectangular, and they are sorted in a Z-order. A widget is - clipped by its tqparent and by the widgets in front of it. + clipped by its parent and by the widgets in front of it. - A widget that isn't embedded in a tqparent widget is called a + A widget that isn't embedded in a parent widget is called a top-level widget. Usually, top-level widgets are windows with a frame and a title bar (although it is also possible to create top-level widgets without such decoration if suitable widget flags are used). In TQt, TQMainWindow and the various subclasses of TQDialog are the most common top-level windows. - A widget without a tqparent widget is always a top-level widget. + A widget without a parent widget is always a top-level widget. Non-top-level widgets are child widgets. These are child windows - in their tqparent widgets. You cannot usually distinguish a child - widget from its tqparent visually. Most other widgets in TQt are + in their parent widgets. You cannot usually distinguish a child + widget from its parent visually. Most other widgets in TQt are useful only as child widgets. (It is possible to make, say, a button into a top-level widget, but most people prefer to put their buttons inside other widgets, e.g. TQDialog.) If you want to use a TQWidget to hold child widgets you will - probably want to add a tqlayout to the tqparent TQWidget. (See \link + probably want to add a tqlayout to the parent TQWidget. (See \link tqlayout.html Layouts\endlink.) TQWidget has many member functions, but some of them have little @@ -2949,10 +2949,10 @@ WState TQWidget::testWState( TQt::WidgetState s ) const { Every widget's constructor accepts two or three standard arguments: \list 1 - \i \c{TQWidget *tqparent = 0} is the tqparent of the new widget. + \i \c{TQWidget *parent = 0} is the parent of the new widget. If it is 0 (the default), the new widget will be a top-level window. - If not, it will be a child of \e tqparent, and be constrained by \e - tqparent's tqgeometry (unless you specify \c WType_TopLevel as + If not, it will be a child of \e parent, and be constrained by \e + parent's tqgeometry (unless you specify \c WType_TopLevel as widget flag). \i \c{const char *name = 0} is the widget name of the new widget. You can access it using name(). The widget name is little @@ -3015,7 +3015,7 @@ WState TQWidget::testWState( TQt::WidgetState s ) const { If your widget only contains child widgets, you probably do not need to implement any event handlers. If you want to detect a mouse click in a child widget call the child's hasMouse() function inside the - tqparent widget's mousePressEvent(). + parent widget's mousePressEvent(). Widgets that accept keyboard input need to reimplement a few more event handlers: @@ -3070,7 +3070,7 @@ WState TQWidget::testWState( TQt::WidgetState s ) const { space. \i moveEvent() - called when the widget has been moved relative to its - tqparent. + parent. \i closeEvent() - called when the user closes the widget (or when close() is called). @@ -3258,7 +3258,7 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { \i WState_Reparented The widget has been reparented. \i WState_ConfigPending A configuration (resize/move) event is pending. \i WState_Resized The widget has been resized. - \i WState_AutoMask The widget has an automatic tqmask, see setAutoMask(). + \i WState_AutoMask The widget has an automatic mask, see setAutoMask(). \i WState_Polished The widget has been "polished" (i.e. late initialization) by a TQStyle. \i WState_DND The widget supports drag and drop, see setAcceptDrops(). @@ -3294,11 +3294,11 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { window that should be decorated as a dialog (i.e. typically no maximize or minimize buttons in the title bar). If you want to use it as a modal dialog it should be launched from another window, or - have a tqparent and this flag should be combined with \c WShowModal. + have a parent and this flag should be combined with \c WShowModal. If you make it modal, the dialog will prevent other top-level windows in the application from getting any input. \c WType_Dialog implies \c WType_TopLevel. We refer to a top-level window that has - a tqparent as a \e secondary window. (See also \c WGroupLeader.) + a parent as a \e secondary window. (See also \c WGroupLeader.) \value WType_Popup indicates that this widget is a popup top-level window, i.e. that it is modal, but has a window system @@ -3358,8 +3358,8 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { \value WStyle_Tool makes the window a tool window. A tool window is often a small window with a smaller than usual title bar and decoration, typically used for collections of tool buttons. It - there is a tqparent, the tool window will always be kept on top of - it. If there isn't a tqparent, you may consider passing \c + there is a parent, the tool window will always be kept on top of + it. If there isn't a parent, you may consider passing \c WStyle_StaysOnTop as well. If the window system supports it, a tool window can be decorated with a somewhat lighter frame. It can also be combined with \c WStyle_NoBorder. @@ -3370,9 +3370,9 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { this flag to work correctly. \value WStyle_Dialog indicates that the window is a logical - subwindow of its tqparent (i.e. a dialog). The window will not get - its own taskbar entry and will be kept on top of its tqparent by the - window system. Usually it will also be minimized when the tqparent + subwindow of its parent (i.e. a dialog). The window will not get + its own taskbar entry and will be kept on top of its parent by the + window system. Usually it will also be minimized when the parent is minimized. If not customized, the window is decorated with a slightly simpler title bar. This is the flag TQDialog uses. @@ -3400,7 +3400,7 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { system tqrepaint events directly. (This tends to produce more events and smaller tqrepaint regions.) - \value WMouseNoMask indicates that even if the widget has a tqmask, + \value WMouseNoMask indicates that even if the widget has a mask, it wants mouse events for its entire rectangle. \value WStaticContents indicates that the widget contents are @@ -3415,11 +3415,11 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { \value WResizeNoErase this value is obsolete; use WNoAutoErase instead. \value WRepaintNoErase this value is obsolete; use WNoAutoErase instead. \value WGroupLeader makes this window a group leader. A group - leader should \e not have a tqparent (i.e. it should be a top-level + leader should \e not have a parent (i.e. it should be a top-level window). Any decendant windows (direct or indirect) of a group leader are in its group; other windows are not. If you show a secondary window from the group (i.e. show a window whose top-most - tqparent is a group leader), that window will be modal with respect + parent is a group leader), that window will be modal with respect to the other windows in the group, but modeless with respect to windows in other groups. @@ -3495,19 +3495,19 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { */ /*! - Constructs a widget which is a child of \a tqparent, with the name + Constructs a widget which is a child of \a parent, with the name \a name and widget flags set to \a f. - If \a tqparent is 0, the new widget becomes a top-level window. If - \a tqparent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window - inside \a tqparent. The new widget is deleted when its \a tqparent is + If \a parent is 0, the new widget becomes a top-level window. If + \a parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window + inside \a parent. The new widget is deleted when its \a parent is deleted. The \a name is sent to the TQObject constructor. The widget flags argument, \a f, is normally 0, but it can be set to customize the window frame of a top-level widget (i.e. \a - tqparent must be 0). To customize the frame, set the \c + parent must be 0). To customize the frame, set the \c WStyle_Customize flag OR'ed with any of the \l TQt::WidgetFlags. If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must @@ -3526,8 +3526,8 @@ TQSize qt_naturalWidgetSize( TQWidget *w ) { \endcode */ -TQWidget::TQWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ), TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Widget ) +TQWidget::TQWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQObject( parent, name ), TQPaintDevice( TQInternal::Widget ) { #if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE) && !defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( tqApp->type() == TQApplication::Tty ) { @@ -3633,7 +3633,7 @@ TQWidget::~TQWidget() if ( isTopLevel() && isShown() && winId() ) hide(); - // A tqparent widget must destroy all its tqchildren before destroying itself + // A parent widget must destroy all its tqchildren before destroying itself if ( childObjects ) { // delete tqchildren objects TQObjectListIt it(*childObjects); TQObject *obj; @@ -3686,7 +3686,7 @@ void TQWidget::destroyMapper() register TQWidget *w; while ( (w=it.current()) ) { // remove parents widgets ++it; - if ( !w->parentObj ) // widget is a tqparent + if ( !w->parentObj ) // widget is a parent w->destroy( TRUE, TRUE ); } delete myMapper; @@ -4048,14 +4048,14 @@ void TQWidget::styleChange( TQStyle& /* oldStyle */ ) TQWidget::isPopup() Popup\endlink and \link TQWidget::isDesktop() desktop\endlink widgets are also top-level widgets. - A top-level widget can have a \link TQWidget::parentWidget() tqparent - widget\endlink. It will then be grouped with its tqparent and deleted - when the tqparent is deleted, minimized when the tqparent is minimized + A top-level widget can have a \link TQWidget::parentWidget() parent + widget\endlink. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted + when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a - common taskbar entry with its tqparent. + common taskbar entry with its parent. TQDialog and TQMainWindow widgets are by default top-level, even if - a tqparent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is + a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is specified by the \c WType_TopLevel widget flag. \sa tqtopLevelWidget(), isDialog(), isModal(), isPopup(), isDesktop(), parentWidget() @@ -4066,7 +4066,7 @@ void TQWidget::styleChange( TQStyle& /* oldStyle */ ) \brief whether the widget is a dialog widget A dialog widget is a secondary top-level widget, i.e. a top-level - widget with a tqparent. + widget with a parent. \sa isTopLevel(), TQDialog */ @@ -4307,7 +4307,7 @@ void TQWidget::showNormal() Returns TRUE if this widget would become enabled if \a ancestor is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. - This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every tqparent up + This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up to but excluding \a ancestor has been explicitly disabled. isEnabledTo(0) is equivalent to isEnabled(). @@ -4506,7 +4506,7 @@ void TQWidget::windowActivationChange( bool ) /*! \property TQWidget::frameGeometry - \brief tqgeometry of the widget relative to its tqparent including any + \brief tqgeometry of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame See the \link tqgeometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink @@ -4530,7 +4530,7 @@ TQRect TQWidget::frameGeometry() const } /*! \property TQWidget::x - \brief the x coordinate of the widget relative to its tqparent including + \brief the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including any window frame See the \link tqgeometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink @@ -4551,7 +4551,7 @@ int TQWidget::x() const /*! \property TQWidget::y - \brief the y coordinate of the widget relative to its tqparent and + \brief the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and including any window frame See the \link tqgeometry.html Window Geometry documentation\endlink @@ -4572,7 +4572,7 @@ int TQWidget::y() const /*! \property TQWidget::pos - \brief the position of the widget within its tqparent widget + \brief the position of the widget within its parent widget If the widget is a top-level widget, the position is that of the widget on the desktop, including its frame. @@ -4607,7 +4607,7 @@ TQPoint TQWidget::pos() const /*! \property TQWidget::tqgeometry - \brief the tqgeometry of the widget relative to its tqparent and + \brief the tqgeometry of the widget relative to its parent and excluding the window frame When changing the tqgeometry, the widget, if visible, receives a @@ -4937,18 +4937,18 @@ void TQWidget::setFixedHeight( int h ) /*! Translates the widget coordinate \a pos to the coordinate system - of \a tqparent. The \a tqparent must not be 0 and must be a tqparent + of \a parent. The \a parent must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget. \sa mapFrom() mapToParent() mapToGlobal() hasMouse() */ -TQPoint TQWidget::mapTo( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQPoint & pos ) const +TQPoint TQWidget::mapTo( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & pos ) const { TQPoint p = pos; - if ( tqparent ) { + if ( parent ) { const TQWidget * w = this; - while ( w != tqparent ) { + while ( w != parent ) { p = w->mapToParent( p ); w = w->parentWidget(); } @@ -4959,18 +4959,18 @@ TQPoint TQWidget::mapTo( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQPoint & pos ) const /*! Translates the widget coordinate \a pos from the coordinate system - of \a tqparent to this widget's coordinate system. The \a tqparent - must not be 0 and must be a tqparent of the calling widget. + of \a parent to this widget's coordinate system. The \a parent + must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget. \sa mapTo() mapFromParent() mapFromGlobal() hasMouse() */ -TQPoint TQWidget::mapFrom( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQPoint & pos ) const +TQPoint TQWidget::mapFrom( TQWidget * parent, const TQPoint & pos ) const { TQPoint p( pos ); - if ( tqparent ) { + if ( parent ) { const TQWidget * w = this; - while ( w != tqparent ) { + while ( w != parent ) { p = w->mapFromParent( p ); w = w->parentWidget(); } @@ -4981,9 +4981,9 @@ TQPoint TQWidget::mapFrom( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQPoint & pos ) const /*! Translates the widget coordinate \a pos to a coordinate in the - tqparent widget. + parent widget. - Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no tqparent. + Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no parent. \sa mapFromParent() mapTo() mapToGlobal() hasMouse() */ @@ -4994,10 +4994,10 @@ TQPoint TQWidget::mapToParent( const TQPoint &pos ) const } /*! - Translates the tqparent widget coordinate \a pos to widget + Translates the parent widget coordinate \a pos to widget coordinates. - Same as mapFromGlobal() if the widget has no tqparent. + Same as mapFromGlobal() if the widget has no parent. \sa mapToParent() mapFrom() mapFromGlobal() hasMouse() */ @@ -5535,7 +5535,7 @@ const TQColorGroup &TQWidget::tqcolorGroup() const As long as no special palette has been set, or after unsetPalette() has been called, this is either a special palette for the widget - class, the tqparent's palette or (if this widget is a top level + class, the parent's palette or (if this widget is a top level widget), the default application palette. Instead of defining an entirely new palette, you can also use the @@ -5614,7 +5614,7 @@ void TQWidget::paletteChange( const TQPalette & ) As long as no special font has been set, or after unsetFont() is called, this is either a special font for the widget class, the - tqparent's font or (if this widget is a top level widget), the + parent's font or (if this widget is a top level widget), the default application font. This code fragment sets a 12 point helvetica bold font: @@ -5631,7 +5631,7 @@ void TQWidget::paletteChange( const TQPalette & ) void TQWidget::setFont( const TQFont &font ) { own_font = TRUE; - if ( fnt == font && fnt.d->tqmask == font.d->tqmask ) + if ( fnt == font && fnt.d->mask == font.d->mask ) return; TQFont old = fnt; fnt = font.resolve( qt_naturalWidgetFont( this ) ); @@ -5724,7 +5724,7 @@ void TQWidget::fontChange( const TQFont & ) \endcode If no cursor has been set, or after a call to unsetCursor(), the - tqparent's cursor is used. The function unsetCursor() has no effect + parent's cursor is used. The function unsetCursor() has no effect on top-level widgets. \sa TQApplication::setOverrideCursor() @@ -6066,7 +6066,7 @@ void TQWidget::clearFocus() TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild() only when it reaches the last or first link on the "page". - Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their tqparent widgets, + Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets, but only the top-level widget decides where to redirect focus. By overriding this method for an object, you thus gain control of focus traversal for all child widgets. @@ -6257,11 +6257,11 @@ bool TQWidget::isActiveWindow() const } #endif #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN32) - HWND tqparent = tlw->winId(); - HWND toptqparent = GetActiveWindow(); - while ( tqparent ) { - tqparent = ::GetParent( tqparent ); - if ( tqparent && tqparent == toptqparent ) + HWND parent = tlw->winId(); + HWND topparent = GetActiveWindow(); + while ( parent ) { + parent = ::GetParent( parent ); + if ( parent && parent == topparent ) return TRUE; } #endif @@ -6344,7 +6344,7 @@ void TQWidget::setTabOrder( TQWidget* first, TQWidget *second ) /*!\internal Moves the relevant subwidgets of this widget from the \a oldtlw's - tab chain to that of the new tqparent, if there's anything to move and + tab chain to that of the new parent, if there's anything to move and we're really moving This function is called from TQWidget::reparent() *after* the widget @@ -6394,7 +6394,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparentFocusWidgets( TQWidget * oldtlw ) } /*! - \fn void TQWidget::recreate( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt ) + \fn void TQWidget::recreate( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt ) \obsolete @@ -6423,7 +6423,7 @@ TQSize TQWidget::frameSize() const \internal Recursive function that updates \a widget and all its tqchildren, - if they have some tqparent background origin. + if they have some parent background origin. */ static void qt_update_bg_recursive( TQWidget *widget ) { @@ -6607,7 +6607,7 @@ void TQWidget::show() if ( !isTopLevel() && !parentWidget()->isVisible() ) { // we should become visible, but one of our ancestors is // explicitly hidden. Since we cleared the ForceHide flag, our - // immediate tqparent will call show() on us again during its + // immediate parent will call show() on us again during its // own processing of show(). if ( wasHidden ) { TQEvent showToParentEvent( TQEvent::ShowToParent ); @@ -6741,14 +6741,14 @@ void TQWidget::hide() tqApp->closePopup( this ); // Move test modal here. Otherwise, a modal dialog could get - // destroyed and we lose all access to its tqparent because we haven't + // destroyed and we lose all access to its parent because we haven't // left modality. (Eg. modal Progress Dialog) if ( testWFlags(WShowModal) ) qt_leave_modal( this ); #if defined(TQ_WS_WIN) if ( isTopLevel() && !isPopup() && parentWidget() && isActiveWindow() ) - parentWidget()->setActiveWindow(); // Activate tqparent + parentWidget()->setActiveWindow(); // Activate parent #endif hideWindow(); @@ -6772,7 +6772,7 @@ void TQWidget::hide() TQApplication::sendEvent( this, &hideToParentEvent ); } - // post tqlayout hint for non toplevels. The tqparent widget check is + // post tqlayout hint for non toplevels. The parent widget check is // necessary since the function is called in the destructor if ( !isTopLevel() && parentWidget() ) TQApplication::postEvent( parentWidget(), @@ -6873,7 +6873,7 @@ void TQWidget::polish() if ( isTopLevel() ) { const TQPixmap *pm = icon(); if ( !pm || pm->isNull() ) { - TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget *)tqparent(); + TQWidget *mw = (TQWidget *)parent(); pm = mw ? mw->icon() : 0; if ( pm && !pm->isNull() ) setIcon( *pm ); @@ -7018,7 +7018,7 @@ bool TQWidget::close( bool alsoDelete ) \property TQWidget::visible \brief whether the widget is visible - Calling show() sets the widget to visible status if all its tqparent + Calling show() sets the widget to visible status if all its parent widgets up to the top-level widget are visible. If an ancestor is not visible, the widget won't become visible until all its ancestors are shown. @@ -7051,7 +7051,7 @@ bool TQWidget::close( bool alsoDelete ) Returns TRUE if this widget would become visible if \a ancestor is shown; otherwise returns FALSE. - The TRUE case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any tqparent + The TRUE case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent up to but excluding \a ancestor has been explicitly hidden. This function will still return TRUE if the widget is obscured by @@ -7256,9 +7256,9 @@ TQSize TQWidget::tqminimumSizeHint() const /*! \fn TQWidget *TQWidget::parentWidget( bool sameWindow ) const - Returns the tqparent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any - tqparent widget. If \a sameWindow is TRUE and the widget is top - level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's tqparent. + Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any + parent widget. If \a sameWindow is TRUE and the widget is top + level returns 0; otherwise returns the widget's parent. */ /*! @@ -7742,7 +7742,7 @@ void TQWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQWheelEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -7762,7 +7762,7 @@ void TQWidget::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQTabletEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle - it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -7784,10 +7784,10 @@ void TQWidget::tabletEvent( TQTabletEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you explicitly \link TQKeyEvent::ignore() ignore\endlink the event - if you do not understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can + if you do not understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it; otherwise, the event will be implicitly accepted. Although top-level widgets are able to choose whether to accept - or ignore unknown events because they have no tqparent widgets that + or ignore unknown events because they have no parent widgets that could otherwise handle them, it is good practice to explicitly ignore events to make widgets as reusable as possible. @@ -7818,7 +7818,7 @@ void TQWidget::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e ) If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you \link TQKeyEvent ignore()\endlink the release if you do not - understand it, so that the widget's tqparent can interpret it. + understand it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it. The default implementation ignores the event. @@ -8285,11 +8285,11 @@ bool TQWidget::qwsEvent( TQWSEvent * ) /*! \property TQWidget::autoMask - \brief whether the auto tqmask feature is enabled for the widget + \brief whether the auto mask feature is enabled for the widget - Transtqparent widgets use a tqmask to define their visible region. + Transparent widgets use a mask to define their visible region. TQWidget has some built-in support to make the task of - recalculating the tqmask easier. When setting auto tqmask to TRUE, + recalculating the mask easier. When setting auto mask to TRUE, updateMask() will be called whenever the widget is resized or changes its focus state. Note that you must reimplement updateMask() (which should include a call to setMask()) or nothing @@ -8297,7 +8297,7 @@ bool TQWidget::qwsEvent( TQWSEvent * ) Note: when you re-implement resizeEvent(), focusInEvent() or focusOutEvent() in your custom widgets and still want to ensure - that the auto tqmask calculation works, you should add: + that the auto mask calculation works, you should add: \code if ( autoMask() ) @@ -8306,17 +8306,17 @@ bool TQWidget::qwsEvent( TQWSEvent * ) at the end of your event handlers. This is true for all member functions that change the appearance of the widget in a way that - requires a recalculation of the tqmask. + requires a recalculation of the mask. While being a technically appealing concept, masks have a big drawback: when using complex masks that cannot be expressed easily with relatively simple regions, they can be very slow on some - window systems. The classic example is a transtqparent label. The + window systems. The classic example is a transparent label. The complex tqshape of its contents makes it necessary to represent its - tqmask by a bitmap, which consumes both memory and time. If all you + mask by a bitmap, which consumes both memory and time. If all you want is to blend the background of several neighboring widgets together seamlessly, you will probably want to use - setBackgroundOrigin() rather than a tqmask. + setBackgroundOrigin() rather than a mask. \sa autoMask() updateMask() setMask() clearMask() setBackgroundOrigin() */ @@ -8348,9 +8348,9 @@ void TQWidget::setAutoMask( bool enable ) The pixmap is drawn using the: \value WidgetOrigin widget's coordinate system. - \value ParentOrigin tqparent's coordinate system. + \value ParentOrigin parent's coordinate system. \value WindowOrigin top-level window's coordinate system. - \value AncestorOrigin same origin as the tqparent uses. + \value AncestorOrigin same origin as the parent uses. */ /*! @@ -8385,8 +8385,8 @@ void TQWidget::setBackgroundOrigin( BackgroundOrigin origin ) /*! This function can be reimplemented in a subclass to support - transtqparent widgets. It should be called whenever a widget changes - state in a way that means that the tqshape tqmask must be recalculated. + transparent widgets. It should be called whenever a widget changes + state in a way that means that the tqshape mask must be recalculated. \sa setAutoMask(), updateMask(), setMask(), clearMask() */ @@ -8620,22 +8620,22 @@ void TQWidget::updateGeometry() /*! - Reparents the widget. The widget gets a new \a tqparent, new widget + Reparents the widget. The widget gets a new \a parent, new widget flags (\a f, but as usual, use 0) at a new position in its new - tqparent (\a p). + parent (\a p). If \a showIt is TRUE, show() is called once the widget has been reparented. - If the new tqparent widget is in a different top-level widget, the + If the new parent widget is in a different top-level widget, the reparented widget and its tqchildren are appended to the end of the - \link setFocusPolicy() tab chain \endlink of the new tqparent + \link setFocusPolicy() tab chain \endlink of the new parent widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved widgets had keyboard focus, reparent() calls clearFocus() for that widget. - If the new tqparent widget is in the same top-level widget as the - old tqparent, reparent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard + If the new parent widget is in the same top-level widget as the + old parent, reparent doesn't change the tab order or keyboard focus. \warning It is extremely unlikely that you will ever need this @@ -8646,11 +8646,11 @@ void TQWidget::updateGeometry() \sa getWFlags() */ -void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, +void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool showIt ) { - reparentSys( tqparent, f, p, showIt ); - TQEvent e( TQEvent::Retqparent ); + reparentSys( parent, f, p, showIt ); + TQEvent e( TQEvent::Reparent ); TQApplication::sendEvent( this, &e ); if (!own_font) unsetFont(); @@ -8668,20 +8668,20 @@ void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, A convenience version of reparent that does not take widget flags as argument. - Calls reparent(\a tqparent, getWFlags() \& ~\l WType_Mask, \a p, \a + Calls reparent(\a parent, getWFlags() \& ~\l WType_Mask, \a p, \a showIt). */ -void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQPoint & p, +void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *parent, const TQPoint & p, bool showIt ) { - reparent( tqparent, getWFlags() & ~WType_Mask, p, showIt ); + reparent( parent, getWFlags() & ~WType_Mask, p, showIt ); } /*! \property TQWidget::ownCursor \brief whether the widget uses its own cursor - If FALSE, the widget uses its tqparent widget's cursor. + If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's cursor. \sa cursor */ @@ -8690,7 +8690,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQPoint & p, \property TQWidget::ownFont \brief whether the widget uses its own font - If FALSE, the widget uses its tqparent widget's font. + If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's font. \sa font */ @@ -8699,7 +8699,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparent( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQPoint & p, \property TQWidget::ownPalette \brief whether the widget uses its own palette - If FALSE, the widget uses its tqparent widget's palette. + If FALSE, the widget uses its parent widget's palette. \sa palette */ @@ -8737,16 +8737,16 @@ void TQDesktopWidget::insertChild( TQObject *obj ) \brief The level of opacity for the window. The valid range of opacity is from 1.0 (completely opaque) to - 0.0 (completely transtqparent). + 0.0 (completely transparent). By default the value of this property is 1.0. This feature is only present on Mac OS X and Windows 2000 and up. - \warning Changing this property from opaque to transtqparent might issue a + \warning Changing this property from opaque to transparent might issue a paint event that needs to be processed before the window is displayed correctly. This affects mainly the use of TQPixmap::grabWindow(). Also note - that semi-transtqparent windows update and resize significantely slower than + that semi-transparent windows update and resize significantely slower than opaque windows. */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.h index 6af93ed..d5f9cb5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget.h @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ struct TQTLWExtra : public QTLWExtra, virtual public TQt uint ussize : 1; // User defined size #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) - WId parentWinId; // tqparent window Id (valid after reparenting) + WId parentWinId; // parent window Id (valid after reparenting) #endif }; @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQWidget : public QWidget, virtual public TQt Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQObject *tqparent() const; + TQObject *parent() const; TQObjectList childrenListObject(); const TQObjectList childrenListObject() const; @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ public: // TQWidget methods public: - TQWidget( QWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQWidget( QWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); void setWState( uint state ); void clearWState( uint flags ); @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ public: X11WindowTypePopup }; void x11SetWindowType( X11WindowType type = X11WindowTypeSelect ); - void x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* tqparent ); + void x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* parent ); #endif }; @@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQWidget : public TQObject, public TQPaintDevice Q_PROPERTY( double windowOpacity READ windowOpacity WRITE setWindowOpacity DESIGNABLE false ) public: - TQ_EXPLICIT TQWidget( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQ_EXPLICIT TQWidget( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQWidget(); WId winId() const; @@ -946,13 +946,13 @@ public: TQLayout * tqlayout() const { return lay_out; } #endif void updateGeometry(); - virtual void reparent( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags, const TQPoint &, + virtual void reparent( TQWidget *parent, WFlags, const TQPoint &, bool showIt=FALSE ); - void reparent( TQWidget *tqparent, const TQPoint &, + void reparent( TQWidget *parent, const TQPoint &, bool showIt=FALSE ); #ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT - void recreate( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, - bool showIt=FALSE ) { reparent(tqparent,f,p,showIt); } + void recreate( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint & p, + bool showIt=FALSE ) { reparent(parent,f,p,showIt); } #endif void erase(); @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ public: X11WindowTypePopup }; void x11SetWindowType( X11WindowType type = X11WindowTypeSelect ); - void x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* tqparent ); + void x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* parent ); #endif void setWindowOpacity(double level); double windowOpacity() const; @@ -1180,7 +1180,7 @@ private: void hideWindow(); void showChildren( bool spontaneous ); void hideChildren( bool spontaneous ); - void reparentSys( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags, const TQPoint &, bool showIt); + void reparentSys( TQWidget *parent, WFlags, const TQPoint &, bool showIt); void createTLExtra(); void createExtra(); void deleteExtra(); @@ -1434,8 +1434,8 @@ inline void TQWidget::drawText( const TQPoint &p, const TQString &s ) inline TQWidget *TQWidget::parentWidget( bool sameWindow ) const { if ( sameWindow ) - return isTopLevel() ? 0 : (TQWidget *)TQObject::tqparent(); - return (TQWidget *)TQObject::tqparent(); + return isTopLevel() ? 0 : (TQWidget *)TQObject::parent(); + return (TQWidget *)TQObject::parent(); } inline TQWidgetMapper *TQWidget::wmapper() @@ -1530,7 +1530,7 @@ struct TQ_EXPORT TQTLWExtra { uint savedFlags; // Save widgetflags while showing fullscreen short basew, baseh; // base sizes #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) - WId parentWinId; // tqparent window Id (valid after reparenting) + WId parentWinId; // parent window Id (valid after reparenting) uint embedded : 1; // window is embedded in another TQt application uint spont_unmapped: 1; // window was spontaneously unmapped uint reserved: 1; // reserved @@ -1600,7 +1600,7 @@ struct TQ_EXPORT TQWExtra { uint compress_events : 1; #endif #if defined(TQ_WS_TQWS) || defined(TQ_WS_MAC) - TQRegion tqmask; // widget tqmask + TQRegion mask; // widget mask #endif char bg_mode; // background mode char bg_mode_visual; // visual background mode diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp index 60df412..532a372 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidget_x11.cpp @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ void TQWidget::setMask( const QBitmap bitmap ) fixerUpper.drawLine(0, fixedBitmap.height()-1, fixedBitmap.width()-1, fixedBitmap.height()-1); fixerUpper.drawLine(fixedBitmap.width()-1, 0, fixedBitmap.width()-1, fixedBitmap.height()-1); fixerUpper.end(); - QWidget::setMask(fixedBitmap.mask()); + QWidget::setMask(fixedBitmap.QBitmap::mask()); } /*! @@ -395,9 +395,9 @@ void TQWidget::sendMouseEventToInputContext( int x, TQEvent::Type type, TQt::But #endif } -void TQWidget::x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* tqparent ) +void TQWidget::x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* parent ) { - XSetTransientForHint( x11Display(), winId(), tqparent->winId()); + XSetTransientForHint( x11Display(), winId(), parent->winId()); } // Sets the EWMH (netwm) window type. Needed as a separate function @@ -551,7 +551,7 @@ extern int qt_curr_events_stylus; extern int qt_curr_events_eraser; #endif -const uint stdWidgetEventMask = // X event tqmask +const uint stdWidgetEventMask = // X event mask (uint)( KeyPressMask | KeyReleaseMask | ButtonPressMask | ButtonReleaseMask | @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ const uint stdWidgetEventMask = // X event tqmask StructureNotifyMask ); -const uint stdDesktopEventMask = // X event tqmask +const uint stdDesktopEventMask = // X event mask (uint)( KeymapStateMask | EnterWindowMask | LeaveWindowMask | @@ -577,13 +577,13 @@ const uint stdDesktopEventMask = // X event tqmask */ Window qt_XCreateWindow( const TQWidget *creator, - Display *display, Window tqparent, + Display *display, Window parent, int x, int y, uint w, uint h, int borderwidth, int depth, uint windowclass, Visual *visual, - ulong valuetqmask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes ); + ulong valuemask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes ); Window qt_XCreateSimpleWindow( const TQWidget *creator, - Display *display, Window tqparent, + Display *display, Window parent, int x, int y, uint w, uint h, int borderwidth, ulong border, ulong background ); void qt_XDestroyWindow( const TQWidget *destroyer, @@ -743,7 +743,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) xd->x_defvisual = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDefaultVisual( xd->x_screen ); setX11Data( xd ); } else if ( parentWidget() && parentWidget()->x11Screen() != x11Screen() ) { - // if we have a tqparent widget, move to its screen if necessary + // if we have a parent widget, move to its screen if necessary TQPaintDeviceX11Data* xd = getX11Data( TRUE ); xd->x_screen = parentWidget()->x11Screen(); xd->x_depth = TQPaintDevice::x11AppDepth( xd->x_screen ); @@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) &wsa ); x11SetWindowType(); } else if ( topLevel && !desktop ) { // top-level widget - TQWidget *p = parentWidget(); // real tqparent + TQWidget *p = parentWidget(); // real parent if (p) p = p->tqtopLevelWidget(); @@ -966,7 +966,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) XSetTransientForHint( dpy, id, root_win ); } - // find the real client leader, i.e. a toplevel without tqparent + // find the real client leader, i.e. a toplevel without parent while ( p && p->parentWidget()) p = p->parentWidget()->tqtopLevelWidget(); @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ void TQWidget::create( WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow) } setWState( WState_MouseTracking ); - setMouseTracking( FALSE ); // also sets event tqmask + setMouseTracking( FALSE ); // also sets event mask if ( desktop ) { setWState( WState_Visible ); } else if ( topLevel ) { // set X cursor @@ -1158,7 +1158,7 @@ void TQWidget::destroy( bool destroyWindow, bool destroySubWindows ) } } -void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool showIt ) +void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool showIt ) { extern void qPRCreate( const TQWidget *, Window ); @@ -1179,7 +1179,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool clearWState(WState_MouseTracking); TQWidget* oldtlw = tqtopLevelWidget(); - TQWidget *oldtqparent = parentWidget(); + TQWidget *oldparent = parentWidget(); WId old_winid = winid; if ( testWFlags(WType_Desktop) ) old_winid = 0; @@ -1203,14 +1203,14 @@ void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool destroySyncCounter(); #endif - if ( isTopLevel() || !tqparent ) // we are toplevel, or reparenting to toplevel + if ( isTopLevel() || !parent ) // we are toplevel, or reparenting to toplevel topData()->parentWinId = 0; - if ( tqparent != parentObj ) { - if ( parentObj ) // remove from tqparent + if ( parent != parentObj ) { + if ( parentObj ) // remove from parent parentObj->removeChild( this ); - if ( tqparent ) // insert into new tqparent - tqparent->insertChild( this ); + if ( parent ) // insert into new parent + parent->insertChild( this ); } bool enable = isEnabled(); // remember status FocusPolicy fp = focusPolicy(); @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool widget_flags = f; clearWState( WState_Created | WState_Visible | WState_ForceHide ); create(); - if ( isTopLevel() || (!tqparent || tqparent->isVisible() ) ) + if ( isTopLevel() || (!parent || parent->isVisible() ) ) setWState( WState_ForceHide ); // new widgets do not show up in already visible parents const TQObjectList *chlist = childrenListObject(); @@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool WM_TRANSIENT_FOR information... unfortunately, some window managers don't handle changing WM_TRANSIENT_FOR before the toplevel window is visible, so we unmap and remap all toplevel-transient tqchildren *after* - the toplevel tqparent has been mapped. thankfully, this is easy in TQt :) + the toplevel parent has been mapped. thankfully, this is easy in TQt :) */ XUnmapWindow(w->x11Display(), w->winId()); XSetTransientForHint(w->x11Display(), w->winId(), winId()); @@ -1288,8 +1288,8 @@ void TQWidget::reparentSys( TQWidget *tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint &p, bool reparentFocusWidgets( oldtlw ); // re-register dnd - if (oldtqparent) - oldtqparent->checkChildrenDnd(); + if (oldparent) + oldparent->checkChildrenDnd(); if ( accept_drops ) setAcceptDrops( TRUE ); @@ -1358,9 +1358,9 @@ void TQWidget::x11SetWindowType( X11WindowType type ) XDeleteProperty(x11Display(), winId(), qt_net_wm_window_type); } -void TQWidget::x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* tqparent ) +void TQWidget::x11SetWindowTransient( TQWidget* parent ) { - XSetTransientForHint( x11Display(), winId(), tqparent->winId()); + XSetTransientForHint( x11Display(), winId(), parent->winId()); } /*! @@ -1621,11 +1621,11 @@ void TQWidget::setIcon( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) if ( !pixmap.isNull() ) { TQPixmap* pm = new TQPixmap( pixmap ); extra->topextra->icon = pm; - if ( !pm->tqmask() ) + if ( !pm->mask() ) pm->setMask( pm->createHeuristicMask() ); // may do detach() icon_pixmap = pm->handle(); - if ( pm->tqmask() ) - mask_pixmap = pm->tqmask()->handle(); + if ( pm->mask() ) + mask_pixmap = pm->mask()->handle(); } XWMHints *h = XGetWMHints( x11Display(), winId() ); XWMHints wm_hints; @@ -2311,7 +2311,7 @@ void TQWidget::hideWindow() } /*! - Raises this widget to the top of the tqparent widget's stack. + Raises this widget to the top of the parent widget's stack. After this call the widget will be visually in front of any overlapping sibling widgets. @@ -2328,7 +2328,7 @@ void TQWidget::raise() } /*! - Lowers the widget to the bottom of the tqparent widget's stack. + Lowers the widget to the bottom of the parent widget's stack. After this call the widget will be visually behind (and therefore obscured by) any overlapping sibling widgets. @@ -2346,7 +2346,7 @@ void TQWidget::lower() /*! - Places the widget under \a w in the tqparent widget's stack. + Places the widget under \a w in the parent widget's stack. To make this work, the widget itself and \a w must be siblings. @@ -2902,7 +2902,7 @@ void TQWidget::deleteTLSysExtra() } /* - examine the tqchildren of our tqparent up the tree and set the + examine the tqchildren of our parent up the tree and set the tqchildren_use_dnd extra data appropriately... this is used to keep DND enabled for widgets that are reparented and don't have DND enabled, BUT *DO* have tqchildren (or tqchildren of tqchildren ...) with DND enabled... @@ -3040,7 +3040,7 @@ void TQWidget::setMask( const TQRegion& region ) /*! Causes only the pixels of the widget for which \a bitmap has a corresponding 1 bit to be visible. Use TQt::color0 to draw - transtqparent regions and TQt::color1 to draw opaque regions of the + transparent regions and TQt::color1 to draw opaque regions of the bitmap. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the widget, @@ -3065,7 +3065,7 @@ void TQWidget::setMask( const TQBitmap &bitmap ) } /*! - Removes any tqmask set by setMask(). + Removes any mask set by setMask(). \sa setMask() */ @@ -3106,7 +3106,7 @@ void TQWidget::updateFrameStrut() const } Atom type_ret; - Window l = winId(), w = winId(), p, r; // target window, it's tqparent, root + Window l = winId(), w = winId(), p, r; // target window, it's parent, root Window *c; int i_unused; unsigned int nc; @@ -3118,11 +3118,11 @@ void TQWidget::updateFrameStrut() const XFree(c); if (! p) { - qWarning("TQWidget::updateFrameStrut(): ERROR - no tqparent"); + qWarning("TQWidget::updateFrameStrut(): ERROR - no parent"); return; } - // if the tqparent window is the root window, an Enlightenment virtual root or + // if the parent window is the root window, an Enlightenment virtual root or // a NET WM virtual root window, stop here data_ret = 0; if (p == r || diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidgetcreate_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidgetcreate_x11.cpp index 574374d..5bbb7c1 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidgetcreate_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/kernel/tqwidgetcreate_x11.cpp @@ -48,22 +48,22 @@ custom versions. */ -Window qt_XCreateWindow( const TQWidget*, Display *display, Window tqparent, +Window qt_XCreateWindow( const TQWidget*, Display *display, Window parent, int x, int y, uint w, uint h, int borderwidth, int depth, uint windowclass, Visual *visual, - ulong valuetqmask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes ) + ulong valuemask, XSetWindowAttributes *attributes ) { - return XCreateWindow( display, tqparent, x, y, w, h, borderwidth, depth, - windowclass, visual, valuetqmask, attributes ); + return XCreateWindow( display, parent, x, y, w, h, borderwidth, depth, + windowclass, visual, valuemask, attributes ); } -Window qt_XCreateSimpleWindow( const TQWidget*, Display *display, Window tqparent, +Window qt_XCreateSimpleWindow( const TQWidget*, Display *display, Window parent, int x, int y, uint w, uint h, int borderwidth, ulong border, ulong background ) { - return XCreateSimpleWindow( display, tqparent, x, y, w, h, borderwidth, + return XCreateSimpleWindow( display, parent, x, y, w, h, borderwidth, border, background ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqdns.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqdns.cpp index 898ac43..4ba3a85 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqdns.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqdns.cpp @@ -4166,8 +4166,8 @@ void TQDnsDomain::sweep( TQ_UINT32 thisSweep ) // so I can subclass and reimplement the Q_SLOTS. -TQDnsSocket::TQDnsSocket( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQDnsSocket::TQDnsSocket( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { // nothing } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.cpp index 7b6acdd..78f1ce8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.cpp @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ public: CsConnectionRefused }; - TQFtpDTP( TQFtpPI *p, TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQFtpDTP( TQFtpPI *p, TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); void setData( TQByteArray * ); void setDevice( TQIODevice * ); @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ class TQFtpPI : public TQObject TQ_OBJECT public: - TQFtpPI( TQObject *tqparent = 0 ); + TQFtpPI( TQObject *parent = 0 ); void connectToHost( const TQString &host, TQ_UINT16 port ); @@ -291,8 +291,8 @@ TQFtpCommand::~TQFtpCommand() * TQFtpDTP implemenatation * *********************************************************************/ -TQFtpDTP::TQFtpDTP( TQFtpPI *p, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) : - TQObject( tqparent, name ), +TQFtpDTP::TQFtpDTP( TQFtpPI *p, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : + TQObject( parent, name ), socket( 0, "TQFtpDTP_socket" ), pi( p ), callWriteData( FALSE ) @@ -629,8 +629,8 @@ void TQFtpDTP::socketBytesWritten( int bytes ) * TQFtpPI implemenatation * *********************************************************************/ -TQFtpPI::TQFtpPI( TQObject *tqparent ) : - TQObject( tqparent ), +TQFtpPI::TQFtpPI( TQObject *parent ) : + TQObject( parent ), rawCommand(FALSE), dtp( this ), commandSocket( 0, "TQFtpPI_socket" ), @@ -1125,7 +1125,7 @@ static void delete_d( const TQFtp* foo ) simply achieved: \code - TQFtp *ftp = new TQFtp( this ); // this is an optional TQObject tqparent + TQFtp *ftp = new TQFtp( this ); // this is an optional TQObject parent ftp->connectToHost( "ftp.trolltech.com" ); ftp->login(); \endcode @@ -1237,13 +1237,13 @@ TQFtp::TQFtp() : TQNetworkProtocol() } /*! - Constructs a TQFtp object. The \a tqparent and \a name parameters + Constructs a TQFtp object. The \a parent and \a name parameters are passed to the TQObject constructor. */ -TQFtp::TQFtp( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) : TQNetworkProtocol() +TQFtp::TQFtp( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) : TQNetworkProtocol() { - if ( tqparent ) - tqparent->insertChild( this ); + if ( parent ) + parent->insertChild( this ); TQT_TQOBJECT(this)->setName( name ); init(); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.h index ee49afc..afa7461 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqftp.h @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_FTP TQFtp : public TQNetworkProtocol public: TQFtp(); // ### TQt 4.0: get rid of this overload - TQFtp( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name=0 ); + TQFtp( TQObject *parent, const char *name=0 ); virtual ~TQFtp(); int supportedOperations() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.cpp index 53cdbeb..6b1f061 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.cpp @@ -1189,13 +1189,13 @@ TQHttp::TQHttp() } /*! - Constructs a TQHttp object. The parameters \a tqparent and \a name + Constructs a TQHttp object. The parameters \a parent and \a name are passed on to the TQObject constructor. */ -TQHttp::TQHttp( TQObject* tqparent, const char* name ) +TQHttp::TQHttp( TQObject* parent, const char* name ) { - if ( tqparent ) - tqparent->insertChild( this ); + if ( parent ) + parent->insertChild( this ); setName( name ); init(); } @@ -1203,15 +1203,15 @@ TQHttp::TQHttp( TQObject* tqparent, const char* name ) /*! Constructs a TQHttp object. Subsequent requests are done by connecting to the server \a hostname on port \a port. The - parameters \a tqparent and \a name are passed on to the TQObject + parameters \a parent and \a name are passed on to the TQObject constructor. \sa setHost() */ -TQHttp::TQHttp( const TQString &hostname, TQ_UINT16 port, TQObject* tqparent, const char* name ) +TQHttp::TQHttp( const TQString &hostname, TQ_UINT16 port, TQObject* parent, const char* name ) { - if ( tqparent ) - tqparent->insertChild( this ); + if ( parent ) + parent->insertChild( this ); setName( name ); init(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.h index 37ab916..fb20d4f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqhttp.h @@ -173,8 +173,8 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_HTTP TQHttp : public TQNetworkProtocol public: TQHttp(); - TQHttp( TQObject* tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); // ### TQt 4.0: make tqparent=0 and get rid of the TQHttp() constructor - TQHttp( const TQString &hostname, TQ_UINT16 port=80, TQObject* tqparent=0, const char* name = 0 ); + TQHttp( TQObject* parent, const char* name = 0 ); // ### TQt 4.0: make parent=0 and get rid of the TQHttp() constructor + TQHttp( const TQString &hostname, TQ_UINT16 port=80, TQObject* parent=0, const char* name = 0 ); virtual ~TQHttp(); int supportedOperations() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp index bd067b1..02a15b0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.cpp @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ public: backlog to specify how many pending connections the server can have. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor. \warning On Tru64 Unix systems a value of 0 for \a backlog means @@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ public: */ TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( TQ_UINT16 port, int backlog, - TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) + TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQServerSocketPrivate; init( TQHostAddress(), port, backlog ); @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( TQ_UINT16 port, int backlog, only on the given \a address. Use \a backlog to specify how many pending connections the server can have. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor. \warning On Tru64 Unix systems a value of 0 for \a backlog means @@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( TQ_UINT16 port, int backlog, TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( const TQHostAddress & address, TQ_UINT16 port, int backlog, - TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) + TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQServerSocketPrivate; init( address, port, backlog ); @@ -133,14 +133,14 @@ TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( const TQHostAddress & address, TQ_UINT16 port, use the TQServerSocket class as a wrapper for other socket types (e.g. Unix Domain Sockets under Unix). - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor. \sa setSocket() */ -TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQServerSocket::TQServerSocket( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQServerSocketPrivate; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.h index 5024c62..d1f4a83 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqserversocket.h @@ -63,10 +63,10 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_NETWORK TQServerSocket : public TQObject TQ_OBJECT public: TQServerSocket( TQ_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, - TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); TQServerSocket( const TQHostAddress & address, TQ_UINT16 port, int backlog = 1, - TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); - TQServerSocket( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQServerSocket( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); virtual ~TQServerSocket(); bool ok() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.cpp index c894f3e..8e4d40a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.cpp @@ -393,22 +393,22 @@ qint64 TQSocket::writeData( const char *data, qint64 len ) /*! Creates a TQSocket object in \c TQSocket::Idle state. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQObject constructor. Note that a TQApplication must have been constructed before sockets can be used. */ -TQSocket::TQSocket( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) +TQSocket::TQSocket( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) #ifdef USE_QT4 : TQIODevice() #else // USE_QT4 - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) #endif // USE_QT4 { #ifdef USE_QT4 - setParent(tqparent); + setParent(parent); setObjectName(name); #endif // USE_QT4 d = new TQSocketPrivate; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.h index 664356c..7b9453e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/network/tqsocket.h @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ public: ErrSocketRead }; - TQSocket( TQObject *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ); + TQSocket( TQObject *parent=0, const char *name=0 ); virtual ~TQSocket(); enum State { Idle, HostLookup, Connecting, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp index 7054e8e..77d4809 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.cpp @@ -207,8 +207,8 @@ TQGLFormat::TQGLFormat() \code // The rendering in MyGLWidget depends on using // stencil buffer and alpha channel - MyGLWidget::MyGLWidget( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQGLWidget( TQGLFormat( StencilBuffer | AlphaChannel ), tqparent, name ) + MyGLWidget::MyGLWidget( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) + : TQGLWidget( TQGLFormat( StencilBuffer | AlphaChannel ), parent, name ) { if ( !format().stencil() ) qWarning( "Could not get stencil buffer; results will be suboptimal" ); @@ -998,17 +998,17 @@ void TQGLContext::init( TQPaintDevice *dev ) \fn TQColor TQGLContext::overlayTransparentColor() const If this context is a valid context in an overlay plane, returns - the plane's transtqparent color. Otherwise returns an \link + the plane's transparent color. Otherwise returns an \link TQColor::isValid() invalid \endlink color. The returned color's \link TQColor::pixel() pixel \endlink value is - the index of the transtqparent color in the colormap of the overlay + the index of the transparent color in the colormap of the overlay plane. (Naturally, the color's RGB values are meaningless.) The returned TQColor object will generally work as expected only when passed as the argument to TQGLWidget::qglColor() or TQGLWidget::qglClearColor(). Under certain circumstances it can - also be used to draw transtqparent graphics with a TQPainter. See the + also be used to draw transparent graphics with a TQPainter. See the examples/opengl/overlay_x11 example for details. */ @@ -1168,8 +1168,8 @@ bool TQGLContext::create( const TQGLContext* shareContext ) TQ_OBJECT // must include this if you use TQt Q_SIGNALS/Q_SLOTS public: - MyGLDrawer( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQGLWidget(tqparent, name) {} + MyGLDrawer( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQGLWidget(parent, name) {} protected: @@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ bool TQGLContext::create( const TQGLContext* shareContext ) functions, except that they will be called when the overlay context is made current. You can explicitly make the overlay context current by using makeOverlayCurrent(), and you can access - the overlay context directly (e.g. to ask for its transtqparent + the overlay context directly (e.g. to ask for its transparent color) by calling overlayContext(). On X servers in which the default visual is in an overlay plane, @@ -1292,13 +1292,13 @@ void qgl_delete_d( const TQGLWidget * w ) } /*! - Constructs an OpenGL widget with a \a tqparent widget and a \a name. + Constructs an OpenGL widget with a \a parent widget and a \a name. The \link TQGLFormat::defaultFormat() default format\endlink is used. The widget will be \link isValid() invalid\endlink if the system has no \link TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL() OpenGL support\endlink. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed + The \a parent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. If the \a shareWidget parameter points to a valid TQGLWidget, this @@ -1314,16 +1314,16 @@ void qgl_delete_d( const TQGLWidget * w ) \sa TQGLFormat::defaultFormat() */ -TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, +TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, const TQGLWidget* shareWidget, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WWinOwnDC | WNoAutoErase) ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WWinOwnDC | WNoAutoErase) ) { init( new TQGLContext(TQGLFormat::defaultFormat(), TQT_TQPAINTDEVICE(this)), shareWidget ); } /*! - Constructs an OpenGL widget with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name. + Constructs an OpenGL widget with parent \a parent, called \a name. The \a format argument specifies the desired \link TQGLFormat rendering options \endlink. If the underlying OpenGL/Window system @@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, The widget will be \link isValid() invalid\endlink if the system has no \link TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL() OpenGL support\endlink. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed + The \a parent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. If the \a shareWidget parameter points to a valid TQGLWidget, this @@ -1350,16 +1350,16 @@ TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, \sa TQGLFormat::defaultFormat(), isValid() */ -TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( const TQGLFormat &format, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( const TQGLFormat &format, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, const TQGLWidget* shareWidget, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f | (WFlags)(TQt::WWinOwnDC | WNoAutoErase) ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f | (WFlags)(TQt::WWinOwnDC | WNoAutoErase) ) { init( new TQGLContext(format, TQT_TQPAINTDEVICE(this)), shareWidget ); } /*! - Constructs an OpenGL widget with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name. + Constructs an OpenGL widget with parent \a parent, called \a name. The \a context argument is a pointer to the TQGLContext that you wish to be bound to this widget. This allows you to pass in @@ -1368,7 +1368,7 @@ TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( const TQGLFormat &format, TQWidget *tqparent, The widget will be \link isValid() invalid\endlink if the system has no \link TQGLFormat::hasOpenGL() OpenGL support\endlink. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed + The \a parent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. If the \a shareWidget parameter points to a valid TQGLWidget, this @@ -1383,9 +1383,9 @@ TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( const TQGLFormat &format, TQWidget *tqparent, \sa TQGLFormat::defaultFormat(), isValid() */ -TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( TQGLContext *context, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQGLWidget::TQGLWidget( TQGLContext *context, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, const TQGLWidget *shareWidget, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WWinOwnDC | WNoAutoErase) ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WWinOwnDC | WNoAutoErase) ) { init( context, shareWidget ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.h index 4b6fce4..2f0431f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl.h @@ -277,11 +277,11 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_OPENGL TQGLWidget : public TQWidget, public TQGL Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQGLWidget( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, + TQGLWidget( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, const TQGLWidget* shareWidget = 0, WFlags f=0 ); - TQGLWidget( TQGLContext *context, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0, + TQGLWidget( TQGLContext *context, TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0, const TQGLWidget* shareWidget = 0, WFlags f=0 ); - TQGLWidget( const TQGLFormat& format, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, + TQGLWidget( const TQGLFormat& format, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, const TQGLWidget* shareWidget = 0, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQGLWidget(); @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ public: static TQImage convertToGLFormat( const TQImage& img ); void setMouseTracking( bool enable ); - virtual void reparent( TQWidget* tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint& p, + virtual void reparent( TQWidget* parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint& p, bool showIt = FALSE ); const TQGLColormap & colormap() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp index 2bedfd6..bc6bc0e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11.cpp @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ void *TQGLContext::tryVisual( const TQGLFormat& f, int bufDepth ) if ( useTranspExt ) { // bug workaround - some systems (eg. FireGL) refuses to return an overlay // visual if the GLX_TRANSPARENT_TYPE_EXT attribute is specfied, even if - // the implementation supports transtqparent overlays + // the implementation supports transparent overlays int tmpSpec[] = { GLX_LEVEL, f.plane(), GLX_TRANSPARENT_TYPE_EXT, f.rgba() ? GLX_TRANSPARENT_RGB_EXT : GLX_TRANSPARENT_INDEX_EXT, None }; @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ void *TQGLContext::tryVisual( const TQGLFormat& f, int bufDepth ) useTranspExtChecked = TRUE; } if ( f.plane() && useTranspExt ) { - // Required to avoid non-transtqparent overlay visual(!) on some systems + // Required to avoid non-transparent overlay visual(!) on some systems spec[i++] = GLX_TRANSPARENT_TYPE_EXT; spec[i++] = f.rgba() ? GLX_TRANSPARENT_RGB_EXT : GLX_TRANSPARENT_INDEX_EXT; } @@ -985,7 +985,7 @@ class TQGLOverlayWidget : public TQGLWidget { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQGLOverlayWidget( const TQGLFormat& format, TQGLWidget* tqparent, + TQGLOverlayWidget( const TQGLFormat& format, TQGLWidget* parent, const char* name=0, const TQGLWidget* shareWidget=0 ); protected: @@ -1004,12 +1004,12 @@ private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= }; -TQGLOverlayWidget::TQGLOverlayWidget( const TQGLFormat& format, TQGLWidget* tqparent, +TQGLOverlayWidget::TQGLOverlayWidget( const TQGLFormat& format, TQGLWidget* parent, const char* name, const TQGLWidget* shareWidget ) - : TQGLWidget( format, tqparent, name, shareWidget ? shareWidget->olw : 0 ) + : TQGLWidget( format, parent, name, shareWidget ? shareWidget->olw : 0 ) { - realWidget = tqparent; + realWidget = parent; } @@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ void TQGLOverlayWidget::initializeGL() if ( transparentColor.isValid() ) qglClearColor( transparentColor ); else - qWarning( "TQGLOverlayWidget::initializeGL(): Could not get transtqparent color" ); + qWarning( "TQGLOverlayWidget::initializeGL(): Could not get transparent color" ); realWidget->initializeOverlayGL(); } @@ -1077,12 +1077,12 @@ void TQGLWidget::init( TQGLContext *context, const TQGLWidget *shareWidget ) } /*! \reimp */ -void TQGLWidget::reparent( TQWidget* tqparent, WFlags f, const TQPoint& p, +void TQGLWidget::reparent( TQWidget* parent, WFlags f, const TQPoint& p, bool showIt ) { if (glcx) glcx->doneCurrent(); - TQWidget::reparent( tqparent, f, p, FALSE ); + TQWidget::reparent( parent, f, p, FALSE ); if ( showIt ) show(); } @@ -1308,15 +1308,15 @@ static bool qCanAllocColors( TQWidget * w ) { bool validVisual = FALSE; int numVisuals; - long tqmask; + long mask; XVisualInfo templ; XVisualInfo * visuals; VisualID id = XVisualIDFromVisual( (Visual *) w->tqtopLevelWidget()->x11Visual() ); - tqmask = VisualScreenMask; + mask = VisualScreenMask; templ.screen = w->x11Screen(); - visuals = XGetVisualInfo( w->x11Display(), tqmask, &templ, &numVisuals ); + visuals = XGetVisualInfo( w->x11Display(), mask, &templ, &numVisuals ); for ( int i = 0; i < numVisuals; i++ ) { if ( visuals[i].visualid == id ) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h index cb88352..dfb8acd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/opengl/tqgl_x11_p.h @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ typedef void (*_glMatrixMode)( GLenum mode ); typedef void (*_glOrtho)( GLdouble left, GLdouble right, GLdouble bottom, GLdouble top, GLdouble near_val, GLdouble far_val ); typedef void (*_glPopAttrib)( void ); typedef void (*_glPopMatrix)( void ); -typedef void (*_glPushAttrib)( GLbitfield tqmask ); +typedef void (*_glPushAttrib)( GLbitfield mask ); typedef void (*_glPushMatrix)( void ); typedef void (*_glRasterPos2i)( GLint x, GLint y ); typedef void (*_glRasterPos3d)( GLdouble x, GLdouble y, GLdouble z ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp index ddc103a..735363c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.cpp @@ -757,14 +757,14 @@ int TQIBaseResult::numRowsAffected() /*********************************/ -TQIBaseDriver::TQIBaseDriver(TQObject * tqparent, const char * name) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent, name ? name : TQIBASE_DRIVER_NAME) +TQIBaseDriver::TQIBaseDriver(TQObject * parent, const char * name) + : TQSqlDriver(parent, name ? name : TQIBASE_DRIVER_NAME) { d = new TQIBaseDriverPrivate(this); } -TQIBaseDriver::TQIBaseDriver(void *connection, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent, name ? name : TQIBASE_DRIVER_NAME) +TQIBaseDriver::TQIBaseDriver(void *connection, TQObject *parent, const char *name) + : TQSqlDriver(parent, name ? name : TQIBASE_DRIVER_NAME) { d = new TQIBaseDriverPrivate(this); d->ibase = (isc_db_handle)(long int)connection; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.h index be5bfd5..e720c1c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/ibase/tqsql_ibase.h @@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ class TQIBaseDriver : public TQSqlDriver friend class TQIBaseResultPrivate; friend class TQIBaseResult; public: - TQIBaseDriver(TQObject *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0); - TQIBaseDriver(void *connection, TQObject *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0); + TQIBaseDriver(TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0); + TQIBaseDriver(void *connection, TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0); virtual ~TQIBaseDriver(); bool hasFeature(DriverFeature f) const; bool open(const TQString & db, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp index e13f12b..98cccb2 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.cpp @@ -376,8 +376,8 @@ static void qServerInit() #endif // TQ_NO_MYSTQL_EMBEDDED } -TQMYSTQLDriver::TQMYSTQLDriver( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQSqlDriver( tqparent, name ? name : TQMYSTQL_DRIVER_NAME ) +TQMYSTQLDriver::TQMYSTQLDriver( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQSqlDriver( parent, name ? name : TQMYSTQL_DRIVER_NAME ) { init(); qServerInit(); @@ -387,8 +387,8 @@ TQMYSTQLDriver::TQMYSTQLDriver( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) Create a driver instance with an already open connection handle. */ -TQMYSTQLDriver::TQMYSTQLDriver( MYSQL * con, TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQSqlDriver( tqparent, name ? name : TQMYSTQL_DRIVER_NAME ) +TQMYSTQLDriver::TQMYSTQLDriver( MYSQL * con, TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQSqlDriver( parent, name ? name : TQMYSTQL_DRIVER_NAME ) { init(); if ( con ) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.h index ef4f4ce..385d900 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/mysql/tqsql_mysql.h @@ -90,8 +90,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT_STQLDRIVER_MYSQL TQMYSTQLDriver : public TQSqlDriver { friend class TQMYSTQLResult; public: - TQMYSTQLDriver( TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * name=0 ); - TQMYSTQLDriver( MYSQL * con, TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * name=0 ); + TQMYSTQLDriver( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 ); + TQMYSTQLDriver( MYSQL * con, TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 ); ~TQMYSTQLDriver(); bool hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const; bool open( const TQString & db, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp index 3401435..8e75f90 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.cpp @@ -1325,14 +1325,14 @@ bool TQODBCResult::exec() //////////////////////////////////////// -TQODBCDriver::TQODBCDriver( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent,name ? name : "TQODBC") +TQODBCDriver::TQODBCDriver( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQSqlDriver(parent,name ? name : "TQODBC") { init(); } -TQODBCDriver::TQODBCDriver( STQLHANDLE env, STQLHANDLE con, TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent,name ? name : "TQODBC") +TQODBCDriver::TQODBCDriver( STQLHANDLE env, STQLHANDLE con, TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQSqlDriver(parent,name ? name : "TQODBC") { init(); d->hEnv = env; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.h index 74ab4e7..cb09743 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/odbc/tqsql_odbc.h @@ -121,8 +121,8 @@ private: class TQ_EXPORT_STQLDRIVER_ODBC TQODBCDriver : public TQSqlDriver { public: - TQODBCDriver( TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * name=0 ); - TQODBCDriver( STQLHANDLE env, STQLHANDLE con, TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * name=0 ); + TQODBCDriver( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 ); + TQODBCDriver( STQLHANDLE env, STQLHANDLE con, TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 ); ~TQODBCDriver(); bool hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const; bool open( const TQString & db, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp index b5885bf..7809749 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.cpp @@ -554,14 +554,14 @@ static TQPSTQLDriver::Protocol getPSTQLVersion( PGconn* connection ) return TQPSTQLDriver::Version6; } -TQPSTQLDriver::TQPSTQLDriver( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent,name ? name : "TQPSQL"), pro( TQPSTQLDriver::Version6 ) +TQPSTQLDriver::TQPSTQLDriver( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQSqlDriver(parent,name ? name : "TQPSQL"), pro( TQPSTQLDriver::Version6 ) { init(); } -TQPSTQLDriver::TQPSTQLDriver( PGconn * conn, TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent,name ? name : "TQPSQL"), pro( TQPSTQLDriver::Version6 ) +TQPSTQLDriver::TQPSTQLDriver( PGconn * conn, TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQSqlDriver(parent,name ? name : "TQPSQL"), pro( TQPSTQLDriver::Version6 ) { init(); d->connection = conn; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.h index c005107..6afbc96 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/psql/tqsql_psql.h @@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ public: Version73 = 9 }; - TQPSTQLDriver( TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * name=0 ); - TQPSTQLDriver( PGconn * conn, TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * name=0 ); + TQPSTQLDriver( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 ); + TQPSTQLDriver( PGconn * conn, TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 ); ~TQPSTQLDriver(); bool hasFeature( DriverFeature f ) const; bool open( const TQString & db, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp index 864c4c9..bf330e3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.cpp @@ -277,14 +277,14 @@ int TQSTQLiteResult::numRowsAffected() ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////// -TQSTQLiteDriver::TQSTQLiteDriver(TQObject * tqparent, const char * name) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent, name ? name : TQSQLITE_DRIVER_NAME) +TQSTQLiteDriver::TQSTQLiteDriver(TQObject * parent, const char * name) + : TQSqlDriver(parent, name ? name : TQSQLITE_DRIVER_NAME) { d = new TQSTQLiteDriverPrivate(); } -TQSTQLiteDriver::TQSTQLiteDriver(sqlite *connection, TQObject *tqparent, const char *name) - : TQSqlDriver(tqparent, name ? name : TQSQLITE_DRIVER_NAME) +TQSTQLiteDriver::TQSTQLiteDriver(sqlite *connection, TQObject *parent, const char *name) + : TQSqlDriver(parent, name ? name : TQSQLITE_DRIVER_NAME) { d = new TQSTQLiteDriverPrivate(); d->access = connection; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.h index 5350ba1..6100089 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/drivers/sqlite/tqsql_sqlite.h @@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ class TQSTQLiteDriver : public TQSqlDriver { friend class TQSTQLiteResult; public: - TQSTQLiteDriver(TQObject *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0); - TQSTQLiteDriver(sqlite *connection, TQObject *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0); + TQSTQLiteDriver(TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0); + TQSTQLiteDriver(sqlite *connection, TQObject *parent = 0, const char *name = 0); ~TQSTQLiteDriver(); bool hasFeature(DriverFeature f) const; bool open(const TQString & db, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp index 910fb11..df5d15b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.cpp @@ -155,12 +155,12 @@ public: */ /*! - Constructs a data browser which is a child of \a tqparent, with the + Constructs a data browser which is a child of \a parent, with the name \a name and widget flags set to \a fl. */ -TQDataBrowser::TQDataBrowser( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags fl ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, fl ) +TQDataBrowser::TQDataBrowser( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags fl ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, fl ) { d = new TQDataBrowserPrivate(); d->dat.setMode( TQSql::Update ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h index 5379b78..1dd20b4 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatabrowser.h @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDataBrowser : public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( bool autoEdit READ autoEdit WRITE setAutoEdit ) public: - TQDataBrowser( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags fl = 0 ); + TQDataBrowser( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags fl = 0 ); ~TQDataBrowser(); enum Boundary { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp index 647c3a2..99ef396 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.cpp @@ -235,18 +235,18 @@ void qt_debug_buffer( const TQString& msg, TQSqlRecord* cursor ) */ /*! - Constructs a data table which is a child of \a tqparent, called + Constructs a data table which is a child of \a parent, called name \a name. */ -TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQTable( tqparent, name ) +TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQTable( parent, name ) { init(); } /*! - Constructs a data table which is a child of \a tqparent, called name + Constructs a data table which is a child of \a parent, called name \a name using the cursor \a cursor. If \a autoPopulate is TRUE (the default is FALSE), columns are @@ -259,8 +259,8 @@ TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) representing NULL values as strings. */ -TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate, TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQTable( tqparent, name ) +TQDataTable::TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate, TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQTable( parent, name ) { init(); setSqlCursor( cursor, autoPopulate ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.h index 2f1c5dd..37f5864 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdatatable.h @@ -86,8 +86,8 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQDataTable : public TQTable Q_PROPERTY( int numRows READ numRows ) public: - TQDataTable ( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDataTable ( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDataTable ( TQSqlCursor* cursor, bool autoPopulate = FALSE, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQDataTable(); virtual void addColumn( const TQString& fieldName, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.cpp index b2fbecf..e4a22a8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.cpp @@ -76,12 +76,12 @@ public: */ /*! - Constructs a data view which is a child of \a tqparent, called \a + Constructs a data view which is a child of \a parent, called \a name, and with widget flags \a fl. */ -TQDataView::TQDataView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags fl ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, fl ) +TQDataView::TQDataView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags fl ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, fl ) { d = new TQDataViewPrivate(); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.h index 017fae6..77c6344 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqdataview.h @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQDataView : public TQWidget TQ_OBJECT public: - TQDataView( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags fl = 0 ); + TQDataView( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags fl = 0 ); ~TQDataView(); virtual void setForm( TQSqlForm* form ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp index 2d02088..7c6e962 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.cpp @@ -69,11 +69,11 @@ */ /*! - Constructs an editor factory with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name. + Constructs an editor factory with parent \a parent, called \a name. */ -TQEditorFactory::TQEditorFactory ( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQEditorFactory::TQEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { } @@ -124,11 +124,11 @@ void TQEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory( TQEditorFactory * factory ) /*! Creates and returns the appropriate editor for the TQVariant \a v. - If the TQVariant is invalid, 0 is returned. The \a tqparent is passed + If the TQVariant is invalid, 0 is returned. The \a parent is passed to the appropriate editor's constructor. */ -TQWidget * TQEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQVariant & v ) +TQWidget * TQEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & v ) { TQWidget * w = 0; switch( v.type() ){ @@ -136,34 +136,34 @@ TQWidget * TQEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQVariant & w = 0; break; case TQVariant::Bool: - w = new TQComboBox( tqparent, "qt_editor_bool" ); + w = new TQComboBox( parent, "qt_editor_bool" ); ((TQComboBox *) w)->insertItem( "False" ); ((TQComboBox *) w)->insertItem( "True" ); break; case TQVariant::UInt: - w = new TQSpinBox( 0, 999999, 1, tqparent, "qt_editor_spinbox" ); + w = new TQSpinBox( 0, 999999, 1, parent, "qt_editor_spinbox" ); break; case TQVariant::Int: - w = new TQSpinBox( -999999, 999999, 1, tqparent, "qt_editor_int" ); + w = new TQSpinBox( -999999, 999999, 1, parent, "qt_editor_int" ); break; case TQVariant::String: case TQVariant::CString: case TQVariant::Double: - w = new TQLineEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_double" ); + w = new TQLineEdit( parent, "qt_editor_double" ); ((TQLineEdit*)w)->setFrame( FALSE ); break; case TQVariant::Date: - w = new TQDateEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_date" ); + w = new TQDateEdit( parent, "qt_editor_date" ); break; case TQVariant::Time: - w = new TQTimeEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_time" ); + w = new TQTimeEdit( parent, "qt_editor_time" ); break; case TQVariant::DateTime: - w = new TQDateTimeEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_datetime" ); + w = new TQDateTimeEdit( parent, "qt_editor_datetime" ); break; #ifndef TQT_NO_LABEL case TQVariant::Pixmap: - w = new TQLabel( tqparent, "qt_editor_pixmap" ); + w = new TQLabel( parent, "qt_editor_pixmap" ); break; #endif case TQVariant::Palette: @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ TQWidget * TQEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQVariant & case TQVariant::SizePolicy: case TQVariant::ByteArray: default: - w = new TQWidget( tqparent, "qt_editor_default" ); + w = new TQWidget( parent, "qt_editor_default" ); break; } return w; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.h index fb67e0f..12c123f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqeditorfactory.h @@ -57,10 +57,10 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQEditorFactory : public TQObject { public: - TQEditorFactory ( TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); + TQEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); ~TQEditorFactory(); - virtual TQWidget * createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQVariant & v ); + virtual TQWidget * createEditor( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & v ); static TQEditorFactory * defaultFactory(); static void installDefaultFactory( TQEditorFactory * factory); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp index 70a15ae..1876720 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.cpp @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ typedef TQDict<TQSqlDriverCreatorBase> TQDriverDict; class TQSqlDatabaseManager : public TQObject { public: - TQSqlDatabaseManager( TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); + TQSqlDatabaseManager( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); ~TQSqlDatabaseManager(); static TQSqlDatabase* database( const TQString& name, bool open ); static TQSqlDatabase* addDatabase( TQSqlDatabase* db, const TQString & name ); @@ -168,8 +168,8 @@ protected: Constructs an SQL database manager. */ -TQSqlDatabaseManager::TQSqlDatabaseManager( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ), dbDict( 1 ), drDict( 0 ) +TQSqlDatabaseManager::TQSqlDatabaseManager( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ), dbDict( 1 ), drDict( 0 ) { } @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::contains( const TQString& connectionName ) /*! Creates a TQSqlDatabase connection called \a name that uses the - driver referred to by \a type, with the tqparent \a tqparent and the + driver referred to by \a type, with the parent \a parent and the object name \a objname. If the \a type is not recognized, the database connection will have no functionality. @@ -587,8 +587,8 @@ bool TQSqlDatabase::contains( const TQString& connectionName ) \sa registerSqlDriver() */ -TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& name, TQObject * tqparent, const char * objname ) - : TQObject( tqparent, objname ) +TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& name, TQObject * parent, const char * objname ) + : TQObject( parent, objname ) { init( type, name ); } @@ -598,14 +598,14 @@ TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& name, TQObje \overload Creates a database connection using the driver \a driver, with - the tqparent \a tqparent and the object name \a objname. + the parent \a parent and the object name \a objname. \warning The framework takes ownership of the \a driver pointer, so it should not be deleted. */ -TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase( TQSqlDriver* driver, TQObject * tqparent, const char * objname ) - : TQObject( tqparent, objname ) +TQSqlDatabase::TQSqlDatabase( TQSqlDriver* driver, TQObject * parent, const char * objname ) + : TQObject( parent, objname ) { d = new TQSqlDatabasePrivate(); d->driver = driver; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h index 98e7be2..24af2b8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldatabase.h @@ -140,8 +140,8 @@ public: static bool isDriverAvailable( const TQString& name ); protected: - TQSqlDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& name, TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * objname=0 ); - TQSqlDatabase( TQSqlDriver* driver, TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * objname=0 ); + TQSqlDatabase( const TQString& type, const TQString& name, TQObject * parent=0, const char * objname=0 ); + TQSqlDatabase( TQSqlDriver* driver, TQObject * parent=0, const char * objname=0 ); private: void init( const TQString& type, const TQString& name ); TQSqlDatabasePrivate* d; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp index 3f6f137..8ce3fab 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.cpp @@ -65,13 +65,13 @@ TQPtrDict<TQSqlOpenExtension> *qSqlOpenExtDict(); */ /*! - Default constructor. Creates a new driver with tqparent \a tqparent, + Default constructor. Creates a new driver with parent \a parent, called \a name. */ -TQSqlDriver::TQSqlDriver( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) -: TQObject(tqparent, name), +TQSqlDriver::TQSqlDriver( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) +: TQObject(parent, name), dbState(0), error() { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h index 84e936c..70a60f1 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqldriver.h @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ public: enum DriverFeature { Transactions, QuerySize, BLOB, Unicode, PreparedQueries, NamedPlaceholders, PositionalPlaceholders }; - TQSqlDriver( TQObject * tqparent=0, const char * name=0 ); + TQSqlDriver( TQObject * parent=0, const char * name=0 ); ~TQSqlDriver(); bool isOpen() const; bool isOpenError() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp index 0c6b16f..b7201bb 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.cpp @@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ /*! - Constructs a SQL editor factory with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a + Constructs a SQL editor factory with parent \a parent, called \a name. */ -TQSqlEditorFactory::TQSqlEditorFactory ( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQEditorFactory( tqparent, name ) +TQSqlEditorFactory::TQSqlEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQEditorFactory( parent, name ) { } @@ -132,14 +132,14 @@ void TQSqlEditorFactory::installDefaultFactory( TQSqlEditorFactory * factory ) Creates and returns the appropriate editor widget for the TQVariant \a variant. - The widget that is returned has the tqparent \a tqparent (which may be + The widget that is returned has the parent \a parent (which may be zero). If \a variant is invalid, 0 is returned. */ -TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, +TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & variant ) { - return TQEditorFactory::createEditor( tqparent, variant ); + return TQEditorFactory::createEditor( parent, variant ); } /*! @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, field. */ -TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, +TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * parent, const TQSqlField * field ) { if ( !field ) { @@ -162,36 +162,36 @@ TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, w = 0; break; case TQVariant::Bool: - w = new TQComboBox( tqparent, "qt_editor_bool" ); + w = new TQComboBox( parent, "qt_editor_bool" ); ((TQComboBox *) w)->insertItem( "False" ); ((TQComboBox *) w)->insertItem( "True" ); break; case TQVariant::UInt: - w = new TQSpinBox( 0, 2147483647, 1, tqparent, "qt_editor_spinbox" ); + w = new TQSpinBox( 0, 2147483647, 1, parent, "qt_editor_spinbox" ); break; case TQVariant::Int: - w = new TQSpinBox( -2147483647, 2147483647, 1, tqparent, "qt_editor_int" ); + w = new TQSpinBox( -2147483647, 2147483647, 1, parent, "qt_editor_int" ); break; case TQVariant::LongLong: case TQVariant::ULongLong: case TQVariant::String: case TQVariant::CString: case TQVariant::Double: - w = new TQLineEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_double" ); + w = new TQLineEdit( parent, "qt_editor_double" ); ((TQLineEdit*)w)->setFrame( FALSE ); break; case TQVariant::Date: - w = new TQDateEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_date" ); + w = new TQDateEdit( parent, "qt_editor_date" ); break; case TQVariant::Time: - w = new TQTimeEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_time" ); + w = new TQTimeEdit( parent, "qt_editor_time" ); break; case TQVariant::DateTime: - w = new TQDateTimeEdit( tqparent, "qt_editor_datetime" ); + w = new TQDateTimeEdit( parent, "qt_editor_datetime" ); break; #ifndef TQT_NO_LABEL case TQVariant::Pixmap: - w = new TQLabel( tqparent, "qt_editor_pixmap" ); + w = new TQLabel( parent, "qt_editor_pixmap" ); break; #endif case TQVariant::Palette: @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ TQWidget * TQSqlEditorFactory::createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, case TQVariant::SizePolicy: case TQVariant::ByteArray: default: - w = new TQWidget( tqparent, "qt_editor_default" ); + w = new TQWidget( parent, "qt_editor_default" ); break; } return w; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.h index 151fb5e..54a50b3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqleditorfactory.h @@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ class TQSqlField; class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQSqlEditorFactory : public TQEditorFactory { public: - TQSqlEditorFactory ( TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); + TQSqlEditorFactory ( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); ~TQSqlEditorFactory(); - virtual TQWidget * createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQVariant & variant ); - virtual TQWidget * createEditor( TQWidget * tqparent, const TQSqlField * field ); + virtual TQWidget * createEditor( TQWidget * parent, const TQVariant & variant ); + virtual TQWidget * createEditor( TQWidget * parent, const TQSqlField * field ); static TQSqlEditorFactory * defaultFactory(); static void installDefaultFactory( TQSqlEditorFactory * factory ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp index a33c18b..95c125f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.cpp @@ -131,10 +131,10 @@ public: /*! - Constructs a TQSqlForm with tqparent \a tqparent and called \a name. + Constructs a TQSqlForm with parent \a parent and called \a name. */ -TQSqlForm::TQSqlForm( TQObject * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQSqlForm::TQSqlForm( TQObject * parent, const char * name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { d = new TQSqlFormPrivate(); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.h index 14cdca1..14087eb 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlform.h @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_SQL TQSqlForm : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSqlForm( TQObject * tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); + TQSqlForm( TQObject * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ); ~TQSqlForm(); virtual void insert( TQWidget * widget, const TQString& field ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp index 6a35ef7..b70f1b5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.cpp @@ -675,13 +675,13 @@ TQDataManager::~TQDataManager() information about the error. */ -void TQDataManager::handleError( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQSqlError& e ) +void TQDataManager::handleError( TQWidget* parent, const TQSqlError& e ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_MESSAGEBOX if (e.driverText().isEmpty() && e.databaseText().isEmpty()) { - TQMessageBox::warning ( tqparent, "Warning", "An error occurred while accessing the database"); + TQMessageBox::warning ( parent, "Warning", "An error occurred while accessing the database"); } else { - TQMessageBox::warning ( tqparent, "Warning", e.driverText() + "\n" + e.databaseText(), + TQMessageBox::warning ( parent, "Warning", e.driverText() + "\n" + e.databaseText(), 0, 0 ); } #endif // TQT_NO_MESSAGEBOX @@ -859,16 +859,16 @@ bool TQDataManager::confirmCancels() const m. Derived classes can reimplement this function and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit action. The dialog - is centered over \a tqparent. + is centered over \a parent. */ -TQSql::Confirm TQDataManager::confirmEdit( TQWidget* tqparent, TQSql::Op m ) +TQSql::Confirm TQDataManager::confirmEdit( TQWidget* parent, TQSql::Op m ) { int ans = 2; if ( m == TQSql::Delete ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_MESSAGEBOX - ans = TQMessageBox::information( tqparent, + ans = TQMessageBox::information( parent, tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Delete" ), tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Delete this record?" ), tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Yes" ), @@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ TQSql::Confirm TQDataManager::confirmEdit( TQWidget* tqparent, TQSql::Op m ) caption = tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Update" ); } #ifndef TQT_NO_MESSAGEBOX - ans = TQMessageBox::information( tqparent, caption, + ans = TQMessageBox::information( parent, caption, tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Save edits?" ), tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Yes" ), tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "No" ), @@ -912,15 +912,15 @@ TQSql::Confirm TQDataManager::confirmEdit( TQWidget* tqparent, TQSql::Op m ) mode \a m. Derived classes can reimplement this function and provide their own confirmation dialog. The default implementation uses a message box which prompts the user to confirm the edit - action. The dialog is centered over \a tqparent. + action. The dialog is centered over \a parent. */ -TQSql::Confirm TQDataManager::confirmCancel( TQWidget* tqparent, TQSql::Op ) +TQSql::Confirm TQDataManager::confirmCancel( TQWidget* parent, TQSql::Op ) { #ifndef TQT_NO_MESSAGEBOX - switch ( TQMessageBox::information( tqparent, + switch ( TQMessageBox::information( parent, tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Confirm" ), tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Cancel your edits?" ), tqApp->translate( "TQSql", "Yes" ), diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h index ed892e3..da00830 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/sql/tqsqlmanager_p.h @@ -138,9 +138,9 @@ public: virtual void setAutoEdit( bool autoEdit ); bool autoEdit() const; - virtual void handleError( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQSqlError& error ); - virtual TQSql::Confirm confirmEdit( TQWidget* tqparent, TQSql::Op m ); - virtual TQSql::Confirm confirmCancel( TQWidget* tqparent, TQSql::Op m ); + virtual void handleError( TQWidget* parent, const TQSqlError& error ); + virtual TQSql::Confirm confirmEdit( TQWidget* parent, TQSql::Op m ); + virtual TQSql::Confirm confirmCancel( TQWidget* parent, TQSql::Op m ); virtual void setConfirmEdits( bool confirm ); virtual void setConfirmInsert( bool confirm ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp index 8ab5d91..90a5588 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqcommonstyle.cpp @@ -216,8 +216,8 @@ void TQCommonStyle::tqdrawPrimitive( TQ_PrimitiveElement pe, p->setPen( TQPen( lv->tqpalette().color( TQPalette::Disabled, TQColorGroup::Text ), 2 ) ); bool parentControl = FALSE; - if ( item->tqparent() && item->tqparent()->rtti() == 1 && - ((TQCheckListItem*) item->tqparent())->type() == TQCheckListItem::Controller ) + if ( item->parent() && item->parent()->rtti() == 1 && + ((TQCheckListItem*) item->parent())->type() == TQCheckListItem::Controller ) parentControl = TRUE; if ( flags & Style_Selected && !lv->rootIsDecorated() && !parentControl ) { p->fillRect( 0, 0, x + marg + w + 4, item->height(), diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp index 042f099..1d42786 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqinterlacestyle.cpp @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::unPolish( TQApplication *app) void TQInterlaceStyle::polish( TQWidget* w) { - // the polish function sets some widgets to transtqparent mode and + // the polish function sets some widgets to transparent mode and // some to translate background mode in order to get the full // benefit from the nice pixmaps in the color group. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ void TQInterlaceStyle::polish( TQWidget* w) void TQInterlaceStyle::unPolish( TQWidget* w) { - // the polish function sets some widgets to transtqparent mode and + // the polish function sets some widgets to transparent mode and // some to translate background mode in order to get the full // benefit from the nice pixmaps in the color group. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp index b05c46d..83d87da 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqmotifstyle.cpp @@ -1837,10 +1837,10 @@ TQRect TQMotifStyle::subRect( SubRect r, const TQWidget *widget ) const case SR_DockWindowHandleRect: { #ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW - if ( !widget || !widget->tqparent() ) + if ( !widget || !widget->parent() ) break; - const TQDockWindow * dw = (const TQDockWindow *) widget->tqparent(); + const TQDockWindow * dw = (const TQDockWindow *) widget->parent(); if ( !dw->area() || !dw->isCloseEnabled() ) rect.setRect( 0, 0, widget->width(), widget->height() ); else { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp index 5a25f3d..7588997 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/styles/tqwindowsstyle.cpp @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ class FriendlyMenuData : public TQMenuData class TQWindowsStyle::Private : public TQObject { public: - Private(TQWindowsStyle *tqparent); + Private(TQWindowsStyle *parent); bool hasSeenAlt(const TQWidget *widget) const; bool altDown() const { return alt_down; } @@ -112,12 +112,12 @@ private: int menuBarTimer; }; -TQWindowsStyle::Private::Private(TQWindowsStyle *tqparent) -: TQObject(tqparent, "TQWindowsStylePrivate"), alt_down(FALSE), menuBarTimer(0) +TQWindowsStyle::Private::Private(TQWindowsStyle *parent) +: TQObject(parent, "TQWindowsStylePrivate"), alt_down(FALSE), menuBarTimer(0) { } -// Returns true if the toplevel tqparent of \a widget has seen the Alt-key +// Returns true if the toplevel parent of \a widget has seen the Alt-key bool TQWindowsStyle::Private::hasSeenAlt(const TQWidget *widget) const { widget = widget->tqtopLevelWidget(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.cpp index cb1d068..e6d4d3a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.cpp @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ public: Selected }; - TQTableHeader( int, TQTable *t, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQTableHeader( int, TQTable *t, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQTableHeader() {}; void addLabel( const TQString &s, int size ); void setLabel( int section, const TQString & s, int size = -1 ); @@ -782,7 +782,7 @@ implementation creates a TQLineEdit. If the function returns 0, the cell is read-only. The returned widget should preferably be invisible, ideally with -TQTable::viewport() as tqparent. +TQTable::viewport() as parent. If you reimplement this function you'll almost certainly need to reimplement setContentFromEditor(), and may need to reimplement @@ -2027,7 +2027,7 @@ TQSize TQCheckTableItem::tqsizeHint() const /*! Creates an empty table object called \a name as a child of \a - tqparent. + parent. Call setNumRows() and setNumCols() to set the table size before populating the table if you're using TQTableItems. @@ -2035,8 +2035,8 @@ TQSize TQCheckTableItem::tqsizeHint() const \sa TQWidget::clearWFlags() TQt::WidgetFlags */ -TQTable::TQTable( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStaticContents) ), +TQTable::TQTable( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStaticContents) ), leftHeader( 0 ), topHeader( 0 ), currentSel( 0 ), lastSortCol( -1 ), sGrid( TRUE ), mRows( FALSE ), mCols( FALSE ), asc( TRUE ), doSort( TRUE ), readOnly( FALSE ) @@ -2046,7 +2046,7 @@ TQTable::TQTable( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs an empty table called \a name with \a numRows rows and - \a numCols columns. The table is a child of \a tqparent. + \a numCols columns. The table is a child of \a parent. If you're using \l{TQTableItem}s to populate the table's cells, you can create TQTableItem, TQComboTableItem and TQCheckTableItem items @@ -2056,8 +2056,8 @@ TQTable::TQTable( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) \sa TQWidget::clearWFlags() TQt::WidgetFlags */ -TQTable::TQTable( int numRows, int numCols, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStaticContents) ), +TQTable::TQTable( int numRows, int numCols, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStaticContents) ), leftHeader( 0 ), topHeader( 0 ), currentSel( 0 ), lastSortCol( -1 ), sGrid( TRUE ), mRows( FALSE ), mCols( FALSE ), asc( TRUE ), doSort( TRUE ), readOnly( FALSE ) @@ -2750,10 +2750,10 @@ void TQTable::swapCells( int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2 ) widgets.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); } -static bool is_child_of( TQWidget *child, TQWidget *tqparent ) +static bool is_child_of( TQWidget *child, TQWidget *parent ) { while ( child ) { - if ( child == tqparent ) + if ( child == parent ) return TRUE; child = child->parentWidget(); } @@ -5999,7 +5999,7 @@ void TQTable::setCellWidget( int row, int col, TQWidget *e ) e->installEventFilter( this ); clearCellWidget( row, col ); - if ( e->tqparent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(viewport()) ) + if ( e->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(viewport()) ) e->reparent( viewport(), TQPoint( 0,0 ) ); TQTableItem *itm = item(row, col); if (itm && itm->row() >= 0 && itm->col() >= 0) { // get the correct row and col if the item is spanning @@ -6516,12 +6516,12 @@ void TQTable::setEnabled( bool b ) /*! Creates a new table header called \a name with \a i sections. It - is a child of widget \a tqparent and attached to table \a t. + is a child of widget \a parent and attached to table \a t. */ TQTableHeader::TQTableHeader( int i, TQTable *t, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQHeader( i, tqparent, name ), mousePressed(FALSE), startPos(-1), + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQHeader( i, parent, name ), mousePressed(FALSE), startPos(-1), table( t ), caching( FALSE ), resizedSection(-1), numStretches( 0 ) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.h index 47b37fd..1b8792f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/table/tqtable.h @@ -266,9 +266,9 @@ class TQM_EXPORT_TABLE TQTable : public TQScrollView friend class TQTableItem; public: - TQTable( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQTable( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQTable( int numRows, int numCols, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQTable(); TQHeader *horizontalHeader() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqdir.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqdir.cpp index 99c9094..311a44d 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqdir.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqdir.cpp @@ -601,19 +601,19 @@ void TQDir::setNameFilter( const TQString &nameFilter ) systems that don't support symbolic links). \value All List directories, files, drives and symlinks (this does not list broken symlinks unless you specify System). - \value TypeMask A tqmask for the the Dirs, Files, Drives and + \value TypeMask A mask for the the Dirs, Files, Drives and NoSymLinks flags. \value Readable List files for which the application has read access. \value Writable List files for which the application has write access. \value Executable List files for which the application has execute access. Executables needs to be combined with Dirs or Files. - \value RWEMask A tqmask for the Readable, Writable and Executable flags. + \value RWEMask A mask for the Readable, Writable and Executable flags. \value Modified Only list files that have been modified (ignored under Unix). \value Hidden List hidden files (on Unix, files starting with a .). \value System List system files (on Unix, FIFOs, sockets and tqdevice files) - \value AccessMask A tqmask for the Readable, Writable, Executable + \value AccessMask A mask for the Readable, Writable, Executable Modified, Hidden and System flags \value DefaultFilter Internal flag. @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ void TQDir::setFilter( int filterSpec ) \value Time Sort by time (modification time). \value Size Sort by file size. \value Unsorted Do not sort. - \value SortByMask A tqmask for Name, Time and Size. + \value SortByMask A mask for Name, Time and Size. \value DirsFirst Put the directories first, then the files. \value Reversed Reverse the sort order. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqfileinfo_unix.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqfileinfo_unix.cpp index 4a08916..dcde72a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqfileinfo_unix.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqfileinfo_unix.cpp @@ -290,33 +290,33 @@ bool TQFileInfo::permission( int permissionSpec ) const if ( !fic || !cache ) doStat(); if ( fic ) { - uint tqmask = 0; + uint mask = 0; if ( permissionSpec & ReadOwner ) - tqmask |= S_IRUSR; + mask |= S_IRUSR; if ( permissionSpec & WriteOwner ) - tqmask |= S_IWUSR; + mask |= S_IWUSR; if ( permissionSpec & ExeOwner ) - tqmask |= S_IXUSR; + mask |= S_IXUSR; if ( permissionSpec & ReadUser ) - tqmask |= S_IRUSR; + mask |= S_IRUSR; if ( permissionSpec & WriteUser ) - tqmask |= S_IWUSR; + mask |= S_IWUSR; if ( permissionSpec & ExeUser ) - tqmask |= S_IXUSR; + mask |= S_IXUSR; if ( permissionSpec & ReadGroup ) - tqmask |= S_IRGRP; + mask |= S_IRGRP; if ( permissionSpec & WriteGroup ) - tqmask |= S_IWGRP; + mask |= S_IWGRP; if ( permissionSpec & ExeGroup ) - tqmask |= S_IXGRP; + mask |= S_IXGRP; if ( permissionSpec & ReadOther ) - tqmask |= S_IROTH; + mask |= S_IROTH; if ( permissionSpec & WriteOther ) - tqmask |= S_IWOTH; + mask |= S_IWOTH; if ( permissionSpec & ExeOther ) - tqmask |= S_IXOTH; - if ( tqmask ) { - return (fic->st.st_mode & tqmask) == tqmask; + mask |= S_IXOTH; + if ( mask ) { + return (fic->st.st_mode & mask) == mask; } else { #if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL) qWarning( "TQFileInfo::permission: permissionSpec is 0" ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.cpp index 70d6342..e581455 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.cpp @@ -49,16 +49,16 @@ void TQMapPrivateBase::rotateLeft( NodePtr x, NodePtr& root) NodePtr y = x->right; x->right = y->left; if (y->left !=0) - y->left->tqparent = x; - y->tqparent = x->tqparent; + y->left->parent = x; + y->parent = x->parent; if (x == root) root = y; - else if (x == x->tqparent->left) - x->tqparent->left = y; + else if (x == x->parent->left) + x->parent->left = y; else - x->tqparent->right = y; + x->parent->right = y; y->left = x; - x->tqparent = y; + x->parent = y; } @@ -67,54 +67,54 @@ void TQMapPrivateBase::rotateRight( NodePtr x, NodePtr& root ) NodePtr y = x->left; x->left = y->right; if (y->right != 0) - y->right->tqparent = x; - y->tqparent = x->tqparent; + y->right->parent = x; + y->parent = x->parent; if (x == root) root = y; - else if (x == x->tqparent->right) - x->tqparent->right = y; + else if (x == x->parent->right) + x->parent->right = y; else - x->tqparent->left = y; + x->parent->left = y; y->right = x; - x->tqparent = y; + x->parent = y; } void TQMapPrivateBase::rebalance( NodePtr x, NodePtr& root) { x->color = Node::Red; - while ( x != root && x->tqparent->color == Node::Red ) { - if ( x->tqparent == x->tqparent->tqparent->left ) { - NodePtr y = x->tqparent->tqparent->right; + while ( x != root && x->parent->color == Node::Red ) { + if ( x->parent == x->parent->parent->left ) { + NodePtr y = x->parent->parent->right; if (y && y->color == Node::Red) { - x->tqparent->color = Node::Black; + x->parent->color = Node::Black; y->color = Node::Black; - x->tqparent->tqparent->color = Node::Red; - x = x->tqparent->tqparent; + x->parent->parent->color = Node::Red; + x = x->parent->parent; } else { - if (x == x->tqparent->right) { - x = x->tqparent; + if (x == x->parent->right) { + x = x->parent; rotateLeft( x, root ); } - x->tqparent->color = Node::Black; - x->tqparent->tqparent->color = Node::Red; - rotateRight (x->tqparent->tqparent, root ); + x->parent->color = Node::Black; + x->parent->parent->color = Node::Red; + rotateRight (x->parent->parent, root ); } } else { - NodePtr y = x->tqparent->tqparent->left; + NodePtr y = x->parent->parent->left; if ( y && y->color == Node::Red ) { - x->tqparent->color = Node::Black; + x->parent->color = Node::Black; y->color = Node::Black; - x->tqparent->tqparent->color = Node::Red; - x = x->tqparent->tqparent; + x->parent->parent->color = Node::Red; + x = x->parent->parent; } else { - if (x == x->tqparent->left) { - x = x->tqparent; + if (x == x->parent->left) { + x = x->parent; rotateRight( x, root ); } - x->tqparent->color = Node::Black; - x->tqparent->tqparent->color = Node::Red; - rotateLeft( x->tqparent->tqparent, root ); + x->parent->color = Node::Black; + x->parent->parent->color = Node::Red; + rotateLeft( x->parent->parent, root ); } } } @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ NodePtr TQMapPrivateBase::removeAndRebalance( NodePtr z, NodePtr& root, { NodePtr y = z; NodePtr x; - NodePtr x_tqparent; + NodePtr x_parent; if (y->left == 0) { x = y->right; } else { @@ -143,109 +143,109 @@ NodePtr TQMapPrivateBase::removeAndRebalance( NodePtr z, NodePtr& root, } } if (y != z) { - z->left->tqparent = y; + z->left->parent = y; y->left = z->left; if (y != z->right) { - x_tqparent = y->tqparent; + x_parent = y->parent; if (x) - x->tqparent = y->tqparent; - y->tqparent->left = x; + x->parent = y->parent; + y->parent->left = x; y->right = z->right; - z->right->tqparent = y; + z->right->parent = y; } else { - x_tqparent = y; + x_parent = y; } if (root == z) root = y; - else if (z->tqparent->left == z) - z->tqparent->left = y; + else if (z->parent->left == z) + z->parent->left = y; else - z->tqparent->right = y; - y->tqparent = z->tqparent; + z->parent->right = y; + y->parent = z->parent; // Swap the colors Node::Color c = y->color; y->color = z->color; z->color = c; y = z; } else { - x_tqparent = y->tqparent; + x_parent = y->parent; if (x) - x->tqparent = y->tqparent; + x->parent = y->parent; if (root == z) root = x; - else if (z->tqparent->left == z) - z->tqparent->left = x; + else if (z->parent->left == z) + z->parent->left = x; else - z->tqparent->right = x; + z->parent->right = x; if ( leftmost == z ) { if (z->right == 0) - leftmost = z->tqparent; + leftmost = z->parent; else leftmost = x->minimum(); } if (rightmost == z) { if (z->left == 0) - rightmost = z->tqparent; + rightmost = z->parent; else rightmost = x->maximum(); } } if (y->color != Node::Red) { while (x != root && (x == 0 || x->color == Node::Black)) { - if (x == x_tqparent->left) { - NodePtr w = x_tqparent->right; + if (x == x_parent->left) { + NodePtr w = x_parent->right; if (w->color == Node::Red) { w->color = Node::Black; - x_tqparent->color = Node::Red; - rotateLeft(x_tqparent, root); - w = x_tqparent->right; + x_parent->color = Node::Red; + rotateLeft(x_parent, root); + w = x_parent->right; } if ((w->left == 0 || w->left->color == Node::Black) && (w->right == 0 || w->right->color == Node::Black)) { w->color = Node::Red; - x = x_tqparent; - x_tqparent = x_tqparent->tqparent; + x = x_parent; + x_parent = x_parent->parent; } else { if (w->right == 0 || w->right->color == Node::Black) { if (w->left) w->left->color = Node::Black; w->color = Node::Red; rotateRight(w, root); - w = x_tqparent->right; + w = x_parent->right; } - w->color = x_tqparent->color; - x_tqparent->color = Node::Black; + w->color = x_parent->color; + x_parent->color = Node::Black; if (w->right) w->right->color = Node::Black; - rotateLeft(x_tqparent, root); + rotateLeft(x_parent, root); break; } } else { - NodePtr w = x_tqparent->left; + NodePtr w = x_parent->left; if (w->color == Node::Red) { w->color = Node::Black; - x_tqparent->color = Node::Red; - rotateRight(x_tqparent, root); - w = x_tqparent->left; + x_parent->color = Node::Red; + rotateRight(x_parent, root); + w = x_parent->left; } if ((w->right == 0 || w->right->color == Node::Black) && (w->left == 0 || w->left->color == Node::Black)) { w->color = Node::Red; - x = x_tqparent; - x_tqparent = x_tqparent->tqparent; + x = x_parent; + x_parent = x_parent->parent; } else { if (w->left == 0 || w->left->color == Node::Black) { if (w->right) w->right->color = Node::Black; w->color = Node::Red; rotateLeft(w, root); - w = x_tqparent->left; + w = x_parent->left; } - w->color = x_tqparent->color; - x_tqparent->color = Node::Black; + w->color = x_parent->color; + x_parent->color = Node::Black; if (w->left) w->left->color = Node::Black; - rotateRight(x_tqparent, root); + rotateRight(x_parent, root); break; } } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.h index 006f490..cb280fc 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqmap.h @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ struct TQ_EXPORT TQMapNodeBase TQMapNodeBase* left; TQMapNodeBase* right; - TQMapNodeBase* tqparent; + TQMapNodeBase* parent; Color color; @@ -183,10 +183,10 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES int TQMapIterator<K,T>::inc() while ( tmp->left ) tmp = tmp->left; } else { - TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->tqparent; + TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->parent; while (tmp == y->right) { tmp = y; - y = y->tqparent; + y = y->parent; } if (tmp->right != y) tmp = y; @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES int TQMapIterator<K,T>::dec() { TQMapNodeBase* tmp = node; if (tmp->color == TQMapNodeBase::Red && - tmp->tqparent->tqparent == tmp ) { + tmp->parent->parent == tmp ) { tmp = tmp->right; } else if (tmp->left != 0) { TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->left; @@ -208,10 +208,10 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES int TQMapIterator<K,T>::dec() y = y->right; tmp = y; } else { - TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->tqparent; + TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->parent; while (tmp == y->left) { tmp = y; - y = y->tqparent; + y = y->parent; } tmp = y; } @@ -299,10 +299,10 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES int TQMapConstIterator<K,T>::inc() while ( tmp->left ) tmp = tmp->left; } else { - TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->tqparent; + TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->parent; while (tmp == y->right) { tmp = y; - y = y->tqparent; + y = y->parent; } if (tmp->right != y) tmp = y; @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES int TQMapConstIterator<K,T>::dec() { TQMapNodeBase* tmp = node; if (tmp->color == TQMapNodeBase::Red && - tmp->tqparent->tqparent == tmp ) { + tmp->parent->parent == tmp ) { tmp = tmp->right; } else if (tmp->left != 0) { TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->left; @@ -324,10 +324,10 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES int TQMapConstIterator<K,T>::dec() y = y->right; tmp = y; } else { - TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->tqparent; + TQMapNodeBase* y = tmp->parent; while (tmp == y->left) { tmp = y; - y = y->tqparent; + y = y->parent; } tmp = y; } @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ public: ConstIterator find(const Key& k) const; void remove( Iterator it ) { - NodePtr del = (NodePtr) removeAndRebalance( it.node, header->tqparent, header->left, header->right ); + NodePtr del = (NodePtr) removeAndRebalance( it.node, header->parent, header->left, header->right ); delete del; --node_count; } @@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ public: #ifdef TQT_TQMAP_DEBUG void inorder( TQMapNodeBase* x = 0, int level = 0 ){ if ( !x ) - x = header->tqparent; + x = header->parent; if ( x->left ) inorder( x->left, level + 1 ); //cout << level << " Key=" << key(x) << " Value=" << ((NodePtr)x)->data << endl; @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ public: #if 0 Iterator insertMulti(const Key& v){ TQMapNodeBase* y = header; - TQMapNodeBase* x = header->tqparent; + TQMapNodeBase* x = header->parent; while (x != 0){ y = x; x = ( v < key(x) ) ? x->left : x->right; @@ -443,21 +443,21 @@ template <class Key, class T> TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::TQMapPrivate() { header = new Node; header->color = TQMapNodeBase::Red; // Mark the header - header->tqparent = 0; + header->parent = 0; header->left = header->right = header; } template <class Key, class T> TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::TQMapPrivate( const TQMapPrivate< Key, T >* _map ) : TQMapPrivateBase( _map ) { header = new Node; header->color = TQMapNodeBase::Red; // Mark the header - if ( _map->header->tqparent == 0 ) { - header->tqparent = 0; + if ( _map->header->parent == 0 ) { + header->parent = 0; header->left = header->right = header; } else { - header->tqparent = copy( (NodePtr)(_map->header->tqparent) ); - header->tqparent->tqparent = header; - header->left = header->tqparent->minimum(); - header->right = header->tqparent->maximum(); + header->parent = copy( (NodePtr)(_map->header->parent) ); + header->parent->parent = header; + header->left = header->parent->minimum(); + header->right = header->parent->maximum(); } } @@ -470,13 +470,13 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::NodePtr TQMapPrivate<Key,T> n->color = p->color; if ( p->left ) { n->left = copy( (NodePtr)(p->left) ); - n->left->tqparent = n; + n->left->parent = n; } else { n->left = 0; } if ( p->right ) { n->right = copy( (NodePtr)(p->right) ); - n->right->tqparent = n; + n->right->parent = n; } else { n->right = 0; } @@ -486,9 +486,9 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::NodePtr TQMapPrivate<Key,T> template <class Key, class T> TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES void TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::clear() { - clear( (NodePtr)(header->tqparent) ); + clear( (NodePtr)(header->parent) ); header->color = TQMapNodeBase::Red; - header->tqparent = 0; + header->parent = 0; header->left = header->right = header; node_count = 0; } @@ -508,7 +508,7 @@ template <class Key, class T> TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::ConstIterator TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::find(const Key& k) const { TQMapNodeBase* y = header; // Last node - TQMapNodeBase* x = header->tqparent; // Root node. + TQMapNodeBase* x = header->parent; // Root node. while ( x != 0 ) { // If as k <= key(x) go left @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::Iterator TQMapPrivate<Key,T { // Search correct position in the tree TQMapNodeBase* y = header; - TQMapNodeBase* x = header->tqparent; + TQMapNodeBase* x = header->parent; bool result = TRUE; while ( x != 0 ) { result = ( k < key(x) ); @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::Iterator TQMapPrivate<Key,T if (y == header || x != 0 || k < key(y) ) { y->left = z; // also makes leftmost = z when y == header if ( y == header ) { - header->tqparent = z; + header->parent = z; header->right = z; } else if ( y == header->left ) header->left = z; // maintain leftmost pointing to min node @@ -574,10 +574,10 @@ TQ_INLINE_TEMPLATES TQ_TYPENAME TQMapPrivate<Key,T>::Iterator TQMapPrivate<Key,T if ( y == header->right ) header->right = z; // maintain rightmost pointing to max node } - z->tqparent = y; + z->parent = y; z->left = 0; z->right = 0; - rebalance( z, header->tqparent ); + rebalance( z, header->parent ); ++node_count; return Iterator(z); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqregexp.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqregexp.cpp index 5f73872..7a7f1ab 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqregexp.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqregexp.cpp @@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ private: */ struct Atom { - int tqparent; // index of tqparent in array of atoms + int parent; // index of parent in array of atoms int capture; // index of capture, from 1 to ncap }; #endif @@ -1111,7 +1111,7 @@ private: ( (Anchor_FirstLookahead << MaxLookaheads) - 1 ) }; #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP_CAPTURE int startAtom( bool capture ); - void finishAtom( int atom ) { cf = f[atom].tqparent; } + void finishAtom( int atom ) { cf = f[atom].parent; } #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP_LOOKAHEAD @@ -1605,7 +1605,7 @@ void TQRegExpEngine::dump() const if ( nf > 0 ) { qDebug( " Atom Parent Capture" ); for ( i = 0; i < nf; i++ ) - qDebug( " %6d %6d %6d", i, f[i].tqparent, f[i].capture ); + qDebug( " %6d %6d %6d", i, f[i].parent, f[i].capture ); } #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP_ANCHOR_ALT @@ -1672,7 +1672,7 @@ int TQRegExpEngine::startAtom( bool capture ) { if ( (nf & (nf + 1)) == 0 && nf + 1 >= (int) f.size() ) f.resize( (nf + 1) << 1 ); - f[nf].tqparent = cf; + f[nf].parent = cf; cf = nf++; f[cf].capture = capture ? ncap++ : -1; return cf; @@ -2059,11 +2059,11 @@ bool TQRegExpEngine::matchHere() /* Lemma 1. For any x in the range [0..nf), we - have f[x].tqparent < x. + have f[x].parent < x. Proof. By looking at startAtom(), it is clear that cf < nf holds all the time, and - thus that f[nf].tqparent < nf. + thus that f[nf].parent < nf. */ /* @@ -2076,7 +2076,7 @@ bool TQRegExpEngine::matchHere() b.fill( FALSE, nf ); b.setBit( q, TRUE ); for ( int ell = q + 1; ell < nf; ell++ ) { - if ( b.testBit(f[ell].tqparent) ) { + if ( b.testBit(f[ell].parent) ) { b.setBit( ell, TRUE ); cap = f[ell].capture; if ( cap >= 0 ) { @@ -2085,15 +2085,15 @@ bool TQRegExpEngine::matchHere() } } } - p = f[q].tqparent; + p = f[q].parent; /* Otherwise, close the capture zones we are leaving. We are leaving f[c].capture, - f[f[c].tqparent].capture, - f[f[f[c].tqparent].tqparent].capture, ..., + f[f[c].parent].capture, + f[f[f[c].parent].parent].capture, ..., until f[x].capture, with x such that - f[x].tqparent is the youngest common ancestor + f[x].parent is the youngest common ancestor for c and n. We go up along c's and n's ancestry until @@ -2113,9 +2113,9 @@ bool TQRegExpEngine::matchHere() capEnd[cap] = i; } } - p = f[p].tqparent; + p = f[p].parent; } else { - q = f[q].tqparent; + q = f[q].parent; } } } @@ -2123,7 +2123,7 @@ bool TQRegExpEngine::matchHere() /* In any case, we now open the capture zones we are entering. We work upwards from n - until we reach p (the tqparent of the atom we + until we reach p (the parent of the atom we reenter or the youngest common ancestor). */ while ( n > p ) { @@ -2132,7 +2132,7 @@ bool TQRegExpEngine::matchHere() capBegin[cap] = i; capEnd[cap] = EmptyCapture; } - n = f[n].tqparent; + n = f[n].parent; } /* If the next state was already in diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.cpp index 1225f7b..ca4b11e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.cpp @@ -2310,14 +2310,14 @@ TQTextStream &TQTextStream::operator<<( void *ptr ) */ /*! - \fn int TQTextStream::setf( int bits, int tqmask ) + \fn int TQTextStream::setf( int bits, int mask ) \overload - Sets the stream flag bits \a bits with a bit tqmask \a tqmask. Returns + Sets the stream flag bits \a bits with a bit mask \a mask. Returns the previous stream flags. - Equivalent to \c{flags( (flags() & ~tqmask) | (bits & tqmask) )}. + Equivalent to \c{flags( (flags() & ~mask) | (bits & mask) )}. \sa setf(), unsetf() */ @@ -2328,7 +2328,7 @@ TQTextStream &TQTextStream::operator<<( void *ptr ) Clears the stream flag bits \a bits. Returns the previous stream flags. - Equivalent to \c{flags( flags() & ~tqmask )}. + Equivalent to \c{flags( flags() & ~mask )}. \sa setf() */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.h index 53aaddb..684687b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/tools/tqtextstream.h @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ public: int flags() const; int flags( int f ); int setf( int bits ); - int setf( int bits, int tqmask ); + int setf( int bits, int mask ); int unsetf( int bits ); void reset(); @@ -257,8 +257,8 @@ inline int TQTextStream::flags( int f ) inline int TQTextStream::setf( int bits ) { int oldf = fflags; fflags |= bits; return oldf; } -inline int TQTextStream::setf( int bits, int tqmask ) -{ int oldf = fflags; fflags = (fflags & ~tqmask) | (bits & tqmask); return oldf; } +inline int TQTextStream::setf( int bits, int mask ) +{ int oldf = fflags; fflags = (fflags & ~mask) | (bits & mask); return oldf; } inline int TQTextStream::unsetf( int bits ) { int oldf = fflags; fflags &= ~bits; return oldf; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.cpp index 8a65d06..6857dda 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.cpp @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ TQActionPrivate::~TQActionPrivate() ++itci; TQComboBox* combo = ci->combo; combo->clear(); - TQActionGroup *group = ::tqqt_cast<TQActionGroup*>(action->tqparent()); + TQActionGroup *group = ::tqqt_cast<TQActionGroup*>(action->parent()); TQObjectList *siblings = group ? group->queryList("TQAction") : 0; if (siblings) { TQObjectListIt it(*siblings); @@ -392,38 +392,38 @@ static TQString qt_stripMenuText( TQString s ) } /*! - Constructs an action called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs an action called \a name with parent \a parent. - If \a tqparent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into - \a tqparent. + If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into + \a parent. - For accelerators and status tips to work, \a tqparent must either be - a widget, or an action group whose tqparent is a widget. + For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be + a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget. \warning To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a widget that the action is later added to. */ -TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionPrivate(this); init(); } /*! \obsolete - Constructs an action called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs an action called \a name with parent \a parent. If \a toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action. - If \a tqparent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into - \a tqparent. + If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into + \a parent. - For accelerators and status tips to work, \a tqparent must either be - a widget, or an action group whose tqparent is a widget. + For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be + a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget. */ -TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name, bool toggle ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool toggle ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionPrivate(this); d->toggleaction = toggle; @@ -436,14 +436,14 @@ TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name, bool toggl /*! This constructor creates an action with the following properties: the icon or iconset \a icon, the menu text \a menuText and - keyboard accelerator \a accel. It is a child of \a tqparent and + keyboard accelerator \a accel. It is a child of \a parent and called \a name. - If \a tqparent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes + If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it. - For accelerators and status tips to work, \a tqparent must either be - a widget, or an action group whose tqparent is a widget. + For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be + a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget. The action uses a stripped version of \a menuText (e.g. "\&Menu Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for @@ -458,8 +458,8 @@ TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name, bool toggl of a widget that the action is later added to. */ TQAction::TQAction( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, - TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) + TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionPrivate(this); if ( !icon.isNull() ) @@ -473,13 +473,13 @@ TQAction::TQAction( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequen /*! This constructor results in an icon-less action with the the menu text \a menuText and keyboard accelerator \a accel. It is a child - of \a tqparent and called \a name. + of \a parent and called \a name. - If \a tqparent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes + If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it. - For accelerators and status tips to work, \a tqparent must either be - a widget, or an action group whose tqparent is a widget. + For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be + a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget. The action uses a stripped version of \a menuText (e.g. "\&Menu Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for @@ -494,8 +494,8 @@ TQAction::TQAction( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequen of a widget that the action is later added to. */ TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, - TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) + TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionPrivate(this); d->text = qt_stripMenuText( menuText ); @@ -508,21 +508,21 @@ TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, This constructor creates an action with the following properties: the description \a text, the icon or iconset \a icon, the menu text \a menuText and keyboard accelerator \a accel. It is a child - of \a tqparent and called \a name. If \a toggle is TRUE the action + of \a parent and called \a name. If \a toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action. - If \a tqparent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes + If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes a member of it. - For accelerators and status tips to work, \a tqparent must either be - a widget, or an action group whose tqparent is a widget. + For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be + a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget. The \a text and \a accel will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip(). */ -TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name, bool toggle ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool toggle ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionPrivate(this); d->toggleaction = toggle; @@ -538,22 +538,22 @@ TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& /*! \obsolete This constructor results in an icon-less action with the description \a text, the menu text \a menuText and the keyboard - accelerator \a accel. Its tqparent is \a tqparent and it is called \a + accelerator \a accel. Its parent is \a parent and it is called \a name. If \a toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action. - The action automatically becomes a member of \a tqparent if \a - tqparent is a TQActionGroup. + The action automatically becomes a member of \a parent if \a + parent is a TQActionGroup. - For accelerators and status tips to work, \a tqparent must either be - a widget, or an action group whose tqparent is a widget. + For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be + a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget. The \a text and \a accel will be used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip(). */ -TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name, bool toggle ) - : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool toggle ) + : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionPrivate(this); d->toggleaction = toggle; @@ -569,8 +569,8 @@ TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequenc */ void TQAction::init() { - if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQActionGroup*>(tqparent()) ) - ((TQActionGroup*) tqparent())->add( this ); // insert into action group + if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQActionGroup*>(parent()) ) + ((TQActionGroup*) parent())->add( this ); // insert into action group } /*! @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ TQString TQAction::toolTip() const \brief the action's status tip The statusTip is displayed on all status bars that this action's - toplevel tqparent widget provides. + toplevel parent widget provides. If no status tip is defined, the action uses the tool tip text. @@ -775,9 +775,9 @@ void TQAction::setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key ) return; } - TQObject* p = tqparent(); + TQObject* p = parent(); while ( p && !p->isWidgetType() ) { - p = p->tqparent(); + p = p->parent(); } if ( p ) { d->accel = new TQAccel( (TQWidget*)p, this, "qt_action_accel" ); @@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ void TQAction::setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key ) } #if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE) else - qWarning( "TQAction::setAccel() (%s) requires widget in tqparent chain", name() ); + qWarning( "TQAction::setAccel() (%s) requires widget in parent chain", name() ); #endif d->update(); } @@ -1119,13 +1119,13 @@ void TQAction::showtqStatusText( const TQString& text ) } } - TQObject* par = tqparent(); + TQObject* par = parent(); TQObject* lpar = 0; TQStatusBar *bar = 0; while ( par && !bar ) { lpar = par; bar = (TQStatusBar*)par->child( 0, "TQStatusBar", FALSE ); - par = par->tqparent(); + par = par->parent(); } if ( !bar && lpar ) { TQObjectList *l = lpar->queryList( "TQStatusBar" ); @@ -1347,9 +1347,9 @@ void TQActionGroupPrivate::update( const TQActionGroup* that ) #endif } for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem> pu( menuitems ); pu.current(); ++pu ) { - TQWidget* tqparent = pu.current()->popup->parentWidget(); - if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(tqparent) ) { - TQPopupMenu* ppopup = (TQPopupMenu*)tqparent; + TQWidget* parent = pu.current()->popup->parentWidget(); + if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(parent) ) { + TQPopupMenu* ppopup = (TQPopupMenu*)parent; ppopup->setItemEnabled( pu.current()->id, that->isEnabled() ); ppopup->setItemVisible( pu.current()->id, that->isVisible() ); } else { @@ -1358,20 +1358,20 @@ void TQActionGroupPrivate::update( const TQActionGroup* that ) } for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQPopupMenu> pm( popupmenus ); pm.current(); ++pm ) { TQPopupMenu *popup = pm.current(); - TQPopupMenu *tqparent = ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(popup->parentWidget()); - if ( !tqparent ) + TQPopupMenu *parent = ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(popup->parentWidget()); + if ( !parent ) continue; int index; - tqparent->findPopup( popup, &index ); - int id = tqparent->idAt( index ); + parent->findPopup( popup, &index ); + int id = parent->idAt( index ); if ( !that->iconSet().isNull() ) - tqparent->changeItem( id, that->iconSet(), that->menuText() ); + parent->changeItem( id, that->iconSet(), that->menuText() ); else - tqparent->changeItem( id, that->menuText() ); - tqparent->setItemEnabled( id, that->isEnabled() ); + parent->changeItem( id, that->menuText() ); + parent->setItemEnabled( id, that->isEnabled() ); #ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL - tqparent->setAccel( that->accel(), id ); + parent->setAccel( that->accel(), id ); #endif } } @@ -1428,18 +1428,18 @@ void TQActionGroupPrivate::update( const TQActionGroup* that ) Actions can be added to an action group using add(), but normally they are added by creating the action with the action group as - tqparent. Actions can have separators dividing them using + parent. Actions can have separators dividing them using addSeparator(). Action groups are added to widgets with addTo(). */ /*! - Constructs an action group called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs an action group called \a name, with parent \a parent. The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(FALSE) to make the action group non-exclusive. */ -TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQAction( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name ) + : TQAction( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionGroupPrivate; d->exclusive = TRUE; @@ -1452,15 +1452,15 @@ TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name ) } /*! - Constructs an action group called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs an action group called \a name, with parent \a parent. If \a exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the group will ever be active. \sa exclusive */ -TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name, bool exclusive ) - : TQAction( TQT_TQOBJECT(tqparent), name ) +TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool exclusive ) + : TQAction( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name ) { d = new TQActionGroupPrivate; d->exclusive = exclusive; @@ -1572,7 +1572,7 @@ bool TQActionGroup::usesDropDown() const Adds action \a action to this group. Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the - group as tqparent, so this function is not usually used. + group as parent, so this function is not usually used. \sa addTo() */ @@ -1630,7 +1630,7 @@ void TQActionGroup::addSeparator() \obsolete Use add() instead, or better still create the action with the action - group as its tqparent. + group as its parent. */ /*! diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.h index 12f8148..08095e4 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.h @@ -75,19 +75,19 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQAction : public TQObject Q_PROPERTY( bool visible READ isVisible WRITE tqsetVisible ) public: - TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 ); #ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL TQAction( const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, - TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 ); TQAction( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, - TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 ); TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, - TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ); // obsolete - TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, + TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ); // obsolete + TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ); // obsolete #endif - TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name , bool toggle ); // obsolete + TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name , bool toggle ); // obsolete ~TQAction(); virtual void setIconSet( const TQIconSet& ); @@ -160,8 +160,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQActionGroup : public TQAction Q_PROPERTY( bool usesDropDown READ usesDropDown WRITE setUsesDropDown ) public: - TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); - TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* tqparent, const char* name , bool exclusive ); // obsolete + TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name , bool exclusive ); // obsolete ~TQActionGroup(); void setExclusive( bool ); bool isExclusive() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.cpp index e9f8d10..a94d0cb 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.cpp @@ -315,9 +315,9 @@ TQTimer *TQButton::timer() \brief the pixmap shown on the button If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its \link - TQPixmap::depth() depth\endlink is 1) and it does not have a tqmask, - this property will set the pixmap to be its own tqmask. The purpose - of this is to draw transtqparent bitmaps which are important for + TQPixmap::depth() depth\endlink is 1) and it does not have a mask, + this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose + of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for toggle buttons, for example. pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set. @@ -371,15 +371,15 @@ TQTimer *TQButton::timer() */ /*! - Constructs a standard button called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent, + Constructs a standard button called \a name with parent \a parent, using the widget flags \a f. - If \a tqparent is a TQButtonGroup, this constructor calls + If \a parent is a TQButtonGroup, this constructor calls TQButtonGroup::insert(). */ -TQButton::TQButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f ) +TQButton::TQButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f ) { bpixmap = 0; toggleTyp = SingleShot; // button is simple @@ -391,8 +391,8 @@ TQButton::TQButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) repeat = FALSE; // not in autorepeat mode d = 0; #ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP - if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQButtonGroup*>(tqparent) ) { - setGroup((TQButtonGroup*)tqparent); + if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQButtonGroup*>(parent) ) { + setGroup((TQButtonGroup*)parent); group()->insert( this ); // insert into button group } #endif @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ void TQButton::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) bpixmap = new TQPixmap( pixmap ); TQ_CHECK_PTR( bpixmap ); } - if ( bpixmap->depth() == 1 && !bpixmap->tqmask() ) + if ( bpixmap->depth() == 1 && !bpixmap->mask() ) bpixmap->setMask( *((TQBitmap *)bpixmap) ); if ( !btext.isNull() ) { btext = TQString::null; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.h index 42088a7..70f3e75 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.h @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQButton : public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( bool exclusiveToggle READ isExclusiveToggle ) public: - TQButton( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQButton( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQButton(); TQString text() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.cpp index 41da908..31ff7a5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.cpp @@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ There are two ways of using a button group: \list - \i The button group is the tqparent widget of a number of buttons, - i.e. the button group is the tqparent argument in the button + \i The button group is the parent widget of a number of buttons, + i.e. the button group is the parent argument in the button constructor. The buttons are assigned identifiers 0, 1, 2, etc., in the order they are created. A TQButtonGroup can display a frame and a title because it inherits TQGroupBox. \i The button group is an invisible widget and the contained - buttons have some other tqparent widget. In this usage, each button + buttons have some other parent widget. In this usage, each button must be manually inserted, using insert(), into the button group and given an identifier. \endlist @@ -132,12 +132,12 @@ typedef TQPtrListIterator<TQButtonItem> TQButtonListIt; /*! Constructs a button group with no title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( tqparent, name ) +TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQGroupBox( parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -145,13 +145,13 @@ TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs a button group with the title \a title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( title, tqparent, name ) + : TQGroupBox( title, parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -161,13 +161,13 @@ TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a orientation). - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( strips, orientation, tqparent, name ) + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQGroupBox( strips, orientation, parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -177,14 +177,14 @@ TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation, be arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a orientation). - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation, - const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, + const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( strips, orientation, title, tqparent, name ) + : TQGroupBox( strips, orientation, title, parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -232,11 +232,11 @@ void TQButtonGroup::setExclusive( bool enable ) group. Returns the button identifier. Buttons are normally inserted into a button group automatically by - passing the button group as the tqparent when the button is + passing the button group as the parent when the button is constructed. So it is not necessary to manually insert buttons - that have this button group as their tqparent widget. An exception + that have this button group as their parent widget. An exception is when you want custom identifiers instead of the default 0, 1, - 2, etc., or if you want the buttons to have some other tqparent. + 2, etc., or if you want the buttons to have some other parent. The button is assigned the identifier \a id or an automatically generated identifier. It works as follows: If \a id >= 0, this diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.h index cdef0a8..052f1ac 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.h @@ -61,13 +61,13 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQButtonGroup : public TQGroupBox Q_PROPERTY( int selectedId READ selectedId WRITE setButton ) public: - TQButtonGroup( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQButtonGroup( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQButtonGroup( const TQString &title, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQButtonGroup( int columns, Qt::Orientation o, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQButtonGroup( int columns, Qt::Orientation o, const TQString &title, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQButtonGroup(); bool isExclusive() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.cpp index 49838ec..b295e4f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.cpp @@ -120,12 +120,12 @@ /*! Constructs a checkbox with no text. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) +TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) { setToggleButton( TRUE ); tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) ); @@ -134,12 +134,12 @@ TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs a checkbox with text \a text. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) +TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) { setText( text ); setToggleButton( TRUE ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.h index 3f0e21b..66f0cbb 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.h @@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQCheckBox : public TQButton TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true ) public: - TQCheckBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); - TQCheckBox( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQCheckBox( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); + TQCheckBox( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); bool isChecked() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.cpp index 382258b..f934485 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.cpp @@ -342,8 +342,8 @@ class TQComboBoxPopup : public TQPopupMenu { public: - TQComboBoxPopup( TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char *name=0 ) - : TQPopupMenu( tqparent, name ) + TQComboBoxPopup( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 ) + : TQPopupMenu( parent, name ) { } @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ static inline bool checkIndex( const char *method, const char * name, /*! - Constructs a combobox widget with tqparent \a tqparent called \a name. + Constructs a combobox widget with parent \a parent called \a name. This constructor creates a popup list if the program uses Motif (or Aqua) look and feel; this is compatible with Motif 1.x and @@ -513,8 +513,8 @@ static inline bool checkIndex( const char *method, const char * name, -TQComboBox::TQComboBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) +TQComboBox::TQComboBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) { d = new TQComboBoxData( this ); if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this) || @@ -556,13 +556,13 @@ TQComboBox::TQComboBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) The input field can be edited if \a rw is TRUE, otherwise the user may only choose one of the items in the combobox. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQComboBox::TQComboBox( bool rw, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) +TQComboBox::TQComboBox( bool rw, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) { d = new TQComboBoxData( this ); setUpListBox(); @@ -2298,7 +2298,7 @@ void TQComboBox::setLineEdit( TQLineEdit *edit ) delete d->ed; d->ed = edit; - if ( edit->tqparent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) ) + if ( edit->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) ) edit->reparent( this, TQPoint(0,0), FALSE ); connect (edit, TQT_SIGNAL( textChanged(const TQString&) ), diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.h index bfee192..f67e7fd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.h @@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQComboBox : public TQWidget TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true ) public: - TQComboBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQComboBox( bool rw, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQComboBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQComboBox( bool rw, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQComboBox(); int count() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.cpp index 346bdd3..be63178 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.cpp @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ class TQDateTimeEditor : public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQDateTimeEditor( TQDateTimeEditBase * widget, TQWidget *tqparent, + TQDateTimeEditor( TQDateTimeEditBase * widget, TQWidget *parent, const char * name=0 ); ~TQDateTimeEditor(); @@ -419,8 +419,8 @@ class TQDateTimeSpinWidget : public TQSpinWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQDateTimeSpinWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQSpinWidget( tqparent, name ) + TQDateTimeSpinWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQSpinWidget( parent, name ) { } @@ -456,12 +456,12 @@ protected: }; /*! - Constructs an empty datetime editor with tqparent \a tqparent and + Constructs an empty datetime editor with parent \a parent and called \a name. */ -TQDateTimeEditor::TQDateTimeEditor( TQDateTimeEditBase * widget, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQDateTimeEditor::TQDateTimeEditor( TQDateTimeEditBase * widget, TQWidget *parent, const char * name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) { d = new TQDateTimeEditorPrivate(); cw = widget; @@ -919,12 +919,12 @@ public: */ /*! - Constructs an empty date editor which is a child of \a tqparent and + Constructs an empty date editor which is a child of \a parent and called name \a name. */ -TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQDateTimeEditBase( tqparent, name ) +TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQDateTimeEditBase( parent, name ) { init(); updateButtons(); @@ -933,14 +933,14 @@ TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) /*! \overload - Constructs a date editor with the initial value \a date, tqparent \a - tqparent and called \a name. + Constructs a date editor with the initial value \a date, parent \a + parent and called \a name. The date editor is initialized with \a date. */ -TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit( const QDate& date, QWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQDateTimeEditBase( TQT_TQWIDGET(tqparent), name ) +TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit( const QDate& date, QWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQDateTimeEditBase( TQT_TQWIDGET(parent), name ) { init(); setDate( TQT_TQDATE_OBJECT(date) ); @@ -1823,12 +1823,12 @@ public: /*! - Constructs an empty time edit with tqparent \a tqparent and called \a + Constructs an empty time edit with parent \a parent and called \a name. */ -TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQDateTimeEditBase( tqparent, name ) +TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQDateTimeEditBase( parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -1837,11 +1837,11 @@ TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) \overload Constructs a time edit with the initial time value, \a time, - tqparent \a tqparent and called \a name. + parent \a parent and called \a name. */ -TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit( const QTime& time, QWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQDateTimeEditBase( TQT_TQWIDGET(tqparent), name ) +TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit( const QTime& time, QWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQDateTimeEditBase( TQT_TQWIDGET(parent), name ) { init(); setTime( TQT_TQTIME_OBJECT(time) ); @@ -2649,11 +2649,11 @@ public: */ /*! - Constructs an empty datetime edit with tqparent \a tqparent and called + Constructs an empty datetime edit with parent \a parent and called \a name. */ -TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -2663,11 +2663,11 @@ TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) \overload Constructs a datetime edit with the initial value \a datetime, - tqparent \a tqparent and called \a name. + parent \a parent and called \a name. */ TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit( const TQDateTime& datetime, - TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) + TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { init(); setDateTime( datetime ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.h index ab59358..4c072f0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.h @@ -54,8 +54,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDateTimeEditBase : public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQDateTimeEditBase( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) {} + TQDateTimeEditBase( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) {} virtual bool setFocusSection( int sec ) = 0; virtual TQString sectionFormattedText( int sec ) = 0; @@ -87,8 +87,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDateEdit : public TQDateTimeEditBase Q_PROPERTY( TQDate minValue READ minValue WRITE setMinValue ) public: - TQDateEdit( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQDateEdit( const QDate& date, QWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDateEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDateEdit( const QDate& date, QWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQDateEdit(); enum Order { DMY, MDY, YMD, YDM }; @@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ public: AMPM = 0x10 }; - TQTimeEdit( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQTimeEdit( const QTime& time, QWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQTimeEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQTimeEdit( const QTime& time, QWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQTimeEdit(); TQSize tqsizeHint() const; @@ -250,8 +250,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDateTimeEdit : public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( TQDateTime dateTime READ dateTime WRITE setDateTime ) public: - TQDateTimeEdit( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQDateTimeEdit( const TQDateTime& datetime, TQWidget* tqparent=0, + TQDateTimeEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDateTimeEdit( const TQDateTime& datetime, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQDateTimeEdit(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.cpp index 5b9601b..8158d47 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.cpp @@ -143,13 +143,13 @@ public: /*! - Constructs a dial called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent. \a f is + Constructs a dial called \a name with parent \a parent. \a f is propagated to the TQWidget constructor. It has the default range of a TQRangeControl. */ -TQDial::TQDial( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ), TQRangeControl() +TQDial::TQDial( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ), TQRangeControl() { d = new TQDialPrivate; d->eraseAreaValid = FALSE; @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ TQDial::TQDial( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) /*! - Constructs a dial called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent. The dial's + Constructs a dial called \a name with parent \a parent. The dial's value can never be smaller than \a minValue or greater than \a maxValue. Its page step size is \a pageStep, and its initial value is \a value. @@ -170,8 +170,8 @@ TQDial::TQDial( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) */ TQDial::TQDial( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, 1, pageStep, value ) { d = new TQDialPrivate; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.h index d7cfcad..10ee437 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.h @@ -67,9 +67,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDial: public TQWidget, public TQRangeControl Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue ) public: - TQDial( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQDial( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); TQDial( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQDial(); bool tracking() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons.cpp index bb7d5f1..18f5631 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons.cpp @@ -63,19 +63,19 @@ struct TQDialogButtonsPrivate }; #ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG -TQDialogButtons::TQDialogButtons(TQDialog *tqparent, bool autoConnect, TQ_UINT32 buttons, - Qt::Orientation orient, const char *name ) : TQWidget(tqparent, name) +TQDialogButtons::TQDialogButtons(TQDialog *parent, bool autoConnect, TQ_UINT32 buttons, + Qt::Orientation orient, const char *name ) : TQWidget(parent, name) { init(buttons, orient); - if(tqparent && autoConnect) { - TQObject::connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL(acceptClicked()), tqparent, TQT_SLOT(accept())); - TQObject::connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL(rejectClicked()), tqparent, TQT_SLOT(reject())); + if(parent && autoConnect) { + TQObject::connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL(acceptClicked()), parent, TQT_SLOT(accept())); + TQObject::connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL(rejectClicked()), parent, TQT_SLOT(reject())); } } #endif // TQT_NO_DIALOG -TQDialogButtons::TQDialogButtons(TQWidget *tqparent, TQ_UINT32 buttons, - Qt::Orientation orient, const char *name ) : TQWidget(tqparent, name) +TQDialogButtons::TQDialogButtons(TQWidget *parent, TQ_UINT32 buttons, + Qt::Orientation orient, const char *name ) : TQWidget(parent, name) { init(buttons, orient); } @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ TQDialogButtons::addWidget(TQWidget *w) } else { lay = (TQBoxLayout*)d->custom->tqlayout(); } - if(w->tqparent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(d->custom)) + if(w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(d->custom)) w->reparent(d->custom, 0, TQPoint(0, 0), TRUE); lay->addWidget(w); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons_p.h index 4262ec1..3c06733 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons_p.h @@ -56,10 +56,10 @@ TQDialogButtons : public TQWidget public: enum Button { None=0, Accept=0x01, Reject=0x02, Help=0x04, Apply=0x08, All=0x10, Abort=0x20, Retry=0x40, Ignore=0x80 }; #ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG - TQDialogButtons(TQDialog *tqparent, bool autoConnect = TRUE, TQ_UINT32 buttons = Accept | Reject, + TQDialogButtons(TQDialog *parent, bool autoConnect = TRUE, TQ_UINT32 buttons = Accept | Reject, Qt::Orientation orient = Qt::Horizontal, const char *name = NULL); #endif // TQT_NO_DIALOG - TQDialogButtons(TQWidget *tqparent, TQ_UINT32 buttons = Accept | Reject, + TQDialogButtons(TQWidget *parent, TQ_UINT32 buttons = Accept | Reject, Qt::Orientation orient = Qt::Horizontal, const char *name = NULL); ~TQDialogButtons(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.cpp index 72f65c2..3701355 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.cpp @@ -573,11 +573,11 @@ int TQDockAreaLayout::widthForHeight( int h ) const /*! Constructs a TQDockArea with orientation \a o, HandlePosition \a h, - tqparent \a tqparent and called \a name. + parent \a parent and called \a name. */ -TQDockArea::TQDockArea( Qt::Orientation o, HandlePosition h, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ), orient( o ), tqlayout( 0 ), hPos( h ) +TQDockArea::TQDockArea( Qt::Orientation o, HandlePosition h, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ), orient( o ), tqlayout( 0 ), hPos( h ) { dockWindows = new TQPtrList<TQDockWindow>; tqlayout = new TQDockAreaLayout( this, o, dockWindows, 0, 0, "tooltqlayout" ); @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ TQDockArea::TQDockArea( Qt::Orientation o, HandlePosition h, TQWidget *tqparent, dock areas, even if they first appeared in this dock area. Floating dock windows are effectively top level windows and are not child windows of the dock area. When a floating dock window is - docked (dragged into a dock area) its tqparent becomes the dock + docked (dragged into a dock area) its parent becomes the dock area. */ @@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, int index ) orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? TQSizePolicy::Expanding : TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) ); dockWindows->append( w ); } else { - if ( w->tqparent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) ) + if ( w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) ) w->reparent( this, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), TRUE ); if ( index == - 1 ) { dockWindows->removeRef( w ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.h index 550732b..6cdd6e6 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.h @@ -67,8 +67,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDockAreaLayout : public TQLayout friend class TQDockArea; public: - TQDockAreaLayout( TQWidget* tqparent, Orientation o, TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> *wl, int space = -1, int margin = -1, const char *name = 0 ) - : TQLayout( tqparent, space, margin, name ), orient( o ), dockWindows( wl ), parentWidget( tqparent ) { init(); } + TQDockAreaLayout( TQWidget* parent, Orientation o, TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> *wl, int space = -1, int margin = -1, const char *name = 0 ) + : TQLayout( parent, space, margin, name ), orient( o ), dockWindows( wl ), parentWidget( parent ) { init(); } ~TQDockAreaLayout() {} void addItem( QLayoutItem * ) {} @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDockArea : public TQWidget public: enum HandlePosition { Normal, Reverse }; - TQDockArea( Qt::Orientation o, HandlePosition h = Normal, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQDockArea( Qt::Orientation o, HandlePosition h = Normal, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQDockArea(); void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, const TQPoint &globalPos, const TQRect &rect, bool swap ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.cpp index fcf0821..1a9796e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.cpp @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ class TQDockWindowResizeHandle : public TQWidget TQ_OBJECT public: - TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Orientation o, TQWidget *tqparent, TQDockWindow *w, const char* /*name*/=0 ); + TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Orientation o, TQWidget *parent, TQDockWindow *w, const char* /*name*/=0 ); void setOrientation( Orientation o ); Orientation orientation() const { return orient; } @@ -102,9 +102,9 @@ private: }; -TQDockWindowResizeHandle::TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Orientation o, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQDockWindowResizeHandle::TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Orientation o, TQWidget *parent, TQDockWindow *w, const char * ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, "qt_dockwidget_internal" ), mousePressed( FALSE ), unclippedPainter( 0 ), dockWindow( w ) + : TQWidget( parent, "qt_dockwidget_internal" ), mousePressed( FALSE ), unclippedPainter( 0 ), dockWindow( w ) { setOrientation( o ); } @@ -752,8 +752,8 @@ void TQDockWindowTitleBar::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * ) have a \link setCaption() caption\endlink.) When you construct a dock window you \e must pass it a TQDockArea - or a TQMainWindow as its tqparent if you want it docked. Pass 0 for - the tqparent if you want it floated. + or a TQMainWindow as its parent if you want it docked. Pass 0 for + the parent if you want it floated. \code TQToolBar *fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "File Actions" ); @@ -909,12 +909,12 @@ void TQDockWindowTitleBar::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * ) /*! - Constructs a TQDockWindow with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name and + Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent \a parent, called \a name and with widget flags \a f. */ -TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) ) +TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) ) { curPlace = InDock; isToolbar = FALSE; @@ -922,24 +922,24 @@ TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f ) } /*! - Constructs a TQDockWindow with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name and + Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent \a parent, called \a name and with widget flags \a f. If \a p is \c InDock, the dock window is docked into a dock area - and \a tqparent \e must be a TQDockArea or a TQMainWindow. If the \a - tqparent is a TQMainWindow the dock window will be docked in the main + and \a parent \e must be a TQDockArea or a TQMainWindow. If the \a + parent is a TQMainWindow the dock window will be docked in the main window's \c Top dock area. If \a p is \c OutsideDock, the dock window is created as a floating window. We recommend creating the dock area \c InDock with a TQMainWindow - as tqparent then calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() to move the + as parent then calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() to move the dock window where you want it. */ -TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) ) +TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) ) { curPlace = p; isToolbar = FALSE; @@ -949,8 +949,8 @@ TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlag /*! \internal */ -TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f, bool toolbar ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) ) +TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f, bool toolbar ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) ) { curPlace = p; isToolbar = toolbar; @@ -960,8 +960,8 @@ TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlag class TQDockWindowGridLayout : public TQGridLayout { public: - TQDockWindowGridLayout( TQWidget *tqparent, int nRows, int nCols ) - : TQGridLayout( tqparent, nRows, nCols ) {}; + TQDockWindowGridLayout( TQWidget *parent, int nRows, int nCols ) + : TQGridLayout( parent, nRows, nCols ) {}; TQ_SPExpandData expandingDirections() const { @@ -1970,7 +1970,7 @@ void TQDockWindow::hideEvent( TQHideEvent *e ) void TQDockWindow::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e ) { - if (curPlace == OutsideDock && (tqparent() && strcmp(tqparent()->name(), "qt_hide_dock") != 0)) { + if (curPlace == OutsideDock && (parent() && strcmp(parent()->name(), "qt_hide_dock") != 0)) { TQRect sr = tqApp->desktop()->availableGeometry( this ); if ( !sr.contains( pos() ) ) { int nx = TQMIN( TQMAX( x(), sr.x() ), sr.right()-width() ); @@ -2115,7 +2115,7 @@ void TQDockWindow::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e ) while ( o ) { if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(o) ) break; - o = o->tqparent(); + o = o->parent(); } if ( !o || ! ( (TQMainWindow*)o )->showDockMenu( e->globalPos() ) ) e->ignore(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.h index 6906fd9..99858eb 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.h @@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ public: enum Place { InDock, OutsideDock }; enum CloseMode { Never = 0, Docked = 1, Undocked = 2, Always = Docked | Undocked }; - TQDockWindow( Place p = InDock, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); - TQDockWindow( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQDockWindow( Place p = InDock, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQDockWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); ~TQDockWindow(); virtual void setWidget( TQWidget *w ); @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ private Q_SLOTS: void toggleVisible() { if ( !isVisible() ) show(); else hide(); } private: - TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f, bool toolbar ); + TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f, bool toolbar ); void handleMove( const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &gp, bool drawRect ); void updateGui(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects.cpp index 0ac6a24..c98a8ee 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects.cpp @@ -58,8 +58,8 @@ class TQAccessWidget : public TQWidget friend class TQAlphaWidget; friend class TQRollEffect; public: - TQAccessWidget( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f ) {} + TQAccessWidget( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f ) {} }; /* diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.cpp index 8112924..1c6f6d8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.cpp @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ look depends upon the current GUI style. \value TabWidgetPanel is used to draw a frame suitable for tab widgets. The look depends upon the current GUI style. - \value MShape internal tqmask + \value MShape internal mask When it does not call TQStyle, Shape interacts with TQFrame::Shadow, the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth() to create the total result. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ \value Sunken the frame and contents appear sunken; draws a 3D sunken line using the light and dark colors of the current color group - \value MShadow internal; tqmask for the shadow + \value MShadow internal; mask for the shadow Shadow interacts with TQFrame::Shape, the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth(). See the \link #picture picture of the frames\endlink @@ -169,12 +169,12 @@ Constructs a frame widget with frame style \c NoFrame and a 1-pixel frame width. - The \a tqparent, \a name and \a f arguments are passed to the + The \a parent, \a name and \a f arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQFrame::TQFrame( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f ) +TQFrame::TQFrame( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f ) { frect = TQRect( 0, 0, 0, 0 ); fstyle = NoFrame | Plain; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.h index 8d289d2..d8ae55c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.h @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQFrame : public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( TQRect frameRect READ frameRect WRITE setFrameRect DESIGNABLE false ) public: - TQFrame( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQFrame( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); int frameStyle() const; virtual void setFrameStyle( int ); @@ -89,12 +89,12 @@ public: LineEditPanel = 0x000a, TabWidgetPanel = 0x000b, GroupBoxPanel = 0x000c, - MShape = 0x000f // tqmask for the tqshape + MShape = 0x000f // mask for the tqshape }; enum Shadow { Plain = 0x0010, // plain line Raised = 0x0020, // raised shadow effect Sunken = 0x0030, // sunken shadow effect - MShadow = 0x00f0 }; // tqmask for the shadow + MShadow = 0x00f0 }; // mask for the shadow Shape frameShape() const; void setFrameShape( Shape ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.cpp index 06c6a88..bd66cc2 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.cpp @@ -67,14 +67,14 @@ */ /*! - Constructs a grid widget with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name. + Constructs a grid widget with parent \a parent, called \a name. If \a orient is \c Horizontal, \a n specifies the number of columns. If \a orient is \c Vertical, \a n specifies the number of rows. The widget flags \a f are passed to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQGrid::TQGrid( int n, Qt::Orientation orient, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, +TQGrid::TQGrid( int n, Qt::Orientation orient, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f ) { int nCols, nRows; if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) { @@ -91,12 +91,12 @@ TQGrid::TQGrid( int n, Qt::Orientation orient, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *n /*! - Constructs a grid widget with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name. + Constructs a grid widget with parent \a parent, called \a name. \a n specifies the number of columns. The widget flags \a f are passed to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQGrid::TQGrid( int n, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f ) +TQGrid::TQGrid( int n, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f ) { lay = new TQGridLayout( this, -1, n, 0, 0, name ); lay->setAutoAdd( TRUE ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.h index 98ee826..787dbd5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.h @@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQGrid : public TQFrame Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQGrid( int n, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); - TQGrid( int n, Qt::Orientation orient, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, + TQGrid( int n, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQGrid( int n, Qt::Orientation orient, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); void setSpacing( int ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.cpp index 0551c30..d4c1638 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.cpp @@ -89,11 +89,11 @@ /*! Constructs a grid view. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed + The \a parent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed to the TQScrollView constructor. */ -TQGridView::TQGridView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - :TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents) ), +TQGridView::TQGridView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + :TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents) ), nrows( 5 ), ncols( 5 ), cellw( 12 ), cellh( 12 ) { viewport()->setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBase ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.h index 01e0b1a..d458432 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.h @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQGridView : public TQScrollView Q_PROPERTY( int cellHeight READ cellHeight WRITE setCellHeight ) public: - TQGridView( TQWidget *tqparent=0, const char *name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQGridView( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQGridView(); int numRows() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.cpp index 228204a..ef877e7 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.cpp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ The simplest way to use it is to create a group box with the desired number of columns (or rows) and orientation, and then just - create widgets with the group box as tqparent. + create widgets with the group box as parent. It is also possible to change the orientation() and number of columns() after construction, or to ignore all the automatic @@ -112,14 +112,14 @@ public: /*! Constructs a group box widget with no title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. This constructor does not do automatic tqlayout. */ -TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) +TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -127,14 +127,14 @@ TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs a group box with the title \a title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. This constructor does not do automatic tqlayout. */ -TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) +TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { init(); setTitle( title ); @@ -145,13 +145,13 @@ TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *n arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a orientation). - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { init(); setColumnLayout( strips, orientation ); @@ -162,14 +162,14 @@ TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation, arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a orientation). - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation, - const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, + const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { init(); setTitle( title ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.h index d73403e..ce77add 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.h @@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQGroupBox : public TQFrame Q_PROPERTY( bool checked READ isChecked WRITE setChecked ) #endif public: - TQGroupBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQGroupBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQGroupBox( const TQString &title, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation o, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation o, const TQString &title, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQGroupBox(); virtual void setColumnLayout(int strips, Qt::Orientation o); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.cpp index d25956d..bbd3dfd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.cpp @@ -66,12 +66,12 @@ /*! - Constructs an hbox widget with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a name. - The tqparent, name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the TQFrame + Constructs an hbox widget with parent \a parent, called \a name. + The parent, name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQHBox::TQHBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - :TQFrame( tqparent, name, f ) +TQHBox::TQHBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + :TQFrame( parent, name, f ) { lay = new TQHBoxLayout( this, frameWidth(), frameWidth(), name ); lay->setAutoAdd( TRUE ); @@ -85,12 +85,12 @@ TQHBox::TQHBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) This constructor is provided for the TQVBox class. You should never need to use it directly. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the + The \a parent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQHBox::TQHBox( bool horizontal, TQWidget *tqparent , const char *name, WFlags f ) - :TQFrame( tqparent, name, f ) +TQHBox::TQHBox( bool horizontal, TQWidget *parent , const char *name, WFlags f ) + :TQFrame( parent, name, f ) { lay = new TQBoxLayout( this, horizontal ? TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight : TQBoxLayout::Down, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.h index e669eb0..b6a524d 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.h @@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQHBox : public TQFrame Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQHBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQHBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); void setSpacing( int ); bool setStretchFactor( TQWidget*, int stretch ); TQSize tqsizeHint() const; protected: - TQHBox( bool horizontal, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQHBox( bool horizontal, TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f = 0 ); void frameChanged(); private: diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.cpp index 29af0a9..3f02794 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.cpp @@ -64,24 +64,24 @@ /*! Constructs a horizontal button group with no title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, tqparent, name ) +TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, parent, name ) { } /*! Constructs a horizontal button group with the title \a title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, title, tqparent, name ) + : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, title, parent, name ) { } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.h index 0a0cf50..a45e25c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.h @@ -51,8 +51,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQHButtonGroup : public TQButtonGroup { TQ_OBJECT public: - TQHButtonGroup( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQHButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQHButtonGroup( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQHButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQHButtonGroup(); private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.cpp index 18d813d..28be091 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.cpp @@ -217,12 +217,12 @@ public: /*! - Constructs a horizontal header called \a name, with tqparent \a - tqparent. + Constructs a horizontal header called \a name, with parent \a + parent. */ -TQHeader::TQHeader( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WStaticContents ) +TQHeader::TQHeader( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WStaticContents ) { orient = Qt::Horizontal; init( 0 ); @@ -230,11 +230,11 @@ TQHeader::TQHeader( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs a horizontal header called \a name, with \a n sections - and tqparent \a tqparent. + and parent \a parent. */ -TQHeader::TQHeader( int n, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WStaticContents ) +TQHeader::TQHeader( int n, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WStaticContents ) { orient = Qt::Horizontal; init( n ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.h index 24fcd25..cfd5491 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.h @@ -69,8 +69,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQHeader : public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( bool stretching READ isStretchEnabled WRITE setStretchEnabled ) public: - TQHeader( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQHeader( int, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQHeader( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQHeader( int, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQHeader(); int addLabel( const TQString &, int size = -1 ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.cpp index 2bac06c..37765df 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.cpp @@ -63,24 +63,24 @@ /*! Constructs a horizontal group box with no title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, tqparent, name ) +TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, parent, name ) { } /*! Constructs a horizontal group box with the title \a title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, title, tqparent, name ) + : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, title, parent, name ) { } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.h index 4b52836..bff396c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.h @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQHGroupBox : public TQGroupBox Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQHGroupBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQHGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQHGroupBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQHGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQHGroupBox(); private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.cpp index 491adab..206a7cd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.cpp @@ -145,14 +145,14 @@ public: /*! Constructs an empty label. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flag \a f, arguments are passed + The \a parent, \a name and widget flag \a f, arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. \sa tqsetAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), setIndent() */ -TQLabel::TQLabel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) +TQLabel::TQLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) { init(); } @@ -161,15 +161,15 @@ TQLabel::TQLabel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) /*! Constructs a label that displays the text, \a text. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flag \a f, arguments are passed + The \a parent, \a name and widget flag \a f, arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. \sa setText(), tqsetAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), setIndent() */ -TQLabel::TQLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, +TQLabel::TQLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) { init(); setText( text ); @@ -185,15 +185,15 @@ TQLabel::TQLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, user presses Alt+ the underlined letter, focus is passed to the buddy widget. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed + The \a parent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. \sa setText(), setBuddy(), tqsetAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), setIndent() */ TQLabel::TQLabel( TQWidget *buddy, const TQString &text, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) + TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) { init(); #ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ void TQLabel::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap ) lpixmap = new TQPixmap( pixmap ); } - if ( lpixmap->depth() == 1 && !lpixmap->tqmask() ) + if ( lpixmap->depth() == 1 && !lpixmap->mask() ) lpixmap->setMask( *((TQBitmap *)lpixmap) ); updateLabel( osh ); @@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ void TQLabel::movieUpdated(const TQRect& rect) r.moveBy(rect.x(), rect.y()); r.setWidth(TQMIN(r.width(), rect.width())); r.setHeight(TQMIN(r.height(), rect.height())); - tqrepaint( r, mov->framePixmap().tqmask() != 0 ); + tqrepaint( r, mov->framePixmap().mask() != 0 ); } } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.h index 654648e..266b5c5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.h @@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQLabel : public TQFrame TQ_OVERRIDE( BackgroundMode backgroundMode DESIGNABLE true) public: - TQLabel( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); - TQLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0, + TQLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); TQLabel( TQWidget *buddy, const TQString &, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQLabel(); TQString text() const { return ltext; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.cpp index e84332c..56d69b0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.cpp @@ -302,14 +302,14 @@ static const char *getSegments( char ch ) // gets list of segments to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to \c Outline. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. \sa setNumDigits(), setSmallDecimalPoint() */ -TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) +TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { ndigits = 5; init(); @@ -322,14 +322,14 @@ TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to \c Outline. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. \sa setNumDigits(), setSmallDecimalPoint() */ -TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber( uint numDigits, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) +TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber( uint numDigits, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { ndigits = numDigits; init(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.h index e954305..7d9fd5a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.h @@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQLCDNumber : public TQFrame // LCD number widget Q_PROPERTY( int intValue READ intValue WRITE display ) public: - TQLCDNumber( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQLCDNumber( uint numDigits, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQLCDNumber( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQLCDNumber( uint numDigits, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQLCDNumber(); enum Mode { Hex, Dec, Oct, Bin, HEX = Hex, DEC = Dec, OCT = Oct, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.cpp index cca37a7..645c646 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.cpp @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ struct TQLineEditPrivate : public TQt const TQValidator* validator; struct MaskInputData { enum Casemode { NoCaseMode, Upper, Lower }; - TQChar maskChar; // either the separator char or the inputtqmask + TQChar maskChar; // either the separator char or the inputmask bool separator; Casemode caseMode; }; @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ struct TQLineEditPrivate : public TQt // masking void parseInputMask( const TQString &maskFields ); - bool isValidInput( TQChar key, TQChar tqmask ) const; + bool isValidInput( TQChar key, TQChar mask ) const; TQString maskString( uint pos, const TQString &str, bool clear = FALSE ) const; TQString clearString( uint pos, uint len ) const; TQString stripString( const TQString &str ) const; @@ -390,13 +390,13 @@ struct TQLineEditPrivate : public TQt The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. \sa setText(), setMaxLength() */ -TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this )) +TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this )) { d->init( TQString::null ); } @@ -407,14 +407,14 @@ TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum text length to 32767 characters. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. \sa text(), setMaxLength() */ -TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( const TQString& contents, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this )) +TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( const TQString& contents, TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this )) { d->init( contents ); } @@ -424,16 +424,16 @@ TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( const TQString& contents, TQWidget* tqparent, const char contents. The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum - text length is set to the length of the tqmask (the number of tqmask + text length is set to the length of the mask (the number of mask characters and separators). - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. \sa setMask() text() */ -TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( const TQString& contents, const TQString &inputMask, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this )) +TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( const TQString& contents, const TQString &inputMask, TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this )) { d->parseInputMask( inputMask ); if ( d->maskData ) { @@ -519,7 +519,7 @@ TQString TQLineEdit::displayText() const cursor position is set to 0 and the first part of the string is shown. - If the line edit has an input tqmask, the tqmask defines the maximum + If the line edit has an input mask, the mask defines the maximum string length. \sa inputMask @@ -1109,18 +1109,18 @@ bool TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput() const /*! \property TQLineEdit::inputMask - \brief The validation input tqmask + \brief The validation input mask - If no tqmask is set, inputMask() returns TQString::null. + If no mask is set, inputMask() returns TQString::null. - Sets the TQLineEdit's validation tqmask. Validators can be used + Sets the TQLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see setValidator(). - Unset the tqmask and return to normal TQLineEdit operation by passing + Unset the mask and return to normal TQLineEdit operation by passing an empty string ("") or just calling setInputMask() with no arguments. - The tqmask format understands these tqmask characters: + The mask format understands these mask characters: \table \header \i Character \i Meaning \row \i \c A \i ASCII alphabetic character required. A-Z, a-z. @@ -1142,7 +1142,7 @@ bool TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput() const separators. \endtable - The tqmask consists of a string of tqmask characters and separators, + The mask consists of a string of mask characters and separators, optionally followed by a semi-colon and the character used for blanks: the blank characters are always removed from the text after editing. The default blank character is space. @@ -2740,9 +2740,9 @@ void TQLineEditPrivate::parseInputMask( const TQString &maskFields ) /* checks if the key is valid compared to the inputMask */ -bool TQLineEditPrivate::isValidInput( TQChar key, TQChar tqmask ) const +bool TQLineEditPrivate::isValidInput( TQChar key, TQChar mask ) const { - switch ( tqmask ) { + switch ( mask ) { case 'A': if ( key.isLetter() && key != blank ) return TRUE; @@ -2794,7 +2794,7 @@ bool TQLineEditPrivate::isValidInput( TQChar key, TQChar tqmask ) const } /* - Applies the inputMask on \a str starting from position \a pos in the tqmask. \a clear + Applies the inputMask on \a str starting from position \a pos in the mask. \a clear specifies from where characters should be gotten when a separator is met in \a str - TRUE means that blanks will be used, FALSE that previous input is used. Calling this when no inputMask is set is undefined. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.h index 0b7fd52..62232d9 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.h @@ -82,9 +82,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQLineEdit : public TQFrame Q_PROPERTY( bool acceptableInput READ hasAcceptableInput ) public: - TQLineEdit( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0 ); - TQLineEdit( const TQString &, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0 ); - TQLineEdit( const TQString &, const TQString &, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQLineEdit( TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 ); + TQLineEdit( const TQString &, TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 ); + TQLineEdit( const TQString &, const TQString &, TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 ); ~TQLineEdit(); TQString text() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp index 3b84d03..331bf26 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp @@ -992,8 +992,8 @@ int TQListBoxPixmap::rtti() const /*! - Constructs a new empty list box called \a name and with tqparent \a - tqparent. + Constructs a new empty list box called \a name and with parent \a + parent. Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags \a f so that only part of the TQListBoxItem tqchildren is redrawn. This may be @@ -1004,8 +1004,8 @@ int TQListBoxPixmap::rtti() const \sa TQWidget::clearWFlags() TQt::WidgetFlags */ -TQListBox::TQListBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ) +TQListBox::TQListBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ) { d = new TQListBoxPrivate( this ); d->updateTimer = new TQTimer( this, "listbox update timer" ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.h index 0b464a9..0a5763b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.h @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQListBox : public TQScrollView Q_PROPERTY( bool variableHeight READ variableHeight WRITE setVariableHeight ) public: - TQListBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQListBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); ~TQListBox(); virtual void setFont( const TQFont & ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp index 506ec60..5b032b0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ struct TQListViewPrivate // the magical hidden mother of all items class Root: public TQListViewItem { public: - Root( TQListView * tqparent ); + Root( TQListView * parent ); void setHeight( int ); void invalidateHeight(); @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ struct TQListViewPrivate class TQListViewToolTip : public TQToolTip { public: - TQListViewToolTip( TQWidget *tqparent, TQListView *lv ); + TQListViewToolTip( TQWidget *parent, TQListView *lv ); void maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ); @@ -273,8 +273,8 @@ private: }; -TQListViewToolTip::TQListViewToolTip( TQWidget *tqparent, TQListView *lv ) - : TQToolTip( tqparent ), view( lv ) +TQListViewToolTip::TQListViewToolTip( TQWidget *parent, TQListView *lv ) + : TQToolTip( parent ), view( lv ) { } @@ -381,18 +381,18 @@ static TQString qEllipsisText( const TQString &org, const TQFontMetrics &fm, int The easiest way to use TQListViewItem is to construct one with a few constant strings, and either a TQListView or another - TQListViewItem as tqparent. + TQListViewItem as parent. \code (void) new TQListViewItem( listView, "Column 1", "Column 2" ); (void) new TQListViewItem( listView->firstChild(), "A", "B", "C" ); \endcode We've discarded the pointers to the items since we can still access - them via their tqparent \e listView. By default, TQListView sorts its + them via their parent \e listView. By default, TQListView sorts its items; this can be switched off with TQListView::setSorting(-1). - The tqparent must be another TQListViewItem or a TQListView. If the - tqparent is a TQListView, the item becomes a top-level item within - that TQListView. If the tqparent is another TQListViewItem, the item + The parent must be another TQListViewItem or a TQListView. If the + parent is a TQListView, the item becomes a top-level item within + that TQListView. If the parent is another TQListViewItem, the item becomes a child of that list view item. If you keep the pointer, you can set or change the texts using @@ -491,53 +491,53 @@ static TQString qEllipsisText( const TQString &org, const TQFontMetrics &fm, int /*! Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView \a - tqparent. + parent. */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent ) +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); } /*! - Constructs a new list view item that is a child of \a tqparent and - first in the tqparent's list of tqchildren. + Constructs a new list view item that is a child of \a parent and + first in the parent's list of tqchildren. */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent ) +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); } /*! - Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of \a tqparent - and is after item \a after in the tqparent's list of tqchildren. Since - \a tqparent is a TQListView the item will be a top-level item. + Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of \a parent + and is after item \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren. Since + \a parent is a TQListView the item will be a top-level item. */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after ) +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); moveToJustAfter( after ); } /*! - Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of \a tqparent - and is after item \a after in the tqparent's list of tqchildren. + Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of \a parent + and is after item \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren. */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after ) +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); moveToJustAfter( after ); } @@ -545,14 +545,14 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, TQListViewItem * afte /*! Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView \a - tqparent, with up to eight constant strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a + parent, with up to eight constant strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a label3, \a label4, \a label5, \a label6, \a label7 and \a label8 defining its columns' contents. \sa setText() */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQString label1, TQString label2, TQString label3, @@ -563,7 +563,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQString label8 ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); setText( 0, label1 ); setText( 1, label2 ); @@ -578,14 +578,14 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, /*! Constructs a new list view item as a child of the TQListViewItem \a - tqparent with up to eight constant strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a + parent with up to eight constant strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a label3, \a label4, \a label5, \a label6, \a label7 and \a label8 as columns' contents. \sa setText() */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQString label1, TQString label2, TQString label3, @@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, TQString label8 ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); setText( 0, label1 ); setText( 1, label2 ); @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, } /*! - Constructs a new list view item in the TQListView \a tqparent that is + Constructs a new list view item in the TQListView \a parent that is included after item \a after and that has up to eight column texts, \a label1, \a label2, \a label3, \a label4, \a label5, \a label6, \a label7 and\a label8. @@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, \sa setText() */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after, +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString label1, TQString label2, TQString label3, @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString label8 ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); moveToJustAfter( after ); setText( 0, label1 ); @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after, /*! Constructs a new list view item as a child of the TQListViewItem \a - tqparent. It is inserted after item \a after and may contain up to + parent. It is inserted after item \a after and may contain up to eight strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a label3, \a label4, \a label5, \a label6, \a label7 and \a label8 as column entries. @@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after, \sa setText() */ -TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after, +TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString label1, TQString label2, TQString label3, @@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, TQListViewItem * afte TQString label8 ) { init(); - tqparent->insertItem( this ); + parent->insertItem( this ); moveToJustAfter( after ); setText( 0, label1 ); @@ -762,14 +762,14 @@ void TQListViewItem::tqsetVisible( bool b ) TQListView *lv = listView(); if ( !lv ) return; - if ( b && tqparent() && !tqparent()->isVisible() ) + if ( b && parent() && !parent()->isVisible() ) return; visible = b; configured = FALSE; setHeight( 0 ); invalidateHeight(); - if ( tqparent() ) - tqparent()->invalidateHeight(); + if ( parent() ) + parent()->invalidateHeight(); else lv->d->r->invalidateHeight(); for ( TQListViewItem *i = childItem; i; i = i->siblingItem ) @@ -969,9 +969,9 @@ void TQListViewItem::okRename( int col ) setText( col, renameBox->text() ); removeRenameBox(); - // we set the tqparent lsc to Unsorted if that column is the sorted one - if ( tqparent() && (int)tqparent()->lsc == col ) - tqparent()->lsc = Unsorted; + // we set the parent lsc to Unsorted if that column is the sorted one + if ( parent() && (int)parent()->lsc == col ) + parent()->lsc = Unsorted; emit lv->itemRenamed( this, col ); emit lv->itemRenamed( this, col, text( col ) ); @@ -2280,10 +2280,10 @@ void TQListViewItem::paintBranches( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, } -TQListViewPrivate::Root::Root( TQListView * tqparent ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent ) +TQListViewPrivate::Root::Root( TQListView * parent ) + : TQListViewItem( parent ) { - lv = tqparent; + lv = parent; setHeight( 0 ); setOpen( TRUE ); } @@ -2422,7 +2422,7 @@ void TQListViewItem::ignoreDoubleClick() The simplest pattern of use is to create a TQListView, add some column headers using addColumn() and create one or more TQListViewItem or TQCheckListItem objects with the TQListView as - tqparent: + parent: \quotefile xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.h \skipto TQListView * table @@ -2460,7 +2460,7 @@ void TQListViewItem::ignoreDoubleClick() The default is FALSE. \row \i \l setTreeStepSize() \i Sets how many pixels an item's tqchildren are indented - relative to their tqparent. The default is 20. This is + relative to their parent. The default is 20. This is mostly a matter of taste. \row \i \l setSorting() \i Sets whether the items should be sorted, whether it should @@ -2556,7 +2556,7 @@ void TQListViewItem::ignoreDoubleClick() \i Make the item below the current item current and visible. \row \i Left Arrow \i If the current item is closed (<b>+</b> icon) or has no - tqchildren, make its tqparent item current and visible. If the + tqchildren, make its parent item current and visible. If the current item is open (<b>-</b> icon) close it, i.e. hide its tqchildren. Exception: if the current item is the first item and is closed and the horizontal scrollbar is offset to @@ -2606,8 +2606,8 @@ void TQListViewItem::ignoreDoubleClick() */ /*! - Constructs a new empty list view called \a name with tqparent \a - tqparent. + Constructs a new empty list view called \a name with parent \a + parent. Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags \a f so that only part of the TQListViewItem tqchildren is redrawn. This may be @@ -2616,8 +2616,8 @@ void TQListViewItem::ignoreDoubleClick() \sa TQWidget::clearWFlags() TQt::WidgetFlags */ -TQListView::TQListView( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ) +TQListView::TQListView( TQWidget * parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ) { init(); } @@ -3165,7 +3165,7 @@ void TQListView::buildDrawableList() const /*! \property TQListView::treeStepSize - \brief the number of pixels a child is offset from its tqparent + \brief the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent The default is 20 pixels. @@ -3908,7 +3908,7 @@ int TQListViewItem::depth() const /*! Returns a pointer to the item immediately above this item on the screen. This is usually the item's closest older sibling, but it - may also be its tqparent or its next older sibling's youngest child, + may also be its parent or its next older sibling's youngest child, or something else if anyoftheabove->height() returns 0. Returns 0 if there is no item immediately above this item. @@ -3948,8 +3948,8 @@ TQListViewItem * TQListViewItem::itemAbove() /*! Returns a pointer to the item immediately below this item on the screen. This is usually the item's eldest child, but it may also - be its next younger sibling, its tqparent's next younger sibling, - grandtqparent's, etc., or something else if anyoftheabove->height() + be its next younger sibling, its parent's next younger sibling, + grandparent's, etc., or something else if anyoftheabove->height() returns 0. Returns 0 if there is no item immediately below this item. @@ -4009,12 +4009,12 @@ TQListViewItem* TQListViewItem::firstChild() const /*! - Returns the tqparent of this item, or 0 if this item has no tqparent. + Returns the parent of this item, or 0 if this item has no parent. \sa firstChild(), nextSibling() */ -TQListViewItem* TQListViewItem::tqparent() const +TQListViewItem* TQListViewItem::parent() const { if ( !parentItem || parentItem->is_root ) return 0; return parentItem; @@ -4324,11 +4324,11 @@ void TQListView::contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent * e ) bool newCurrent = FALSE; TQListViewItem *ci = d->focusItem; while ( ci ) { - if ( ci->tqparent() && ci->tqparent() == i ) { + if ( ci->parent() && ci->parent() == i ) { newCurrent = TRUE; break; } - ci = ci->tqparent(); + ci = ci->parent(); } if ( newCurrent ) { setCurrentItem( i ); @@ -4534,11 +4534,11 @@ void TQListView::contentsMouseReleaseEventEx( TQMouseEvent * e ) bool newCurrent = FALSE; TQListViewItem *ci = d->focusItem; while ( ci ) { - if ( ci->tqparent() && ci->tqparent() == i ) { + if ( ci->parent() && ci->parent() == i ) { newCurrent = TRUE; break; } - ci = ci->tqparent(); + ci = ci->parent(); } if ( newCurrent ) setCurrentItem( i ); @@ -5200,7 +5200,7 @@ TQListViewItem * TQListView::itemAt( const TQPoint & viewPos ) const while( c && c->i && ( c->y + c->i->height() <= g || !c->i->isVisible() || - (c->i->tqparent() && !c->i->tqparent()->isVisible()) ) ) + (c->i->parent() && !c->i->parent()->isVisible()) ) ) c = d->drawables->next(); TQListViewItem *i = (c && c->y <= g) ? c->i : 0; @@ -6057,55 +6057,55 @@ struct TQCheckListItemPrivate /*! - Constructs a checkable item with tqparent \a tqparent, text \a text + Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, text \a text and of type \a tt. Note that a \c RadioButton must be the child of a \c RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *tqparent, const TQString &text, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, const TQString &text, Type tt ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, text, TQString::null ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, text, TQString::null ) { myType = tt; init(); if ( myType == RadioButton ) { - if ( tqparent->type() != RadioButtonController ) + if ( parent->type() != RadioButtonController ) qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be " "child of a controller" ); else - d->exclusive = tqparent; + d->exclusive = parent; } } /*! - Constructs a checkable item with tqparent \a tqparent, which is after - \a after in the tqparent's list of tqchildren, and with text \a text + Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, which is after + \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren, and with text \a text and of type \a tt. Note that a \c RadioButton must be the child of a \c RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &text, Type tt ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, after, text ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, after, text ) { myType = tt; init(); if ( myType == RadioButton ) { - if ( tqparent->type() != RadioButtonController ) + if ( parent->type() != RadioButtonController ) qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be " "child of a controller" ); else - d->exclusive = tqparent; + d->exclusive = parent; } } /*! - Constructs a checkable item with tqparent \a tqparent, text \a text + Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, text \a text and of type \a tt. Note that this item must \e not be a \c RadioButton. Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c RadioButtonController. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, const TQString &text, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text, Type tt ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, text, TQString::null ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, text, TQString::null ) { myType = tt; if ( myType == RadioButton ) { @@ -6116,15 +6116,15 @@ TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, const TQString &text } /*! - Constructs a checkable item with tqparent \a tqparent, which is after - \a after in the tqparent's list of tqchildren, with text \a text and + Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, which is after + \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren, with text \a text and of type \a tt. Note that this item must \e not be a \c RadioButton. Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c RadioButtonController. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &text, Type tt ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, after, text ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, after, text ) { myType = tt; if ( myType == RadioButton ) { @@ -6136,13 +6136,13 @@ TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *afte /*! - Constructs a checkable item with tqparent \a tqparent, text \a text + Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, text \a text and of type \a tt. Note that \a tt must \e not be \c RadioButton. Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c RadioButtonController. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, const TQString &text, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text, Type tt ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, text ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, text ) { myType = tt; if ( tt == RadioButton ) @@ -6152,14 +6152,14 @@ TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, const TQString &text, } /*! - Constructs a checkable item with tqparent \a tqparent, which is after - \a after in the tqparent's list of tqchildren, with text \a text and + Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, which is after + \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren, with text \a text and of type \a tt. Note that \a tt must \e not be \c RadioButton. Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c RadioButtonController. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &text, Type tt ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, after, text ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, after, text ) { myType = tt; if ( tt == RadioButton ) @@ -6179,12 +6179,12 @@ int TQCheckListItem::rtti() const } /*! - Constructs a \c RadioButtonController item with tqparent \a tqparent, + Constructs a \c RadioButtonController item with parent \a parent, text \a text and pixmap \a p. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, const TQString &text, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap & p ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, text ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, text ) { myType = RadioButtonController; setPixmap( 0, p ); @@ -6192,12 +6192,12 @@ TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, const TQString &text, } /*! - Constructs a \c RadioButtonController item with tqparent \a tqparent, + Constructs a \c RadioButtonController item with parent \a parent, text \a text and pixmap \a p. */ -TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, const TQString &text, +TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap & p ) - : TQListViewItem( tqparent, text ) + : TQListViewItem( parent, text ) { myType = RadioButtonController; setPixmap( 0, p ); @@ -6288,7 +6288,7 @@ TQCheckListItem::ToggleState TQCheckListItem::state() const } /* - Same as the public state() except this one does not tqmask NoChange into Off + Same as the public state() except this one does not mask NoChange into Off when tristate is disabled. */ TQCheckListItem::ToggleState TQCheckListItem::internalState() const @@ -6323,8 +6323,8 @@ void TQCheckListItem::setState( ToggleState s ) /* Sets the toggle state of the checklistitems. \a update tells if the - controller / tqparent controller should be aware of these changes, \a store - tells if the tqparent should store its tqchildren if certain conditions arise + controller / parent controller should be aware of these changes, \a store + tells if the parent should store its tqchildren if certain conditions arise */ void TQCheckListItem::setState( ToggleState s, bool update, bool store) { @@ -6335,9 +6335,9 @@ void TQCheckListItem::setState( ToggleState s, bool update, bool store) if ( myType == CheckBox ) { setCurrentState( s ); stateChange( state() ); - if ( update && tqparent() && tqparent()->rtti() == 1 - && ((TQCheckListItem*)tqparent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) - ((TQCheckListItem*)tqparent())->updateController( update, store ); + if ( update && parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 + && ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) + ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->updateController( update, store ); } else if ( myType == CheckBoxController ) { if ( s == NoChange && childCount()) { restoreState( (void*) this ); @@ -6359,18 +6359,18 @@ void TQCheckListItem::setState( ToggleState s, bool update, bool store) ToggleState oldState = internalState(); updateController( FALSE, FALSE ); if ( oldState != internalState() && - tqparent() && tqparent()->rtti() == 1 && - ((TQCheckListItem*)tqparent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) - ((TQCheckListItem*)tqparent())->updateController( update, store ); + parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 && + ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) + ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->updateController( update, store ); updateController( update, store ); } else { - // if there are no tqchildren we simply set the CheckBoxController and update its tqparent + // if there are no tqchildren we simply set the CheckBoxController and update its parent setCurrentState( s ); stateChange( state() ); - if ( tqparent() && tqparent()->rtti() == 1 - && ((TQCheckListItem*)tqparent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) - ((TQCheckListItem*)tqparent())->updateController( update, store ); + if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 + && ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) + ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->updateController( update, store ); } } else { setCurrentState( s ); @@ -6421,7 +6421,7 @@ void TQCheckListItem::setCurrentState( ToggleState s ) /* - updates the internally stored state of this item for the tqparent (key) + updates the internally stored state of this item for the parent (key) */ void TQCheckListItem::setStoredState( ToggleState newState, void *key ) { @@ -6477,8 +6477,8 @@ void TQCheckListItem::activate() int boxsize = lv->tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize, lv); if ( activatedPos( pos ) ) { bool parentControl = FALSE; - if ( tqparent() && tqparent()->rtti() == 1 && - ((TQCheckListItem*) tqparent())->type() == RadioButtonController ) + if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 && + ((TQCheckListItem*) parent())->type() == RadioButtonController ) parentControl = TRUE; int x = parentControl ? 0 : 3; @@ -6600,7 +6600,7 @@ void TQCheckListItem::restoreState( void *key, int depth ) /* Checks the tqchildrens state and updates the controllers state - if necessary. If the controllers state change, then his tqparent again is + if necessary. If the controllers state change, then his parent again is called to update itself. */ void TQCheckListItem::updateController( bool update , bool store ) @@ -6609,10 +6609,10 @@ void TQCheckListItem::updateController( bool update , bool store ) return; TQCheckListItem *controller = 0; - // checks if this CheckBoxController has another CheckBoxController as tqparent - if ( tqparent() && tqparent()->rtti() == 1 - && ((TQCheckListItem*)tqparent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) - controller = (TQCheckListItem*)tqparent(); + // checks if this CheckBoxController has another CheckBoxController as parent + if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 + && ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController ) + controller = (TQCheckListItem*)parent(); ToggleState theState = Off; bool first = TRUE; @@ -6734,8 +6734,8 @@ void TQCheckListItem::paintCell( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, } bool parentControl = FALSE; - if ( tqparent() && tqparent()->rtti() == 1 && - ((TQCheckListItem*) tqparent())->type() == RadioButtonController ) + if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 && + ((TQCheckListItem*) parent())->type() == RadioButtonController ) parentControl = TRUE; TQFontMetrics fm( lv->fontMetrics() ); @@ -6819,8 +6819,8 @@ void TQCheckListItem::paintFocus( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup & cg, intersect = r.intersects( TQRect( p, r.y(), xdepth - p + 1, r.height() ) ); } bool parentControl = FALSE; - if ( tqparent() && tqparent()->rtti() == 1 && - ((TQCheckListItem*) tqparent())->type() == RadioButtonController ) + if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 && + ((TQCheckListItem*) parent())->type() == RadioButtonController ) parentControl = TRUE; if ( myType != RadioButtonController && intersect && (lv->rootIsDecorated() || myType == RadioButton || @@ -6981,7 +6981,7 @@ bool TQListView::rootIsDecorated() const /*! Ensures that item \a i is visible, scrolling the list view - vertically if necessary and opening (expanding) any tqparent items + vertically if necessary and opening (expanding) any parent items if this is required to show the item. \sa tqitemRect() TQScrollView::ensureVisible() @@ -6992,11 +6992,11 @@ void TQListView::ensureItemVisible( const TQListViewItem * i ) if ( !i || !i->isVisible() ) return; - TQListViewItem *tqparent = i->tqparent(); - while ( tqparent ) { - if ( !tqparent->isOpen() ) - tqparent->setOpen( TRUE ); - tqparent = tqparent->tqparent(); + TQListViewItem *parent = i->parent(); + while ( parent ) { + if ( !parent->isOpen() ) + parent->setOpen( TRUE ); + parent = parent->parent(); } if ( d->r->maybeTotalHeight < 0 ) @@ -7051,7 +7051,7 @@ int TQListView::childCount() const /* Moves this item to just after \a olderSibling. \a olderSibling and - this object must have the same tqparent. + this object must have the same parent. If you need to move an item in the hierarchy use takeItem() and insertItem(). @@ -7089,7 +7089,7 @@ void TQListViewItem::moveItem( TQListViewItem *after ) { if ( !after || after == this ) return; - if ( tqparent() != after->tqparent() ) { + if ( parent() != after->parent() ) { if ( parentItem ) parentItem->takeItem( this ); if ( after->parentItem ) { @@ -7371,7 +7371,7 @@ bool TQListView::isRenaming() const starting point. This means that it always makes the first child of the current item the new current item. If there is no child, the next sibling becomes the new current item; and if there is no next - sibling, the next sibling of the tqparent becomes current. + sibling, the next sibling of the parent becomes current. The following example creates a list of all the items that have been selected by the user, storing pointers to the items in a @@ -7404,7 +7404,7 @@ bool TQListView::isRenaming() const its TQListViewItems. So when a TQListViewItem gets removed all iterators that point to this item are updated and point to the following item if possible, otherwise to a valid item before the - current one or to 0. Note however that deleting the tqparent item of + current one or to 0. Note however that deleting the parent item of an item that an iterator points to is not safe. \sa TQListView, TQListViewItem @@ -7605,7 +7605,7 @@ TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator++() TQListViewItem *item = curr->firstChild(); if ( !item ) { while ( (item = curr->nextSibling()) == 0 ) { - curr = curr->tqparent(); + curr = curr->parent(); if ( curr == 0 ) break; } @@ -7655,7 +7655,7 @@ TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator--() if ( !curr ) return *this; - if ( !curr->tqparent() ) { + if ( !curr->parent() ) { // we are in the first depth if ( curr->listView() ) { if ( curr->listView()->firstChild() != curr ) { @@ -7669,7 +7669,7 @@ TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator--() if ( i && i->firstChild() ) { // go to the last child of this item TQListViewItemIterator it( curr->firstChild() ); - for ( ; it.current() && it.current()->tqparent(); ++it ) + for ( ; it.current() && it.current()->parent(); ++it ) curr = it.current(); } @@ -7685,11 +7685,11 @@ TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator--() } else return *this; } else { - TQListViewItem *tqparent = curr->tqparent(); + TQListViewItem *parent = curr->parent(); - if ( curr != tqparent->firstChild() ) { + if ( curr != parent->firstChild() ) { // go to the previous sibling - TQListViewItem *i = tqparent->firstChild(); + TQListViewItem *i = parent->firstChild(); while ( i && i->siblingItem != curr ) i = i->siblingItem; @@ -7698,7 +7698,7 @@ TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator--() if ( i && i->firstChild() ) { // go to the last child of this item TQListViewItemIterator it( curr->firstChild() ); - for ( ; it.current() && it.current()->tqparent() != tqparent; ++it ) + for ( ; it.current() && it.current()->parent() != parent; ++it ) curr = it.current(); } @@ -7707,8 +7707,8 @@ TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator--() return *this; } else { - // make our tqparent the current item - curr = tqparent; + // make our parent the current item + curr = parent; if ( curr && !matchesFlags( curr ) ) --( *this ); @@ -7816,8 +7816,8 @@ void TQListViewItemIterator::currentRemoved() { if ( !curr ) return; - if ( curr->tqparent() ) - curr = curr->tqparent(); + if ( curr->parent() ) + curr = curr->parent(); else if ( curr->nextSibling() ) curr = curr->nextSibling(); else if ( listView && listView->firstChild() && diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.h index 3d6c997..7c3d68b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.h @@ -69,28 +69,28 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQListViewItem : public TQt friend class TQListViewToolTip; public: - TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent ); - TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent ); - TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after ); - TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after ); + TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent ); + TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent ); + TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after ); + TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after ); - TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, + TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQString, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null ); - TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, + TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQString, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null ); - TQListViewItem( TQListView * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after, + TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null ); - TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * tqparent, TQListViewItem * after, + TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after, TQString, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null, @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ public: TQListViewItem * firstChild() const; TQListViewItem * nextSibling() const { return siblingItem; } - TQListViewItem * tqparent() const; + TQListViewItem * parent() const; TQListViewItem * itemAbove(); TQListViewItem * itemBelow(); @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQListView: public TQScrollView Q_PROPERTY( RenameAction defaultRenameAction READ defaultRenameAction WRITE setDefaultRenameAction ) public: - TQListView( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQListView( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); ~TQListView(); int treeStepSize() const; @@ -483,21 +483,21 @@ public: // ### should be integrated with qbutton in ver4 perhaps enum ToggleState { Off, NoChange, On }; - TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *tqparent, const TQString &text, + TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController ); - TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, + TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController ); - TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, const TQString &text, + TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController ); - TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, + TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController ); - TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, const TQString &text, + TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController ); - TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, TQListViewItem *after, + TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after, const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController ); - TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *tqparent, const TQString &text, + TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap & ); - TQCheckListItem( TQListView *tqparent, const TQString &text, + TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text, const TQPixmap & ); ~TQCheckListItem(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.cpp index 6a649bc..446371c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.cpp @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ class TQMainWindowLayout : public TQLayout TQ_OBJECT public: - TQMainWindowLayout( TQMainWindow *mw, TQLayout* tqparent = 0 ); + TQMainWindowLayout( TQMainWindow *mw, TQLayout* parent = 0 ); ~TQMainWindowLayout() {} void addItem( QLayoutItem * ); @@ -236,8 +236,8 @@ TQSize TQMainWindowLayout::tqminimumSize() const return TQSize( w, h ); } -TQMainWindowLayout::TQMainWindowLayout( TQMainWindow *mw, TQLayout* tqparent ) - : TQLayout( tqparent ), left( 0 ), right( 0 ), central( 0 ) +TQMainWindowLayout::TQMainWindowLayout( TQMainWindow *mw, TQLayout* parent ) + : TQLayout( parent ), left( 0 ), right( 0 ), central( 0 ) { mainWindow = mw; } @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ TQLayoutIterator TQMainWindowLayout::iterator() class TQHideToolTip : public TQToolTip { public: - TQHideToolTip( TQWidget *tqparent ) : TQToolTip( tqparent ) {} + TQHideToolTip( TQWidget *parent ) : TQToolTip( parent ) {} ~TQHideToolTip() {} virtual void maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ); @@ -332,14 +332,14 @@ class TQHideDock : public TQWidget TQ_OBJECT public: - TQHideDock( TQMainWindow *tqparent ) : TQWidget( tqparent, "qt_hide_dock" ) { + TQHideDock( TQMainWindow *parent ) : TQWidget( parent, "qt_hide_dock" ) { hide(); setFixedHeight( tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DockWindowHandleExtent, this ) + 3 ); pressedHandle = -1; pressed = FALSE; setMouseTracking( TRUE ); - win = tqparent; + win = parent; #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP tip = new TQHideToolTip( this ); #endif @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ void TQHideToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ) When subclassing we add the menu items and toolbars in the subclass's constructor. If we've created a TQMainWindow instance directly we can add menu items and toolbars just as easily by - passing the TQMainWindow instance as the tqparent instead of the \e + passing the TQMainWindow instance as the parent instead of the \e this pointer. \quotefile application/application.cpp @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ void TQHideToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ) default). The slot will be called when the toolbar button is clicked. Any dock window can be added to a dock area either using addDockWindow(), or by creating a dock window with the TQMainWindow - as the tqparent. + as the parent. \quotefile application/application.cpp \skipto editor @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ void TQHideToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ) The main window will take care of the dock areas, and the tqgeometry of the central widget, but all other aspects of the central widget are left to you. TQMainWindow automatically detects the creation of - a menu bar or status bar if you specify the TQMainWindow as tqparent, + a menu bar or status bar if you specify the TQMainWindow as parent, or you can use the provided menuBar() and statusBar() functions. The functions menuBar() and statusBar() create a suitable widget if one doesn't exist, and update the window's tqlayout to make @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ void TQHideToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ) */ /*! - Constructs an empty main window. The \a tqparent, \a name and widget + Constructs an empty main window. The \a parent, \a name and widget flags \a f, are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. By default, the widget flags are set to \c WType_TopLevel rather @@ -923,8 +923,8 @@ void TQHideToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ) f to 0. */ -TQMainWindow::TQMainWindow( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f ) +TQMainWindow::TQMainWindow( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f ) { d = new TQMainWindowPrivate; #ifdef TQ_WS_MACX @@ -1641,11 +1641,11 @@ void TQMainWindow::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ) bool TQMainWindow::dockMainWindow( TQObject *dock ) { while ( dock ) { - if ( dock->tqparent() && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(dock->tqparent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) ) + if ( dock->parent() && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(dock->parent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) ) return TRUE; - if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(dock->tqparent()) ) + if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(dock->parent()) ) return FALSE; - dock = dock->tqparent(); + dock = dock->parent(); } return FALSE; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.h index 6cbcc02..b2e2734 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.h @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQMainWindow: public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( bool opaqueMoving READ opaqueMoving WRITE setOpaqueMoving ) public: - TQMainWindow( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = (WFlags)TQt::WType_TopLevel ); + TQMainWindow( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = (WFlags)TQt::WType_TopLevel ); ~TQMainWindow(); #ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.cpp index e932f18..eee9314 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.cpp @@ -99,8 +99,8 @@ extern int qt_xfocusout_grab_counter; // defined in qapplication_x11.cpp setItemEnabled(). There is no need to lay out a menu bar. It automatically sets its - own tqgeometry to the top of the tqparent widget and changes it - appropriately whenever the tqparent is resized. + own tqgeometry to the top of the parent widget and changes it + appropriately whenever the parent is resized. \important insertItem removeItem clear insertSeparator setItemEnabled isItemEnabled setItemVisible isItemVisible @@ -260,10 +260,10 @@ static const int gtkItemVMargin = 8; /*! - Constructs a menu bar called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs a menu bar called \a name with parent \a parent. */ -TQMenuBar::TQMenuBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) +TQMenuBar::TQMenuBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ) { #if defined( TQ_WS_MAC ) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE) mac_eaten_menubar = FALSE; @@ -284,13 +284,13 @@ TQMenuBar::TQMenuBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) toggleclose = 0; pendingDelayedContentsChanges = 0; pendingDelayedStateChanges = 0; - if ( tqparent ) { - // filter tqparent events for resizing - tqparent->installEventFilter( this ); + if ( parent ) { + // filter parent events for resizing + parent->installEventFilter( this ); // filter top-level-widget events for accelerators TQWidget *tlw = tqtopLevelWidget(); - if ( tlw != tqparent ) + if ( tlw != parent ) tlw->installEventFilter( this ); } installEventFilter( this ); @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ void TQMenuBar::performDelayedContentsChanged() if ( isVisible() ) { update(); #ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW - TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(tqparent()); + TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(parent()); if ( mw ) { mw->triggerLayout(); mw->update(); @@ -503,17 +503,17 @@ void TQMenuBar::languageChange() \internal This function is used to adjust the menu bar's tqgeometry to the - tqparent widget's tqgeometry. Note that this is \e not part of the + parent widget's tqgeometry. Note that this is \e not part of the public interface - the function is \c public only because TQObject::eventFilter() is. - Resizes the menu bar to fit in the tqparent widget when the tqparent + Resizes the menu bar to fit in the parent widget when the parent receives a resize event. */ bool TQMenuBar::eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event ) { - if ( object == tqparent() && object + if ( object == parent() && object #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR && !::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(object) #endif @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ bool TQMenuBar::eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event ) // this key and don't wait for Alt on this widget if ( waitforalt ) { waitforalt = 0; - if ( object->tqparent() ) + if ( object->parent() ) object->removeEventFilter( this ); ke->accept(); return TRUE; @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ bool TQMenuBar::eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event ) #endif // look for Alt release if ( TQT_TQOBJECT(((TQWidget*)object)->tqfocusWidget()) == object || - (object->tqparent() == 0 && ((TQWidget*)object)->tqfocusWidget() == 0) ) { + (object->parent() == 0 && ((TQWidget*)object)->tqfocusWidget() == 0) ) { if ( waitforalt && event->type() == TQEvent::KeyRelease && ( ke->key() == Qt::Key_Alt || ke->key() == Qt::Key_Meta ) #if defined(TQ_WS_X11) @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ bool TQMenuBar::eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event ) #endif ) { setAltMode( TRUE ); - if ( object->tqparent() ) + if ( object->parent() ) object->removeEventFilter( this ); TQWidget * tlw = ((TQWidget *)object)->tqtopLevelWidget(); if ( tlw ) { @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ bool TQMenuBar::eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event ) } else if ( !hasFocus() && (event->type() == TQEvent::AccelOverride ) && !(((TQKeyEvent *)event)->key() == Qt::Key_Alt || ((TQKeyEvent *)event)->key() == Qt::Key_Meta) ) { - if ( object->tqparent() ) + if ( object->parent() ) object->removeEventFilter( this ); setAltMode( FALSE ); } @@ -767,7 +767,7 @@ void TQMenuBar::openActPopup() return; TQ_ASSERT( popup->parentMenu == 0 ); - popup->parentMenu = this; // set tqparent menu + popup->parentMenu = this; // set parent menu popup->snapToMouse = FALSE; popup->popup( pos ); @@ -843,7 +843,7 @@ void TQMenuBar::show() #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW - TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(tqparent()); + TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(parent()); if ( mw ) //### ugly workaround mw->triggerLayout(); #endif @@ -861,7 +861,7 @@ void TQMenuBar::hide() setAltMode( FALSE ); hidePopups(); #ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW - TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(tqparent()); + TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(parent()); if ( mw ) //### ugly workaround mw->triggerLayout(); #endif @@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ int TQMenuBar::calculateRects( int max_width ) /*! Returns the height that the menu would resize itself to if its - tqparent (and hence itself) resized to the given \a max_width. This + parent (and hence itself) resized to the given \a max_width. This can be useful for simple tqlayout tasks in which the height of the menu bar is needed after items have been inserted. See \l showimg/showimg.cpp for an example of the usage. @@ -1638,7 +1638,7 @@ TQSize TQMenuBar::tqsizeHint() const TQSize TQMenuBar::tqminimumSize() const { #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR - TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(tqparent()); + TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(parent()); if ( tb ) return tqsizeHint(); #endif diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.h index 6b32031..c5668a5 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.h @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQMenuBar : public TQFrame, public TQMenuData Q_PROPERTY( bool defaultUp READ isDefaultUp WRITE setDefaultUp ) public: - TQMenuBar( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQMenuBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQMenuBar(); void updateItem( int id ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.cpp index 2061254..925ed22 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.cpp @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon, be displayed to the left of the text in the item. To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap - should provide a tqmask (see TQPixmap::tqmask()). + should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()). Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0). @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap, receiver object. To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap - should provide a tqmask (see TQPixmap::tqmask()). + should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()). Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0). @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon, Inserts a menu item with text \a text, submenu \a popup, optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. - The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its tqparent + The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when the menu is deleted. @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QString &text, TQPopupMenu *popup, popup, optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item. - The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its tqparent + The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when the menu is deleted. @@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon, optional \a index position. To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap - should provide a tqmask (see TQPixmap::tqmask()). + should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()). Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0). @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon, Inserts a menu item with pixmap \a pixmap, submenu \a popup, optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. - The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its tqparent + The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when the menu is deleted. @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap, TQPopupMenu *popup, popup, optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item. - The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its tqparent + The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when the menu is deleted. @@ -801,9 +801,9 @@ int TQMenuData::insertSeparator( int index ) void TQMenuData::removeItem( int id ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - if ( findItem( id, &tqparent ) ) - tqparent->removeItemAt(tqparent->indexOf(id)); + TQMenuData *parent; + if ( findItem( id, &parent ) ) + parent->removeItemAt(parent->indexOf(id)); } /*! @@ -926,11 +926,11 @@ TQKeySequence TQMenuData::accel( int id ) const void TQMenuData::setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key, int id ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi ) { mi->accel_key = key; - tqparent->menuContentsChanged(); + parent->menuContentsChanged(); } } @@ -1012,8 +1012,8 @@ TQPixmap *TQMenuData::pixmap( int id ) const void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQString &text ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi ) { // item found if ( mi->text_data == text ) // same string return; @@ -1026,7 +1026,7 @@ void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQString &text ) if ( !mi->accel_key && text.find( '\t' ) != -1 ) mi->accel_key = TQt::Key_unknown; #endif - tqparent->menuContentsChanged(); + parent->menuContentsChanged(); } } @@ -1041,8 +1041,8 @@ void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQString &text ) void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQPixmap &pixmap ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi ) { // item found register TQPixmap *i = mi->pixmap_data; bool fast_refresh = i != 0 && @@ -1057,9 +1057,9 @@ void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQPixmap &pixmap ) mi->pixmap_data = 0; delete i; // old mi->pixmap_data, could be &pixmap if ( fast_refresh ) - tqparent->updateItem( id ); + parent->updateItem( id ); else - tqparent->menuContentsChanged(); + parent->menuContentsChanged(); } } @@ -1103,8 +1103,8 @@ void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQIconSet &icon, const TQPixmap &pixm void TQMenuData::changeItemIconSet( int id, const TQIconSet &icon ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi ) { // item found register TQIconSet *i = mi->iconset_data; bool fast_refresh = i != 0; @@ -1114,9 +1114,9 @@ void TQMenuData::changeItemIconSet( int id, const TQIconSet &icon ) mi->iconset_data = 0; delete i; // old mi->iconset_data, could be &icon if ( fast_refresh ) - tqparent->updateItem( id ); + parent->updateItem( id ); else - tqparent->menuContentsChanged(); + parent->menuContentsChanged(); } } @@ -1143,15 +1143,15 @@ bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled( int id ) const void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled( int id, bool enable ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi && (bool)mi->is_enabled != enable ) { mi->is_enabled = enable; #if !defined(TQT_NO_ACCEL) && !defined(TQT_NO_POPUPMENU) if ( mi->popup() ) mi->popup()->enableAccel( enable ); #endif - tqparent->menuStateChanged(); + parent->menuStateChanged(); } } @@ -1190,15 +1190,15 @@ bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked( int id ) const void TQMenuData::setItemChecked( int id, bool check ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi && (bool)mi->is_checked != check ) { mi->is_checked = check; #ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU - if ( tqparent->isPopupMenu && !((TQPopupMenu *)tqparent)->isCheckable() ) - ((TQPopupMenu *)tqparent)->setCheckable( TRUE ); + if ( parent->isPopupMenu && !((TQPopupMenu *)parent)->isCheckable() ) + ((TQPopupMenu *)parent)->setCheckable( TRUE ); #endif - tqparent->menuStateChanged(); + parent->menuStateChanged(); } } @@ -1224,11 +1224,11 @@ bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible( int id ) const void TQMenuData::setItemVisible( int id, bool visible ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi && (bool)mi->is_visible != visible ) { mi->is_visible = visible; - tqparent->menuContentsChanged(); + parent->menuContentsChanged(); } } @@ -1255,8 +1255,8 @@ TQMenuItem *TQMenuData::findItem( int id ) const \overload Returns the menu item with identifier \a id, or 0 if there is no - item with this identifier. Changes \a *tqparent to point to the - tqparent of the return value. + item with this identifier. Changes \a *parent to point to the + parent of the return value. Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like @@ -1266,10 +1266,10 @@ TQMenuItem *TQMenuData::findItem( int id ) const \sa indexOf() */ -TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem( int id, TQMenuData ** tqparent ) const +TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const { - if ( tqparent ) - *tqparent = (TQMenuData *)this; // ### + if ( parent ) + *parent = (TQMenuData *)this; // ### if ( id == -1 ) // bad identifier return 0; @@ -1288,7 +1288,7 @@ TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem( int id, TQMenuData ** tqparent ) const TQPopupMenu *p = mi->popup_menu; if (!p->avoid_circularity) { p->avoid_circularity = 1; - mi = mi->popup_menu->findItem( id, tqparent ); + mi = mi->popup_menu->findItem( id, parent ); p->avoid_circularity = 0; if ( mi ) // found item return mi; @@ -1441,11 +1441,11 @@ bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem( int id, const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis( int id, const TQString& text ) { - TQMenuData *tqparent; - TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &tqparent ); + TQMenuData *parent; + TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent ); if ( mi ) { mi->setWhatsThis( text ); - tqparent->menuContentsChanged(); + parent->menuContentsChanged(); } } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.h index 70f7a43..bc5095f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.h @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ public: int itemParameter( int id ) const; TQMenuItem *findItem( int id ) const; - TQMenuItem *findItem( int id, TQMenuData ** tqparent ) const; + TQMenuItem *findItem( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const; TQMenuItem * findPopup( TQPopupMenu *, int *index = 0 ); virtual void activateItemAt( int index ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.cpp index 1dba7ed..4a928a8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.cpp @@ -130,12 +130,12 @@ class TQMultiLineEditData /*! - Constructs a new, empty, TQMultiLineEdit with tqparent \a tqparent called + Constructs a new, empty, TQMultiLineEdit with parent \a parent called \a name. */ -TQMultiLineEdit::TQMultiLineEdit( TQWidget *tqparent , const char *name ) - : TQTextEdit( tqparent, name ) +TQMultiLineEdit::TQMultiLineEdit( TQWidget *parent , const char *name ) + : TQTextEdit( parent, name ) { d = new TQMultiLineEditData; setTextFormat( TQt::PlainText ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.h index f382f78..dc7a669 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.h @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQMultiLineEdit : public TQTextEdit Q_PROPERTY( bool edited READ edited WRITE setEdited DESIGNABLE false ) public: - TQMultiLineEdit( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQMultiLineEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQMultiLineEdit(); TQString textLine( int line ) const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.cpp index a96b67d..b528c8b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.cpp @@ -281,15 +281,15 @@ public: static TQPopupMenu* active_popup_menu = 0; /*! - Constructs a popup menu called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs a popup menu called \a name with parent \a parent. - Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a tqparent is - passed the popup menu will be deleted when that tqparent is + Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is + passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is destroyed (as with any other TQObject). */ -TQPopupMenu::TQPopupMenu( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, (WFlags)WType_Popup | TQt::WNoAutoErase ) +TQPopupMenu::TQPopupMenu( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)WType_Popup | TQt::WNoAutoErase ) { d = new TQPopupMenuPrivate; d->scroll.scrollableSize = d->scroll.topScrollableIndex = 0; @@ -599,13 +599,13 @@ void TQPopupMenu::popup( const TQPoint &pos, int indexAtPoint ) x11SetWindowTransient( static_cast< TQPopupMenu* >( parentMenu )); if( !parentMenu ) { // hackish ... try to find the main window related to this popup - TQWidget* tqparent = parentWidget() ? parentWidget()->tqtopLevelWidget() : NULL; - if( tqparent == NULL ) - tqparent = TQApplication::widgetAt( pos ); - if( tqparent == NULL ) - tqparent = TQT_TQWIDGET(tqApp->activeWindow()); - if( tqparent != NULL ) - x11SetWindowTransient( tqparent ); + TQWidget* parent = parentWidget() ? parentWidget()->tqtopLevelWidget() : NULL; + if( parent == NULL ) + parent = TQApplication::widgetAt( pos ); + if( parent == NULL ) + parent = TQT_TQWIDGET(tqApp->activeWindow()); + if( parent != NULL ) + x11SetWindowTransient( parent ); } #endif @@ -1267,33 +1267,33 @@ TQSize TQPopupMenu::updateSize(bool force_update, bool do_resize) #ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL /*! \internal - The \a tqparent is 0 when it is updated when a menu item has + The \a parent is 0 when it is updated when a menu item has changed a state, or it is something else if called from the menu bar. */ -void TQPopupMenu::updateAccel( TQWidget *tqparent ) +void TQPopupMenu::updateAccel( TQWidget *parent ) { TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems); register TQMenuItem *mi; - if ( tqparent ) { + if ( parent ) { delete autoaccel; autoaccel = 0; } else if ( !autoaccel ) { - // we have no tqparent. Rather than ignoring any accelerators we try to find this popup's main window + // we have no parent. Rather than ignoring any accelerators we try to find this popup's main window if ( tornOff ) { - tqparent = this; + parent = this; } else { TQWidget *w = (TQWidget *) this; - tqparent = w->parentWidget(); - while ( (!w->testWFlags(TQt::WType_TopLevel) || !w->testWFlags(WType_Popup)) && tqparent ) { - w = tqparent; - tqparent = tqparent->parentWidget(); + parent = w->parentWidget(); + while ( (!w->testWFlags(TQt::WType_TopLevel) || !w->testWFlags(WType_Popup)) && parent ) { + w = parent; + parent = parent->parentWidget(); } } } - if ( tqparent == 0 && autoaccel == 0 ) + if ( parent == 0 && autoaccel == 0 ) return; if ( autoaccel ) // build it from scratch @@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ void TQPopupMenu::updateAccel( TQWidget *tqparent ) else { // create an autoaccel in any case, even if we might not use // it immediately. Maybe the user needs it later. - autoaccel = new TQAccel( tqparent, this ); + autoaccel = new TQAccel( parent, this ); connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)), TQT_SLOT(accelActivated(int)) ); connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(activatedAmbiguously(int)), @@ -1342,12 +1342,12 @@ void TQPopupMenu::updateAccel( TQWidget *tqparent ) badSize = TRUE; } } - if ( mi->popup() && tqparent ) { // call recursively + if ( mi->popup() && parent ) { // call recursively // reuse TQPopupMenu* popup = mi->popup(); if (!popup->avoid_circularity) { popup->avoid_circularity = 1; - popup->updateAccel( tqparent ); + popup->updateAccel( parent ); popup->avoid_circularity = 0; } } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.h index 8863cd5..d7290f4 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQPopupMenu : public TQFrame, public TQMenuData TQ_OBJECT Q_PROPERTY( bool checkable READ isCheckable WRITE setCheckable ) public: - TQPopupMenu( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQPopupMenu( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQPopupMenu(); void popup( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = -1 ); // open @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public: Q_SIGNALS: void activated( int itemId ); void highlighted( int itemId ); - void activatedRedirect( int itemId ); // to tqparent menu + void activatedRedirect( int itemId ); // to parent menu void highlightedRedirect( int itemId ); void aboutToShow(); void aboutToHide(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.cpp index e00d12d..007b2e8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.cpp @@ -88,14 +88,14 @@ The total number of steps is set to 100 by default. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed on to + The \a parent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed on to the TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor. \sa setTotalSteps() */ -TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ), +TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ), total_steps( 100 ), progress_val( -1 ), percentage( -1 ), @@ -118,15 +118,15 @@ TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) would be 50. Before examining the first file, call setProgress(0); call setProgress(50) after examining the last file. - The \a tqparent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the + The \a parent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor. \sa setTotalSteps(), setProgress() */ TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar( int totalSteps, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ), + TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ), total_steps( totalSteps ), progress_val( -1 ), percentage( -1 ), diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.h index 7b9d191..a380bc0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.h @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQProgressBar : public TQFrame Q_PROPERTY( bool percentageVisible READ percentageVisible WRITE setPercentageVisible ) public: - TQProgressBar( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); - TQProgressBar( int totalSteps, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQProgressBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQProgressBar( int totalSteps, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); int totalSteps() const; int progress() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.cpp index e8583ff..aecc6c7 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.cpp @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ may have a slightly larger size hint. This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a TQDialog - tqparent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE. + parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE. See the \l default property for details of how \l default and auto-default interact. @@ -274,24 +274,24 @@ public: /*! Constructs a push button with no text. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQPushButton::TQPushButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name ) +TQPushButton::TQPushButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name ) { init(); } /*! - Constructs a push button called \a name with the tqparent \a tqparent + Constructs a push button called \a name with the parent \a parent and the text \a text. */ -TQPushButton::TQPushButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQPushButton::TQPushButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name ) + : TQButton( parent, name ) { init(); setText( text ); @@ -304,13 +304,13 @@ TQPushButton::TQPushButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, Note that you can also pass a TQPixmap object as an icon (thanks to the implicit type conversion provided by C++). - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. */ #ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET TQPushButton::TQPushButton( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString &text, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name ) + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name ) { init(); setText( text ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.h index 92a375d..3af2d76 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.h @@ -65,10 +65,10 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQPushButton : public TQButton TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true ) public: - TQPushButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); - TQPushButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQPushButton( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); + TQPushButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); #ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET - TQPushButton( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQPushButton( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); #endif ~TQPushButton(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.cpp index 13ca866..1c24676 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.cpp @@ -104,12 +104,12 @@ /*! Constructs a radio button with no text. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) +TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) { init(); } @@ -117,13 +117,13 @@ TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs a radio button with the text \a text. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) + : TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask ) { init(); setText( text ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.h index 50f9927..1a27850 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.h @@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQRadioButton : public TQButton TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true ) public: - TQRadioButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); - TQRadioButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQRadioButton( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); + TQRadioButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); bool isChecked() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.h index ddda65d..d1fb4d4 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.h @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSpinWidget : public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQSpinWidget( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQSpinWidget( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQSpinWidget(); void setEditWidget( TQWidget * widget ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.cpp index de8c74c..959ed28 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.cpp @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ static const int repeatTime = 50; /*! Constructs a vertical scroll bar. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. The \c minValue defaults to 0, the \c maxValue to 99, with a \c @@ -228,8 +228,8 @@ static const int repeatTime = 50; \c value of 0. */ -TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ), orient( Qt::Vertical ) +TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ), orient( Qt::Vertical ) { init(); } @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) The \a orientation must be \c Qt::Vertical or \c Qt::Horizontal. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. The \c minValue defaults to 0, the \c maxValue to 99, with a \c @@ -247,9 +247,9 @@ TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) \c value of 0. */ -TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ), orient( orientation ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ), orient( orientation ) { init(); } @@ -264,14 +264,14 @@ TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, If \a orientation is \c Vertical the scroll bar is vertical and if it is \c Horizontal the scroll bar is horizontal. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. */ TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value, Qt::Orientation orientation, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ), + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ), TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, lineStep, pageStep, value ), orient( orientation ) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.h index cf48a05..2d634bd 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.h @@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQScrollBar : public TQWidget, public TQRangeControl Q_PROPERTY( Orientation orientation READ orientation WRITE setOrientation ) public: - TQScrollBar( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); - TQScrollBar( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQScrollBar( TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQScrollBar( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 ); TQScrollBar( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, - int value, Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); + int value, Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 ); ~TQScrollBar(); virtual void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.cpp index dba2bc0..f2dbfd6 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.cpp @@ -104,8 +104,8 @@ class TQViewportWidget : public TQWidget TQ_OBJECT public: - TQViewportWidget( TQScrollView* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f ) {} + TQViewportWidget( TQScrollView* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f ) {} }; class TQClipperWidget : public TQWidget @@ -113,26 +113,26 @@ class TQClipperWidget : public TQWidget TQ_OBJECT public: - TQClipperWidget( TQWidget * tqparent=0, const char * name=0, WFlags f=0 ) - : TQWidget ( tqparent,name,f) {} + TQClipperWidget( TQWidget * parent=0, const char * name=0, WFlags f=0 ) + : TQWidget ( parent,name,f) {} }; #include "tqscrollview.tqmoc" class TQScrollViewData { public: - TQScrollViewData(TQScrollView* tqparent, int vpwflags) : - hbar( new TQScrollBar( Qt::Horizontal, tqparent, "qt_hbar" ) ), - vbar( new TQScrollBar( Qt::Vertical, tqparent, "qt_vbar" ) ), - viewport( new TQViewportWidget( tqparent, "qt_viewport", (WFlags)vpwflags ) ), + TQScrollViewData(TQScrollView* parent, int vpwflags) : + hbar( new TQScrollBar( Qt::Horizontal, parent, "qt_hbar" ) ), + vbar( new TQScrollBar( Qt::Vertical, parent, "qt_vbar" ) ), + viewport( new TQViewportWidget( parent, "qt_viewport", (WFlags)vpwflags ) ), clipped_viewport( 0 ), flags( vpwflags ), vx( 0 ), vy( 0 ), vwidth( 1 ), vheight( 1 ), #ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP - autoscroll_timer( tqparent, "scrollview autoscroll timer" ), + autoscroll_timer( parent, "scrollview autoscroll timer" ), drag_autoscroll( TRUE ), #endif - scrollbar_timer( tqparent, "scrollview scrollbar timer" ), + scrollbar_timer( parent, "scrollview scrollbar timer" ), inresize( FALSE ), use_cached_size_hint( TRUE ) { l_marg = r_marg = t_marg = b_marg = 0; @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ public: vMode = TQScrollView::Auto; hMode = TQScrollView::Auto; corner = 0; - defaultCorner = new TQWidget( tqparent, "qt_default_corner" ); + defaultCorner = new TQWidget( parent, "qt_default_corner" ); defaultCorner->hide(); vbar->setSteps( 20, 1/*set later*/ ); hbar->setSteps( 20, 1/*set later*/ ); @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ void TQScrollViewData::viewportResized( int w, int h ) To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(TRUE) on the TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the - tqparent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you + parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the TQScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function viewportToContents() for this. @@ -571,16 +571,16 @@ void TQScrollViewData::viewportResized( int w, int h ) //#### is received /*! - Constructs a TQScrollView called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent and + Constructs a TQScrollView called \a name with parent \a parent and widget flags \a f. The widget flags \c WStaticContents, \c WNoAutoErase and \c WPaintClever are propagated to the viewport() widget. The other - widget flags are propagated to the tqparent constructor as usual. + widget flags are propagated to the parent constructor as usual. */ -TQScrollView::TQScrollView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) : - TQFrame( tqparent, name, f & (~TQt::WStaticContents) & (~TQt::WResizeNoErase) ) +TQScrollView::TQScrollView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) : + TQFrame( parent, name, f & (~TQt::WStaticContents) & (~TQt::WResizeNoErase) ) { WFlags flags = (WFlags)(TQt::WResizeNoErase | (f&TQt::WPaintClever) | (f&WRepaintNoErase) | (f&TQt::WStaticContents)); d = new TQScrollViewData( this, flags ); @@ -1304,7 +1304,7 @@ TQWidget* TQScrollView::cornerWidget() const destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0). - Any \e newly set widget should have no current tqparent. + Any \e newly set widget should have no current parent. By default, no corner widget is present. diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.h index caa86bb..3f65776 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.h @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQScrollView : public TQFrame #endif public: - TQScrollView(TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0); + TQScrollView(TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0); ~TQScrollView(); enum ResizePolicy { Default, Manual, AutoOne, AutoOneFit }; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.cpp index 4ba2515..38dd7cc 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.cpp @@ -115,12 +115,12 @@ struct TQSliderPrivate /*! Constructs a vertical slider. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQSlider::TQSlider( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQSlider::TQSlider( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { orient = Qt::Vertical; init(); @@ -131,12 +131,12 @@ TQSlider::TQSlider( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) The \a orientation must be \l Qt::Vertical or \l Qt::Horizontal. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQSlider::TQSlider( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQSlider::TQSlider( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { orient = orientation; init(); @@ -151,14 +151,14 @@ TQSlider::TQSlider( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, const char If \a orientation is \c Qt::Vertical the slider is vertical and if it is \c Qt::Horizontal the slider is horizontal. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. */ TQSlider::TQSlider( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Qt::Orientation orientation, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ), + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ), TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, 1, pageStep, value ) { orient = orientation; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.h index ac6177d..76191aa 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.h @@ -71,10 +71,10 @@ public: enum TickSetting { NoMarks = 0, Above = 1, Left = Above, Below = 2, Right = Below, Both = 3 }; - TQSlider( TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); - TQSlider( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQSlider( TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQSlider( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 ); TQSlider( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Qt::Orientation, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name = 0 ); + TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 ); ~TQSlider(); virtual void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.cpp index 8ea1775..51cf8ed 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.cpp @@ -227,13 +227,13 @@ TQValidator::State TQSpinBoxValidator::validate( TQString& str, int& pos ) const /*! Constructs a spin box with the default TQRangeControl range and - step values. It is called \a name and has tqparent \a tqparent. + step values. It is called \a name and has parent \a parent. \sa minValue(), maxValue(), setRange(), lineStep(), setSteps() */ -TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox( TQWidget * tqparent , const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), +TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox( TQWidget * parent , const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), TQRangeControl() { initSpinBox(); @@ -245,14 +245,14 @@ TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox( TQWidget * tqparent , const char *name ) maxValue inclusive, with step amount \a step. The value is initially set to \a minValue. - The spin box is called \a name and has tqparent \a tqparent. + The spin box is called \a name and has parent \a parent. \sa minValue(), maxValue(), setRange(), lineStep(), setSteps() */ -TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox( int minValue, int maxValue, int step, TQWidget* tqparent, +TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox( int minValue, int maxValue, int step, TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), + : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, step, step, minValue ) { initSpinBox(); @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ TQString TQSpinBox::cleanText() const automatically choose a good margin width, you can set up the spin box like this: \code - TQSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, tqparent, "marginBox" ); + TQSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, parent, "marginBox" ); marginBox->setSuffix( " mm" ); marginBox->setSpecialValueText( "Auto" ); \endcode diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.h index 2e18cef..1013c11 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.h @@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQSpinBox: public TQWidget, public TQRangeControl Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue ) public: - TQSpinBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQSpinBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); TQSpinBox( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQSpinBox(); TQString text() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinwidget.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinwidget.cpp index f035c13..b134180 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinwidget.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinwidget.cpp @@ -78,13 +78,13 @@ public: \internal - Constructs an empty range control widget with tqparent \a tqparent + Constructs an empty range control widget with parent \a parent called \a name. */ -TQSpinWidget::TQSpinWidget( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQSpinWidget::TQSpinWidget( TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { d = new TQSpinWidgetPrivate(); connect( &d->auRepTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( timerDone() ) ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.cpp index b5a159b..18cf11c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.cpp @@ -86,11 +86,11 @@ static TQPoint bottomRight( TQWidget *w ) } } -TQSplitterHandle::TQSplitterHandle( Qt::Orientation o, TQSplitter *tqparent, +TQSplitterHandle::TQSplitterHandle( Qt::Orientation o, TQSplitter *parent, const char * name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { - s = tqparent; + s = parent; setOrientation( o ); } @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ TQCOORD TQSplitterLayoutStruct::getSizer( Qt::Orientation orient ) To show a TQListBox, a TQListView and a TQTextEdit side by side: \code - TQSplitter *split = new TQSplitter( tqparent ); + TQSplitter *split = new TQSplitter( parent ); TQListBox *lb = new TQListBox( split ); TQListView *lv = new TQListView( split ); TQTextEdit *ed = new TQTextEdit( split ); @@ -209,12 +209,12 @@ TQCOORD TQSplitterLayoutStruct::getSizer( Qt::Orientation orient ) /*! - Constructs a horizontal splitter with the \a tqparent and \a name + Constructs a horizontal splitter with the \a parent and \a name arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQSplitter::TQSplitter( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, TQt::WPaintUnclipped ) +TQSplitter::TQSplitter( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WPaintUnclipped ) { orient = Qt::Horizontal; init(); @@ -222,12 +222,12 @@ TQSplitter::TQSplitter( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) /*! - Constructs a splitter with orientation \a o with the \a tqparent and + Constructs a splitter with orientation \a o with the \a parent and \a name arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQSplitter::TQSplitter( Qt::Orientation o, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, TQt::WPaintUnclipped ) +TQSplitter::TQSplitter( Qt::Orientation o, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WPaintUnclipped ) { orient = o; init(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.h index 18d62f9..5ab15b0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.h @@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ public: // ### TQt 4.0: remove Auto from public API enum ResizeMode { Stretch, KeepSize, FollowSizeHint, Auto }; - TQSplitter( TQWidget* tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); - TQSplitter( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget* tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); + TQSplitter( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); + TQSplitter( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 ); ~TQSplitter(); virtual void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation ); @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ class TQSplitterHandle : public TQWidget TQ_OBJECT public: TQSplitterHandle( Qt::Orientation o, - TQSplitter *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQSplitter *parent, const char* name=0 ); void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o ); Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return orient; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.cpp index 6dbe4a4..2a424d4 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.cpp @@ -136,13 +136,13 @@ public: /*! - Constructs a status bar called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent and + Constructs a status bar called \a name with parent \a parent and with a size grip. \sa setSizeGripEnabled() */ -TQStatusBar::TQStatusBar( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQStatusBar::TQStatusBar( TQWidget * parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { d = new TQStatusBarPrivate; d->items.setAutoDelete( TRUE ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.h index 8fc6cfc..73929cb 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.h @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQStatusBar: public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( bool sizeGripEnabled READ isSizeGripEnabled WRITE setSizeGripEnabled ) public: - TQStatusBar( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQStatusBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); virtual ~TQStatusBar(); virtual void addWidget( TQWidget *, int stretch = 0, bool = FALSE ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.cpp index fd02625..bcbd41a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.cpp @@ -255,8 +255,8 @@ struct TQTabPrivate { class TQTabBarToolTip : public TQToolTip { public: - TQTabBarToolTip( TQWidget * tqparent ) - : TQToolTip( tqparent ) {} + TQTabBarToolTip( TQWidget * parent ) + : TQToolTip( parent ) {} virtual ~TQTabBarToolTip() {} void add( TQTab * tab, const TQString & tip ) @@ -330,12 +330,12 @@ private: */ /*! - Constructs a new, empty tab bar; the \a tqparent and \a name + Constructs a new, empty tab bar; the \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQTabBar::TQTabBar( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WNoMousePropagation) ) +TQTabBar::TQTabBar( TQWidget * parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WNoMousePropagation) ) { d = new TQTabPrivate; d->pressed = 0; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.h index 1b0fa76..021e13e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.h @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTabBar: public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( int keyboardFocusTab READ keyboardFocusTab ) public: - TQTabBar( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQTabBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQTabBar(); enum Shape { RoundedAbove, RoundedBelow, diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.cpp index e1afe3d..b4275db 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.cpp @@ -175,12 +175,12 @@ class TQTabBarBase : public TQWidget { public: - TQTabBarBase( TQTabWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) {}; + TQTabBarBase( TQTabWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) {}; protected: void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ) { - TQObject * obj = tqparent(); + TQObject * obj = parent(); if( obj ){ TQTabWidget * t = (TQTabWidget *) obj; TQPainter p( this ); @@ -219,11 +219,11 @@ public: }; /*! - Constructs a tabbed widget called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent, + Constructs a tabbed widget called \a name with parent \a parent, and widget flags \a f. */ -TQTabWidget::TQTabWidget( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, f ) +TQTabWidget::TQTabWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, f ) { d = new TQTabWidgetData; d->stack = new TQWidgetStack( this, "tab pages" ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.h index eb11988..14e5a84 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.h @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTabWidget : public TQWidget TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true ) public: - TQTabWidget( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQTabWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ); ~TQTabWidget(); virtual void addTab( TQWidget *, const TQString & ); // ### make these inline in 4.0 diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.cpp index 81cf7de..a022136 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.cpp @@ -132,11 +132,11 @@ public: /*! - Constructs an empty TQTextBrowser called \a name, with tqparent \a - tqparent. + Constructs an empty TQTextBrowser called \a name, with parent \a + parent. */ -TQTextBrowser::TQTextBrowser(TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name) - : TQTextEdit( tqparent, name ) +TQTextBrowser::TQTextBrowser(TQWidget *parent, const char *name) + : TQTextEdit( parent, name ) { setReadOnly( TRUE ); d = new TQTextBrowserData; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.h index 91bff50..b2319a4 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.h @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTextBrowser : public TQTextEdit TQ_OVERRIDE( bool undoRedoEnabled DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false ) public: - TQTextBrowser( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQTextBrowser( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQTextBrowser(); TQString source() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.cpp index 7900d3c..fe1dbbf 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.cpp @@ -891,19 +891,19 @@ static bool block_set_tqalignment = FALSE; */ /*! - Constructs an empty TQTextEdit called \a name, with tqparent \a - tqparent. + Constructs an empty TQTextEdit called \a name, with parent \a + parent. */ -TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ), +TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ), doc( new TQTextDocument( 0 ) ), undoRedoInfo( doc ) { init(); } /*! - Constructs a TQTextEdit called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. The + Constructs a TQTextEdit called \a name, with parent \a parent. The text edit will display the text \a text using context \a context. The \a context is a path which the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory @@ -923,8 +923,8 @@ TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) */ TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit( const TQString& text, const TQString& context, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name) - : TQScrollView( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ), + TQWidget *parent, const char *name) + : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ), doc( new TQTextDocument( 0 ) ), undoRedoInfo( doc ) { init(); @@ -3421,14 +3421,14 @@ void TQTextEdit::repaintChanged() } #ifndef TQT_NO_MIME -TQTextDrag *TQTextEdit::dragObject( TQWidget *tqparent ) const +TQTextDrag *TQTextEdit::dragObject( TQWidget *parent ) const { if ( !doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) || doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard ).isEmpty() ) return 0; if ( textFormat() != TQt::RichText ) - return new TQTextDrag( doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard ), tqparent ); - TQRichTextDrag *drag = new TQRichTextDrag( tqparent ); + return new TQTextDrag( doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard ), parent ); + TQRichTextDrag *drag = new TQRichTextDrag( parent ); drag->setPlainText( doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ); drag->setRichText( doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) ); return drag; @@ -6278,7 +6278,7 @@ TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * TQTextEdit::optimAppendTag( int index, const TQStr t->index = index; t->tag = tag; t->leftTag = 0; - t->tqparent = 0; + t->parent = 0; t->prev = d->od->lastTag; if ( d->od->lastTag ) d->od->lastTag->next = t; @@ -6307,7 +6307,7 @@ TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *TQTextEdit::optimInsertTag(int line, int index, con t->index = index; t->tag = tag; t->leftTag = 0; - t->tqparent = 0; + t->parent = 0; t->next = 0; t->prev = 0; @@ -6448,7 +6448,7 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimParseTags( TQString * line, int lineNo, int indexOffset ) : TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Color; if ( tagStr[0] == '/' ) { // this is a right-tag - search for the left-tag - // and possible tqparent tag + // and possible parent tag cur = tag->prev; if ( !cur ) { #ifdef TQT_CHECK_RANGE @@ -6464,13 +6464,13 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimParseTags( TQString * line, int lineNo, int indexOffset ) if ( !tmp ) { if ( (("/" + cur->tag) == tag->tag) || (tag->tag == "/font" && cur->tag.left(4) == "font") ) { - // set up the left and tqparent of this tag + // set up the left and parent of this tag tag->leftTag = cur; tmp = cur->prev; - if ( tmp && tmp->tqparent ) { - tag->tqparent = tmp->tqparent; + if ( tmp && tmp->parent ) { + tag->parent = tmp->parent; } else if ( tmp && !tmp->leftTag ) { - tag->tqparent = tmp; + tag->parent = tmp; } break; } else if ( !cur->leftTag ) { @@ -6489,7 +6489,7 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimParseTags( TQString * line, int lineNo, int indexOffset ) tag->underline = underline > 0; tmp = tag->prev; while ( tmp && tmp->leftTag ) { - tmp = tmp->leftTag->tqparent; + tmp = tmp->leftTag->parent; } if ( tmp ) { tag->bold |= tmp->bold; @@ -6812,9 +6812,9 @@ TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * TQTextEdit::optimPreviousLeftTag( int line ) } if ( ftag ) { - if ( ftag && ftag->tqparent ) // use the open tqparent tag - ftag = ftag->tqparent; - else if ( ftag && ftag->leftTag ) // this is a right-tag with no tqparent + if ( ftag && ftag->parent ) // use the open parent tag + ftag = ftag->parent; + else if ( ftag && ftag->leftTag ) // this is a right-tag with no parent ftag = 0; } return ftag; @@ -6848,7 +6848,7 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimSetTextFormat( TQTextDocument * td, TQTextCursor * cur, tag = tag->prev; while ( tag && (tag->type == TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Format || tag->leftTag) ) { - tag = tag->leftTag ? tag->tqparent : tag->prev; + tag = tag->leftTag ? tag->parent : tag->prev; } } if ( tag ) { @@ -6934,8 +6934,8 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimDrawContents( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, tmp = 0; if ( tag->prev && !tag->prev->leftTag ) { tmp = tag->prev; - } else if ( tag->prev && tag->prev->tqparent ) { - tmp = tag->prev->tqparent; + } else if ( tag->prev && tag->prev->parent ) { + tmp = tag->prev->parent; } if ( (tag->index - lastIndex) > 0 && tmp ) { optimSetTextFormat( td, &cur, &f, lastIndex, tag->index, tmp ); @@ -6945,8 +6945,8 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimDrawContents( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, tag = tag->next; } // Step 3 - color last part of the line - if necessary - if ( tmp && tmp->tqparent ) - tmp = tmp->tqparent; + if ( tmp && tmp->parent ) + tmp = tmp->parent; if ( (cur.paragraph()->length()-1 - lastIndex) > 0 && tmp && !tmp->leftTag ) { optimSetTextFormat( td, &cur, &f, lastIndex, cur.paragraph()->length() - 1, tmp ); @@ -6958,8 +6958,8 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimDrawContents( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, // tag = d->od->tags; // qWarning("###"); // while ( tag ) { -// qWarning( "Tag: %p, tqparent: %09p, leftTag: %09p, Name: %-15s, ParentName: %s, %d%d%d", tag, -// tag->tqparent, tag->leftTag, tag->tag.latin1(), tag->tqparent ? tag->tqparent->tag.latin1():"<none>", +// qWarning( "Tag: %p, parent: %09p, leftTag: %09p, Name: %-15s, ParentName: %s, %d%d%d", tag, +// tag->parent, tag->leftTag, tag->tag.latin1(), tag->parent ? tag->parent->tag.latin1():"<none>", // tag->bold, tag->italic, tag->underline ); // tag = tag->next; // } @@ -7404,8 +7404,8 @@ void TQTextEdit::optimCheckLimit( const TQString& str ) itr = d->od->tags; while ( itr ){ for ( tmp = lst.first(); tmp; tmp = lst.next() ) { - if ( itr->tqparent == tmp ) - itr->tqparent = 0; + if ( itr->parent == tmp ) + itr->parent = 0; if ( itr->leftTag == tmp ) itr->leftTag = 0; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.h index a69b434..26d5f4f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.h @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ class TQSyntaxHighlighter; class TQTextEditOptimPrivate { public: - // Note: no left-tag has any value for leftTag or tqparent, and + // Note: no left-tag has any value for leftTag or parent, and // no right-tag has any formatting flags set. enum TagType { Color = 0, Format = 1 }; struct Tag { @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ public: int line; int index; Tag * leftTag; // ptr to left-tag in a left-right tag pair - Tag * tqparent; // ptr to tqparent left-tag in a nested tag + Tag * parent; // ptr to parent left-tag in a nested tag Tag * prev; Tag * next; TQString tag; @@ -222,8 +222,8 @@ public: }; TQTextEdit( const TQString& text, const TQString& context = TQString::null, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); - TQTextEdit( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); + TQTextEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); virtual ~TQTextEdit(); void setPalette( const TQPalette & ); @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ private: void copyToClipboard(); #ifndef TQT_NO_MIME TQCString pickSpecial(TQMimeSource* ms, bool always_ask, const TQPoint&); - TQTextDrag *dragObject( TQWidget *tqparent = 0 ) const; + TQTextDrag *dragObject( TQWidget *parent = 0 ) const; #endif #ifndef TQT_NO_MIMECLIPBOARD void pasteSpecial(const TQPoint&); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.cpp index 286ae12..a262dfb 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.cpp @@ -55,16 +55,16 @@ /*! \reimp */ TQTextView::TQTextView( const TQString& text, const TQString& context, - TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQTextEdit( text, context, tqparent, name ) + TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQTextEdit( text, context, parent, name ) { setReadOnly( TRUE ); } /*! \reimp */ -TQTextView::TQTextView( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQTextEdit( tqparent, name ) +TQTextView::TQTextView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQTextEdit( parent, name ) { setReadOnly( TRUE ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.h index b8f74c3..f8a4a89 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.h @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTextView : public TQTextEdit public: TQTextView( const TQString& text, const TQString& context = TQString::null, - TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0); - TQTextView( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0); + TQTextView( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); virtual ~TQTextView(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar.cpp index 84ec7b9..bb5e052 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar.cpp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ class TQTitleBarTip : public TQToolTip { public: - TQTitleBarTip( TQWidget * tqparent ) : TQToolTip( tqparent ) { } + TQTitleBarTip( TQWidget * parent ) : TQToolTip( parent ) { } void maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos ) { @@ -154,8 +154,8 @@ public: #endif }; -TQTitleBar::TQTitleBar(TQWidget* w, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ) +TQTitleBar::TQTitleBar(TQWidget* w, TQWidget* parent, const char* name) + : TQWidget( parent, name, (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ) { d = new TQTitleBarPrivate(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar_p.h index 44cac81..8e10ed1 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar_p.h @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQTitleBar : public TQWidget Q_PROPERTY( bool movable READ isMovable WRITE setMovable ) public: - TQTitleBar (TQWidget* w, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name=0); + TQTitleBar (TQWidget* w, TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0); ~TQTitleBar(); bool isActive() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.cpp index e7ff8f4..771a332 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.cpp @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ class TQToolBarSeparator : public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQToolBarSeparator( Qt::Orientation, TQToolBar *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQToolBarSeparator( Qt::Orientation, TQToolBar *parent, const char* name=0 ); TQSize tqsizeHint() const; Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return orient; } @@ -164,14 +164,14 @@ void TQToolBarExtensionWidget::layOut() tb->setGeometry( 2, 2, width() - 4, height() - 4 ); } -TQToolBarSeparator::TQToolBarSeparator(Qt::Orientation o , TQToolBar *tqparent, +TQToolBarSeparator::TQToolBarSeparator(Qt::Orientation o , TQToolBar *parent, const char* name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { - connect( tqparent, TQT_SIGNAL(orientationChanged(Qt::Orientation)), + connect( parent, TQT_SIGNAL(orientationChanged(Qt::Orientation)), this, TQT_SLOT(setOrientation(Qt::Orientation)) ); setOrientation( o ); - setBackgroundMode( tqparent->backgroundMode() ); + setBackgroundMode( parent->backgroundMode() ); setBackgroundOrigin( ParentOrigin ); tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) ); } @@ -303,29 +303,29 @@ void TQToolBarSeparator::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * ) /*! Constructs an empty toolbar. - The toolbar is called \a name and is a child of \a tqparent and is - managed by \a tqparent. It is initially located in dock area \a dock + The toolbar is called \a name and is a child of \a parent and is + managed by \a parent. It is initially located in dock area \a dock and is labeled \a label. If \a newLine is TRUE the toolbar will be placed on a new line in the dock area. */ TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString &label, - TQMainWindow * tqparent, TQt::ToolBarDock dock, + TQMainWindow * parent, TQt::ToolBarDock dock, bool newLine, const char * name ) - : TQDockWindow( InDock, tqparent, name, 0, TRUE ) + : TQDockWindow( InDock, parent, name, 0, TRUE ) { - mw = tqparent; + mw = parent; init(); - if ( tqparent ) - tqparent->addToolBar( this, label, dock, newLine ); + if ( parent ) + parent->addToolBar( this, label, dock, newLine ); } /*! Constructs an empty horizontal toolbar. - The toolbar is called \a name and is a child of \a tqparent and is + The toolbar is called \a name and is a child of \a parent and is managed by \a mainWindow. The \a label and \a newLine parameters are passed straight to TQMainWindow::addDockWindow(). \a name and the widget flags \a f are passed on to the TQDockWindow constructor. @@ -336,15 +336,15 @@ TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString &label, */ TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString &label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, - TQWidget * tqparent, bool newLine, const char * name, + TQWidget * parent, bool newLine, const char * name, WFlags f ) - : TQDockWindow( InDock, tqparent, name, f, TRUE ) + : TQDockWindow( InDock, parent, name, f, TRUE ) { mw = mainWindow; init(); clearWFlags( (WFlags)(TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) ); - reparent( tqparent, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), FALSE ); + reparent( parent, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), FALSE ); if ( mainWindow ) mainWindow->addToolBar( this, label, TQt::DockUnmanaged, newLine ); @@ -354,19 +354,19 @@ TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString &label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow, /*! \overload - Constructs an empty toolbar called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent, - in its \a tqparent's top dock area, without any label and without + Constructs an empty toolbar called \a name, with parent \a parent, + in its \a parent's top dock area, without any label and without requiring a newline. */ -TQToolBar::TQToolBar( TQMainWindow * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQDockWindow( InDock, tqparent, name, 0, TRUE ) +TQToolBar::TQToolBar( TQMainWindow * parent, const char * name ) + : TQDockWindow( InDock, parent, name, 0, TRUE ) { - mw = tqparent; + mw = parent; init(); - if ( tqparent ) - tqparent->addToolBar( this, TQString(), TQt::DockTop ); + if ( parent ) + parent->addToolBar( this, TQString(), TQt::DockTop ); } /*! @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ bool TQToolBar::event( TQEvent * e ) if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted ) { TQObject * child = TQT_TQOBJECT(((TQChildEvent*)e)->child()); if ( child && child->isWidgetType() && !(TQT_TQWIDGET(child)->isTopLevel()) - && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(child->tqparent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) + && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(child->parent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) && tqstrcmp("qt_dockwidget_internal", child->name()) != 0 ) { boxLayout()->addWidget( (TQWidget*)child ); if ( isVisible() ) { diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.h index 92f6d9f..a741eb0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.h @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public: bool newLine = FALSE, const char* name=0 ); TQToolBar( const TQString &label, TQMainWindow *, TQWidget *, bool newLine = FALSE, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 ); - TQToolBar( TQMainWindow* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQToolBar( TQMainWindow* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQToolBar(); void addSeparator(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.cpp index b082f56..aa38123 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.cpp @@ -264,11 +264,11 @@ void TQToolBoxButton::drawButton( TQPainter *p ) */ /*! - Constructs a toolbox called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent and flags \a f. + Constructs a toolbox called \a name with parent \a parent and flags \a f. */ -TQToolBox::TQToolBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f ) +TQToolBox::TQToolBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f ) { d = new TQToolBoxPrivate; d->tqlayout = new TQVBoxLayout( this ); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.h index 0ca8c38..973f81c 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.h @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQToolBox : public TQFrame Q_PROPERTY( int count READ count ) public: - TQToolBox( TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ); + TQToolBox( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 ); ~TQToolBox(); int addItem( TQWidget *item, const TQString &label ); @@ -131,8 +131,8 @@ class TQToolBoxButton : public TQButton Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQToolBoxButton( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name ), selected( FALSE ) + TQToolBoxButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name ), selected( FALSE ) { setBackgroundMode(TQt::PaletteBackground); tqsetSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Minimum); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.cpp index 8c84a59..9f392ca 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.cpp @@ -135,16 +135,16 @@ public: /*! - Constructs an empty tool button called \a name, with tqparent \a - tqparent. + Constructs an empty tool button called \a name, with parent \a + parent. */ -TQToolButton::TQToolButton( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name ) +TQToolButton::TQToolButton( TQWidget * parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name ) { init(); #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR - TQToolBar* tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(tqparent); + TQToolBar* tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(parent); if ( tb ) { setAutoRaise( TRUE ); if ( tb->mainWindow() ) { @@ -172,11 +172,11 @@ TQToolButton::TQToolButton( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name ) An arrow button has auto-repeat turned on by default. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQToolButton::TQToolButton( TQt::ArrowType type, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name ) +TQToolButton::TQToolButton( TQt::ArrowType type, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name ) { init(); setUsesBigPixmap( FALSE ); @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ void TQToolButton::init() /*! Constructs a tool button called \a name, that is a child of \a - tqparent (which must be a TQToolBar). + parent (which must be a TQToolBar). The tool button will display \a iconSet, with its text label and tool tip set to \a textLabel and its status bar message set to \a @@ -230,8 +230,8 @@ void TQToolButton::init() TQToolButton::TQToolButton( const TQIconSet& iconSet, const TQString &textLabel, const TQString& grouptext, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME * receiver, const char *slot, - TQToolBar * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButton( tqparent, name ) + TQToolBar * parent, const char *name ) + : TQButton( parent, name ) { init(); setAutoRaise( TRUE ); @@ -239,26 +239,26 @@ TQToolButton::TQToolButton( const TQIconSet& iconSet, const TQString &textLabel, setTextLabel( textLabel ); if ( receiver && slot ) connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(clicked()), receiver, slot ); - if ( tqparent->mainWindow() ) { - connect( tqparent->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(pixmapSizeChanged(bool)), + if ( parent->mainWindow() ) { + connect( parent->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(pixmapSizeChanged(bool)), this, TQT_SLOT(setUsesBigPixmap(bool)) ); - setUsesBigPixmap( tqparent->mainWindow()->usesBigPixmaps() ); - connect( tqparent->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(usesTextLabelChanged(bool)), + setUsesBigPixmap( parent->mainWindow()->usesBigPixmaps() ); + connect( parent->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(usesTextLabelChanged(bool)), this, TQT_SLOT(setUsesTextLabel(bool)) ); - setUsesTextLabel( tqparent->mainWindow()->usesTextLabel() ); + setUsesTextLabel( parent->mainWindow()->usesTextLabel() ); } else { setUsesBigPixmap( FALSE ); } #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP if ( !textLabel.isEmpty() ) { - if ( !grouptext.isEmpty() && tqparent->mainWindow() ) + if ( !grouptext.isEmpty() && parent->mainWindow() ) TQToolTip::add( this, textLabel, - tqparent->mainWindow()->toolTipGroup(), grouptext ); + parent->mainWindow()->toolTipGroup(), grouptext ); else TQToolTip::add( this, textLabel ); - } else if ( !grouptext.isEmpty() && tqparent->mainWindow() ) + } else if ( !grouptext.isEmpty() && parent->mainWindow() ) TQToolTip::add( this, TQString::null, - tqparent->mainWindow()->toolTipGroup(), grouptext ); + parent->mainWindow()->toolTipGroup(), grouptext ); #endif } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.h index 3cdb9c0..0d8c015 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.h @@ -82,14 +82,14 @@ public: Right = BesideIcon, // obsolete Under = BelowIcon // obsolete }; - TQToolButton( TQWidget * tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQToolButton( TQWidget * parent, const char* name=0 ); #ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR TQToolButton( const TQIconSet& s, const TQString &textLabel, const TQString& grouptext, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME * receiver, const char* slot, - TQToolBar * tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQToolBar * parent, const char* name=0 ); #endif - TQToolButton( TQt::ArrowType type, TQWidget *tqparent, const char* name=0 ); + TQToolButton( TQt::ArrowType type, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 ); ~TQToolButton(); TQSize tqsizeHint() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.cpp index 411487d..5213e58 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.cpp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ class TQTipLabel : public TQLabel Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQTipLabel( TQWidget* tqparent, const TQString& text) : TQLabel( tqparent, "toolTipTip", + TQTipLabel( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& text) : TQLabel( parent, "toolTipTip", (WFlags)(TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder | TQt::WStyle_Tool | WX11BypassWM) ) { setMargin(1); @@ -1067,7 +1067,7 @@ void TQToolTip::tip( const TQRect &rect, const TQString &text, const TQString& g /*! - Immediately removes all tool tips for this tooltip's tqparent + Immediately removes all tool tips for this tooltip's parent widget. */ @@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ void TQToolTip::clear() Returns the widget this TQToolTip applies to. - The tool tip is destroyed automatically when the tqparent widget is + The tool tip is destroyed automatically when the parent widget is destroyed. \sa group() @@ -1159,11 +1159,11 @@ void TQToolTip::clear() /*! - Constructs a tool tip group called \a name, with tqparent \a tqparent. + Constructs a tool tip group called \a name, with parent \a parent. */ -TQToolTipGroup::TQToolTipGroup( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQToolTipGroup::TQToolTipGroup( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { del = TRUE; ena = TRUE; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.h index e9afb22..c5c13f8 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.h @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQToolTipGroup: public TQObject Q_PROPERTY( bool enabled READ enabled WRITE setEnabled ) public: - TQToolTipGroup( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name = 0 ); + TQToolTipGroup( TQObject *parent, const char *name = 0 ); ~TQToolTipGroup(); bool delay() const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.cpp index 423e837..18fffc7 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.cpp @@ -124,12 +124,12 @@ /*! - Sets up the validator. The \a tqparent and \a name parameters are + Sets up the validator. The \a parent and \a name parameters are passed on to the TQObject constructor. */ -TQValidator::TQValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) +TQValidator::TQValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) { } @@ -234,12 +234,12 @@ void TQValidator::fixup( TQString & ) const /*! - Constructs a validator called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent, that + Constructs a validator called \a name with parent \a parent, that accepts all integers. */ -TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQValidator( tqparent, name ) +TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name ) + : TQValidator( parent, name ) { b = INT_MIN; t = INT_MAX; @@ -247,13 +247,13 @@ TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name ) /*! - Constructs a validator called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent, that + Constructs a validator called \a name with parent \a parent, that accepts integers from \a minimum to \a maximum inclusive. */ TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator( int minimum, int maximum, - TQObject * tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQValidator( tqparent, name ) + TQObject * parent, const char* name ) + : TQValidator( parent, name ) { b = minimum; t = maximum; @@ -369,12 +369,12 @@ void TQIntValidator::setTop( int top ) */ /*! - Constructs a validator object with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a + Constructs a validator object with parent \a parent, called \a name, which accepts any double. */ -TQDoubleValidator::TQDoubleValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQValidator( tqparent, name ) +TQDoubleValidator::TQDoubleValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name ) + : TQValidator( parent, name ) { b = -HUGE_VAL; t = HUGE_VAL; @@ -383,14 +383,14 @@ TQDoubleValidator::TQDoubleValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name ) /*! - Constructs a validator object with tqparent \a tqparent, called \a + Constructs a validator object with parent \a parent, called \a name. This validator will accept doubles from \a bottom to \a top inclusive, with up to \a decimals digits after the decimal point. */ TQDoubleValidator::TQDoubleValidator( double bottom, double top, int decimals, - TQObject * tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQValidator( tqparent, name ) + TQObject * parent, const char* name ) + : TQValidator( parent, name ) { b = bottom; t = top; @@ -587,27 +587,27 @@ void TQDoubleValidator::setDecimals( int decimals ) /*! Constructs a validator that accepts any string (including an empty - one) as valid. The object's tqparent is \a tqparent and its name is \a + one) as valid. The object's parent is \a parent and its name is \a name. */ -TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQValidator( tqparent, name ), r( TQString::tqfromLatin1(".*") ) +TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator( TQObject *parent, const char *name ) + : TQValidator( parent, name ), r( TQString::tqfromLatin1(".*") ) { } /*! Constructs a validator which accepts all strings that match the - regular expression \a rx. The object's tqparent is \a tqparent and its + regular expression \a rx. The object's parent is \a parent and its name is \a name. The match is made against the entire string, e.g. if the regexp is <b>[A-Fa-f0-9]+</b> it will be treated as <b>^[A-Fa-f0-9]+$</b>. */ -TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator( const TQRegExp& rx, TQObject *tqparent, +TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator( const TQRegExp& rx, TQObject *parent, const char *name ) - : TQValidator( tqparent, name ), r( rx ) + : TQValidator( parent, name ), r( rx ) { } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.h index 16f9db1..5e18f6b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQValidator : public TQObject Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name = 0 ); + TQValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 ); ~TQValidator(); enum State { Invalid, Intermediate, Valid=Intermediate, Acceptable }; @@ -79,9 +79,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQIntValidator : public TQValidator Q_PROPERTY( int top READ top WRITE setTop ) public: - TQIntValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name = 0 ); + TQIntValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 ); TQIntValidator( int bottom, int top, - TQObject * tqparent, const char *name = 0 ); + TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 ); ~TQIntValidator(); TQValidator::State validate( TQString &, int & ) const; @@ -113,9 +113,9 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQDoubleValidator : public TQValidator Q_PROPERTY( int decimals READ decimals WRITE setDecimals ) public: - TQDoubleValidator( TQObject * tqparent, const char *name = 0 ); + TQDoubleValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 ); TQDoubleValidator( double bottom, double top, int decimals, - TQObject * tqparent, const char *name = 0 ); + TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 ); ~TQDoubleValidator(); TQValidator::State validate( TQString &, int & ) const; @@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQRegExpValidator : public TQValidator // Q_PROPERTY( TQRegExp regExp READ regExp WRITE setRegExp ) public: - TQRegExpValidator( TQObject *tqparent, const char *name = 0 ); - TQRegExpValidator( const TQRegExp& rx, TQObject *tqparent, + TQRegExpValidator( TQObject *parent, const char *name = 0 ); + TQRegExpValidator( const TQRegExp& rx, TQObject *parent, const char *name = 0 ); ~TQRegExpValidator(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.cpp index fbfba79..11e273f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.cpp @@ -61,11 +61,11 @@ /*! - Constructs a vbox widget called \a name with tqparent \a tqparent and + Constructs a vbox widget called \a name with parent \a parent and widget flags \a f. */ -TQVBox::TQVBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - :TQHBox( FALSE, tqparent, name, f ) +TQVBox::TQVBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + :TQHBox( FALSE, parent, name, f ) { } #endif diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.h index cccad24..8d0ab7d 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.h @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQVBox : public TQHBox Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQVBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); + TQVBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 ); private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator= #if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.cpp index d7a4490..01a807b 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.cpp @@ -62,24 +62,24 @@ /*! Constructs a vertical button group with no title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Horizontal /* sic! */, tqparent, name ) +TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Horizontal /* sic! */, parent, name ) { } /*! Constructs a vertical button group with the title \a title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Horizontal /* sic! */, title, tqparent, name ) + : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Horizontal /* sic! */, title, parent, name ) { } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.h index faccef2..99cd8b0 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.h @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQVButtonGroup : public TQButtonGroup Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQVButtonGroup( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQVButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQVButtonGroup( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQVButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQVButtonGroup(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.cpp index 38ccfa1..7c50c3a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.cpp @@ -61,24 +61,24 @@ /*! Constructs a vertical group box with no title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Horizontal, tqparent, name ) +TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Horizontal, parent, name ) { } /*! Constructs a vertical group box with the title \a title. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. */ -TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *tqparent, +TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) - : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Horizontal, title, tqparent, name ) + : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Horizontal, title, parent, name ) { } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.h index 142172d..be82c4a 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.h @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQVGroupBox : public TQGroupBox Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQVGroupBox( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQVGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQVGroupBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQVGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQVGroupBox(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.cpp index 3ada619..a3275b2 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.cpp @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ class TQWhatsThisButton: public TQToolButton TQ_OBJECT public: - TQWhatsThisButton( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ); + TQWhatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ); ~TQWhatsThisButton(); public Q_SLOTS: @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ class TQWhatsThat : public TQWidget Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQWhatsThat( TQWidget* w, const TQString& txt, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ); + TQWhatsThat( TQWidget* w, const TQString& txt, TQWidget* parent, const char* name ); ~TQWhatsThat() ; public Q_SLOTS: @@ -243,8 +243,8 @@ void qWhatsThisBDH() } -TQWhatsThat::TQWhatsThat( TQWidget* w, const TQString& txt, TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name, WType_Popup ), text( txt ), pressed( FALSE ), widget( w ) +TQWhatsThat::TQWhatsThat( TQWidget* w, const TQString& txt, TQWidget* parent, const char* name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name, WType_Popup ), text( txt ), pressed( FALSE ), widget( w ) { setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground ); @@ -448,8 +448,8 @@ static const char * const button_image[] = { " ooo "}; // the button class -TQWhatsThisButton::TQWhatsThisButton( TQWidget * tqparent, const char * name ) - : TQToolButton( tqparent, name ) +TQWhatsThisButton::TQWhatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent, const char * name ) + : TQToolButton( parent, name ) { TQPixmap p( (const char**)button_image ); setPixmap( p ); @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ void TQWhatsThis::remove( TQWidget * widget ) the mouse position; this is useful, for example, if you've subclassed to make the text that is displayed position dependent. - If \a includeParents is TRUE, tqparent widgets are taken into + If \a includeParents is TRUE, parent widgets are taken into consideration as well when looking for what's this help text. \sa add() @@ -838,15 +838,15 @@ TQString TQWhatsThis::textFor( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint& pos, bool includePar /*! Creates a TQToolButton preconfigured to enter "What's this?" mode when clicked. You will often use this with a tool bar as \a - tqparent: + parent: \code (void) TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( my_help_tool_bar ); \endcode */ -TQToolButton * TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( TQWidget * tqparent ) +TQToolButton * TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent ) { TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis(); - return new TQWhatsThisButton( tqparent, + return new TQWhatsThisButton( parent, "automatic what's this? button" ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.h index 7ef3e8d..dbc1259 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.h @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ public: static void remove( TQWidget * ); static TQString textFor( TQWidget *, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint(), bool includeParents = FALSE ); - static TQToolButton * whatsThisButton( TQWidget * tqparent ); + static TQToolButton * whatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent ); static void enterWhatsThisMode(); static bool inWhatsThisMode(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetinterface_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetinterface_p.h index 022294d..008fb3e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetinterface_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetinterface_p.h @@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ struct TQWidgetFactoryInterface : public TQFeatureListInterface public: /*! In the implementation create and return the widget \a widget - here, use \a tqparent and \a name when creating the widget */ - virtual TQWidget* create( const TQString &widget, TQWidget* tqparent = 0, const char* name = 0 ) = 0; + here, use \a parent and \a name when creating the widget */ + virtual TQWidget* create( const TQString &widget, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 ) = 0; /*! In the implementation return the name of the group of the widget \a widget */ diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.cpp index 9b4d106..57eed86 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.cpp @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ public: TQ_REFCOUNT; TQStringList featureList() const; - TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ); + TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ); TQString group( const TQString &widget ) const; TQIconSet iconSet( const TQString &widget ) const; TQString includeFile( const TQString &widget ) const; @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ TQRESULT TQWidgetPluginPrivate::queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, TQUnknownInte Creates and returns a TQWidget object for the widget key \a key. The widget key is the class name of the required widget. The \a - name and \a tqparent arguments are passed to the custom widget's + name and \a parent arguments are passed to the custom widget's constructor. \sa keys() @@ -182,9 +182,9 @@ TQStringList TQWidgetPluginPrivate::featureList() const return plugin->keys(); } -TQWidget *TQWidgetPluginPrivate::create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) +TQWidget *TQWidgetPluginPrivate::create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) { - TQWidget *w = plugin->create( key, tqparent, name ); + TQWidget *w = plugin->create( key, parent, name ); widgets.add( TQT_TQOBJECT(w) ); return w; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.h index 5544677..b879396 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.h @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ public: ~TQWidgetPlugin(); virtual TQStringList keys() const = 0; - virtual TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *tqparent = 0, const char *name = 0 ) = 0; + virtual TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ) = 0; virtual TQString group( const TQString &key ) const; virtual TQIconSet iconSet( const TQString &key ) const; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp index d09353d..beaf51f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp @@ -54,8 +54,8 @@ static bool resizeHorizontalDirectionFixed = FALSE; static bool resizeVerticalDirectionFixed = FALSE; -TQWidgetResizeHandler::TQWidgetResizeHandler( TQWidget *tqparent, TQWidget *cw, const char *name ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ), widget( tqparent ), childWidget( cw ? cw : tqparent ), +TQWidgetResizeHandler::TQWidgetResizeHandler( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *cw, const char *name ) + : TQObject( parent, name ), widget( parent ), childWidget( cw ? cw : parent ), extrahei( 0 ), buttonDown( FALSE ), moveResizeMode( FALSE ), sizeprotect( TRUE ), moving( TRUE ) { mode = Nowhere; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h index bb2b1cb..472f3e3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ public: Any = Move|Resize }; - TQWidgetResizeHandler( TQWidget *tqparent, TQWidget *cw = 0, const char *name = 0 ); + TQWidgetResizeHandler( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *cw = 0, const char *name = 0 ); void setActive( bool b ) { setActive( Any, b ); } void setActive( Action ac, bool b ); bool isActive() const { return isActive( Any ); } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.cpp index ff78a7b..93be95f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.cpp @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ int TQWidgetStack::addWidget(TQWidget * w, int id) } w->hide(); - if (w->parent() != this) + if (w->QWidget::parent() != this) w->reparent(this, contentsRect().topLeft(), false); w->setGeometry(contentsRect()); updateGeometry(); @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ static bool isChildOf(TQWidget* child, TQWidget *parent) void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget(TQWidget *w) { - if (!w || w == invisible || w->parent() != this || w == topWidget) + if (!w || w == invisible || w->QWidget::parent() != this || w == topWidget) return; if (id(w) == -1) @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ public: class Invisible: public TQWidget { public: - Invisible( TQWidgetStack * tqparent ): TQWidget( tqparent, "qt_invisible_widgetstack" ) + Invisible( TQWidgetStack * parent ): TQWidget( parent, "qt_invisible_widgetstack" ) { setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground ); } @@ -655,14 +655,14 @@ class TQWidgetStackEventFilter : public TQObject bool TQWidgetStack::event( TQEvent* e ) { if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint ) - updateGeometry(); // propgate tqlayout hints to tqparent + updateGeometry(); // propgate tqlayout hints to parent return TQFrame::event( e ); } */ public: - TQWidgetStackEventFilter( TQObject *tqparent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) - : TQObject( tqparent, name ) {} + TQWidgetStackEventFilter( TQObject *parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) + : TQObject( parent, name ) {} bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e ) { if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint && o->isWidgetType() ) ((TQWidget*)o)->updateGeometry(); @@ -682,7 +682,7 @@ public: The application programmer can move any widget to the top of the stack at any time using raiseWidget(), and add or remove widgets using addWidget() and removeWidget(). It is not sufficient to pass - the widget stack as tqparent to a widget which should be inserted into + the widget stack as parent to a widget which should be inserted into the widgetstack. visibleWidget() is the \e get equivalent of raiseWidget(); it @@ -709,12 +709,12 @@ public: /*! Constructs an empty widget stack. - The \a tqparent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame + The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name ) +TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack( TQWidget * parent, const char *name ) + : TQFrame( parent, name ) { init(); } @@ -722,11 +722,11 @@ TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name ) /*! Constructs an empty widget stack. - The \a tqparent, \a name and \a f arguments are passed to the TQFrame + The \a parent, \a name and \a f arguments are passed to the TQFrame constructor. */ -TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack( TQWidget * tqparent, const char *name, WFlags f ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, f ) //## merge constructors in 4.0 +TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack( TQWidget * parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) + : TQFrame( parent, name, f ) //## merge constructors in 4.0 { init(); } @@ -808,7 +808,7 @@ int TQWidgetStack::addWidget( TQWidget * w, int id ) } w->hide(); - if ( w->tqparent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) ) + if ( w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) ) w->reparent( this, contentsRect().topLeft(), FALSE ); w->setGeometry( contentsRect() ); updateGeometry(); @@ -855,11 +855,11 @@ void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget( int id ) raiseWidget( w ); } -static bool isChildOf( TQWidget* child, TQWidget *tqparent ) +static bool isChildOf( TQWidget* child, TQWidget *parent ) { - if ( !child || !tqparent->childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) + if ( !child || !parent->childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) return FALSE; - TQObjectListIt it(tqparent->childrenListObject()); + TQObjectListIt it(parent->childrenListObject()); TQObject *obj; while ( (obj = it.current()) ) { ++it; @@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ static bool isChildOf( TQWidget* child, TQWidget *tqparent ) void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget( TQWidget *w ) { - if ( !w || w == invisible || w->tqparent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) || w == topWidget ) + if ( !w || w == invisible || w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) || w == topWidget ) return; if ( id(w) == -1 ) diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.h index 5c0acfd..ce0347f 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.h @@ -178,8 +178,8 @@ class TQ_EXPORT TQWidgetStack: public TQFrame Q_OBJECT TQ_OBJECT public: - TQWidgetStack( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); - TQWidgetStack( TQWidget* tqparent, const char* name, WFlags f); + TQWidgetStack( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWidgetStack( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f); ~TQWidgetStack(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp index a4e2687..531a78e 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.cpp @@ -91,11 +91,11 @@ document windows, each of which is a widget. The workspace itself is an ordinary TQt widget. It has a standard - constructor that takes a tqparent widget and an object name. The - tqparent window is usually a TQMainWindow, but it need not be. + constructor that takes a parent widget and an object name. The + parent window is usually a TQMainWindow, but it need not be. Document windows (i.e. MDI windows) are also ordinary TQt widgets - which have the workspace as their tqparent widget. When you call + which have the workspace as their parent widget. When you call show(), hide(), showMaximized(), setCaption(), etc. on a document window, it is shown, hidden, etc. with a frame, caption, icon and icon text, just as you'd expect. You can provide widget flags @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ class TQWorkspaceChild : public TQFrame public: TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, - TQWorkspace* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWorkspace* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQWorkspaceChild(); void setActive( bool ); @@ -249,34 +249,34 @@ public: TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockwindows, newdocks; }; -static bool isChildOf( TQWidget * child, TQWidget * tqparent ) +static bool isChildOf( TQWidget * child, TQWidget * parent ) { - if ( !tqparent || !child ) + if ( !parent || !child ) return FALSE; TQWidget * w = child; - while( w && w != tqparent ) + while( w && w != parent ) w = w->parentWidget(); return w != 0; } /*! - Constructs a workspace with a \a tqparent and a \a name. + Constructs a workspace with a \a parent and a \a name. */ -TQWorkspace::TQWorkspace( TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQWorkspace::TQWorkspace( TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { init(); } #ifdef TQT_WORKSPACE_WINDOWMODE /*! - Constructs a workspace with a \a tqparent and a \a name. This + Constructs a workspace with a \a parent and a \a name. This constructor will also set the WindowMode to \a mode. \sa windowMode() */ -TQWorkspace::TQWorkspace( TQWorkspace::WindowMode mode, TQWidget *tqparent, const char *name ) - : TQWidget( tqparent, name ) +TQWorkspace::TQWorkspace( TQWorkspace::WindowMode mode, TQWidget *parent, const char *name ) + : TQWidget( parent, name ) { init(); d->wmode = mode; @@ -1045,7 +1045,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e ) setGeometry(0, 0, w->width(), w->height()); #if 0 /* Hide really isn't acceptable because I need to make the rest of TQt - think it is visible, so instead I set it to an empty tqmask. I'm not + think it is visible, so instead I set it to an empty mask. I'm not sure what problems this is going to create, hopefully everything will be happy (or not even notice since this is mostly intended for TQt/Mac) */ // w->setMask(TQRegion()); @@ -1311,7 +1311,7 @@ TQWidgetList TQWorkspace::windowList( WindowOrder order ) const /*!\reimp*/ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) { - if(d->wmode == TopLevel && d->mainwindow && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(TQT_TQOBJECT(o)->tqparent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->mainwindow)) { + if(d->wmode == TopLevel && d->mainwindow && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(TQT_TQOBJECT(o)->parent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->mainwindow)) { if((e->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted || e->type() == TQEvent::Reparent) && ::tqqt_cast<TQDockArea*>(o) && !((TQWidget*)o)->isVisible()) { TQChildEvent *ce = (TQChildEvent*)e; @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ bool TQWorkspace::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e) switch ( e->type() ) { case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress: { - TQMenuBar* b = (TQMenuBar*)o->tqparent(); + TQMenuBar* b = (TQMenuBar*)o->parent(); if ( !t ) t = new TQTime; if ( tc != this || t->elapsed() > TQApplication::doubleClickInterval() ) { @@ -1473,7 +1473,7 @@ void TQWorkspace::showMaximizeControls() TQ_ASSERT(d->maxWindow); TQMenuBar* b = 0; - // Do a breadth-first search first on every tqparent, + // Do a breadth-first search first on every parent, TQWidget* w = parentWidget(); TQObjectList * l = 0; while ( !l && w ) { @@ -2026,10 +2026,10 @@ void TQWorkspace::tile() blockSignals(FALSE); } -TQWorkspaceChild::TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, TQWorkspace *tqparent, +TQWorkspaceChild::TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, TQWorkspace *parent, const char *name ) - : TQFrame( tqparent, name, - (WFlags)((tqparent->windowMode() == TQWorkspace::TopLevel ? (TQt::WStyle_MinMax | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu | TQt::WType_TopLevel) : + : TQFrame( parent, name, + (WFlags)((parent->windowMode() == TQWorkspace::TopLevel ? (TQt::WStyle_MinMax | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu | TQt::WType_TopLevel) : TQt::WStyle_NoBorder ) | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WDestructiveClose | TQt::WNoMousePropagation | TQt::WSubWindow) ) { statusbar = 0; @@ -2055,7 +2055,7 @@ TQWorkspaceChild::TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, TQWorkspace *tqparent, } } - if ( window && window->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Title ) && tqparent->windowMode() != TQWorkspace::TopLevel ) { + if ( window && window->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Title ) && parent->windowMode() != TQWorkspace::TopLevel ) { titlebar = new TQTitleBar( window, this, "qt_ws_titlebar" ); connect( titlebar, TQT_SIGNAL( doActivate() ), this, TQT_SLOT( activate() ) ); @@ -2135,14 +2135,14 @@ TQWorkspaceChild::TQWorkspaceChild( TQWidget* window, TQWorkspace *tqparent, childWidget->installEventFilter( this ); widgetResizeHandler = new TQWidgetResizeHandler( this, window ); - widgetResizeHandler->setSizeProtection( !tqparent->scrollBarsEnabled() ); + widgetResizeHandler->setSizeProtection( !parent->scrollBarsEnabled() ); connect( widgetResizeHandler, TQT_SIGNAL( activate() ), this, TQT_SLOT( activate() ) ); if ( !tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_TitleBar_NoBorder, titlebar ) ) widgetResizeHandler->setExtraHeight( th + contentsRect().y() - 2*frameWidth() ); else widgetResizeHandler->setExtraHeight( th + contentsRect().y() - frameWidth() ); - if(tqparent->windowMode() == TQWorkspace::TopLevel && isTopLevel()) { + if(parent->windowMode() == TQWorkspace::TopLevel && isTopLevel()) { move(0, 0); widgetResizeHandler->setActive( FALSE ); } @@ -2775,7 +2775,7 @@ void TQWorkspaceChild::internalRaise() return; } - TQPtrListIterator<TQWorkspaceChild> it( ((TQWorkspace*)tqparent())->d->windows ); + TQPtrListIterator<TQWorkspaceChild> it( ((TQWorkspace*)parent())->d->windows ); while ( it.current () ) { TQWorkspaceChild* c = it.current(); ++it; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h index b48f7fe..745363d 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/workspace/tqworkspace.h @@ -77,9 +77,9 @@ private: public: #ifdef TQT_WORKSPACE_WINDOWMODE - TQWorkspace( WindowMode mode, TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWorkspace( WindowMode mode, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); #endif - TQWorkspace( TQWidget* tqparent=0, const char* name=0 ); + TQWorkspace( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 ); ~TQWorkspace(); diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqdom.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqdom.cpp index 4b85e22..ddc64de 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqdom.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqdom.cpp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ which can not be deleted at this time. If a node dies and has direct tqchildren which can not be deleted, - then remove the pointer to the tqparent. + then remove the pointer to the parent. createElement and friends create double reference counts. */ @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ public: class TQDomNodePrivate : public TQShared { public: - TQDomNodePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent = 0 ); + TQDomNodePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent = 0 ); TQDomNodePrivate( TQDomNodePrivate* n, bool deep ); virtual ~TQDomNodePrivate(); @@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ public: virtual void normalize(); virtual void clear(); - TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent() { return hasParent ? ownerNode : 0; } + TQDomNodePrivate* parent() { return hasParent ? ownerNode : 0; } void setParent( TQDomNodePrivate *p ) { ownerNode = p; hasParent = TRUE; } void setNoParent() { ownerNode = hasParent ? (TQDomNodePrivate*)ownerDocument() : 0; @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ public: // Variables TQDomNodePrivate* prev; TQDomNodePrivate* next; - TQDomNodePrivate* ownerNode; // either the node's tqparent or the node's owner document + TQDomNodePrivate* ownerNode; // either the node's parent or the node's owner document TQDomNodePrivate* first; TQDomNodePrivate* last; @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ public: bool isAppendToParent() { return appendToParent; } /** * If TRUE, then the node will redirect insert/remove calls - * to its tqparent by calling TQDomNodePrivate::appendChild or removeChild. + * to its parent by calling TQDomNodePrivate::appendChild or removeChild. * In addition the map wont increase or decrease the reference count * of the nodes it contains. * @@ -244,11 +244,11 @@ public: * Creates a copy of the map. It is a deep copy * that means that all tqchildren are cloned. */ - TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate* clone( TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent ); + TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate* clone( TQDomNodePrivate* parent ); // Variables TQDict<TQDomNodePrivate> map; - TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent; + TQDomNodePrivate* parent; bool readonly; bool appendToParent; }; @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ public: class TQDomDocumentTypePrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomDocumentTypePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent = 0 ); + TQDomDocumentTypePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent = 0 ); TQDomDocumentTypePrivate( TQDomDocumentTypePrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomDocumentTypePrivate(); void init(); @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ public: class TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent = 0 ); + TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent = 0 ); TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate( TQDomNodePrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate(); @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ public: class TQDomCharacterDataPrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomCharacterDataPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& data ); + TQDomCharacterDataPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& data ); TQDomCharacterDataPrivate( TQDomCharacterDataPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomCharacterDataPrivate(); @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ public: class TQDomTextPrivate : public TQDomCharacterDataPrivate { public: - TQDomTextPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& value ); + TQDomTextPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& value ); TQDomTextPrivate( TQDomTextPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomTextPrivate(); @@ -357,8 +357,8 @@ public: class TQDomElementPrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomElementPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& name ); - TQDomElementPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& nsURI, const TQString& qName ); + TQDomElementPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& name ); + TQDomElementPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& nsURI, const TQString& qName ); TQDomElementPrivate( TQDomElementPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomElementPrivate(); @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ public: class TQDomCommentPrivate : public TQDomCharacterDataPrivate { public: - TQDomCommentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& value ); + TQDomCommentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& value ); TQDomCommentPrivate( TQDomCommentPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomCommentPrivate(); @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ public: class TQDomCDATASectionPrivate : public TQDomTextPrivate { public: - TQDomCDATASectionPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& value ); + TQDomCDATASectionPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& value ); TQDomCDATASectionPrivate( TQDomCDATASectionPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomCDATASectionPrivate(); @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ public: class TQDomNotationPrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomNotationPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& name, + TQDomNotationPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& name, const TQString& pub, const TQString& sys ); TQDomNotationPrivate( TQDomNotationPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomNotationPrivate(); @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ public: class TQDomEntityPrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomEntityPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& name, + TQDomEntityPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& name, const TQString& pub, const TQString& sys, const TQString& notation ); TQDomEntityPrivate( TQDomEntityPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomEntityPrivate(); @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ public: class TQDomEntityReferencePrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomEntityReferencePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& name ); + TQDomEntityReferencePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& name ); TQDomEntityReferencePrivate( TQDomNodePrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomEntityReferencePrivate(); @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ public: class TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate : public TQDomNodePrivate { public: - TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& target, + TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate*, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& target, const TQString& data); TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate( TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate* n, bool deep ); ~TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate(); @@ -860,9 +860,9 @@ void TQDomNodeListPrivate::createList() else if ( p->next ) p = p->next; else { - p = p->tqparent(); + p = p->parent(); while ( p && p != node_impl && !p->next ) - p = p->tqparent(); + p = p->parent(); if ( p && p != node_impl ) p = p->next; } @@ -877,9 +877,9 @@ void TQDomNodeListPrivate::createList() else if ( p->next ) p = p->next; else { - p = p->tqparent(); + p = p->parent(); while ( p && p != node_impl && !p->next ) - p = p->tqparent(); + p = p->parent(); if ( p && p != node_impl ) p = p->next; } @@ -1156,7 +1156,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::insertBefore( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQ return 0; // Error check - if ( refChild && refChild->tqparent() != this ) + if ( refChild && refChild->parent() != this ) return 0; // "mark lists as dirty" @@ -1169,7 +1169,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::insertBefore( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQ if ( newChild->first == 0 ) return newChild; - // New tqparent + // New parent TQDomNodePrivate* n = newChild->first; while ( n ) { n->setParent( this ); @@ -1205,8 +1205,8 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::insertBefore( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQ // ownership of the node. newChild->ref(); - if ( newChild->tqparent() ) - newChild->tqparent()->removeChild( newChild ); + if ( newChild->parent() ) + newChild->parent()->removeChild( newChild ); newChild->setParent( this ); @@ -1249,7 +1249,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::insertAfter( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQD return 0; // Error check - if ( refChild && refChild->tqparent() != this ) + if ( refChild && refChild->parent() != this ) return 0; // "mark lists as dirty" @@ -1262,7 +1262,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::insertAfter( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQD if ( newChild->first == 0 ) return newChild; - // New tqparent + // New parent TQDomNodePrivate* n = newChild->first; while ( n ) { n->setParent( this ); @@ -1293,9 +1293,9 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::insertAfter( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQD return newChild; } - // Release new node from its current tqparent - if ( newChild->tqparent() ) - newChild->tqparent()->removeChild( newChild ); + // Release new node from its current parent + if ( newChild->parent() ) + newChild->parent()->removeChild( newChild ); // No more errors can occur now, so we take // ownership of the node @@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::insertAfter( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQD TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::replaceChild( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQDomNodePrivate* oldChild ) { - if ( oldChild->tqparent() != this ) + if ( oldChild->parent() != this ) return 0; if ( !newChild || !oldChild ) return 0; @@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::replaceChild( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQ if ( newChild->first == 0 ) return newChild; - // New tqparent + // New parent TQDomNodePrivate* n = newChild->first; while ( n ) { n->setParent( this ); @@ -1393,9 +1393,9 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::replaceChild( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQ // ownership of the node newChild->ref(); - // Release new node from its current tqparent - if ( newChild->tqparent() ) - newChild->tqparent()->removeChild( newChild ); + // Release new node from its current parent + if ( newChild->parent() ) + newChild->parent()->removeChild( newChild ); newChild->setParent( this ); @@ -1425,14 +1425,14 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::replaceChild( TQDomNodePrivate* newChild, TQ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::removeChild( TQDomNodePrivate* oldChild ) { // Error check - if ( oldChild->tqparent() != this ) + if ( oldChild->parent() != this ) return 0; // "mark lists as dirty" qt_nodeListTime++; // Perhaps oldChild was just created with "createElement" or that. In this case - // its tqparent is TQDomDocument but it is not part of the documents child list. + // its parent is TQDomDocument but it is not part of the documents child list. if ( oldChild->next == 0 && oldChild->prev == 0 && first != oldChild ) return 0; @@ -1468,7 +1468,7 @@ TQDomDocumentPrivate* TQDomNodePrivate::ownerDocument() while ( p && !p->isDocument() ) { if ( !p->hasParent ) return (TQDomDocumentPrivate*)p->ownerNode; - p = p->tqparent(); + p = p->parent(); } return (TQDomDocumentPrivate*)p; @@ -1794,14 +1794,14 @@ TQDomNode::NodeType TQDomNode::nodeType() const } /*! - Returns the tqparent node. If this node has no tqparent, a null node + Returns the parent node. If this node has no parent, a null node is returned (i.e. a node for which isNull() returns TRUE). */ TQDomNode TQDomNode::parentNode() const { if ( !impl ) return TQDomNode(); - return TQDomNode( IMPL->tqparent() ); + return TQDomNode( IMPL->parent() ); } /*! @@ -2492,7 +2492,7 @@ bool TQDomNode::isComment() const TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate::TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate( TQDomNodePrivate* n ) { readonly = FALSE; - tqparent = n; + parent = n; appendToParent = FALSE; } @@ -2558,7 +2558,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate::setNamedItem( TQDomNodePrivate* arg return 0; if ( appendToParent ) - return tqparent->appendChild( arg ); + return parent->appendChild( arg ); TQDomNodePrivate *n = map[ arg->nodeName() ]; // We take a reference @@ -2573,7 +2573,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate::setNamedItemNS( TQDomNodePrivate* ar return 0; if ( appendToParent ) - return tqparent->appendChild( arg ); + return parent->appendChild( arg ); if ( !arg->prefix.isNull() ) { // node has a namespace @@ -2597,7 +2597,7 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomNamedNodeMapPrivate::removeNamedItem( const TQString& nam if ( p == 0 ) return 0; if ( appendToParent ) - return tqparent->removeChild( p ); + return parent->removeChild( p ); map.remove( p->nodeName() ); // We took a reference, so we have to free one here @@ -2901,8 +2901,8 @@ bool TQDomNamedNodeMap::contains( const TQString& name ) const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomDocumentTypePrivate::TQDomDocumentTypePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent ) - : TQDomNodePrivate( doc, tqparent ) +TQDomDocumentTypePrivate::TQDomDocumentTypePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc, TQDomNodePrivate* parent ) + : TQDomNodePrivate( doc, parent ) { init(); } @@ -3221,8 +3221,8 @@ bool TQDomDocumentType::isDocumentType() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate::TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent ) - : TQDomNodePrivate( doc, tqparent ) +TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate::TQDomDocumentFragmentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* doc, TQDomNodePrivate* parent ) + : TQDomNodePrivate( doc, parent ) { name = "#document-fragment"; } @@ -3594,8 +3594,8 @@ bool TQDomCharacterData::isCharacterData() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomAttrPrivate::TQDomAttrPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& name_ ) - : TQDomNodePrivate( d, tqparent ) +TQDomAttrPrivate::TQDomAttrPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& name_ ) + : TQDomNodePrivate( d, parent ) { name = name_; m_specified = FALSE; @@ -3840,9 +3840,9 @@ bool TQDomAttr::specified() const */ TQDomElement TQDomAttr::ownerElement() const { - if ( !impl && !impl->tqparent()->isElement() ) + if ( !impl && !impl->parent()->isElement() ) return TQDomElement(); - return TQDomElement( (TQDomElementPrivate*)(impl->tqparent()) ); + return TQDomElement( (TQDomElementPrivate*)(impl->parent()) ); } /*! @@ -4625,8 +4625,8 @@ TQString TQDomElement::text() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomTextPrivate::TQDomTextPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& value ) - : TQDomCharacterDataPrivate( d, tqparent, value ) +TQDomTextPrivate::TQDomTextPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& value ) + : TQDomCharacterDataPrivate( d, parent, value ) { name = "#text"; } @@ -4650,15 +4650,15 @@ TQDomNodePrivate* TQDomTextPrivate::cloneNode( bool deep) TQDomTextPrivate* TQDomTextPrivate::splitText( int offset ) { - if ( !tqparent() ) { - qWarning( "TQDomText::splitText The node has no tqparent. So I can not split" ); + if ( !parent() ) { + qWarning( "TQDomText::splitText The node has no parent. So I can not split" ); return 0; } TQDomTextPrivate* t = new TQDomTextPrivate( ownerDocument(), 0, value.mid( offset ) ); value.truncate( offset ); - tqparent()->insertAfter( t, this ); + parent()->insertAfter( t, this ); return t; } @@ -4784,8 +4784,8 @@ bool TQDomText::isText() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomCommentPrivate::TQDomCommentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& value ) - : TQDomCharacterDataPrivate( d, tqparent, value ) +TQDomCommentPrivate::TQDomCommentPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& value ) + : TQDomCharacterDataPrivate( d, parent, value ) { name = "#comment"; } @@ -4913,9 +4913,9 @@ bool TQDomComment::isComment() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomCDATASectionPrivate::TQDomCDATASectionPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, +TQDomCDATASectionPrivate::TQDomCDATASectionPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& value ) - : TQDomTextPrivate( d, tqparent, value ) + : TQDomTextPrivate( d, parent, value ) { name = "#cdata-section"; } @@ -5049,10 +5049,10 @@ bool TQDomCDATASection::isCDATASection() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomNotationPrivate::TQDomNotationPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, +TQDomNotationPrivate::TQDomNotationPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& aname, const TQString& pub, const TQString& sys ) - : TQDomNodePrivate( d, tqparent ) + : TQDomNodePrivate( d, parent ) { name = aname; m_pub = pub; @@ -5118,7 +5118,7 @@ void TQDomNotationPrivate::save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const DOM does not support editing notation nodes; they are therefore read-only. - A notation node does not have any tqparent. + A notation node does not have any parent. You can retrieve the publicId() and systemId() from a notation node. @@ -5219,10 +5219,10 @@ bool TQDomNotation::isNotation() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomEntityPrivate::TQDomEntityPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, +TQDomEntityPrivate::TQDomEntityPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& aname, const TQString& pub, const TQString& sys, const TQString& notation ) - : TQDomNodePrivate( d, tqparent ) + : TQDomNodePrivate( d, parent ) { name = aname; m_pub = pub; @@ -5334,7 +5334,7 @@ void TQDomEntityPrivate::save( TQTextStream& s, int, int ) const be made to each of the clones instead. All the descendents of an entity node are read-only. - An entity node does not have any tqparent. + An entity node does not have any parent. You can access the entity's publicId(), systemId() and notationName() when available. @@ -5450,8 +5450,8 @@ bool TQDomEntity::isEntity() const * **************************************************************/ -TQDomEntityReferencePrivate::TQDomEntityReferencePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& aname ) - : TQDomNodePrivate( d, tqparent ) +TQDomEntityReferencePrivate::TQDomEntityReferencePrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& aname ) + : TQDomNodePrivate( d, parent ) { name = aname; } @@ -5595,8 +5595,8 @@ bool TQDomEntityReference::isEntityReference() const **************************************************************/ TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate::TQDomProcessingInstructionPrivate( TQDomDocumentPrivate* d, - TQDomNodePrivate* tqparent, const TQString& target, const TQString& data ) - : TQDomNodePrivate( d, tqparent ) + TQDomNodePrivate* parent, const TQString& target, const TQString& data ) + : TQDomNodePrivate( d, parent ) { name = target; value = data; @@ -6598,7 +6598,7 @@ TQDomNodeList TQDomDocument::elementsByTagName( const TQString& tagname ) const function creates a copy that can be used within this document. This function returns the imported node that belongs to this - document. The returned node has no tqparent. It is not possible to + document. The returned node has no parent. It is not possible to import TQDomDocument and TQDomDocumentType nodes. In those cases this function returns a \link TQDomNode::isNull() null node\endlink. @@ -6993,7 +6993,7 @@ bool TQDomHandler::endElement( const TQString&, const TQString&, const TQString& { if ( node == doc ) return FALSE; - node = node->tqparent(); + node = node->parent(); return TRUE; } diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp index 3f3c863..78200aa 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqsvgdevice.cpp @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ bool TQSvgDevice::play( const TQDomNode &node ) c = c.nextSibling(); } if ( t == TSpanElement ) { - // move current text position in tqparent text element + // move current text position in parent text element StateList::Iterator it = --d->stack.fromLast(); (*it).textx = curr->textx; (*it).texty = curr->texty; diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqxml.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqxml.cpp index fa98822..8f4a4e3 100644 --- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqxml.cpp +++ b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/xml/tqxml.cpp @@ -330,9 +330,9 @@ TQXmlLocator::~TQXmlLocator() class TQXmlSimpleReaderLocator : public TQXmlLocator { public: - TQXmlSimpleReaderLocator( TQXmlSimpleReader* tqparent ) + TQXmlSimpleReaderLocator( TQXmlSimpleReader* parent ) { - reader = tqparent; + reader = parent; } ~TQXmlSimpleReaderLocator() { @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ TQStringList TQXmlNamespaceSupport::prefixes( const TQString& uri ) const Normally, you should push a new context at the beginning of each XML element: the new context automatically inherits the - declarations of its tqparent context, and it also keeps track of + declarations of its parent context, and it also keeps track of which declarations were made within this context. \sa popContext() |